HomeMy WebLinkAboutFile Documents.401 Castle Creek Rd.0071.2018 (5).ACBK PROJECT MANUAL
Volume II Divisions 21 through 33
ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
100% Construction Documents
May 9, 2018
Architect’s Project Number: 1740
OWNER:
Pitkin County, CO
ARCHITECT: Chamberlin Architects, P.C. (AOR) 437 Main Street Grand Junction, CO 81501 (970) 242-6804
Studio B 501 Rio Grande Plaza, Suite 104 Aspen, CO 81611 (970) 920-9428
CIVIL ENGINEER: Roaring Fork Engineering 592 Highway 133 Carbondale, CO 81623 (970) 340-4130
LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT: Lift Studio, LLC 442 Paepcke Dr #102 Aspen, CO 81611 (970) 404-5610
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: Lindauer-Dunn, Inc. 802 Rood Avenue Grand Junction, CO 81501 (970) 241-0900
MECHANICAL ENGINEER: Ralston Mechanical Consulting 356 Echo Canyon Court Grand Junction, CO 81507 (970) 434-9819
ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: Grand Valley Engineering Solutions 334 Dakota Circle Grand Junction, CO 81503 (970) 256-0353
06/08/2018
TABLE OF CONTENTS – VOL II 1
Facility Services Subgroup
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION
210500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
211313 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENTS
220700 PLUMBING INSULATION
221100 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION
221300 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE
221400 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE
223400 FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)
230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230700 HVAC INSULATION
230900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230993 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
231123 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
232113 HYDRONIC PIPING
232116 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
232123 HYDRONIC PUMPS
232300 REFRIGERANT PIPING
232500 HVAC WATER TREATMENT
233100 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233400 HVAC FANS
233700 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
235100 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS
235233.13 FINNED WATER-TUBE BOILERS
235239 FIRE-TUBE BOILERS
235400 FURNACES
235500 FUEL-FIRED HEATERS
238126 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONS
238200 CONVECTION HEATING AND COOLING UNITS
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260548.16 SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260573.13 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDIES
260573.16 COORDINATION STUDIES
06/08/2018
TABLE OF CONTENTS – VOL II 2
260573.19 ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS
260943 RELAY-BASED LIGHTING CONTROLS
262416 PANELBOARDS
262726 WIRING DEVICES
263213.16 GASEOUS EMERGENCY ENGINE GENERATORS
263600 TRANSFER SWITCHES
265119 LED INTERIOR LIGHTING
265613 LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS
265619 LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
270526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
270528 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
271100 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS
271116 COMMUNICATIONS RACKS, FRAMES, AND ENCLOSURES
271513 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
281500 ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES
284621.11 ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS
Site and Infrastructure Subgroup
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
312000 EARTH MOVING
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
321216 ASPHALT PAVING
321313 CONCRETE PAVING
328400 PLANTING IRRIGATION
329300 PLANTS
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
REFER TO DRAWINGS
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS VOL II
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 - 1
SECTION 210500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes pipe, fittings, valves, and connections for sprinkler systems and firestopping
relating to fire suppression work and firestop accessories.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 031000 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Execution requirements for inserts
and sleeves specified by this section.
2. Section 099000 - Painting and Coating: Execution requirements for piping painting
specified by this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
1. ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
2. ASME B16.11 - Forged Steel Fittings - Socket-Welding and Threaded.
3. ASME B16.25 - Buttwelding Ends.
4. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.
5. ASME B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings.
6. ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
7. ASME B16.9 - Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings.
8. ASME B36.10M - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe.
B. ASTM International:
1. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-
Coated, Welded and Seamless.
2. ASTM A135 - Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe.
3. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon
Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service.
4. ASTM A795/A795M - Standard Specification for Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use.
5. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal.
6. ASTM B75 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube.
7. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.
8. ASTM B251 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Wrought Seamless
Copper and Copper-Alloy Tube.
9. ASTM D3309 - Standard Specification for Polybutylene (PB) Plastic Hot- and Cold-
Water Distribution Systems.
10. ASTM F438 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 - 2
11. ASTM F439 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
12. ASTM F442/F442M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR).
13. ASTM F493 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
C. American Welding Society:
1. AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding.
2. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
D. American Water Works Association:
1. AWWA C110 - American National Standard for Ductile-Iron and Grey-Iron Fittings, 3
in. through 48 in. (75 mm through 1200 mm), for Water and Other Liquids.
2. AWWA C111 - American National Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron
Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
3. AWWA C151 - American National Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast,
for Water.
E. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Firestopping (Through-Penetration Protection System): Sealing or stuffing material or assembly
placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to arrest movement of
fire, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire rated construction.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Firestopping Materials: Comply with requirements of Section 078413.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Firestopping Materials: Comply with requirements of Section 078413.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall
penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, and piping
connections.
C. Product Data:
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 - 3
1. Submit manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
2. Firestopping: Submit data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria.
D. Firestopping Schedule: Submit schedule of opening locations and sizes, penetrating items, and
required listed design numbers to seal openings to maintain fire resistance rating of adjacent
assembly.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions:
1. Firestopping: Submit preparation and installation instructions.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and tag numbering.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts lists.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum 25/50 flame spread/smoke developed index when
tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
B. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 13 and codes adopted by authority having jurisdiction.
C. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.9 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years
documented experience.
1.10 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers, with labeling in place.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 - 4
C. Furnish cast iron and steel valves with temporary protective coating.
D. Furnish temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until
installation.
1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.
B. Do not apply firestopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is
below 60 degrees F.
C. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after installation of
firestopping materials.
D. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials.
1.13 WARRANTY
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B. Furnish one-year manufacturer warranty for basic fire suppression materials and methods.
1.14 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
B. Furnish two sets of valve stem packing for each size and type of valve installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VALVES
A. Gate Valves:
1. Up to and including 2 inches: Bronze body and trim, rising stem, hand wheel, solid
wedge or disc, threaded ends.
2. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem pre-grooved for mounting tamper
switch, hand wheel, OS&Y, solid rubber covered bronze or cast iron wedge, flanged or
grooved ends.
3. Over 4 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, non-rising stem with bolted bonnet, solid bronze
wedge, flanged ends, iron body indicator post assembly.
B. Globe or Angle Valves:
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 - 5
1. Up to and including 2 inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem and hand wheel,
inside screw, renewable rubber disc, threaded ends, with back seating capacity packable
under pressure.
2. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, hand wheel, OS&Y, plug-type disc,
flanged ends, renewable seat and disc.
C. Ball Valves:
1. Up to and including 2 inches: Bronze two piece body, brass, chrome plated bronze, or
stainless steel ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle, threaded ends.
2. Over 2 inches: Manufacturers: Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball, teflon seat and
stuffing box seals, lever handle, flanged.
D. Butterfly Valves:
1. Bronze Body: Stainless steel disc, resilient replaceable seat, threaded or grooved ends,
extended neck, hand wheel and gear drive and integral indicating device, and built-in
tamper proof switch rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC.
2. Cast or Ductile Iron Body: Cast or ductile iron, chrome or nickel plated ductile iron or
aluminum bronze disc, resilient replaceable EPDM seat, wafer, lug, or grooved ends.
With extended neck, hand wheel and gear drive and integral indicating device, and
internal or external tamper switch rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC.
E. Check Valves:
1. Up to and including 2 inches: Bronze body and swing disc, rubber seat, threaded ends.
2. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, swing check with rubber disc, renewable disc and
seat, flanged ends with automatic ball check.
3. 4 inches and Over: Iron body, bronze disc with stainless steel spring, resilient seal,
threaded, wafer, or flanged ends.
F. Drain Valves:
1. Ball Valve: Brass with cap and chain, 3/4 inch hose thread.
2.2 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151 and AWWA C104.
1. Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile iron, standard thickness.
2. Joints: AWWA C111, rubber gasket with rods.
3. Jackets: Double layer, half lapped, 10 mil polyethylene tape.
2.3 ABOVE GROUND PIPING
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B; ASTM A135/135M; ASTM A135/135M UL listed,
threadable, light wall; ASTM A795/A795M; or ASME B36.10; Schedule 10 or 40 black.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 - 6
1. Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel, butt welded; ASME B16.25, butt weld ends;
ASTM A234/A234M, wrought carbon steel and alloy steel; ASME B16.5, steel flanges
and fittings; ASME B16.11, forged steel socket welded and threaded.
2. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1, flanges and flanged fittings; ASME B16.4, threaded
fittings.
3. Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, threaded fittings.
4. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C"
shaped elastomeric sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for
galvanized pipe.
5. Mechanical Formed Fittings: Carbon-steel housing with integral pipe stop and O-ring
pocketed and O-ring uniformly compressed into permanent mechanical engagement onto
pipe.
2.4 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Conform to ASCE 7-10, Chapter 13, for seismic design requirements.
B. Conform to NFPA 13.
C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron or carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split
ring.
D. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inch and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
E. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 inches: Cast iron hook.
G. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.
H. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp or angle ring.
I. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier
or steel support.
2.5 FIRESTOPPING
A. Firestopping Materials: Comply with requirements of Section 078413.
2.6 FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES
A. Firestopping Materials: Comply with requirements of Section 078413.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 - 7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before
starting work.
B. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves.
C. Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
D. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before using powder-actuated anchors.
E. Do not drill or cut structural members.
F. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting bond
of firestopping material.
G. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond.
H. Install backing or damming materials where necessary to arrest liquid material leakage.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install piping in accordance with NFPA 13 for sprinkler systems.
B. Install Work in accordance with codes adopted by authority having jurisdiction.
C. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient.
D. Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and other work.
E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
F. Install pipe sleeve at piping penetrations through partitions, walls, and floors. Seal pipe and
sleeve penetrations to maintain fire resistance equivalent to fire separation.
G. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected
equipment.
H. Pipe Hangers and Supports:
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 - 8
1. Install in accordance with NFPA 13 including provisions for seismic bracing.
2. Install hangers to with minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent
work.
3. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
4. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe
movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
5. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support riser piping independently of connected
horizontal piping.
6. Where installing several pipes in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or
trapeze hangers.
7. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Section 099000. Hangers and
supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not
considered exposed.
I. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Install eccentric reducers to maintain
top of pipe level.
J. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support
members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of
zinc rich primer to welding. Refer to Section 099000.
K. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated.
L. Where more than one piping system material is specified, install compatible system components
and joints. Install flanges, union, and couplings at locations requiring servicing.
M. Die cut threaded joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil or
other non-toxic joint compound applied to male threads only.
N. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Remove protective coatings prior to
installation.
O. Install gate, ball, or butterfly valves for shut-off or isolating service.
P. Install drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus.
3.4 INSTALLATION - FIRESTOPPING
A. Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating
sleeves, piping, ductwork, and other items, requiring firestopping.
B. Apply primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of firestopping material and
substrate involved, and as required for compliance with required fire ratings.
C. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve required fire and smoke rating.
D. Place foamed material in layers to ensure homogenous density, filling cavities and spaces. Place
sealant to completely seal junctions with adjacent dissimilar materials.
E. Place intumescent coating in sufficient coats to achieve rating required.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 - 9
F. Remove dam material after firestopping material has cured.
G. Fire Rated Surface:
1. Seal opening at floor, wall, and partition as follows:
a. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch on both
sides of building element.
b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch void between sleeve and building
element.
c. Pack void with backing material.
d. Seal ends of sleeve with UL listed fire resistive silicone compound to meet fire
rating of structure penetrated.
H. Non-Rated Surfaces:
1. Seal opening through non-fire rated floor as follows:
a. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch on both
sides of building element.
b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch void between sleeve and building
element.
c. Install type of firestopping material recommended by manufacturer.
2. Install escutcheons or floor plates where conduit, penetrates non-fire rated surfaces in
occupied spaces. Occupied spaces include rooms with finished ceilings and where
penetration occurs below finished ceiling.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for inspecting, testing.
B. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for testing, adjusting,
and balancing.
C. Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning.
B. Clean entire system after other construction is complete.
C. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
END OF SECTION 210500
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 1
SECTION 211313 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Wet-pipe sprinkler system.
2. System design, installation, and certification.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 210500 - Common Work Results for Fire Suppression: Pipe materials, fittings,
check valves, and supervised valves.
2. Section 221100 - Facility Water Distribution: Domestic water supply and backflow
preventers.
3. Section 260583 - Wiring Connections: Electrical connections to equipment.
4. Section 283100 - Fire Detection and Alarm: Automatic fire-alarm and smoke-detection
systems.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
B. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for preinstallation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this Section.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Product Data:
1. Submit manufacturer information regarding sprinklers, valves, and specialties.
2. Submit performance ratings, rough-in details, weights, and requirements for supports and
piping connections.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 2
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate layout of finished-ceiling areas, indicating sprinkler locations to be coordinated
with ceiling installation.
2. Indicate detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, sprinklers, components, and
accessories.
3. Indicate system controls.
D. Delegated Design Submittals: Submit signed and sealed Shop Drawings with design
calculations and assumptions for following items:
1. Performance requirements and analysis data showing compliance with performance
criteria.
2. Data for water supply, hazard assessment, and system design concept.
3. Hydraulic calculations to substantiate compliance with hydraulic design requirements.
4. Hydrant flow test report with static and residual pressures.
E. Manufacturer Instructions: Submit detailed instructions on installation requirements, including
storage and handling procedures.
F. Field Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor-furnished tests and inspections.
G. Manufacturer Reports: Certify that equipment has been installed according to manufacturer
instructions.
H. Qualifications Statements:
1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer, installer, and licensed professional.
2. Submit manufacturer's approval of installer.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.
B. Project Record Documents:
1. Record actual locations of sprinklers and deviations of piping from Drawings.
2. Indicate drain and test locations.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenance
materials.
B. Extra Stock Materials: Furnish extra sprinklers according to NFPA 13.
C. Tools:
1. Furnish suitable operating wrenches for each sprinkler type.
2. Furnish metal storage cabinet located adjacent to alarm valve.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 3
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work according to NFPA 13.
B. Seismic Performance: Comply with NFPA 13.
C. Perform Work according to codes adopted by authority having jurisdiction.
D. Maintain one copy of each standard affecting Work of this Section on Site.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with
minimum three years' documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum three years'
documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
C. Licensed Professional: As required by Authority Having Jurisdiction.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and
protecting products.
B. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for
damage.
C. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions.
D. Protection:
1. Furnish piping with temporary inlet and outlet caps until installation.
2. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from
construction operations areas.
3. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions.
1.10 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements:
1. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
2. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for warranties.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide coverage for entire building.
B. Occupancy Requirements: Hydraulically design system to NFPA 13 for appropriate occupancy
classification, including hose stream allowances.
C. Volume and Pressure of Water Supply:
1. Source: Hydrant water-flow test data.
D. Connection Interfaces: Building automatic fire-alarm and smoke-detection system.
E. Fire-Department Connections: At locations as indicated on Drawings.
2.2 SPRINKLERS
A. Suspended-Ceiling Type:
1. Type: Recessed pendant sprinklers, with matching push-on, clamp-on, or screw-on
escutcheon plate.
2. Materials:
a. Sprinkler: Factory painted.
b. Escutcheon Plate: Color to match sprinkler.
3. Fusible Link:
a. Type: Glass bulb.
b. Temperature Rating: As required for specific area hazard.
4. Finishes:
a. Sprinkler: Polyester.
b. Color: As selected.
B. Exposed-Area Type:
1. Type: Upright sprinklers.
2. Material: Factory painted.
3. Fusible Link:
a. Type: Glass bulb.
b. Temperature Rating: As required for specific area hazard.
4. Finishes:
a. Sprinkler: Polyester.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 5
b. Color: As selected.
C. Sidewall Type:
1. Type: Recessed, horizontal sidewall with matching push-on, clamp-on, or screw-on
escutcheon plate and guard.
2. Materials:
a. Sprinkler: Factory painted.
b. Escutcheon Plate: Color to match sprinkler.
3. Fusible Link:
a. Type: Glass bulb.
b. Temperature Rating: As required for specific area hazard.
4. Finishes:
a. Sprinkler: Polyester.
b. Color: As selected.
2.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Electric Alarm: Electrically operated, chrome-plated gong, with pressure alarm switch.
B. Water-Flow Switch:
1. Description: Vane type for mounting horizontally or vertically.
2. Contacts:
a. Quantity: Two.
b. Rating: 10 A at 125 V ac, and 2.5 A at 24 V dc.
C. Fire-Department Connections:
1. Description: Flush-mounted wall type, constructed of chrome-plated brass.
2. Outlets:
a. Type: Two way.
b. End Connections:
1) Minimum Size: 2-1/2 inches.
2) Fittings: Threaded swivel type to match fire-department hardware.
c. Furnish threaded cap and chain of matching material and finish.
3. Drain:
a. Type: Automatic drip.
b. Size: 3/4 inch.
c. Outlet: Connected to building drain.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 6
4. Label: AUTO. SPKR..
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation
examination.
B. Verify that water-flow, pressure, supervisory, and alarm devices are installed and connected to
automatic fire-alarm and smoke-detection system.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NFPA 13.
B. Backflow Preventer:
1. Install approved double-check valve backflow preventer assembly at sprinkler system
water source connection.
C. Clearances:
1. Locate fire-department connection, check valve, and automatic drip with sufficient
clearance from walls, obstructions, or adjacent fire-department connections, to allow full
swing of fire-department wrench handle.
2. Provide for forward full-flow testing of backflow preventer.
D. Locate fire alarm bell outside on exterior building wall as indicated on Drawings.
E. Piping:
1. Minimize obstructions with other Work.
2. Where possible, install in concealed spaces above finished ceilings.
F. Center sprinklers in two directions in ceiling tile and install piping offsets.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for inspecting and testing.
B. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for testing, adjusting,
and balancing.
C. Hydrostatic Testing:
1. Comply with NFPA 13.
2. Witnessing: Fire marshal and authority having jurisdiction.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 7
D. Equipment Acceptance:
1. Adjust, repair, modify, or replace components failing to perform as specified and rerun
tests.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.
B. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished
Work.
B. Apply masking tape or paper cover to protect sprinklers, concealed sprinklers, cover plates, and
sprinkler escutcheons not receiving field paint finish.
C. Remove protection after painting and replace painted sprinklers with new.
END OF SECTION 211313
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 1
SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipe hangers and supports.
2. Hanger rods.
3. Flashing.
4. Sleeves.
5. Mechanical sleeve seals.
6. Formed steel channel.
7. Firestopping relating to plumbing work.
8. Firestopping accessories.
9. Equipment bases and supports.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 031000 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Execution requirements for
placement of sleeves in concrete forms specified by this section.
2. Section 033000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Execution requirements for placement of
concrete housekeeping pads specified by this section.
3. Section 099000 - Painting and Coating: Product and execution requirements for painting
specified by this section.
4. Section 221100 - Facility Water Distribution: Execution requirements for placement of
hangers and supports specified by this section.
5. Section 221300 - Facility Sanitary Sewerage: Execution requirements for placement of
hangers and supports specified by this section.
6. Section 221400 - Facility Storm Drainage: Execution requirements for placement of
hangers and supports specified by this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Civil Engineers:
1. ASCE 7-10 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
1. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping.
2. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping.
3. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.
C. ASTM International:
1. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 2
2. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and
Materials.
3. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops.
4. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.
5. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.
D. American Welding Society:
1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
E. FM Global:
1. FM - Approval Guide, A Guide to Equipment, Materials & Services Approved By
Factory Mutual Research For Property Conservation.
F. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry:
1. MSS SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer.
2. MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.
3. MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.
G. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
2. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
3. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.
4. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems.
5. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.
H. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed):
1. WH - Certification Listings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Firestopping (Through-Penetration Protection System): Sealing or stuffing material or assembly
placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to arrest movement of
fire, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire rated construction.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Firestopping Materials: Comply with requirements of Section 078413.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Firestopping Materials: Comply with requirements of Section 078413.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 3
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data:
1. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.
2. Firestopping: Submit data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria.
C. Firestopping Schedule: Submit schedule of opening locations and sizes, penetrating items, and
required listed design numbers to seal openings to maintain fire resistance rating of adjacent
assembly.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum 25/50 flame spread/smoke developed index when
tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
B. Perform Work in accordance with applicable authority and AWS D1.1 for welding hanger and
support attachments to building structure.
C. Perform Work in accordance with codes adopted by authority having jurisdiction.
D. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with
minimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 3 years
documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and
protecting products.
B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's
identification.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 4
C. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, by storing in
original packaging.
1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.
B. Do not apply firestopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is
below 60 degrees F.
C. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after installation of
firestopping materials.
D. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials.
1.12 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.13 WARRANTY
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B. Furnish one year manufacturer warranty for pipe hangers and supports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Plumbing Piping - DWV:
1. Conform to ASCE 7-10, ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP58, MSS SP69, and MSS
SP89.
2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron or carbon steel, adjustable
swivel, split ring.
3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hook.
6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel
clamp.
7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
8. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and
concrete pier or steel support.
B. Plumbing Piping - Water:
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 5
1. Conform to ASCE 7-10, ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP58, MSS SP69, and MSS
SP89.
2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron or carbon steel, adjustable
swivel, split ring.
3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hook.
6. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
7. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor
flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
8. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Smaller: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle,
lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
9. Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated, Carbon-steel ring.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded on one end, or continuous threaded.
B. Rod Attachments: Provide swivels, eye nuts, or other devices to prevent bending of the rod in
the event of seismic movement.
2.3 FLASHING
A. Metal Flashing: 26 gage thick galvanized steel.
B. Metal Counterflashing: 22 gage thick galvanized steel.
C. Lead Flashing:
1. Waterproofing: 5 lb./sq. ft sheet lead.
D. Flexible Flashing: compatible with roofing.
2.4 SLEEVES
A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel.
B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel
pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel.
C. Sealant: Acrylic; refer to Section 079000.
2.5 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Product Description: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links
shaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve, connected with bolts and
pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight
seal and electrical insulation.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 6
2.6 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL
A. Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage thick steel. With holes 1-1/2 inches on center.
2.7 FIRESTOPPING
A. Firestopping Materials: Comply with requirements of Section 078413.
2.8 FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES
A. Firestopping Materials: Comply with requirements of Section 078413.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before
starting work.
B. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves.
C. Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting bond
of firestopping material.
B. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond.
C. Install backing or damming materials if necessary to arrest liquid material leakage.
D. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before using powder-actuated anchors.
E. Do not drill or cut structural members.
3.3 INSTALLATION - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Comply with ASCE 7-10 Chapter 13 Seismic Design Requirements for Nonstructural
Components.
B. Install in accordance with ASME B31.1, ASME B31.5, ASME 31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP 58,
MSS SP 69, and MSS SP 89.
C. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 7
D. Install hangers with minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.
E. Support piping with hanger and rod assembly that is 12 inches or less in length from top of pipe
to supporting structure. Include swivels, eye nuts, or other devices to prevent bending in rod.
F. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
G. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.
H. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between
hangers.
I. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub.
J. Where piping is installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe or trapeze
hangers.
K. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
L. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
M. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
N. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Section 099000. Hangers and supports
located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
O. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of
insulation. Refer to Section 220700.
3.4 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS
A. Comply with ASCE 7-10 Chapter 13 Seismic Design Requirements for Nonstructural
Components.
B. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 3-1/2 inches thick and extending 6 inches
beyond supported equipment. Refer to Section 033000.
C. Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting
and anchoring equipment.
D. Construct supports of steel members, formed steel channel, or steel pipe and fittings. Brace and
fasten with flanges bolted to structure.
3.5 INSTALLATION - FLASHING
A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping penetrates weather or
waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.
B. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches clear on sides
with minimum 36 x 36 inch sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 8
C. Seal floor shower and mop sink drains watertight to adjacent materials.
D. Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; caulk around top edge. Use storm collars above
roof jacks. Screw vertical flange section to face of curb.
3.6 INSTALLATION - SLEEVES
A. Exterior watertight entries: Seal with mechanical sleeve seals.
B. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.
C. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for
continuous insulation wrapping.
D. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves.
E. Where piping penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe and adjacent work
with firestopping insulation and caulk airtight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon
covers at both sides of penetration.
F. Install chrome plated steel or stainless steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.
3.7 INSTALLATION - FIRESTOPPING
A. Firestopping Materials: Comply with requirements of Section 078413.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for inspecting, testing.
B. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for testing, adjusting,
and balancing.
C. Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
3.10 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished
Work.
B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 9
3.11 SCHEDULES
A. Pipe Hanger Spacing:
1. Pipe Material: Cast iron.
a. Maximum Hanger Spacing: 5 feet
b. 5/8 inch
2. Pipe Material: Cast Iron, with 10-foot length of pipe.
a. Maximum Hanger Spacing: 10 feet
b. 5/8 inch
3. Pipe Material: CPVC.
a. Size: 1 inch and smaller.
b. Maximum Hanger Spacing: 3 feet
c. 1/2 inch
4. Pipe Material: CPVC.
a. Size: 1-1/4 inches and larger.
b. Maximum Hanger Spacing: 4 feet
c. 1/2 inch
5. Pipe Material: Copper tube.
a. Size: 1-1/4 inches and smaller.
b. Maximum Hanger Spacing: 6 feet
c. 1/2 inch
6. Pipe Material: Copper tube.
a. Size: 1-1/2 inches and larger.
b. Maximum Hanger Spacing: 10 feet
c. 1/2 inch
7. Pipe Material: PVC.
a. Maximum Hanger Spacing: 4 feet
b. 3/8 inch
8. Pipe Material: Steel.
a. Size: 3 inches and smaller.
b. Maximum Hanger Spacing: 12 feet
c. 1/2 inch
9. Pipe Material: Steel.
a. Size: 4 inches and larger.
b. Maximum Hanger Spacing: 12 feet
c. 5/8 inch
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 10
END OF SECTION 220529
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 1
SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Nameplates.
2. Tags.
3. Stencils.
4. Pipe markers.
5. Ceiling tacks.
6. Labels.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 099000 - Painting and Coating: Execution requirements for painting specified by
this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
1. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves; include valve tag
numbers.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to ASME A13.1 for color scheme for identification of piping systems and accessories.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 2
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years
documented experience.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NAMEPLATES
A. Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light
contrasting background color.
2.2 TAGS
A. Plastic Tags:
1. Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background
color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter.
B. Metal Tags:
1. Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter with finished edges.
C. Information Tags:
1. Clear plastic with printed "Danger," "Caution," or "Warning" and message; size 3-1/4 x
5-5/8 inches with grommet and self-locking nylon ties.
D. Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list of applied tags and location plastic laminated.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 3
2.3 STENCILS
A. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:
1. Up to 2 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1/2 inch high letters.
2. 2-1/2 to 6 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1-inch high letters.
3. Over 6 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1-3/4 inches high letters.
4. Ductwork and Equipment: 1-3/4 inches high letters.
B. Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 099000, semi-gloss enamel, colors and lettering size
conforming to ASME A13.1.
2.4 PIPE MARKERS
A. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1.
B. Plastic Pipe Markers
1. Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe
covering. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener.
C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers
1. Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings.
D. Plastic Underground Pipe Markers
1. Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil
thick, manufactured for direct burial service.
2.5 CEILING TACKS
A. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color-coded head.
B. Color code as follows:
1. Plumbing valves: Green.
2.6 LABELS
A. Description: Aluminum, polyester or laminated Mylar, size 1.9 x 0.75 inches, adhesive backed
with printed identification.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 099000 for stencil painting.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 099000.
B. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting.
C. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.
D. Install labels with sufficient adhesive for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. For
unfinished canvas covering, apply paint primer before applying labels.
E. Install tags using corrosion resistant chain. Number tags consecutively by location.
F. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above
buried pipe.
G. Identify water heaters, pumps, tanks, and water treatment devices with plastic nameplates.
Identify in-line pumps and other small devices with tags.
H. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates.
I. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.
J. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers or plastic tape pipe markers.
Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure.
Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on
straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of
penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
K. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel
closest to equipment.
END OF SECTION 220553
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 1
SECTION 220700 - PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Plumbing piping insulation, jackets and accessories.
2. Plumbing equipment insulation, jackets and accessories.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 099000 - Painting and Coating: Execution requirements for painting insulation
jackets and covering specified by this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International:
1. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement.
2. ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting
Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement.
3. ASTM C450 - Standard Practice for Fabrication of Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers for
NPS Piping, and Vessel Lagging.
4. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for
Commercial and Industrial Applications.
5. ASTM C585 - Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal
Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System).
6. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal
Insulation.
7. ASTM C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials
for Thermal Insulation.
8. ASTM C1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for
Thermal Insulation.
9. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe,
Schedule 40, 80, and 120.
10. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
11. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit product description, thermal characteristics and list of materials and
thickness for each service, and location.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 2
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Test pipe insulation for maximum flame spread index of 25 and maximum smoke developed
index of not exceeding 50 in accordance with ASTM E84.
B. Pipe insulation manufactured in accordance with ASTM C585 for inner and outer diameters.
C. Factory fabricated fitting covers manufactured in accordance with ASTM C450.
D. Perform Work in accordance with codes adopted by authority having jurisdiction.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years documented experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three
years documented experience.
1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and
protecting products.
B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's
identification, including product density and thickness.
C. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, by
storing in original wrapping.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.
B. Install insulation only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions are within range
recommended by manufacturer.
C. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 3
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B. Furnish one year manufacturer warranty for man made fiber.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE INSULATION
A. TYPE P-1: ASTM C547, molded glass fiber pipe insulation.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.23 at 75 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 850 degrees F.
3. Vapor Barrier Jacket: ASTM C1136, Type I, factory applied reinforced foil kraft with
self-sealing adhesive joints.
4. Jacket Temperature Limit: minus 20 to 150 degrees F.
2.2 PIPE INSULATION JACKETS
A. Vapor Retarder Jacket:
1. ASTM C921, white Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film.
2. Water Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96/E96M; 0.02 perms.
B. PVC Plastic Pipe Jacket:
1. Product Description: ASTM D1785, One-piece molded type fitting covers and sheet
material, off-white color.
2. Thickness: 10 mil.
3. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
2.3 PIPE INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
B. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation.
C. Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter and smaller: Galvanized steel insulation protection shield. MSS
SP-69, Type 40. Length: Based on pipe size and insulation thickness.
D. Piping 2 inches diameter and larger: High compressive strength insulation saddle. Inserts
length: not less than 6 inches long, matching thickness and contour of adjoining insulation.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 4
E. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.
F. Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement: ASTM
C449/C449M.
G. Insulating Cement: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
H. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation.
2.4 EQUIPMENT INSULATION
A. TYPE E-1: ASTM C553; glass fiber, flexible or semi-rigid, noncombustible.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.24 at 75 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 450 degrees F.
3. Density: 1.5, 1.65, or 2.3 pound per cubic foot.
B. TYPE E-2: ASTM C612; glass fiber, rigid board, noncombustible with factory applied kraft
reinforced aluminum foil jacket.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.24 at 75 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 450 degrees F.
3. Density: 3.0 or 4.2 pound per cubic foot.
4. Jacket Temperature Limit: minus 20 to 150 degrees F.
2.5 EQUIPMENT INSULATION JACKETS
A. PVC Plastic Equipment Jacket:
1. Product Description: ASTM D1785, sheet material, off-white color.
2. Minimum Service Temperature: -40degrees F.
3. Maximum Service Temperature: 150degrees F.
4. Water Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96/E96M; 0.02 perms.
5. Thickness: 10 mil.
6. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
B. Vapor Retarder Jacket:
1. ASTM C921, white Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film.
2. Water Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96/E96M; 0.02 perms.
2.6 EQUIPMENT INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
B. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation.
C. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 5
D. Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement: ASTM
C449/C449M.
E. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify piping and equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials.
C. Verify surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
3.2 INSTALLATION - PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Piping Exposed to View in Finished Spaces: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible
locations.
B. Continue insulation through penetrations of building assemblies or portions of assemblies
having fire resistance rating of one hour or less. Provide intumescent firestopping when
continuing insulation through assembly. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
C. Piping Systems Conveying Fluids Below Ambient Temperature:
1. Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible
connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints.
2. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied vapor retarder jackets. Secure factory-applied
jackets with pressure sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips.
Secure field-applied jackets with outward clinch expanding staples and seal staple
penetrations with vapor retarder mastic.
3. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness
as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor retarder adhesive or PVC fitting
covers.
D. Glass Fiber Board Insulation:
1. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation. Fasten
insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands.
2. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth
surface. On cold equipment, use vapor retarder cement.
3. Cover wire mesh or bands with cement to a thickness to remove surface irregularities.
E. Hot Piping Systems less than 140 degrees F:
1. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied standard jackets. Secure with outward clinch
expanding staples or pressure sensitive adhesive system on standard factory-applied
jacket and butt strips or both.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 6
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as
adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
3. Do not insulate unions and flanges at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation at
such locations.
F. Inserts and Shields:
1. Piping 1-1/2 inches Diameter and Smaller: Install galvanized steel shield between pipe
hanger and insulation.
2. Piping 2 inches Diameter and Larger: Install insert between support shield and piping and
under finish jacket.
a. Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of thickness and contour matching
adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated.
b. Insert Material: Compression resistant insulating material suitable for planned
temperature range and service.
G. Insulation Terminating Points:
1. Condensate Piping: Insulate entire piping system and components to prevent
condensation.
H. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (less than 10 feet above
finished floor): Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers.
I. Prepare pipe insulation for finish painting. Refer to Section 099000.
3.3 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT
A. Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate.
B. Exposed Equipment: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
C. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On
cold equipment, use vapor retarder cement.
D. Equipment Containing Fluids Below Ambient Temperature:
1. Insulate entire equipment surfaces.
2. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation. Fasten
insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands.
3. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied vapor retarder jackets. Secure factory-applied
jackets with pressure sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips.
Secure field-applied jackets with outward clinch expanding staples and seal staple
penetrations with vapor retarder mastic.
4. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
E. Equipment Containing Fluids 140 degrees F or Less:
1. Do not insulate flanges and unions, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 7
2. Install insulation with factory-applied or field applied jackets, with or without vapor
barrier. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive.
3. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
F. Equipment in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces: Finish with PVC jacket and
fitting covers.
G. Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do not cover with insulation.
H. Equipment Requiring Access for Maintenance, Repair, or Cleaning: Install insulation for easy
removal and replacement without damage.
I. Prepare equipment insulation for finish painting. Refer to Section 099000.
3.4 SCHEDULES
A. Water Supply Services Piping Insulation Schedule:
1. Domestic Hot Water Supply and Recirculation:
a. Type: P-1.
b. Thickness:
1) Pipe Size 1-1/4 Inches and Smaller: 1.0 inch
2) Pipe Size 1-1/2 Inches and Larger: 1.5 inch
2. Domestic Cold Water:
a. Type: P-1.
b. Thickness:
1) Pipe Size 1-1/4 Inches and Smaller: 0.5 inch
2) Pipe Size 1-1/2 Inches and Larger: 0.5 inch
B. Drainage Services Piping Insulation Schedule:
1. Storm Piping - Horizontal Above Ground Within Building:
a. Type: P-1.
b. Thickness: 1.0 inch
2. Storm Piping - Horizontal and Vertical Above Ground Within Building if PVC Pipe is
Used:
a. Type: P-1.
b. Thickness: 0.5 inch
C. Equipment Insulation Schedule:
1. Roof Drain Bodies:
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 8
a. Type: E-2.
b. Thickness: 1 inch
END OF SECTION 220700
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION 221100 - 1
SECTION 221100 - FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Domestic water piping, within 5 feet of building.
2. Domestic water piping, above grade.
3. Unions and flanges.
4. Valves.
5. Pressure gages.
6. Pressure gage taps.
7. Thermometers.
8. Water pressure reducing valves.
9. Relief valves.
10. Strainers.
11. Hose bibs.
12. Hydrants.
13. Recessed valve box.
14. Backflow preventers.
15. Water hammer arrestors.
16. Diaphragm-type compression tanks.
17. System lubricated circulators.
18. Water filters.
19. Underground pipe markers.
20. Bedding and cover materials.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 033000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Execution requirements for placement of
concrete house keeping pads specified by this section.
2. Section 083113 - Access Doors and Frames: Product requirements for access doors for
placement by this section.
3. Section 099000 - Painting and Coating: Product and execution requirements for painting
specified by this section.
4. Section 220529 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Product
requirements for pipe hangers and supports [and firestopping] for placement by this
section.
5. Section 220553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Product
requirements for pipe identification and valve tags for placement by this section.
6. Section 220700 - Plumbing Insulation: Product and execution requirements for pipe
insulation.
7. Section 260503 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for electric
connections to equipment specified by this section.
8. Section 310513 - Soils for Earthwork: Soils for backfill in trenches.
9. Section 310516 - Aggregates for Earthwork: Aggregate for backfill in trenches.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION 221100 - 2
10. Section 312316 - Excavation: Product and execution requirements for excavation and
backfill required by this section.
11. Section 312317 - Trenching: Execution requirements for trenching required by this
section.
12. Section 312323 - Fill: Requirements for backfill to be placed by this section.
13. Section 331300 - Disinfecting of Water Utility Distribution: Product and execution
requirements for disinfection of domestic water piping beyond 5 feet of building.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute:
1. ANSI Z21.22 - Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply Systems.
B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
1. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
2. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
3. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.
4. ASME B40.1 - Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element.
5. ASME Section VIII - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Pressure Vessels.
6. ASME Section IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Welding and Brazing
Qualifications.
C. American Society of Sanitary Engineering:
1. ASSE 1010 - Performance Requirements for Water Hammer Arresters.
2. ASSE 1013 - Performance Requirements for Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow
Preventers and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection Principle Backflow Preventers.
3. ASSE 1019 - Performance Requirements for Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants, Freeze
Resistant, Automatic Draining Type.
4. ASSE 5013 - Performance Requirements for Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow
Preventers (RP) and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection Principle Backflow Preventers
(RFP).
D. ASTM International:
1. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
2. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal.
3. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.
4. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe,
Schedule 40, 80, and 120.
5. ASTM D2241 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR)
Based on Controlled Inside Diameter.
6. ASTM D2464 - Standard Specification for Threaded Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
7. ASTM D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Schedule 40.
8. ASTM D2467 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Schedule 80.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION 221100 - 3
9. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC) Plastic Piping Systems.
10. ASTM D2846/D2846M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems.
11. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings.
12. ASTM E1 - Standard Specification for ASTM Thermometers.
13. ASTM E77 - Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers.
14. ASTM F437 - Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
15. ASTM F438 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.
16. ASTM F439 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
17. ASTM F441/F441M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80.
18. ASTM F442/F442M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR).
19. ASTM F493 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
E. American Water Works Association:
1. AWWA C104 - American National Standard for Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron
Pipe and Fittings for Water.
2. AWWA C105 - American National Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-
Iron Pipe Systems.
3. AWWA C110 - American National Standard for Ductile-Iron and Grey-Iron Fittings, 3
in. through 48 in. (75 mm through 1200 mm), for Water and Other Liquids.
4. AWWA C111 - American National Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron
Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
5. AWWA C151 - American National Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast,
for Water.
6. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains.
7. AWWA M6 - Water Meters - Selection, Installation, Testing, and Maintenance.
F. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry:
1. MSS SP 67 - Butterfly Valves.
2. MSS SP 80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.
3. MSS SP 110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared
Ends.
G. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
H. Plumbing and Drainage Institute:
1. PDI WH201 - Water Hammer Arrester Standard.
I. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION 221100 - 4
1. UL 393 - Indicating Pressure Gauges for Fire-Protection Service.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data:
1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. Submit manufacturer's
catalog information.
2. Valves: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for each
service.
3. Domestic Water Specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information, component sizes,
rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.
4. Pumps: Submit pump type, capacity, certified pump curves showing pump performance
characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when
applicable. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves and equipment.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts list, exploded assembly views and
recommended maintenance intervals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. For drinking water service, provide valves complying with NSF 61.
B. Perform Work in accordance with codes adopted by authority having jurisdiction.
C. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years
documented experience.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION 221100 - 5
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Accept valves and equipment on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for
damage.
C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until
installation.
E. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing
sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system.
1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
B. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.
1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B. Furnish one-year manufacturer warranty for domestic water piping.
1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
B. Furnish two loose keys for outside hose bibs.
C. Furnish four spare water filters.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION 221100 - 6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A. Cement Mortar Lined Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151 and C104, Class 52.
1. Fittings: AWWA C110, Class 150 ductile or gray iron, cement lined.
2. Joints: AWWA C111, rubber gasket with rods, with copper straps or No. 4 solid copper
wire welded across joints to insure conductivity. All fittings shall have Mega-Lug
retainer glands in addition to concrete thrust blocks and/or zinc coated steel, or approved
equal, tie rods.
3. Jackets in Areas of High Soil Conductivity and at Concrete Thrust Blocks: AWWA
C105 polyethylene jacket or double layer, half lapped, 8 mil polyethylene wrap.
2.2 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, drawn.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze.
2. Joints: ASTM B32, Alloy Grade Sb5 tin-antimony, or Alloy Grade Sn95 tin-silver, lead
free solder or AWS A5.8 Classification BCuP-3 or BCuP-4 silver braze.
2.3 FLUE AND COMBUSTION AIR PIPING
A. CPVC Pipe: ASTM F441/F441M, Schedule 40, chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC)
material.
1. Fittings: ASTM F438, CPVC, Schedule 40, socket type.
2. Joints: ASTM D2846/D2846M, solvent weld with ASTM F493 solvent cement. Prime
joints with a contrasting color.
B. CPVC Pipe: ASTM F441/F441M, Schedule 80, chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC)
material.
1. Fittings: ASTM F439, CPVC, Schedule 80, socket type.
2. Joints: ASTM D2846/D2846M, solvent weld with ASTM F493 solvent cement. Prime
joints with a contrasting color.
2.4 UNIONS AND FLANGES
A. Unions for Pipe 2 inches and Smaller:
1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150, malleable iron, threaded.
2. Copper Piping: Class 150, bronze unions with soldered.
3. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder
end, water impervious isolation barrier.
4. CPVC Piping: CPVC.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION 221100 - 7
B. Flanges for Pipe 2-1/2 inches and Larger:
1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150, forged steel, slip-on flanges.
2. Copper Piping: Class 150, slip-on bronze flanges.
3. PVC Piping: PVC flanges.
4. CPVC Piping: CPVC flanges.
5. Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene gaskets.
2.5 BALL VALVES
A. BA-1 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 110, 400 psi WOG, two piece bronze body, chrome plated
brass ball, full port, teflon seats, blow-out proof stem, solder ends, lever handle.
B. BA-2 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 110, Class 150, bronze, two piece body, chrome plated
bronze ball, full port, teflon seats, blow-out proof stem, solder ends, lever handle.
2.6 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. BF-1 2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 67, Class 150.
1. Body: Cast or ductile iron, lug ends, stainless steel stem, extended neck.
2. Disc: Stainless steel.
3. Seat: Resilient replaceable EPDM or Buna N.
4. Handle and Operator: 10 position lever handle.
2.7 CHECK VALVES
A. Spring Loaded Check Valves:
1. CK-6 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 80, Class 250, bronze body, in-line spring lift
check, silent closing, Buna-N disc, integral seat, solder ends.
2.8 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Gage: ASME B40.1, UL 393 with bourdon tube, rotary brass movement, brass socket, front
calibration adjustment, black scale on white background.
1. Case: Steel, Cast aluminum, Fiberglass reinforced polypropylene, Stainless steel, or
ABS.
2. Bourdon Tube: Brass, Phosphor bronze or Type 316 stainless steel.
3. Dial Size: 3-1/2 inch diameter.
4. Mid-Scale Accuracy: One percent.
5. Scale: Psi.
2.9 PRESSURE GAGE TAPS
A. Ball Valve: Brass, 1/4 inch NPT for 250 psi.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION 221100 - 8
B. Pulsation Damper: Pressure snubber, brass with 1/4 inch NPT connections.
2.10 STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS
A. Thermometer: ASTM E1, adjustable angle, red appearing mercury, lens front tube, cast
aluminum case with enamel finish, cast aluminum adjustable joint with positive locking device.
1. Size: 9 inch scale.
2. Window: Clear glass or Lexan.
3. Stem: Brass, 3/4 inch NPT, 3-1/2 inch long.
4. Accuracy: ASTM E77 2 percent.
5. Calibration: Degrees F.
2.11 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
A. 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 80, bronze body, stainless steel and thermoplastic internal parts,
fabric reinforced diaphragm, strainer, threaded and single union ends.
2.12 RELIEF VALVES
A. Pressure Relief:
1. ANSI Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct
pressure actuated.
B. Temperature and Pressure Relief:
1. ANSI Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs,
automatic, direct pressure actuated, temperature relief maximum 210 degrees F, capacity
ASME certified and labeled.
2.13 STRAINERS
A. 2 inch and Smaller: Threaded brass body for 175 psi CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless
steel perforated screen.
2.14 HOSE BIBS
A. HB-2 - Interior Mixing: Bronze or brass, concealed, double service faucet with 4-arm handles,
check valves, continuous pressure vacuum breaker,wall bracket, riser pipe, 36 inch hose, and
miscellaneous fittings; T&S Brass B-0512 faucet, B-CVH1-2 check valves, B-0109-01 wall
bracket, HW-2B-36 hose, B-0963 vacuum breaker, 000369-40 riser pipe, plus miscellaneous
fittings.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION 221100 - 9
2.15 HOSE REELS
A. HR-1 - Steel hose reel, powder coated finish, controlled retraction, lock ratchet mechanism,
brass swivel with nitrile seals, permanently lubricated bearings, steel pedestal, guide arm
oriented for wall installation, with 100 ft. of ½ inch I.D. hose, Coxreels model EZ-SH-4100 or
equivalent.
2.16 HYDRANTS
A. HB-1 - Wall Hydrant: ASSE 1019; non-freeze, self-draining type with chrome plated lockable
recessed box hose thread spout, locks shield and removable key, and integral vacuum breaker,
Woodford model HB-67 or equivalent.
2.17 RECESSED VALVE BOX
A. WB-3 - Washing Machine: Plastic preformed rough-in box with chrome-plated brass ball
valves, water hammer arrestors, socket for 2 inch waste, slip in finishing cover, Sioux Chief
696 series or equivalent.
B. WB-2 – Refrigerator and Coffee Maker: Plastic preformed rough-in box with chrome-plated
brass ball valve with slip in finishing cover, Sioux Chief 696 series or equivalent.
2.18 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers:
1. Comply with ASSE 1013.
2. Bronze body, with bronze internal parts and stainless steel springs.
3. Two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential
pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve opening under back
pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate
valves, strainer, and four test cocks.
2.19 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
A. ASSE 1010; stainless steel or copper construction, piston type sized in accordance with PDI
WH-201.
B. Pre-charged suitable for operation in temperature range 34 to 200 degrees F and maximum 150
psi working pressure.
2.20 ET-3 DIAPHRAGM-TYPE COMPRESSION TANKS
A. Construction: Welded steel, rated for working pressure of 150 psig, with flexible Butyl
diaphragm sealed into tank and stainless steel system connection.
B. Accessories: Air-charging fitting; pre-charge to 70 psig.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION 221100 - 10
C. Size: 15 inches diameter, 15.4 inches overall length, 5.5 gal acceptance capacity.
D. Manufacturer and model: Wessels Company model T-25 or equivalent.
2.21 CP-1 SYSTEM LUBRICATED CIRCULATORS
A. Type: Horizontal shaft, single stage, direct connected with single speed wet rotor motor for in-
line mounting, for 140 psig maximum working pressure, 230 degrees F maximum water
temperature.
B. Casing: Bronze with flanged pump connections.
C. Impeller, Shaft, Rotor: Stainless Steel or non-metallic.
D. Bearings: Metal Impregnated carbon (graphite) and ceramic.
E. Motor: Impedance protected, single speed.
F. Performance:
1. Flow Capacity: 5 gal/min.
2. Head: 6 feet.
G. Electrical Characteristics:
1. 1/40 hp.
2. 115 volts, single phase, 60 Hz.
H. Manufacturer and model: Refer to Pump Schedule on Drawings.
2.22 WATER FILTERS
A. Water Filter Holder: NSF Certified inline filter canister, plastic head with 1 inch FPT
connections, pressure release button, threaded plastic canister, o-ring seal, mounting bracket,
rated for maximum of 125 psig and 100 degrees F, maximum flow of 4 gpm; GE model
GXWH35F or equivalent.
B. Water Filter Cartridge: NSF Certified 4.75 x 9.75 inch cabon spun fiber filter to reduce chlorine
taste and odor, sediment, sand and rust, to filter approximately 30,000 gallons; G.E. model
FXHTC or equivalent.
C. Accessories: Canister wrench.
2.23 UNDERGROUND PIPE MARKERS
A. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, brightly colored plastic covering, imprinted with
"Domestic Water Service" in large letters.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION 221100 - 11
2.24 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS
A. Bedding, Cover, and Backfill: As specified in 2014 Water Distribution System Standards, City
of Aspen Water Department.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
3.3 INSTALLATION - METERS
A. Install positive displacement meters in accordance with AWWA M6, with isolating valves on
inlet and outlet. Comply with water utility company requirements.
3.4 INSTALLATION - THERMOMETERS AND GAGES
A. Install gage taps in piping.
B. Install pressure gages with pulsation dampers. Provide ball valve to isolate each gage.
C. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes smaller than
2-1/2 inches for installation of thermometer sockets. Allow clearance from insulation.
D. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest appropriate
scale.
E. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal operating
level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical.
F. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate to zero.
3.5 INSTALLATION - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Install hangers and supports in accordance with Section 220529.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION 221100 - 12
3.6 INSTALLATION - BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Bedding, Cover, and Backfill: As specified in 2014 Water Distribution System Standards, City
of Aspen Water Department.
B. Verify connection size, location, and invert are as indicated on Drawings.
C. Establish elevations of buried piping with not less than 7 ft of cover.
D. Establish minimum separation from other services piping in accordance with applicable codes
and standards.
E. Remove scale and dirt on inside of piping before assembly.
F. Excavate pipe trench in accordance with applicable code.
G. Install pipe to elevation as indicated on Drawings.
H. Place bedding material at trench bottom to provide uniform bedding for piping, level bedding
materials in one continuous layer not exceeding 6 inches compacted depth; compact to 95
percent maximum density.
I. Install pipe on prepared bedding.
J. Route pipe in straight line.
K. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints.
L. Provide thrust blocks as indicated in Civil Construction Documents.
M. Install blue identification tape marked “Potable” continuous buried 2 ft. above pipe line. Refer
to Section 220553.
N. Pipe Cover and Backfilling:
1. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill material to attain required compaction density.
2. After hydrostatic test, evenly backfill entire trench width by hand placing bedding
material and hand tamping in 6 inches compacted layers to 12 inches minimum cover
over top of jacket. Compact to 95 percent maximum density.
3. Evenly and continuously backfill remaining trench depth in uniform layers with backfill
material.
4. Do not use wheeled or tracked vehicles for tamping.
3.7 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING
A. Install non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
B. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to
walls.
C. Install piping to maintain headroom without interfering with use of space or taking more space
than necessary.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION 221100 - 13
D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
E. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points.
F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected
equipment.
G. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of
insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 220700.
H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not accessible. Coordinate size and location of
access doors with Section 083113.
I. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies.
J. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting.
Refer to Section 099000.
K. Install domestic water piping in accordance with ASME B31.9.
L. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors. Refer to Section 220529.
M. Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating
sleeves and piping. Refer to Section 220529.
N. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
O. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
P. Install ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical
risers.
Q. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps.
R. Install potable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic
water may occur; on boiler feed water lines, janitor rooms, fire sprinkler systems, premise
isolation, irrigation systems, flush valves, interior and exterior hose bibs.
S. Pipe relief from valves, back-flow preventers and drains to nearest floor drain.
T. Test backflow preventers in accordance with ASSE 5013.
U. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold water
supply piping to washing machine outlets, flush valves, dishwasher outlets, and ice maker
outlets.
3.8 INSTALLATION - PUMPS
A. Provide pumps to operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and
cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent
of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION 221100 - 14
B. Provide line sized shut-off valve and on pump suction, and line sized soft seat check valve, and
shut-off valve on pump discharge.
3.9 INSTALLATION - SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A. Provide new water service complete with approved reduced pressure back-flow preventer and
water meter with by-pass valves, pressure reducing valves, and strainer.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements and 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements:
Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Test domestic water piping system in accordance with applicable code and local authority
having jurisdiction.
3.11 CLEANING
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.
B. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.
C. Verify pH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda
ash) or acid (hydrochloric).
D. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder and tablet or gas form, throughout system to
obtain residual from 50 to 80 mg/L.
E. Bleed water from outlets to obtain distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15
percent of outlets.
F. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.
G. When final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.
H. Flush disinfectant from system until residual concentration is equal to incoming water or 1.0
mg/L.
I. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water
entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.
3.12 SCHEDULES
A. Pipe Hanger Spacing:
1. Pipe Material: Copper tube.
a. Size: 1-1/4 inches and smaller.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION 221100 - 15
b. Maximum Hanger Spacing: 6 feet
c. 1/2 inch
2. Pipe Material: Copper tube.
a. Size: 1-1/2 inches and larger.
b. Maximum Hanger Spacing: 10 feet
c. 1/2 inch
3. Pipe Material: CPVC.
a. Size: 1 inch and smaller.
b. Maximum Hanger Spacing: 3 feet
c. 1/2 inch
4. Pipe Material: CPVC.
a. Size: 1-1/4 inches and larger.
b. Maximum Hanger Spacing: 4 feet
c. 1/2 inch
END OF SECTION 221100
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE 221300 - 1
SECTION 221300 - FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sanitary sewer piping buried within 5 feet of building.
2. Sanitary sewer piping above grade.
3. Floor drains.
4. Floor sinks.
5. Trench drains.
6. Cleanouts.
7. Sumps.
8. Interceptors.
9. Bedding and cover materials.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 099000 - Painting and Coating: Product and execution requirements for painting
specified by this section.
2. Section 220529 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Product
requirements for pipe hangers and supports [and firestopping] for placement by this
section.
3. Section 220553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Product
requirements for pipe identification for placement by this section.
4. Section 220700 - Plumbing Insulation: Product and execution requirements for pipe
insulation.
5. Section 260503 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for electric
connections to equipment specified by this section.
6. Section 310513 - Soils for Earthwork: Soils for backfill in trenches.
7. Section 310516 - Aggregates for Earthwork: Aggregate for backfill in trenches.
8. Section 312316 - Excavation: Product and execution requirements for excavation and
backfill required by this section.
9. Section 312317 - Trenching: Execution requirements for trenching required by this
section.
10. Section 312323 - Fill: Requirements for backfill to be placed by this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
1. ASME A112.21.1 - Floor Drains.
B. ASTM International:
1. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe,
Schedules 40, 80, and 120.
2. ASTM D2464 - Standard Specification for Threaded Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE 221300 - 2
3. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC) Plastic Piping Systems.
4. ASTM D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain,
Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings.
5. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings.
C. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry:
1. MSS SP 80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes for sewage-
ejectors, and manholes.
C. Product Data:
1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. Submit manufacturers
catalog information.
2. Sanitary Drainage Specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information, component
sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.
3. Pumps: Submit pump type, capacity, certified pump curves showing pump performance
characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when
applicable. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment and clean-outs.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views for pumps
and equipment.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with codes adopted by authority having jurisdiction.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years documented experience.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE 221300 - 3
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years
documented experience.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing
sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system.
1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
B. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.
1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B. Furnish one-year manufacturer warranty for sump pumps.
1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material.
1. Fittings: PVC, ASTM D2665.
2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE 221300 - 4
2.2 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material.
1. Fittings: ASTM D2665, PVC.
2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.
2.3 BALL VALVES
A. BA-6 2 inches and Smaller: 150 psi at 73 degrees F water temperature, maximum service
temperature: 140 degrees F ASTM D1785 PVC body and ball, double lever handle, EPDM
seals, teflon seats, full port, single or double union type with socket ends.
2.4 CHECK VALVES
A. Spring Loaded Check Valves:
1. CK-6 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 80, bronze body, in-line spring lift check, silent
closing, Buna-N disc, integral seat, threaded ends.
2.5 FLOOR DRAINS
A. FD-1 Floor Drain: ASME A112.21.1; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage
flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and square, adjustable nickel-bronze strainer.
Provide with rubber trap seal complying with ASSE 1072.
B. FD-2 Floor Drain: ASME A112.21.1; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage
flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable round nickel-bronze
strainer. Provide with rubber trap seal complying with ASSE 1072.
2.6 FLOOR SINKS
A. FS-1 Floor Sink: Square lacquered cast iron body with integral seepage pan, clamp collar,
epoxy coated interior, aluminum dome strainer, 12x12x6 inch, Zurn model Z1900-KC or
equivalent. Provide with rubber trap seal complying with ASSE 1072.
2.7 TRENCH DRAINS
A. Trench Drains (TD-1): HDPE modular channels, 80 inches long x 6-1/4 inch reveal with 4 inch
wide throat and bottom slope of 0.75%, mechanical connection between sections, rebar clips,
bottom outlet, and slotted grate of ductile iron load rated class C. Zurn model Z886 trench with
Zurn model DGC grate, or equivalent. Provide with p-trap.
2.8 CLEANOUTS
A. Exterior Surfaced Areas (CO-1): Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE 221300 - 5
B. Exterior Unsurfaced Areas (CO-2): Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy
coated cover with gasket.
C. Interior Finished Floor Areas (CO-3): Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, threaded
top assembly, and round scored cover with gasket in service areas and square depressed cover
with gasket to accept floor finish in finished floor areas.
D. Interior Finished Wall Areas (CO-4): Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy
coated cover with gasket, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw.
E. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas (CO-5): Calked or threaded type.
2.9 SO-1 SAND AND OIL INTERCEPTORS
A. Construction:
1. Material: Precast minimum 5000 psi concrete.
2. Monolithic poured floor, H-20 loading
3. Rough in: Below grade.
4. Compartments: Equal to 2/3 (first compartment) and 1/3 (second compartment) of
volume, each compartment with 24 inch diameter access opening through lid.
B. Accessories: Boots at inlets, outlets and vent connection; H-20 traffic rated cast iron manhole
ring and manhole cover with pick hole and hex fasteners; 5000 psi concrete manhole sections
with galvanized steel steps, and gas-tight gaskets for manhole components. Provide internal
piping as indicated on Drawings.
C. Volume: 800 gallons.
2.10 SP-1 SUMP AND PUMP
A. Basin: Glass fiber reinforced or injection-molded structural foam with gas tight lid and required
openings and drainage fittings, 20 gallon capacity.
B. Pump: Submersible pump with cast iron housing, oil filled motor housing, ball bearings, carbon
ceramic shaft seal, 0.3 hp 115V motor, 1-1/2” discharge, ½ inch solids handling, vertical type
switch with piggy-back plug, 10 ft. cable, flow of 20 gpm at 19 ft. head.
C. Manufacturer and model: Refer to Pump Schedule on Drawings.
D. Accessories:
1. High level alarm float and remote alarm panel with audible alarm, red beacon, and alarm
silence switch, 15 ft. float cable, Hydromatic Q-Alert or equivalent.
2. Line sized ball valve, line sized check valve, and line sized union on pump discharge
above basin lid.
2.11 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS
A. Bedding: Sand or pea gravel.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE 221300 - 6
B. Cover: Sand or pea gravel.
C. Soil Backfill from Above Pipe to Finish Grade: Subsoil with no rocks over 6 inches in diameter,
frozen earth or foreign matter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.
B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
C. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or
caps.
3.3 INSTALLATION - BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Verify connection size, location, and invert are as indicated on Drawings.
B. Establish elevations of buried piping with not less than 1 ft of cover or as indicated on
Drawings.
C. Establish minimum separation from other services piping in accordance with applicable code.
D. Remove scale and dirt on inside of piping before assembly.
E. Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Civil Specifications.
F. Place bedding material at trench bottom to provide uniform bedding for piping, level bedding
materials in one continuous layer not exceeding 4 inches compacted depth; compact to 95
percent maximum density.
G. Install pipe on prepared bedding.
H. Route pipe in straight line.
I. Install trace wire continuous buried 6 inches below finish grade, above pipe line. Refer to
Section 220553.
J. Pipe Cover and Backfilling:
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE 221300 - 7
1. Backfill trench in accordance with Civil Specifications.
2. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill material to attain required compaction density.
3. After hydrostatic test, evenly backfill entire trench width by hand placing backfill
material and hand tamping in 6 inches compacted layers to 6 inches minimum cover over
top of jacket. Compact to 95 percent maximum density.
4. Evenly and continuously backfill remaining trench depth in uniform layers with backfill
material.
5. Do not use wheeled or tracked vehicles for tamping.
3.4 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING
A. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/4 inch per foot minimum. Maintain
gradients.
B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with
mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Provide clearances at cleanout for snaking drainage system.
C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.
D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.
E. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
F. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to
walls.
G. Install piping to maintain headroom. Do not spread piping, conserve space.
H. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
I. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected
equipment.
J. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of
insulation. Refer to Section 220700.
K. Provide access where valves and fittings are not accessible.
L. Install piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly.
M. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and
apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
N. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting.
Refer to Section 099000.
O. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.
P. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE 221300 - 8
Q. Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating
sleeves and piping. Refer to Section 220529.
3.5 INSTALLATION FLOOR DRAINS AND TRENCH DRAINS
A. Install floor drains per manufacturer’s instructions. Grate shall be set flush with finished floor or
slightly below but shall not create a tripping hazard.
B. Install trench drains per manufacturer’s instructions.
3.6 INSTALLATION - PUMPS
A. Provide line sized ball valve, line sized soft seated check valve, and union on pump discharge.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements; Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout
Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Test sanitary waste and vent piping system in accordance with applicable code and local
authority having jurisdiction.
C. Pipe Hanger Spacing:
1. Pipe Material: PVC.
a. Maximum Hanger Spacing: 4 feet
b. 3/8 inch
END OF SECTION 221300
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE 221400 - 1
SECTION 221400 - FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Storm water piping buried within 5 feet of building.
2. Storm water piping above grade.
3. Deck drains.
4. Cleanouts.
5. Bedding and cover materials.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Execution requirements for placement of
concrete specified by this section.
2. Section 083113 - Access Doors and Frames: Product requirements for access doors for
placement by this section.
3. Section 099000 - Painting and Coating: Execution requirements for painting material
specified by this section.
4. Section 220529 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Product
requirements for pipe hangers and supports and firestopping for placement by this
section.
5. Section 220553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Product
requirements for pipe identification for placement by this section.
6. Section 220700 - Plumbing Insulation: Product and execution requirements for pipe
insulation.
7. Section 310513 - Soils for Earthwork: Soils for backfill in trenches.
8. Section 310516 - Aggregates for Earthwork: Aggregate for backfill in trenches.
9. Section 312316 - Excavation: Product and execution requirements for excavation and
backfill required by this section.
10. Section 312317 - Trenching: Execution requirements for trenching required by this
section.
11. Section 312323 - Fill: Requirements for backfill to be placed by this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
1. ASME A112.21.2M - Roof Drains.
2. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.
B. ASTM International:
1. ASTM D2464 - Standard Specification for Threaded Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
2. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC) Plastic Piping Systems.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE 221400 - 2
3. ASTM D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain,
Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings.
4. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings.
5. ASTM D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data:
1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. Submit manufacturers
catalog information.
2. Storm Drainage Specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information, component sizes,
rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment and cleanouts.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work according to codes adopted by authority having jurisdiction.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years' documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years'
documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE 221400 - 3
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing
sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system.
1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
B. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.
1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material.
1. Fittings: PVC, ASTM D3034.
2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.
2.2 STORM WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material.
1. Fittings: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034, PVC.
2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.
2.3 FLANGES
A. Flanges for Pipe 2-1/2 Inches and Larger:
1. PVC Piping: PVC flanges.
2. Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene gaskets.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE 221400 - 4
B. PVC Pipe Materials: For connections to equipment and valves with threaded connections,
furnish solvent-weld socket to screwed joint adapters, or ASTM D2464, Schedule 80, threaded,
PVC pipe.
2.4 DECK DRAINS
A. DD-1 Deck Drain: Square coated cast iron body, frame clamps, seepage openings, stainless
steel perforated extension, secondary clamp collar, rotatable 10x10 inch top, polished bronze
heel-proof grate, Zurn model ZB158-85 or equivalent.
2.5 CLEANOUTS
A. Exterior Surfaced Areas (CO-1): Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover.
B. Exterior Unsurfaced Areas (CO-2): Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy
coated cover with gasket.
C. Interior Finished Floor Areas (CO-3): Lacquered or galvanized cast iron body with anchor
flange, threaded top assembly, and round scored cover with gasket in service areas and round
depressed cover with gasket to accept floor finish in finished floor areas.
D. Interior Finished Wall Areas (CO-4): Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy
coated cover with gasket, and round stainless-steel access cover secured with machine screw.
E. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas (CO-5): Caulked or threaded type. Provide bolted stack
cleanouts on vertical rainwater leaders.
2.6 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS
A. Bedding: Sand or pea gravel.
B. Cover: Sand or pea gravel.
C. Soil Backfill from Above Pipe to Finish Grade: Subsoil with no rocks over 6 inches in diameter,
frozen earth or foreign matter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE 221400 - 5
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or
caps.
3.3 INSTALLATION - BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Verify connection size, location, and invert are as indicated on Drawings.
B. Establish elevations of buried piping with not less than 4 ft of cover.
C. Excavate pipe trench according to Civil Specifications.
D. Install pipe to elevation as indicated on Drawings.
E. Place bedding material at trench bottom to provide uniform bedding for piping, level bedding
materials in one continuous layer not exceeding 6 inches compacted depth; compact to 95
percent maximum density.
F. Install pipe on prepared bedding.
G. Route pipe in straight line.
H. Install trace wire continuous buried 6 inches below finish grade, above pipe line. Refer to
Section 220553.
I. Pipe Cover and Backfilling:
1. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill material to attain required compaction density.
2. After hydrostatic test, evenly backfill entire trench width by hand placing backfill
material and hand tamping in 6 inches compacted layers to 6 inches minimum cover over
top of jacket. Compact to 95 percent maximum density.
3. Evenly and continuously backfill remaining trench depth in uniform layers with backfill
material.
4. Do not use wheeled or tracked vehicles for tamping.
3.4 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING
A. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/4 inch per foot minimum unless noted
otherwise on Plan. Maintain gradients.
B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with
mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Provide clearance at cleanout for snaking drainage system.
C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE 221400 - 6
D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.
E. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to
walls.
F. Install piping to maintain headroom. Group piping to conserve space.
G. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
H. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected
equipment.
I. Install piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly.
J. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting.
Refer to Section 099000.
K. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors. Refer to Section 220529.
L. Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating
sleeves and piping. Refer to Section 220529.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements and 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements:
Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Test storm drainage piping system according codes adopted by authority having jurisdiction.
END OF SECTION 221400
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223400 - 1
SECTION 223400 - FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Residential gas-fired water heaters.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Execution requirements for concrete
housekeeping pads specified by this Section.
2. Section 220513 - Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment: Product
requirements for pump motors for placement by this Section.
3. Section 220700 - Plumbing Insulation: Field applied insulation for domestic water
heaters.
4. Section: 221100 - Facility Water Distribution: Supply connections to domestic water
heaters.
5. Section 231123 - Facility Natural-Gas Piping: Execution requirements for gas piping
connections specified by this Section.
6. Section 260503 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for electric
connections specified by this Section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute:
1. ANSI Z21.10.1 - Gas Water Heaters Vol. I Storage Water Heaters with Input Ratings of
75,000 Btu per Hour or Less.
2. ANSI Z21.10.3 - Gas Water Heaters - Vol. III Storage, with Input Ratings Above 75,000
Btu per Hour, Circulating and Instantaneous Water Heaters.
B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers:
1. ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.
C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
1. ASME PTC 25 - Pressure Relief Devices.
2. ASME Section VIII - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Pressure Vessels.
D. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code.
E. United States Department of Energy:
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223400 - 2
1. DOE 10 CFR - Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of
Furnaces.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data:
1. Water Heaters: Submit dimensioned drawings of water heaters indicating components
and connections to other equipment and piping. Indicate pump type, capacity and power
requirements. Submit electrical characteristics and connection locations.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit replacement part numbers and availability.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Water Heater Performance Requirements: Equipment efficiency not less than prescribed by
ASHRAE 90.1 when tested according to ANSI Z21.10.3.
B. Perform Work according to codes adopted by authority having jurisdiction.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with
minimum three years' documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum three years'
documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this Section.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Products storage and handling requirements.
B. Accept water heaters on Site in original labeled cartons. Inspect for damage.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223400 - 3
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B. Furnish 6-year manufacturer warranty for domestic water heaters.
1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GAS FIRED WATER HEATERS
A. Type: Automatic, natural gas-fired, vertical storage.
B. Capacity:
1. Storage Capacity: 50 gal.
2. Input: 100,000 Btuh at sea level.
3. Thermal Efficiency: 96%
4. Minimum Recovery Rate: 116 gph with 100 degrees F temperature rise.
5. Maximum Working Pressure: 150 psig.
6. Certification: ANSI Z21.10.3.
C. Tank and Combustion System: Glass-lined welded steel with spiral heat exchanger, power
direct vent, condensing design; thermally insulated with glass fiber.
D. Controls: LCD display, microprocessor controller, diagnostics.
E. Accessories: Magnesium anode and ASME temperature and pressure relief valve.
F. Manufacturer and model: A.O. Smith GDHE-50 or equivalent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances around and over water heaters.
B. Install water heater on concrete housekeeping pad, minimum 3-1/2 inches high and 6 inches
larger than water heater base on each side. Refer to Section 033000.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223400 - 4
C. Connect natural gas piping according to NFPA 54.
D. Connect natural gas piping to water heater, full size of water heater gas train inlet. Arrange
piping with clearances for burner removal and service.
E. Connect domestic hot and cold water piping to supply and return water heater connections.
F. Install the following piping accessories on natural gas piping connections. Refer to Section
231123.
1. Shutoff valve.
2. Sediment trap.
3. Union.
4. Flexible pipe connector.
G. Install discharge piping from relief valves and drain valves to nearest floor drain.
H. Install circulator and diaphragm expansion tank on water heater.
I. Install water heater trim and accessories furnished loose for field mounting.
J. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting.
K. Connect CPVC combustion air and combustion vent piping to water heater. Route piping to
building exterior as indicated on Drawings.
END OF SECTION 223400
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 1
SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Water closets.
2. Lavatories.
3. Sinks.
4. Service sinks.
5. Showers.
6. Emergency combination shower with eye and face wash.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 221100 - Facility Water Distribution: Supply connections to plumbing fixtures.
2. Section 221300 - Facility Sanitary Sewerage: Waste connections to plumbing fixtures.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute:
1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.
2. ANSI Z124.1 - Plastic Bathtub Units.
3. ANSI Z124.2 - Plastic Shower Units.
4. ANSI Z358.1 - Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment.
B. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute:
1. ARI 1010 - Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers.
C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
1. ASME A112.6.1 - Floor-Affixed Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public
Use.
2. ASME A112.18.1 - Plumbing Fixture Fittings.
3. ASME A112.19.1M - Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures.
4. ASME A112.19.2M - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures.
5. ASME A112.19.3 - Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential Use).
6. ASME A112.19.4 - Porcelain Enameled Formed Steel Plumbing Fixtures.
7. ASME A112.19.5 - Trim for Water-Closet Bowls, Tanks and Urinals.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 2
B. Product Data: Submit catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes,
trim, and finishes.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit fixture, trim, exploded view, and replacement parts
lists.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work according to codes adopted by authority having jurisdiction.
B. Provide plumbing fixture fittings according to ASME A112.18.1 that prevent backflow from
fixture into water distribution system.
C. Maintain one copy of each document on Site.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with
minimum three years' documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum three years'
documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this Section.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Accept fixtures on Site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
C. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in
place to protect fixtures and prevent use.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 3
B. Furnish one-year manufacturer warranty for plumbing fixtures.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WC-1 FLUSH VALVE WATER CLOSETS
A. Bowl: ASME A112.19.2M; floor mounted, siphon jet 17-inch bowl height, ADA accessible
vitreous china closet bowl, with elongated rim, 1-1/2-inch top spud, china bolt caps; American
Standard model 3043.001 or equivalent.
B. Sensor Operated Flush Valve: ASME A112.18.1; exposed chrome-plated brass, diaphragm type
with battery operated solenoid operator, infrared sensor and over-ride button, stop and vacuum
breaker; maximum 1.28 gal. flush volume; Sloan model 8111-1.28 or equivalent.
C. Seat: Solid white plastic, open front, extended back, self-sustaining hinge, brass bolts, without
cover.
2.2 WC-2 TANK TYPE WATER CLOSETS
A. Bowl: ASME A112.19.2M; floor mounted, siphon jet, vitreous china, 15.25 inches high close-
coupled closet combination with elongated rim, insulated vitreous china closet tank with
fittings, lever operated 4 inch piston flush valve, bolt caps, white; American Standard model
211CA.104 or equivalent.
B. Seat: Solid white plastic, open front, extended back, slow closing, without cover.
2.3 LAVATORIES
A. LV-1 Vitreous China Wall Hung Basin: ASME A112.19.2M; ADA compliant vitreous china
wall hung lavatory 18 by 21 inches minimum, with depressed faucet ledge, drillings for center
center hole faucet and right side soap dispenser, rear overflow, and acrylic knee shroud, white;
American Standard model 0955.123EC or equivalent.
B. LV-2 Undercounter Lavatory: ASME A112.19.2M; vitreous china, unglazed rim for under
counter mount with rear overflow, 16 by 16 inches, white, with mounting kit; American
Standard model 0426.000.
C. LV-2 Supply Fitting: ASME A112.18.1; chrome-plated brass supply fitting, ceramic disc valve
cartridge, braided flexible supplies with pop-up waste, water economy aerator with maximum
1.2 gpm flow, single lever handle; American Standard model 2064.131 or equivalent.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 4
D. LV-1 Sensor Faucet: ASME A112.18.1; chrome-plated single temperature faucet with battery
operated solenoid operator and infrared sensor, 0.5 gpm vandal resistant aerator or spray and
open grid strainer, Sloan model EAF-250 or equivalent..
E. Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2 or ASTM F 409.
F. For LV-1 public hand washing facilities, provide tempered water through regulating device
conforming to ASSE 1070.
G. Accessories:
1. Chrome-plated 17-gage brass P-trap and arm with escutcheon.
2. Metal ball valve stops.
3. Flexible metal braid covered supplies.
4. LV-1 trap and waste insulated and offset to meet ADA compliance.
H. LV-1 Wall Mounted Carrier: ASME A112.6.1; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs
for floor and wall attachment, concealed arm supports, bearing plate and studs.
2.4 SINKS
A. SK-1 Single Compartment Scullery Sink: 14 gauge Type 304 stainless steel, welded
construction, 8 inch high sloped backsplash, polished surfaces, right and left drainboarads, 3-1/2
inch drain opening, stainless steel tubular legs, 36 by 24 by 14 compartment, 24 inch wide
drainboards; Elkay model WNSF8136LR2 or equivalent.
B. SK-1 Trim:
1. ASME A112.18.1; prerinse unit consisting of wall mount faucet with 8 inch centers and
quarter turn valve cartridges with spring checks and lever handles, 44 inch flexible
stainless steel hose, 1.42 gpm spray valve, 6 inch wall bracket, 18 inch riser pipe, and
finger hook; T&S Brass model B-0133-B or equivalent.
2. Chrome plated brass or stainless steel drain fitting.
C. SK-2 Single Compartment Bowl: ASME A112.19.3; ADA compliant 16 by 16 by 5.375 inches
bowl dimensions, 18-gage thick, Type 304 stainless steel, undermount and undercoated, 3.375
inch drain at rear center, with drain kit, mounting kit, and strainer/stopper; Elkay model
ELUHAD161655PD or equivalent.
D. SK-2 Trim:
1. ASME A112.18.1; ADA compliant high arc polished chrome-plated brass swing spout
pull-down faucet with four function spray head, shank mounted single lever handle,
ceramic disc valve cartridge, spray head magnetic docking, braided flexible stainless steel
supply hoses, integral check valves, 1.5 gpm maximum flow rate, for single hole
mounting; American Standard model 4932.300.002 or equivalent.
2. ASME A112.18.1; 10 inch high deck mounted glass filler with polished chrome brass
body, adjustable flow outlet, push back actuation arm, pedestal with adjustable deck
flange, and ½ inch NPT male inlet; T&S Brass model B-1210-01 or equivalent.
3. Chrome plated brass or stainless steel drain fitting.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 5
E. SK-3 Double Compartment Bowl: ASME A112.19.3; ADA compliant 19 by 16 by 5.375 inches
bowl dimensions 18-gage thick, Type 304 stainless steel, undermount and undercoated, rear
center drain locations, with drain kits, mounting kit, and strainer/stopper; Elkay model
ELUHAD421855PD or equivalent.
F. SK-3 Trim:
1. ASME A112.18.1; ADA compliant high arc polished chrome-plated brass swing spout
pull-down faucet with four function spray head, shank mounted single lever handle,
ceramic disc valve cartridge, spray head magnetic docking, braided flexible stainless steel
supply hoses, integral check valves, 1.5 gpm maximum flow rate, for single hole
mounting; American Standard model 4932.300.002 or equivalent.
2. Food waste disposer, insinkerator model Badger 5XP or equivalent with dimensions
suitable for ADA compliance when installed in sink knee space.
G. SK-4 Utility Sink: ANZI-Z-124.6-97; Reinforced plastic single compartment 23 by 22 by 14
inch sink with 21 inch tall legs, 1-1/2 inch drain opening, and faucet deck; Florestone model FM
or equivalent.
H. SK-4 Trim: ASME A112.18.1; chrome-plated brass supply with high rise swing spout, water
economy aerator with maximum 2.2 gpm flow, single lever handle and retractable spray;
American Standard model 4275.550 or equivalent.
I. SK-5 Single Compartment Bowl: ASME A112.19.3; 13.5 by 16 by 7.875 inches bowl
dimensions, 18-gage thick, Type 304 stainless steel, undermount and undercoated, 3.375 inch
drain at rear center, with drain kit, mounting kit, and strainer/stopper; Elkay model
ELUH1316PD or equivalent.
J. SK-5 Trim:
1. ASME A112.18.1; ADA compliant high arc polished chrome-plated brass swing spout
pull-down faucet with four function spray head, shank mounted single lever handle,
ceramic disc valve cartridge, spray head magnetic docking, braided flexible stainless steel
supply hoses, integral check valves, 1.5 gpm maximum flow rate, for single hole
mounting; American Standard model 4932.300.002 or equivalent.
2. ASME A112.18.1; 10 inch high deck mounted glass filler with polished chrome brass
body, adjustable flow outlet, push back actuation arm, pedestal with adjustable deck
flange, and ½ inch NPT male inlet; T&S Brass model B-1210-01 or equivalent.
3. Chrome plated brass or stainless steel drain fitting.
K. Accessories: Chrome-plated 17-gage brass P-trap and arm with escutcheon, metal ball valve
stops, metal braid covered flexible supplies.
2.5 SH-1 SHOWERS
A. Cabinet: ANSI Z124.2 molded cast acrylic, 48 by 34 by 78 inches high, with integral receptor,
multiple integral shelves, integral seat, removable chrome-plated strainer, tailpiece, white color,
with shower door; Aquatic model E148L/R with L0517 door.
B. Trim: ASME A112.18.1; concealed pressure balance shower supply with screwdriver stops,
single handle, bent shower arm with flow control ball joint showerhead with maximum 2.0 gpm
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 6
flow, and escutcheon, polished chrome; American Standard model T722.507.002 with model
R111SS valve or equivalents.
2.6 SH-2 SHOWERS
A. Cabinet: ANSI Z124.2, ADA compliant, applied acrylic surface, 36x36x75.25 interior, ¾ inch
skirt, ½ inch beveled threshold, textured bottom, center drain, grab bars, fold-up seat, soap dish,
curtain rod, Aquatic model 1363BFSD with options or equivalent.
B. Trim:
1. ASME A112.18.1; concealed pressure balance shower supply with screwdriver stops,
single handle, with flow control ball joint showerhead with maximum 2.0 gpm flow, and
escutcheon, polished chrome; American Standard model T722.507.002 with model
R111SS valve or equivalents.
2. Shower slide rail/shower column with integral two position diverter, fixed head outlet,
hose outlet, and integral check valve, Kohler model K-45906 or equivalent.
2.7 EWC-1 ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS
A. Fountain:
1. ARI 1010; surface mounted ADA compliant single station electric water cooler with
stainless-steel top, stainless-steel body, elevated anti-squirt bubbler with stream guard,
automatic stream regulator, push buttons, mounting bracket, refrigerated with integral air
cooled condenser, bottle filling station with electronic sensor for activation and “bottles
saved” counter digital display.
2. Capacity: 8 gph of 50 degrees F water with inlet at 80 degrees F and room temperature of
90 degrees F.
3. Electrical: Maximum 1/4 hp compressor, 6-foot cord and plug for connection to electric
wiring system including grounding connector.
4. Manufacturer and model: Elkay model EZSG8WSSK or equivalent
2.8 MS-1 MOP SINKS
A. Bowl: 36 by 24 by 10 inches high white molded stone, floor mounted, with one inch wide
shoulders, vinyl bumper guard, stainless-steel strainer; Florestone model MSR-3624 or
equivalent.
B. Trim: ASME A112.18.1 polished chrome plated exposed wall type supply with cross or lever
handles, spout wall brace, vacuum breaker, hose end spout, strainers, eccentric adjustable inlets,
integral screwdriver stops with covering caps and adjustable threaded wall flanges; Zurn model
Z843M1 or equivalent.
C. Accessories:
1. 5 feet of 1/2 inch diameter plain end reinforced plastic or rubber hose.
2. Hose clamp hanger.
3. Mop hanger.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 7
2.9 EW-1 EMERGENCY COMBINATION SHOWER WITH EYE AND FACE WASH
A. Shower: ANSI Z358.1; free standing, self- cleaning, non-clogging 8-inch diameter plastic
drench shower head, instant action stay open valve actuated by rigid stainless-steel pull rod.
B. Eyewash: ANSI Z358.1; stainless-steel bowl with elbow, 1-1/4-inch galvanized steel pipe
pedestal with floor flange, instant action stay open valve actuated by push flag, zero velocity
spray head, dust cover assembly, and tailpiece and chrome-plated brass P-trap.
C. Supply and Waste Piping: 1-1/4-inch galvanized steel pipe pedestal with floor flange.
D. Furnish thermostatic mixing valve.
E. Furnish universal emergency sign.
F. Manufacturer and model: Haws model 8300CRP-8309CRP with 9201E mixing valve or
equivalents.
2.10 LAVATORY INSULATION KIT
A. Product Description: Where Lavatories are noted to be insulated for ADA compliance, furnish
the following: Safety Covers conforming to ANSI A177.1 and consisting of insulation kit of
molded closed cell vinyl construction, 3/16 inch thick, white color, for insulating tailpiece, P-
trap, valves, and supply piping. Furnish with weep hole and angle valve access covers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures.
C. Verify electric power is available and of correct characteristics.
D. Confirm millwork is constructed with adequate provision for installation of counter top
lavatories and sinks.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Rough-in fixture piping connections according to minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in
schedule for particular fixtures.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 8
B. Provide flexible supplies to fixtures with stops, reducers, and escutcheons.
C. Install components level and plumb.
D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall carriers and bolts.
E. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 079000, transparent
sealant.
F. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold fixture
in place.
G. For ADA accessible water closets, install flush valve with handle to wide side of stall.
3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Review millwork shop-drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before
rough in and installation.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or
overflow.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning.
B. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
3.7 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Protecting installed construction.
B. Do not permit use of fixtures before final acceptance.
3.8 SCHEDULES
A. Fixture Mounting Heights:
1. Water Closet:
a. Standard: 15 inches to top of bowl rim.
b. Accessible: 18 inches to top of seat.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 9
2. Water Closet Flush Valves:
a. Standard: 11 inches min. above bowl rim.
3. Lavatory:
a. Accessible: 34 inches to top of basin rim.
4. Shower Heads:
a. Adult Male and Female: 69.5 inches to bottom of head.
B. Fixture Rough-In:
1. Vent sizes shall be increased where required by code due to total length.
2. Water Closet Flush Valve:
a. Cold: 1 inch.
b. Waste: 4 inches.
c. Vent: 2 inches.
3. Water Closet - Tank Type:
a. Cold: 1/2 inch.
b. Waste: 3 inches.
c. Vent: 2 inches.
4. Public Lavatory LV-1:
a. Hot: 1/4 inch (per 2015 IECC).
b. Cold: 1/4 inch.
c. Waste: 1-1/2 inches.
d. Vent: 1-1/4 inches.
5. Lavatory LV-2:
a. Hot: 1/2 inch.
b. Cold: 1/2 inch.
c. Waste: 1-1/2 inches.
d. Vent: 1-1/4 inches.
6. Sink:
a. Hot: 1/2 inch.
b. Cold: 1/2 inch.
c. Waste: 1-1/2 inches.
d. Vent: 1-1/4 inches.
7. Service Sink:
a. Hot: 1/2 inch.
b. Cold: 1/2 inch.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 10
c. Waste: 3 inches.
d. Vent: 1-1/2 inches.
8. Shower:
a. Hot: 1/2 inches.
b. Cold: 1/2 inch.
c. Waste: 1-1/2 inches.
d. Vent: 1-1/4 inches.
9. Drinking Fountain:
a. Cold: 1/2 inch.
b. Waste: 1-1/4 inches.
c. Vent: 1-1/4 inches.
END OF SECTION 224000
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 1
SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipe hangers and supports.
2. Hanger rods.
3. Flashing.
4. Sleeves.
5. Mechanical sleeve seals.
6. Formed steel channel.
7. Firestopping and accessories for HVAC Work.
8. Equipment bases and supports.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 031000 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Placement of inserts and sleeves in
concrete forms as required by this Section.
2. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of concrete housekeeping pads as
required by this Section.
3. Section 099000 - Painting and Coating: Painting as required by this Section.
4. Section 230700 - HVAC Insulation: Piping and accessory insulation as required by this
Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Firestopping (Through-Penetration Protection System): The material used to seal or stuff or an
assembly placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to arrest
movement of fire, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire-rated construction.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Welding Society:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
B. ASME International:
1. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping.
2. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components.
3. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.
C. ASTM International:
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 2
1. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and
Materials.
2. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems.
3. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.
4. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.
D. FM Global:
1. FM - Approval Guide.
E. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Mark):
1. WH-ETL - Product Directory.
F. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry:
1. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection,
Application, and Installation.
G. UL:
1. UL - Fire-resistance-rated Systems and Products.
2. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
3. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.
4. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for preinstallation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this Section.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Product Data:
1. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturer's catalog information, including load
capacity.
2. Firestopping: Submit information on product characteristics, performance, and limitations.
C. Firestopping Schedule: Submit schedule of opening locations and sizes, penetrated items, and
specified design numbers to seal openings to maintain fire-resistance rating of adjacent assembly.
D. Field Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor-furnished tests and inspections.
E. Qualifications Statements:
1. Submit manufacturer's approval of applicator.
2. Welders: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 3
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Firestopping Materials: Comply with requirements of Section 078413.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics:
1. Maximum 25/50 flame-spread/smoke-developed index.
2. Testing: Comply with ASTM E84.
C. Welding of Hanger and Support Attachments to Building Structure: Comply with applicable
authority and AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
D. Perform Work according to codes adopted by authority having jurisdiction.
E. Maintain one copy of each standard affecting Work of this Section on Site.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with
minimum three years' documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum three years'
documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
C. Welders: AWS qualified within previous 12 months for employed weld types.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and
protecting products.
B. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for damage.
C. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions.
D. Protection:
1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from
construction operations areas.
2. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions.
1.9 AMBIENT CONDITIONS
A. Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Requirements for ambient condition control
facilities for product storage and installation.
B. Minimum Conditions:
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 4
1. Do not apply firestopping materials if temperature of substrate material and ambient air is
below 60 degrees F.
2. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum three days after
installation of firestopping materials.
C. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials.
1.10 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements:
1. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
2. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for warranties.
B. Furnish one-year manufacturer's warranty for pipe hangers and supports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Firestopping Materials: Comply with requirements of Section 078413.
2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Firestopping Materials: Comply with requirements of Section 078413.
2.3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hydronic Piping and Natural Gas Piping:
1. Comply with ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, and MSS SP-58.
2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches:
a. Material: Malleable iron or carbon steel.
b. Type: Adjustable swivel and split ring.
3. Hangers for Hot Pipe, Sizes 2 to 4 Inches:
a. Material: Carbon steel.
b. Type: Adjustable; clevis.
4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 5
5. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
6. Floor Support for Hot Pipe, Sizes 4 Inches and Smaller:
a. Pipe Saddle: Cast iron; adjustable.
b. Support: Concrete pier or steel column.
c. Furnish lock nut, nipple, and floor flange.
7. Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated carbon-steel ring.
B. Refrigerant Piping:
1. Conform to ASME B31.5, ASTM F708, and MSS SP-58.
2. Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated carbon-steel ring.
C. Accessories:
1. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded on one end, or continuously
threaded.
2.4 FLASHING
A. Metal Flashing:
1. Material: Galvanized steel.
2. Thickness: 26 gage.
B. Metal Counterflashing:
1. Material: Galvanized steel.
2. Thickness: 22 gage.
C. Sheet Lead Flashing:
1. Waterproofing: 5 psf.
2. Soundproofing: 1 psf.
D. Flexible Flashing:
1. Material:
a. Compatible with roofing.
2. Thickness: 47 mils.
2.5 SLEEVES
A. Pipes through Non-fire-rated Floors:
1. Material: Galvanized steel.
2. Thickness: 18 gage.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 6
B. Pipes through Non-fire-rated Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18-gage
galvanized steel.
C. Round Ductwork: Galvanized steel.
D. Rectangular Ductwork: Galvanized steel.
E. Sealant:
1. Material: Acrylic.
2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description:
1. Type: Modular mechanical.
2. Configuration: Interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space
between object and sleeve.
3. Connection: Bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when
tightened, providing watertight seal and insulation.
2.7 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL
A. Description:
1. Material: Galvanized 12-gage steel.
2. Thickness: 12 gage.
3. Hole Spacing: 1-1/2 inches o.c.
2.8 FIRESTOPPING
A. Firestopping Materials: Comply with requirements of Section 078413.
2.9 FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES
A. Firestopping Materials: Comply with requirements of Section 078413.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation
examination.
B. Verify that openings are ready to receive sleeves.
C. Verify that openings are ready to receive firestopping.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 7
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation
preparation.
B. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter that may affect
bond of firestopping material.
C. Remove incompatible materials that may affect bond.
D. Install backing or damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage.
E. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before using powder-actuated anchors.
F. Do not drill or cut structural members.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Comply with ASCE 07 Chapter 13 Seismic Design Requirements for Nonstructural
Components
2. Comply with ASME B31.1, B31.5, and B31.9.
3. Comply with ASTM F708 and MSS SP-58.
4. Support horizontal piping as scheduled in this section.
5. Minimum Hanger Spacing: 1/2 inch between finished covering and adjacent Work.
6. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
7. Minimum Vertical Hanger Adjustment: 1-1/2 inches.
8. Support vertical piping at every floor.
9. If piping is installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple-pipe or trapeze
hangers.
10. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
11. Provide copper-plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
12. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
13. Painting and Coating:
a. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports as specified in Section 099000 -
Painting and Coating.
b. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling
spaces are not considered exposed.
14. Insulation:
a. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation
of insulation.
b. As specified in Section 220700 - Plumbing Insulation.
B. Equipment Bases and Supports:
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 8
1. Comply with ASCE 07 Chapter 13 Seismic Design Requirements for Nonstructural
Components
2. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete as specified in Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place
Concrete.
3. Minimum Size: 3-1/2 inches thick and extending 6 inches beyond supported equipment.
4. Use templates furnished with equipment to install equipment anchor bolts and accessories.
5. Supports:
a. Material: Steel members, formed steel channel, or steel pipe and fittings.
b. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.
C. Flashing:
1. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping and ductwork penetrate
weatherproofed or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.
D. Sleeves:
1. Exterior Watertight Entries: Seal with mechanical sleeve seals.
2. Set sleeves in position in forms and provide reinforcing around sleeves.
3. Sizing:
a. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction.
b. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.
4. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level, and calk sleeves.
5. Spaces:
a. If piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe
or duct and adjacent Work with stuffing or firestopping insulation and calk airtight.
b. Provide close-fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.
c. Install chrome-plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.
E. Firestopping:
1. Firestopping Materials: Comply with requirements of Section 078413.
2. Occupied Spaces:
a. Install escutcheons, floor plates, or ceiling plates where conduit penetrates non-fire-
rated surfaces in occupied spaces.
b. Occupied spaces include rooms with finished ceilings and where penetration occurs
below finished ceiling.
3. Exterior Wall Openings below Grade: Assemble rubber links of mechanical sealing device
to size of piping and tighten in place according to manufacturer instructions.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for inspecting and testing.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 9
B. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for testing, adjusting, and
balancing.
C. Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished
Work.
B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
3.7 ATTACHMENTS
A. Pipe Hanger Spacing:
1. Pipe Material: CPVC.
a. Size: 1 inch and smaller.
b. Maximum Hanger Spacing: 3 feet.
c. Hanger Rod Diameter: 1/2 inch.
2. Pipe Material: CPVC.
a. Size: 1-1/4 inches and larger.
b. Maximum Hanger Spacing: 4 feet.
c. Hanger Rod Diameter: 1/2 inch.
3. Pipe Material: Copper tube.
a. Size: 1-1/4 inches and smaller.
b. Maximum Hanger Spacing: 6 feet.
c. Hanger Rod Diameter: 1/2 inch.
4. Pipe Material: Copper tube.
a. Size: 1-1/2 inches and larger.
b. Maximum Hanger Spacing: 10 feet.
c. Hanger Rod Diameter: 1/2 inch.
5. Pipe Material: PVC.
a. Maximum Hanger Spacing: 4 feet.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 10
b. Hanger Rod Diameter: 3/8 inch.
6. Pipe Material: Steel.
a. Size: 3 inches and smaller.
b. Maximum Hanger Spacing: 12 feet.
c. Hanger Rod Diameter: 1/2 inch.
END OF SECTION 230529
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 1
SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Nameplates.
2. Tags.
3. Stencils.
4. Pipe markers.
5. Ceiling tacks.
6. Labels.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 099000 - Painting and Coating: Execution requirements for painting specified by
this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
1. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves; include valve tag
numbers.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to ASME A13.1 for color scheme for identification of piping systems and accessories.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 2
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years
documented experience.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NAMEPLATES
A. Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light
contrasting background color.
2.2 TAGS
A. Plastic Tags
a. Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting
background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter.
B. Metal Tags
a. Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter with finished
edges.
C. Information Tags
a. Clear plastic with printed "Danger," "Caution," or "Warning" and message; size 3-
1/4 x 5-5/8 inches with grommet and self-locking nylon ties.
D. Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list of applied tags and location in anodized aluminum frame.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 3
2.3 STENCILS
A. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:
1. Up to 2 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1/2 inch high letters.
2. 2-1/2 to 6 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1-inch high letters.
3. Over 6 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1 inch high letters.
4. Ductwork and Equipment: 1 inch high letters.
B. Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 099000, semi-gloss enamel, colors and lettering size
conforming to ASME A13.1.
2.4 PIPE MARKERS
A. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1.
B. Plastic Pipe Markers
1. Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe
covering. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener.
C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers
1. Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings.
2.5 CEILING TACKS
A. Ceiling Tacks
B. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color-coded head.
C. Color code as follows:
1. HVAC equipment: Yellow.
2. Fire dampers/smoke dampers: Red.
3. Plumbing valves: Green.
4. Heating/cooling valves: Blue.
2.6 LABELS
A. Labels:
B. Description: Aluminum, polyester, or laminated Mylar, size 1.9 x 0.75 inches, adhesive backed
with printed identification.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 4
2.7 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
A. Description: Polyethylene tape with metallic core for detection and location of piping with
metal detector resistant to acids, alkalis and other soil components.
1. Size: 0.004 inch6 inches
2. Printed text as selected by Architect/Engineer in black color and repeated at maximum 40
inches intervals.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 099000 for stencil painting.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 099000.
B. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting.
C. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.
D. Install labels with sufficient adhesive for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
E. Install tags using corrosion resistant chain. Number tags consecutively by location.
F. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above
buried pipe.
G. Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment devices
with plastic nameplates. Identify in-line pumps and other small devices with tags.
H. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates.
I. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.
J. Identify air terminal units and radiator valves with numbered tags.
K. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic.
L. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers or plastic tape pipe markers.
Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure.
Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on
straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of
penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 5
M. For exposed natural gas lines other than steel pipe, attach yellow pipe labels with "GAS" in
black lettering, at maximum 5 foot spacing.
N. Identify ductwork with plastic nameplates or stenciled painting. Identify with air handling unit
identification number and area served. Locate identification at air handling unit, at each side of
penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
O. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in
corner of panel closest to equipment.
END OF SECTION 230553
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 1
SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Testing adjusting, and balancing of air systems.
2. Testing adjusting, and balancing of hydronic and refrigerating systems.
3. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 230993 - Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls: Sequences of operation
for HVAC equipment.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Associated Air Balance Council:
1. AABC MN-1 - National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and
Air Conditioning Systems.
B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers:
1. ASHRAE 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of
Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Systems.
C. Natural Environmental Balancing Bureau:
1. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental
Systems.
D. Testing Adjusting and Balancing Bureau:
1. TABB - International Standards for Environmental Systems Balance.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Prior to commencing Work, submit proof of latest calibration date of each instrument.
C. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC MN-1 National Standards for Total System Balance
forms, forms prepared following ASHRAE 111, NEBB Report forms, or TABB Report Forms.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 2
D. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies preventing proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of
systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.
E. Prior to commencing Work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting, balancing, and
equipment data required. Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms and copy of
AABC National Project Performance Guaranty, Copy of NEBB Certificate of Conformance
Certification, or TABB International Quality Assurance program guarantee.
F. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project.
G. Furnish reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with table of contents
page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced
drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and
indicating thermostat locations.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of balancing dampers, balancing valves and
rough settings.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Furnish final copy of testing, adjusting, and balancing report
inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with codes adopted by authority having jurisdiction.
B. Perform Work in accordance with AABC MN-1 National Standards for Field Measurement and
Instrumentation, Total System Balance, ASHRAE 111, NEBB Procedural Standards for
Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems, or TABB International Quality
Assurance program.
C. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
D. Prior to commencing Work, calibrate each instrument to be used.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Agency: Company specializing in testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience certified by AABC, Certified by
NEBB, or Certified by TABB.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 3
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.8 SEQUENCING
A. Section 011000 - Summary: Work sequence.
B. Sequence balancing between completion of systems tested and Date of Substantial Completion.
1.9 SCHEDULING
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Verify the following:
1. Systems are started and operating in safe and normal condition.
2. HVAC control systems are installed complete and operable.
3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.
4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final
filters.
5. Duct systems are clean of debris.
6. Fans are rotating correctly.
7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.
8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.
9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.
10. Air outlets are installed and connected.
11. Duct system leakage is minimized.
12. Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented.
13. Pumps are rotating correctly.
14. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place or in normal position.
15. Service and balancing valves are open.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Furnish instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 4
B. Make instruments available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing.
3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus 10 or minus 0 percent of design.
B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 0 percent of design to
space.
C. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Verify recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.
C. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings
to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.
D. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted. If disrupted,
verify correcting adjustments have been made.
E. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services, preventing system
balance.
F. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing
doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.
G. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or
areas as selected and witnessed by Owner.
3.5 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to obtain required or design supply, return, and
exhaust air quantities at site altitude.
B. Make air flow rate measurements in main ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional
area of duct.
C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
D. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent adjustments do not create
objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by using volume dampers
located in ducts.
E. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Vary branch air quantities by
damper regulation.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 5
F. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet.
G. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure
drops, and total pressure across fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters.
H. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design
conditions.
I. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check
leakage.
J. At modulating damper locations, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions.
K. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to obtain
required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches differential static
pressure near building entries. Apparatus bays shall be at negative pressure due to continuous
exhaust operation.
3.6 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A. Adjust water systems, after air balancing, to obtain design quantities.
B. Use calibrated venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gauges to determine
flow rates for system balance. Where flow-metering devices are not installed, base flow balance
on temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in system.
C. Confirm air bleeds indicate system is full of water.
D. Adjust systems to obtain specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer elements prior
to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential in conjunction
with air balancing.
E. Perform system balance with automatic control valves fully open and triple duty valves fully
open.
F. Confirm pump rotation and differential pressure at full flow.
G. Perform adjustment of water distribution systems by the following measures:
1. Use balancing cocks, valves, and fittings.
H. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless designed for balancing and shut-off
functions. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual
system parts, simulate full flow in one part by temporary restriction of flow to other parts.
3.7 SCHEDULES
A. List of Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing:
1. Plumbing Pumps.
2. HVAC Pumps.
3. Boilers.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 6
4. Snow melt tubing manifolds (balancing loops)
5. Forced Air Furnaces.
6. Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers.
7. Computer Room Min-Split System Air Conditioning Units.
8. Air Coils.
9. Fan Coil Units.
10. Fans.
11. Air Inlets and Outlets.
12. Energy Recovery Ventilators.
B. Report Forms
1. Title Page:
a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency
b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency
c. Telephone and facsimile numbers of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency
d. Project name
e. Project location
f. Project Architect
g. Project Engineer
h. Project Contractor
i. Project altitude
j. Report date
2. Summary Comments:
a. Design versus final performance
b. Notable characteristics of system
c. Description of systems operation sequence
d. Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate building pressurization
e. Nomenclature used throughout report
f. Test conditions
3. Instrument List:
a. Instrument
b. Manufacturer
c. Model number
d. Serial number
e. Range
f. Calibration date
4. Electric Motors:
a. Manufacturer
b. Model/Frame
c. HP/BHP and kW
d. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load
e. RPM
f. Service factor
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 7
g. Starter size, rating, heater elements
h. Sheave Make/Size/Bore
5. V-Belt Drive:
a. Identification/location
b. Required driven RPM
c. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM
d. Belt, size and quantity
e. Motor sheave diameter and RPM
f. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual
6. Pump Data:
a. Identification/number
b. Manufacturer
c. Size/model
d. Impeller
e. Service
f. Design flow rate, pressure drop, BHP and kW
g. Actual flow rate, pressure drop, BHP and kW
h. Discharge pressure
i. Suction pressure
j. Total operating head pressure
k. Shut off, discharge and suction pressures
l. Shut off, total head pressure
7. Air Cooled Condenser:
a. Identification/number
b. Location
c. Manufacturer
d. Model number
e. Serial number
f. Entering DB air temperature, design and actual
g. Leaving DB air temperature, design and actual
h. Number of compressors
8. Cooling Coil Data:
a. Identification/number
b. Location
c. Service
d. Manufacturer
e. Air flow, design and actual
f. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual
g. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual
h. Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual
i. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual
j. Water flow, design and actual
k. Water pressure drop, design and actual
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 8
l. Entering water temperature, design and actual
m. Leaving water temperature, design and actual
n. Saturated suction temperature, design and actual
o. Air pressure drop, design and actual
9. Heating Coil Data:
a. Identification/number
b. Location
c. Service
d. Manufacturer
e. Air flow, design and actual
f. Water flow, design and actual
g. Water pressure drop, design and actual
h. Entering water temperature, design and actual
i. Leaving water temperature, design and actual
j. Entering air temperature, design and actual
k. Leaving air temperature, design and actual
l. Air pressure drop, design and actual
10. Fan Coil Data:
a. Manufacturer
b. Identification/number
c. Location
d. Model number
e. Size
f. Air flow, design and actual
g. Water flow, design and actual
h. Water pressure drop, design and actual
i. Entering water temperature, design and actual
j. Leaving water temperature, design and actual
k. Entering air temperature, design and actual
l. Leaving air temperature, design and actual
11. Air Moving Equipment:
a. Location
b. Manufacturer
c. Model number
d. Serial number
e. Arrangement/Class/Discharge
f. Air flow, specified and actual
g. Return air flow, specified and actual
h. Outside air flow, specified and actual
i. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual
j. Inlet pressure
k. Discharge pressure
l. Sheave Make/Size/Bore
m. Number of Belts/Make/Size
n. Fan RPM
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 9
12. Return Air/Outside Air Data:
a. Identification/location
b. Design air flow
c. Actual air flow
d. Design return air flow
e. Actual return air flow
f. Design outside air flow
g. Actual outside air flow
h. Return air temperature
i. Outside air temperature
j. Required mixed air temperature
k. Actual mixed air temperature
l. Design outside/return air ratio
m. Actual outside/return air ratio
13. Exhaust Fan Data:
a. Location
b. Manufacturer
c. Model number
d. Serial number
e. Air flow, specified and actual
f. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual
g. Inlet pressure
h. Discharge pressure
i. Sheave Make/Size/Bore
j. Number of Belts/Make/Size
k. Fan RPM
14. Duct Traverse:
a. System zone/branch
b. Duct size
c. Area
d. Design velocity
e. Design air flow
f. Test velocity
g. Test air flow
h. Duct static pressure
i. Air temperature
j. Air correction factor
15. Duct Leak Test:
a. Description of ductwork under test
b. Duct design operating pressure
c. Duct design test static pressure
d. Duct capacity, air flow
e. Maximum allowable leakage duct capacity times leak factor
f. Test apparatus
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 10
1) Blower
2) Orifice, tube size
3) Orifice size
4) Calibrated
g. Test static pressure
h. Test orifice differential pressure
i. Leakage
16. Air Distribution Test Sheet:
a. Air terminal number
b. Room number/location
c. Terminal type
d. Terminal size
e. Area factor
f. Design velocity
g. Design air flow
h. Test (final) velocity
i. Test (final) air flow
j. Percent of design air flow
17. Snow Melt Test Sheet:
a. Tubing loop lengths
b. Tubing loop design flow rates
c. Tubing loop actual flow rates
d. Manifold balancing settings for each tubing loop
e. Manifold hot water supply pressure
f. Manifold hot water return pressure
END OF SECTION 230593
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 1
SECTION 230700 - HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. HVAC piping insulation, jackets and accessories.
2. HVAC equipment insulation, jackets and accessories.
3. HVAC ductwork insulation, jackets, and accessories.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 099000 - Painting and Coating: Execution requirements for painting insulation
jackets and covering specified by this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International:
1. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and
Plate.
2. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement.
3. ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting
Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement.
4. ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular
Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form.
5. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.
6. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for
Commercial and Industrial Applications.
7. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal
Insulation.
8. ASTM C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials
for Thermal Insulation.
9. ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Glass
Fiber, Duct Lining Material).
10. ASTM C1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for
Thermal Insulation.
11. ASTM C1290 - Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation
Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts.
12. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe,
Schedules 40, 80, and 120.
13. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
14. ASTM E162 - Standard Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using a
Radiant Heat Energy Source.
B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association:
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 2
1. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit product description, thermal characteristics and list of materials and
thickness for each service, and location.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Test pipe insulation for maximum flame spread index of 25 and maximum smoke developed
index of not exceeding 50 in accordance with ASTM E84.
B. Pipe insulation manufactured in accordance with ASTM C585 for inner and outer diameters.
C. Factory fabricated fitting covers manufactured in accordance with ASTM C450.
D. Duct insulation, Coverings, and Linings: Maximum 25/50 flame spread/smoke developed index,
when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, using specimen procedures and mounting
procedures of ASTM E 2231.
E. Perform Work in accordance with codes adopted by authority having jurisdiction.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years documented experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three
years documented experience approved by manufacturer.
1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and
protecting products.
B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's
identification, including product density and thickness.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 3
C. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, by
storing in original wrapping.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.
B. Install insulation only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions are within range
recommended by manufacturer.
C. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B. Furnish one-year manufacturer warranty for man-made fiber.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE INSULATION
A. TYPE P-1: ASTM C547, molded glass fiber pipe insulation.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.23 at 75 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 850 degrees F.
3. Vapor Barrier Jacket: ASTM C1136, Type I, factory applied reinforced foil kraft with
self-sealing adhesive joints.
4. Jacket Temperature Limit: minus 20 to 150 degrees F.
B. TYPE P-5: ASTM C534, Type I, flexible, closed cell elastomeric insulation, tubular.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: Range: Minus 70 to 180 degrees F.
C. TYPE P-7: ASTM C534, Type I, flexible, nonhalogen, closed cell elastomeric insulation,
tubular.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 250 degrees F.
3. Operating Temperature Range: Range: Minus 58 to 250 degrees F.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 4
D. Buried Heating Piping Insulation: Refer to section 232113 for pre-insulated and jacketed
hydronic piping.
2.2 PIPE INSULATION JACKETS
A. PVC Plastic Pipe Jacket:
1. Product Description: ASTM D1785, One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet
material, off-white color.
2. Thickness: 10 mil.
3. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
B. Aluminum Pipe Jacket:
1. ASTM B209.
2. Thickness: 0.025, 0.032, or 0.040 inch thick sheet.
3. Finish: Smooth.
4. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.
5. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.
6. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.
2.3 PIPE INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
B. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation.
C. Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter and smaller: Galvanized steel insulation protection shield. MSS
SP-69, Type 40. Length: Based on pipe size and insulation thickness.
D. Piping 2 inches diameter and larger: Wood insulation saddle, high density insulation. Inserts
length: not less than 6 inches long, matching thickness and contour of adjoining insulation.
E. Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation Pipe Hanger: Polyurethane insert with aluminum single
piece construction with self-adhesive closure. Thickness to match pipe insulation.
F. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.
G. Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement: ASTM
C449/C449M.
H. Insulating Cement: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
I. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation.
2.4 EQUIPMENT INSULATION
A. TYPE E-1: ASTM C553; glass fiber, flexible or semi-rigid, noncombustible.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 5
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.24 at 75 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 450 degrees F.
3. Density: 1.5, 1.65, or 2.3 pound per cubic foot.
B. TYPE E-2: ASTM C612; glass fiber, rigid board, noncombustible with factory applied kraft
aluminum foil jacket.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.24 at 75 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 450 degrees F.
3. Density: 3.0 or 4.2 pound per cubic foot.
4. Jacket Temperature Limit: minus 20 to 150 degrees F.
C. TYPE E-3: ASTM C612; semi-rigid, fibrous glass board noncombustible, end grain adhered to
jacket.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 650 degrees F.
3. Vapor Barrier Jacket: ASTM C1136, Type II, factory applied reinforced foil kraft with
self-sealing adhesive joints.
4. Jacket Temperature Limit: minus 20 to 150 degrees F.
2.5 EQUIPMENT INSULATION JACKETS
A. PVC Plastic Equipment Jacket:
1. Product Description: ASTM D1785, sheet material, off-white color.
2. Minimum Service Temperature: -40degrees F.
3. Maximum Service Temperature: 150degrees F.
4. Water Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96/E96M; 0.02 perms.
5. Thickness: 10 mil.
6. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
B. Aluminum Equipment Jacket:
1. ASTM B209Thickness: 0.025, 0.032, or 0.040 inch thick sheet.
2. Finish: Smooth.
3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.
4. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.
2.6 EQUIPMENT INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
B. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation.
C. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.
D. Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement: ASTM
C449/C449M.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 6
E. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation.
2.7 DUCTWORK INSULATION
A. TYPE D-1: ASTM C1290, Type III, flexible glass fiber, commercial grade with factory applied
reinforced aluminum foil jacket meeting ASTM C1136, Type II.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.25 at 75 degrees F.
2. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 degrees F.
3. Density: 0.75, 1.0, or 1.5 pound per cubic foot.
B. TYPE D-2: ASTM C612, Type IA or IB, rigid glass fiber, with factory applied all service
facing meeting ASTM C1136, Type II.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.24, 0.23, or 0.22 at 75 degrees F.
2. Density: 1.6, 2.25, 3.0, 4.25, or 6.0 pound per cubic foot.
C. TYPE D-4: ASTM C1071, Type I, flexible, glass fiber duct liner with coated air side.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.25 or 0.24 at 75 degrees F.
2. Density: 1.5, 2.0, 2.75, or 3.0 pound per cubic foot.
3. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 degrees F.
4. Maximum Air Velocity: 6,000 feet per minute.
D. TYPE D-5: ASTM C1071, Type II, rigid, glass fiber duct liner with coated air side.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.23 at 75 degrees F.
2. Density: 3.0 pound per cubic foot.
3. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 degrees F.
4. Maximum Air Velocity: 4,000 feet per minute.
2.8 DUCTWORK INSULATION JACKETS
A. Aluminum Duct Jacket:
1. ASTM B209.
2. Thickness: 0.016 inch thick sheet.
3. Finish: Smooth.
4. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.
5. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.
6. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.
2.9 DUCTWORK INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Vapor Retarder Tape:
1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure
sensitive rubber based adhesive.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 7
B. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
C. Adhesive: Waterproof, ASTM E162 fire-retardant type.
D. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, welded with integral head.
E. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.
F. Lagging Adhesive: Fire retardant type with maximum 25/50 flame spread/smoke developed
index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
G. Impale Anchors: Galvanized steel, 12 gage self-adhesive pad.
H. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation.
I. Membrane Adhesives: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify piping, equipment and ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials.
C. Verify surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
3.2 INSTALLATION - PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Piping Exposed to View in Finished Spaces: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible
locations.
B. Continue insulation through penetrations of building assemblies or portions of assemblies
having fire resistance rating of one hour or less. Provide intumescent firestopping when
continuing insulation through assembly. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
C. Piping Systems Conveying Fluids Below Ambient Temperature:
1. Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible
connections, and expansion joints.
2. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied vapor retarder jackets. Secure factory-applied
jackets with pressure sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips.
Secure field-applied jackets with outward clinch expanding staples and seal staple
penetrations with vapor retarder mastic.
3. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness
as adjacent pipe. Finish with PVC fitting covers.
D. Glass Fiber Board Insulation:
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 8
1. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation. Fasten
insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands.
2. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth
surface. On cold equipment, use vapor retarder cement.
3. Cover wire mesh or bands with cement to a thickness to remove surface irregularities.
E. Hot Piping Systems less than 140 degrees F:
1. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied standard jackets. Secure with outward clinch
expanding staples or pressure sensitive adhesive system on standard factory-applied
jacket and butt strips or both.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as
adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
3. Do not insulate unions and flanges at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation at
such locations.
F. Hot Piping Systems greater than 140 degrees F:
1. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied standard jackets. Secure with outward clinch
expanding staples or pressure sensitive adhesive system on standard factory-applied
jacket and butt strips or both.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as
adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
3. Insulate flanges and unions at equipment.
G. Inserts and Shields:
1. Piping 1-1/2 inches Diameter and Smaller: Install galvanized steel shield between pipe
hanger and insulation.
2. Piping 2 inches Diameter and Larger: Install insert between support shield and piping and
under finish jacket.
a. Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of thickness and contour matching
adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated.
b. Insert Material: Compression resistant insulating material suitable for planned
temperature range and service.
H. Insulation Terminating Points:
1. Coil Branch Piping 1 inch and Smaller: Terminate hot water piping at union upstream of
the coil control valve.
I. Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation:
1. Push insulation on to piping. Insulation shall not have longitudinal seams.
2. Miter joints at elbows.
3. Seal seams and butt joints with manufacturer’s recommended adhesive.
4. When application requires multiple layers, apply with joints staggered.
5. Insulate fittings and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 9
J. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (less than 10 feet above
finished floor): Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers.
K. Piping Exterior to Building: Provide vapor retarder jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves
with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh
reinforced vapor retarder cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located at 3 or 9
o’clock position on side of horizontal piping with overlap facing down to shed water or on
bottom side of horizontal piping.
L. Buried Piping: Refer to section 232113 for pre-insulated and jacketed hydronic piping.
M. Prepare exposed pipe insulation for finish painting. Refer to Section 099000.
3.3 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT
A. Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate.
B. Exposed Equipment: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
C. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On
cold equipment, use vapor retarder cement.
D. Equipment Containing Fluids 140 degrees F or Less:
1. Do not insulate flanges and unions, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.
2. Install insulation with factory-applied or field applied jackets, with or without vapor
barrier. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive.
3. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
E. Equipment Containing Fluids Over 140 degrees F:
1. Insulate flanges and unions with removable sections and jackets.
2. Install insulation with factory-applied or field applied jackets, with or without vapor
barrier. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive.
3. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
F. Equipment in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces: Finish with PVC jacket and
fitting covers.
G. Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do not cover with insulation.
H. Equipment Requiring Access for Maintenance, Repair, or Cleaning: Install insulation for easy
removal and replacement without damage.
I. Prepare equipment insulation for finish painting. Refer to Section 099000.
3.4 INSTALLATION - DUCTWORK SYSTEMS
A. Duct dimensions indicated on Drawings are sheet metal dimensions.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 10
B. Insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature:
1. Provide insulation with vapor retarder jackets.
2. Finish with tape and vapor retarder jacket.
3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations.
4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible
connections, and expansion joints.
C. External Glass Fiber Duct Insulation:
1. Secure insulation with vapor retarder with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor retarder
adhesive or tape to match jacket.
2. Secure insulation without vapor retarder with staples, tape, or wires.
3. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners
where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift ductwork off trapeze hangers and insert spacers.
4. Seal vapor retarder penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor retarder adhesive.
5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation
without disturbing wrapping.
D. Duct and Plenum Liner:
1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage.
2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Comply with SMACNA Standards for
spacing.
3. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints.
4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive.
5. Cut insulation for tight overlapped corner joints. Support top pieces of liner at edges with
side pieces.
E. Prepare exposed duct insulation for finish painting. Refer to Section 099000.
3.5 SCHEDULES
A. Cooling Services Piping Insulation Schedule:
1. Refrigerant Suction:
a. Type: P-5 or P-7.
b. Thickness: 1.0 inch
B. Heating Services Piping Insulation Schedule:
1. Heating Water Supply and Return, 105 to 140 degrees F:
a. Type: P-1.
b. Thickness:
1) Pipe Size 1-1/4 Inches and Smaller: 1.0 inch
2) Pipe Size 1-1/2 and Larger: 1.5 inch
2. Heating Water Supply and Return, 141 to 200 degrees F:
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 11
a. Type: P-1.
b. Thickness:
1) Pipe Size 1-1/4 Inches and Smaller: 1.5 inch
2) Pipe Size 1-1/2 Inches and Larger: 2.0 inches
3. Combustion Air Piping:
a. Type: P-5 or P-7.
b. Thickness:
1) Pipe Size 1-1/2 Inches and Larger: 2.0 inches
C. Equipment Insulation Schedule:
1. Air Separators:
a. Type: E-1, E-2, or E-3.
b. Thickness: 1.5 inches
D. Ductwork Insulation Schedule:
1. Outside Air Intake Ducts and Outside Air Plenum:
a. Type: Rectangular duct D-2
b. Type: Exposed round spiral duct D-5
c. Thickness: 2.0 inch
2. Supply Ducts - Internally Insulated:
a. Type: D-4 for other than exposed round spiral duct.
b. Type: D-5 for exposed round spiral duct.
c. Thickness: 1.0 inch
3. Rectangular Return Ducts - Internally Insulated:
a. Type: D-4.
b. Thickness: 1.0 inch
4. Supply Ducts - Externally Insulated, Installed Thickness:
a. Type: D-1 or D-2.
b. Thickness: 1.5 inches
5. Return Ducts - Externally Insulated, Installed Thickness:
a. Type: D-1 or D-2.
b. Thickness: 1.5 inches
6. Duct Coils:
a. Type: D-1.
b. Thickness: 1.5 inches
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 12
7. Exhaust Ducts Within 10 feet of Exterior Openings, Installed Thickness:
a. Type: D-1 or D-2.
b. Thickness: 2.0 inches
8. Exhaust Ducts and Exhaust Plenum Exposed to Outdoor Air:
a. Type: D-2.
b. Thickness: 2.0 inches
9. Transfer Air Ducts - Internally Insulated:
a. Type: D-4.
b. Thickness: 1.0 inches
END OF SECTION 230700
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 1
SECTION 230900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Thermostats.
2. Time clocks.
3. Control air dampers.
4. Electric damper actuators.
5. Electric damper actuators.
6. Control valves.
7. Electric valve actuators.
8. Economizer control systems.
9. Zone control systems
10. Discharge air temperature controllers
11. Snow melt controller.
12. Carbon monoxide detector and controller
13. Duct-mounted smoke detector.
14. Static pressure controllers
15. Control power transformer
16. Indicator lights
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 230553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Nameplates and
labeling for control panels specified in this Section.
2. Section 230993 - Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls: Sequences of operation
implemented using products specified in this Section.
3. Section 232116 - Hydronic Piping Specialties: Product requirements for thermometer
sockets and gage taps for placement by this Section. Installation requirements for piping
products furnished in this Section.
4. Section 233300 - Air Duct Accessories: Product requirements for duct-mounted
thermometers. Installation requirements for dampers and other duct-mounted products
furnished in this Section.
5. Section 260503 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for electric
connections specified by this Section.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.:
1. AMCA 500-D - Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating.
B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers:
1. ASHRAE 62.1 - Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 2
C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
1. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
2. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
D. ASTM International:
1. ASTM A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and
Pipe Fittings.
2. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
3. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal.
4. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.
5. ASTM B280 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning
and Refrigeration Field Service.
6. ASTM D2737 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Tubing.
E. American Welding Society:
1. AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding.
F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
2. NEMA DC 3 - Residential Controls - Electrical Wall-Mounted Room Thermostats.
G. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code.
2. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
H. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.:
1. UL 1820 - Fire Test of Pneumatic Tubing for Flame and Smoke Characteristics.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination.
B. Coordinate installation of control components in piping systems with work of Section 232116 -
Hydronic Piping Specialties.
C. Coordinate installation of control components in duct systems with work of Section 233300 -
Air Duct Accessories.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for preinstallation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this Section.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 3
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Product Data:
1. Submit description and engineering data for each control system component, including
sizing as applicable.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate operating data, system drawings, wiring diagrams, and written, detailed
operational description of sequences.
2. Coordinate submittals with information requested in Section 230993 - Sequence of
Operations for HVAC Controls.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit installation requirements for each control component.
E. Field Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor-furnished tests and inspections.
F. Qualifications Statements:
1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer and installer.
2. Submit manufacturer's approval of installer.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including panels,
thermostats, and sensors.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit inspection period, cleaning methods, recommended
cleaning materials, and calibration tolerances.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenance
materials.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Control Air Damper Performance: According to AMCA 500-D.
B. Perform Work according to codes adopted by authority having jurisdiction.
C. Maintain one copy of each document on-Site.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 4
1.9 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with
minimum five years' documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum three years'
documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and
protecting products.
B. Inspection: Accept controls on-Site in original factory packaging and inspect for damage.
C. Store materials according to manufacturer's instructions.
1.11 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements:
1. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
2. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for warranties.
B. Furnish one-year manufacturer's warranty for each control-system component and HVAC
instrumentation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 THERMOSTATS
A. Electric Room Thermostats for Zone Control:
1. Comply with NEMA DC 3.
2. Voltage: 24 VAC.
3. Program: 7-day, at least four programmed events per day.
4. Service: 2-stages heat, 2-stages cool.
5. Manufacturer and model: Honeywell model TH6220U2000 or equivalent.
B. Electric Room Thermostats for Cabinet Heater:
1. Comply with NEMA DC 3.
2. Voltage: 24 VAC.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 5
3. Program: 7-day, at least four programmed events per day.
4. Service: 1-stage heat, 1-stage cool.
5. Security: Keypad lockout feature.
6. Manufacturer and model: Honeywell model TH6210U2001 or equivalent.
C. Aquastat:
1. Domestic hot water recirculation pump control: 3/4 inch clip-on line-voltage temperature
switch, 85°F on, 105°F off, Grundfos model 595444 or equivalent.
2. Cabinet heater fan cycling: As provide by cabinet heater manufacturer.
2.2 TIME CLOCKS
A. One channel electronic time switch.
1. Programmable 7-day
2. Auto daylight saving time
3. Battery backup
4. Manual override
5. Relay: SPDT
6. Power Requirements: 24VAC
2.3 CONTROL AIR DAMPERS
A. Frames:
1. Materials: Galvanized steel or extruded aluminum, welded or riveted with corner
reinforcement.
2. Minimum Thickness: 12 gauge.
B. Blades:
1. Material: Galvanized steel or extruded aluminum Rolled carbon steel Stainless steel.
2. Action: Opposed blade.
C. Seals:
1. Blades:
a. Material: Synthetic elastomeric or neoprene.
b. Mechanically attached.
c. Field replaceable.
2. Jambs: Stainless-steel spring.
D. Bearings:
1. Shaft: Oil-impregnated, sintered bronze or graphite-impregnated nylon sleeve, with
thrust washers at bearing.
2. Linkage: Oil-impregnated, sintered bronze or graphite-impregnated nylon.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 6
E. Damper Leakage: Maximum rate of 4 cfm per sq. ft. at 1-inch wg pressure differential.
F. Maximum Pressure Differential: 1-inch wg.
G. Temperature Limits: Minus 40 to 200 degrees F.
2.4 ELECTRIC DAMPER ACTUATORS FOR ECONOMIZERS
A. Operation: Spring return.
B. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250, Type 1.
C. Mounting: Direct.
D. Stroke:
1. Full Stroke: 90 seconds, end to end.
2. Spring Return: 15 seconds, return to normal.
E. Protection: Electronic stall.
F. Electrical Characteristics:
1. Control Input: 2-10 Vdc.
G. Nominal Power: 24 V ac.
H. Torque: Sized for minimum 150 percent of required duty.
I. Duty Cycle: Rated for 65,000 cycles.
J. Alternative Actuator: Honeywell MS3103J1030 Sylk-enabled for use with Honeywell W7220
JADE Economizer Module.
2.5 ELECTRIC DAMPER ACTUATORS FOR FAN COIL FC-1
A. Operation: spring return, two-position.
B. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250, Type 1.
C. Mounting: Direct.
D. Stroke:
1. Full Stroke: 75 or 90 seconds, end to end.
2. Spring Return: 15 seconds, return to normal.
E. Protection: Electronic stall.
F. Nominal Power: 24 V ac.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 7
G. Torque: Sized for minimum 150 percent of required duty.
H. Duty Cycle: Rated for 65,000 cycles.
2.6 CONTROL VALVES FOR HC-1, HC-2, HC-3 AND FC-1
A. Ball Valves:
1. Operation: Mixing valve.
2. Body: Forged brass.
3. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
4. Stem: Blowout proof.
5. O-Rings:
a. Material: EPDM.
b. Minimum Pressure Rating: 600 psig.
6. Fluid Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 250 degrees F.
7. Flow Characteristics:
a. Three-Way Valves: Equal percentage through control port and linear through
bypass port.
8. End Connections:
a. Threaded for three-way valves 2 inches and smaller.
9. Accessories:
a. Auxiliary contacts, adjustable trip for actuator rotation position.
10. sizing:
a. Valves: 1 psi maximum pressure drop at design flow rate.
11. Manufacturer and model: Belimo B311 series or equivalent.
2.7 CONTROL VALVE FOR CH-1
A. Zone Valves:
1. Body: Forged brass.
2. Stem: Stainless steel.
3. O-Rings:
a. Material: EPDM.
b. Minimum Pressure Rating: 300 psig.
4. Fluid Temperature Range: Minus 32 to 212 degrees F.
5. Configuration: 3-way diverting.
6. End Connections:
a. Threaded for three-way valves 2 inches and smaller.
7. Actuator: 2-position, spring to fail open, with manual override lever, 24VAC
8. Accessories:
a. Auxiliary contacts.
9. Sizing:
a. Valves: 1 psi maximum pressure drop at design flow rate.
10. Manufacturer and model: Belimo ZONE315N-10 or equivalent provided with cabinet
heater.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 8
2.8 ELECTRIC VALVE ACTUATORS FOR HC-1, HC-2, HC-3 AND FC-1
A. Description: Fully factory assembled and sized to operate with sufficient reserve power to
provide smooth modulating action or two-position action under every condition.
B. Motor:
1. Type: Permanent-split capacitor or shaded pole.
C. Actuator:
1. Description: Nonhydraulic design for minimum 100,000 full-stroke cycles at rated
torque.
2. Type: Direct coupled.
3. Rating: Not less than twice thrust needed for actual operation of valve.
4. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry.
5. Non-Spring-Return Actuators: Furnish external, manual gear release.
6. Electrical Characteristics:
a. Modulating: 24 V ac; maximum 15 VA.
b. Control Signal: Floating point.
7. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to 120 degrees F.
8. Run Time: 90 seconds.
9. Accessories: Auxiliary switch, adjustable 0 to 100%.
D. Sizing: Size for torque required for valve closing at maximum pump differential pressure,
regardless of water loop system pressures.
E. Manufacturer and model: Belimo LRB24-3-S or equivalent.
2.9 ECONOMIZER CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Control Module: Digital controller for modulation of outdoor air and return air dampers based
on outdoor air temperature and mixed air temperature, with LCD screen and keypad user
interface, and LED indicators for modes of operation.
B. Actuator Control: Communication bus or 2-10Vdc output.
C. Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor: 20k ohm NTC thermistor.
D. Mixed Air Temperature Sensor: : 20k ohm NTC thermistor.
E. Manufacturer and Model: Honeywell W7720 module, C7250A mixed air sensor, C7250A
outdoor air sensor, or equivalents.
2.10 ZONE CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Description: Digital control system for up to 32 zones. Controls furnace with two-stages of heat
and variable speed blower, condensing unit with two stages of cooling, and zone dampers based
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 9
on zone thermostats. Senses outdoor air temperature, and discharge air temperature. System
shall provide control functions described in Section 230993.
B. Manufacturer and model: Honeywell HZ432 controller, TAZ-4 additional zones panels (as
needed), ARD zone dampers, MARD bypass damper, SPC static pressure control, C7735A1000
discharge air temperature sensor, C7089U1006 outdoor air sensor, AT140A1042 or
AT175A1008 control power transformer, or equivalents.
2.11 DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
A. Description: Electronic stand-alone temperature controller in NEMA 1 enclosure.
B. Functions: Internal Time Clock Scheduler, floating point output, PI and PID control.
C. User interface: LCD screen and keypad.
D. Input: 1097 ohm PTC.
E. Output: Two SPDT relay outputs for use as floating point control.
F. Manufacturer and model: Honeywell T775B2016.
2.12 SNOW MELTING CONTROLLER
A. Tekmar model 670 with model 090 or 094 snow/ice sensor, model 070 outdoor air temperature
sensor, and model 082 boiler supply water temperature (SWS).
2.13 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTOR AND CONTROLLER
A. Description: Dual-level detectors, using solid-state sensors with three-year minimum life, fan
relay, alarm relay, and alarm buzzer.
B. Temperature Range: 0 to 125 degrees F.
C. Coverage area: 5000 sqft.
D. Calibrated Setting:
1. Fan relay: 25, 35, 50, or 100ppm.
2. Alarm relay: 50, 100, 150, or 200ppm.
E. Relays:
1. Fan relay 5A, 240VAC, pilot duty,SPDT.
2. Alarm relay: 0.5A 120VAC, selectable N.O. or N.C.
F. Power requirements: 12-24Vac or 12-32Vdc.
G. Manufacturer and model: Macurco CM-6 or equivalent.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 10
2.14 DUCT-MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTOR
A. Comply with NFPA 72.
B. Type: Photoelectric.
C. Furnish four-wire detector with separate power supply and signal circuits.
D. Accessories:
1. Auxiliary SPDT relay contact.
2. Key-operated NORMAL-RESET-TEST switch.
3. Duct sampling tubes extending width of duct.
4. Visual indicator for detector actuation.
5. Duct-mounted housing.
2.15 CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMERS
A.
2.16 INDICATOR LIGHTS
A.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE
The following list of materials pertains only to electrical associated with mechanical and
plumbing.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 11
M = Mechanical Contractor C = Controls Contractor E = Electrical Contractor
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation
examination.
B. Verify that air-handling units and ductwork installation has been completed and that air filters
are in place before installing sensors in airstreams.
C. Verify locations of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with Drawings before
installation.
D. Verify that building systems to be controlled are ready to operate.
ITEM FURNISHED
BY
SET IN
PLACE BY
LINE
VOLTAGE
WIRING BY
LOW
VOLTAGE
WIRING BY
Thermostats, low voltage C C - C
Thermostats, line voltage C E E -
Junction box and conduit for wall
mounted sensors and thermostats
C C - -
Temperature sensors C C - C
Zone Control Systems C C - C
Time Clocks C C - C
Duct smoke detectors M M E C
Pressure sensors C C - C
Pressure switches C C - C
Control power transformers C C E C
Disconnect switches E E E -
Solid state speed controls M E E -
Damper actuators C C - C
Economizer control systems C C - C
Control valve actuators C C - C
Magnetic motor starters E E E C
Magnetic motor contactors E E E C
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 12
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Thermostats and Other Exposed Control Sensors:
1. Install after locations have been coordinated with other work.
2. Install centerline at 46 inches above floor.
3. Align with light switches.
B. Thermostats:
1. Install freeze-protection thermostats using flanges and element holders.
2. Install outdoor reset thermostats and outdoor sensors indoors, with sensing elements
outdoors with sun shield.
3. Provide separable sockets for liquids and flanges for air bulb elements, as specified in
Section 232116 - Hydronic Piping Specialties.
C. Control Panels:
1. Install control panels adjacent to associated equipment on vibration-free walls or
freestanding supports.
2. Use one cabinet for each system.
3. Install engraved plastic nameplates for instruments and controls inside cabinet and
engraved plastic nameplates on cabinet face, as specified in Section 230553 -
Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
4. Label with appropriate equipment or system designation as specified in Section 230553 -
Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
5. Install HAND-OFF-AUTO switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch
is in HAND position.
D. Install conduit and electrical wiring as specified in Section 260503 - Equipment Wiring
Connections.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for inspecting and testing.
B. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for testing, adjusting,
and balancing.
C. After completion of installation, test and adjust control equipment.
D. Submit data showing set points and final adjustments of controls.
E. Calibration:
1. Check calibration of instruments.
2. Recalibrate instruments out of calibration.
3. Replace defective instruments.
F. Equipment Acceptance:
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 13
1. Adjust, repair, modify, or replace components failing to perform as specified, and rerun
tests.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for demonstration and
training.
B. Demonstrate complete operation of systems, including sequence of operation, equipment
startup, shutdown, routine maintenance, and emergency repair procedures, to Owner's
personnel.
3.6 MAINTENANCE
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenance service.
B. Provide service and maintenance of control system for one year from date of Substantial
Completion.
C. Furnish complete service of controls systems, including callbacks.
D. Repair or replace parts according to manufacturer's operating and maintenance data, using parts
produced by manufacturer of original equipment.
E. Perform Work without removing units from service during normal building occupied hours.
F. Provide emergency callback service at all hours for this maintenance period.
G. Replacement Parts:
1. Maintain adequate stock of parts locally, for replacement or emergency purposes.
2. Ensure personnel availability to fulfill parts service without unreasonable loss of time.
H. Perform Work using personnel under supervision and in direct employ of manufacturer or
original installer.
I. Do not assign or transfer maintenance service to agent or subcontractor without prior written
consent of Owner.
END OF SECTION 230900
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 230993 - 1
SECTION 230993 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes sequence of operation for:
1. Furnaces, condensing units, economizers, and zone control systems.
2. Energy recovery ventilators with hydronic heating coils.
3. Cabinet Heaters.
4. Exhaust fans.
5. Kitchen exhaust and fan coil unit.
6. Gas-fired tubular infrared radiant heaters.
7. Boiler and pumps for building heating.
8. Boiler and pumps for snow melt.
9. Ductless mini split system.
10. Water heaters with hot water recirculation pump.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 230900 - Instrumentation and Control for HVAC: For equipment, devices, and
system components to implement sequences of operation.
2. Section 230923 - Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC: For equipment, devices,
system components, and software to implement sequences of operation.
3. Section 230953 - Pneumatic and Electric Control System for HVAC: For equipment,
devices, and system components to implement sequences of operation.
4. Section 255000 - Integrated Automation Facility Controls: For equipment, devices,
system components, and software to implement sequences of operation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate mechanical system controlled and control system components.
1. Label with settings, adjustable range of control and limits. Submit written description of
control sequence.
2. Submit flow diagrams for each control system, graphically depicting control logic.
3. Submit draft copies of graphic displays indicating mechanical system components,
control system components, and controlled function status and value.
4. Coordinate submittals with information requested in Section 230900.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 230993 - 2
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and set points of controls,
including changes to sequences made after submission of shop drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FURNACES, CONDENSING UNITS, ECONOMIZERS, AND ZONE CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. System consists of:
1. Two-stage gas-fired furnace to provide air circulation and heat.
2. Direct expansion cooling coil and two-stage condensing unit to provide cooling.
3. Outdoor air economizer to provide free cooling.
4. Digital zone control system to provide temperature control for multiple zones on each
furnace system.
5. Programmable space thermostats located in each zone.
6. Motorized zone dampers.
7. Motorized bypass damper.
8. Discharge air temperature sensor.
9. Outdoor air temperature sensor.
10. Discharge air static pressure control.
B. Control sequences:
1. Zone thermostats shall be programmable, shall control zone level heating and cooling to
maintain current space temperature setpoint, and shall control two stages of heating and
two stages of cooling.
2. Zone thermostats indicate to zone control system whether heating or cooling is required
at zones.
3. Zone control system shall run furnace blower, enable first and second stages of heating,
enable first and second stages of cooling, and cycle blower based on number of zones
calling for heating or cooling.
4. Stand-alone discharge air static pressure control and modulating power open/power close
bypass damper shall allow bypass air from supply to return when discharge air pressure
rises to setpoint.
5. Economizer control module shall modulate return air and outdoor air dampers to provide
free cooling when outdoor air temperature is suitable and cooling is called for by zone
control system. First and second stage cooling relay outputs from zone control system
shall be wired to economizer control module. First and second stage cooling relay outputs
from economizer control module shall be wired to condensing unit.
3.2 ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATORS AND HYDRONIC HEATING COILS
A. System consists of:
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 230993 - 3
1. Energy recovery ventilators ERV-1, ERV-2, and ERV-3 with plate-type heat exchanger
providing sensible and latent heat transfer between outdoor air and exhaust air streams.
2. Hydronic heating coils HC-1, HC-2, and HC-3.
3. Modulating floating point control valves and discharge air temperature controllers with
programmable time schedule for occupied/unoccupied modes.
B. Control sequences:
1. Unoccupied mode:
a. ERV blowers shall be off.
b. Heating coil control valve shall be closed.
2. Occupied mode:
a. ERV blowers shall run.
b. Heating coil control valve shall be modulated by floating point discharge air
temperature controller to hold discharge air temperature at 68°F. Controller shall
utilize a PI control loop or PID control loop to hold air temperature at setpoint.
Control shall not be on/off control with setpoint plus offset. Control valve auxiliary
switch shall close when valve is greater than 5% open thereby enabling boiler BL-
2 to operate.
3.3 CABINET HEATERS
A. A wall-mounted electric room thermostat, set at 55 degrees F, shall maintain the space
temperature by cycling a two-position hot water zone control valve. The fan motor shall be
cycled by an aqua-stat mounted on the hot water return piping inside the cabinet. The control
valve shall include an auxiliary switch to enable boiler and pump operation upon opening the
control valve.
3.4 EXHAUST FANS
A. Fan EF-1 in the apparatus bays shall be controlled by a carbon monoxide sensor and a timer
switch. If carbon monoxide levels rise to the setpoint of the detector, the fan shall run until the
level drops to below the setpoint minus the dead-band. The fan may also be run by setting the
timer switch for the desired run time.
B. Fan EF-2 in the apparatus bays shall run continuously to provide code required air exchange.
3.5 KITCHEN EXHAUST AND FAN COIL UNIT
A. System consists of:
1. Range hood fan EF-3.
2. Makeup air fan coil FC-1.
3. Modulating floating point hot water control valve on FC-1 coil.
4. Discharge air temperature controller for floating point control.
5. Outside air damper and spring return to close actuator.
6. Wall mounted timer switch.
B. Control sequences:
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 230993 - 4
1. The fan EF-3 for the kitchen range hood and kitchen makeup air fan coil FC-1 shall be
controlled by a wall mounted timer switch.
2. When the switch is put in the ON position, EF-3 and the supply fan at FC-1 shall
immediately start and the boiler BL-2 shall be enabled to fire.
3. The heating coil control valve position shall be modulated by the floating point discharge
air temperature controller to maintain the air temperature at 68°F.
4. The outside air damper shall open slowly and require 75 seconds to fully open.
5. When the wall switch is put in the OFF position, EF-3 and FC-1 shall cease operation and
the outside air damper shall close.
6. When FC-1 stops, the control valve shall remain in its current position.
3.6 GAS-FIRED TUBULAR INFRARED RADIANT HEATERS
A. The heaters shall be controlled by wall mounted non-programmable heating thermostats.
3.7 BOILER AND PUMPS FOR BUILDING HEATING
A. System consists of:
1. Boiler BL-2.
2. Pumps PC-3 and PC-4.
B. Control sequences:
1. An emergency power off switch shall be installed just inside the door of the mechanical
room by the electrical contractor. The switch shall interrupt control power to the boiler.
2. PC-3 and PC-4 shall not run simultaneously. They shall automatically alternate after each
start and stop. A switch shall be provided to select either automatic alternating, PC-3, or
PC-4. If a pump has failed, the switch shall be used to manually select the other pump to
be enabled to run when called for.
3. Control valves at heating coils HC-1, HC-2, HC-3 and CH-1 shall include auxiliary
switches. Fan coil FC-1 shall include a relay contact that closes when the fan runs. When
an auxiliary switch closes or the contact at FC-1 closes, and the outdoor air temperature is
below the boiler lockout temperature, one of the pumps shall run.
4. The boiler shall be enabled to fire when a pump is running and when the outdoor
temperature is below 65°F. When the boiler is enabled to fire, firing shall be modulated
by the factory installed control system based on hot water supply temperature (THWS) and
outdoor air temperature (TOA). THWS shall vary linearly on an outdoor air reset schedule
such that at TOA = 65°F, THWS = 120°, and at TOA < 0°F, THWS = 160°F.
5. When the outdoor air temperature rises to above 65°F or no control valve auxiliary
switches are closed, the boiler shall not fire and the pumps shall not run.
3.8 BOILER AND PUMPS FOR SNOW MELT
A. System consists of:
1. Boiler BL-1.
2. Boiler loop pump PC-1.
3. Slab tubing circulation pump PC-2.
4. Snow melt controller SC-1 including outdoor air temperature sensor and slab
temperature/moisture sensor.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 230993 - 5
B. Control sequences:
1. An emergency power off switch shall be installed just inside the door of the mechanical
room by the electrical contractor. The switch shall interrupt control power to the boiler.
2. The system pump, PC-2, shall operate continuously when heating the slab during melting
or idling operation.
3. The boiler pump, PC-1, shall be controlled by BL-1 to cycle on and off together with the
boiler, BL-1.
4. The slab temperature shall be controlled by modulating the boiler firing rate and cycling
the boiler on and off.
5. The slab temperature to be maintained shall be determined by the melting/idling setpoint
and by the sensed outdoor temperature.
6. Slab protection shall limit the temperature difference between the boiler supply and slab
to no more than 25°F.
7. The system shall not operate when the outdoor temperature is above 40°F, or when the
slab temperature is above 50°F and no precipitation is detected on the slab sensor.
8. Idling operation shall maintain the slab temperature at 34°F.
9. Melting operation shall maintain the slab temperature at 38°F.
10. When slab is up to temperature, boiler HWS setpoint shall be no greater than 135°F and
shall modulate as required to maintain slab temperature setpoint.
3.9 DUCTLESS MINI SPLIT SYSTEM
A. The system shall be controlled by a wired wall mounted thermostat to maintain the space
temperature at setpoint.
3.10 HOT WATER RECIRCULATION PUMP
A. Hot water recirculation pump CP-1 shall be controlled by an aquastat on the return piping. The
pump shall start when the pipe temperature drops to 85°F and stop when the pipe temperature
rises to 105°F.
END OF SECTION 230993
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 1
SECTION 231123 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Natural gas piping above grade.
2. Unions and flanges.
3. Valves.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 083113 - Access Doors and Frames: Access doors for concealed valves and
accessories.
2. Section 099000 - Painting and Coating: Product requirements for painting for placement
by this section.
3. Section 230529 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product
requirements for pipe hangers and supports [and firestopping] for placement by this
section.
4. Section 230553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product requirements
for valve and pipe identification for placement by this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute:
1. ANSI Z21.15 - Manually Operated Gas Valves for Appliances, Appliance Connector
Valves and Hose End Valves.
B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
1. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.
2. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes.
3. ASME B16.33 - Manually Operated Metallic Gas Valves for Use in Gas Piping Systems
Up to 125 psig (sizes 1/2 - 2).
4. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.
5. ASME Section IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Welding and Brazing
Qualifications.
C. ASTM International:
1. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-
Coated, Welded and Seamless.
2. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon
Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service.
3. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 2
4. ASTM B280 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning
and Refrigeration Field Service.
5. ASTM B749 - Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate
Products.
6. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.
D. American Welding Society:
1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
E. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry:
1. MSS SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer.
2. MSS SP 67 - Butterfly Valves.
3. MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.
4. MSS SP 78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.
5. MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.
6. MSS SP 110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared
Ends.
F. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code.
G. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1. UL 842 - Valves for Flammable Fluids.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide compatible system
components and joints. Use non-conducting dielectric connections when joining dissimilar
metals in systems.
B. Provide flanges, unions, or couplings at locations requiring servicing. Use unions, flanges, or
couplings downstream of valves and at equipment connections. Do not use direct welded or
threaded connections to valves, equipment.
C. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP 58,
MSS SP 69, and MSS SP 89.
D. Use ball, valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data:
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 3
1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. Submit manufacturers
catalog information.
2. Valves: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for each
service.
C. Test Reports: Indicate results of piping system pressure test.
D. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification
within previous 12 months.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves, piping system, and system
components.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform natural gas Work in accordance with NFPA 54.
B. Perform work in accordance with codes adopted by authority having jurisdiction.
C. Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.9 code for installation of piping systems and
ASME Section IX for welding materials and procedures.
D. Furnish shutoff valves complying with ASME B16.33 or ANSI Z21.15.
E. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years' documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years'
documented experience.
1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 4
B. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
C. Protect piping and fittings from soil and debris with temporary end caps and closures. Maintain
in place until installation. Furnish temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
B. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.
1.11 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.12 COORDINATION
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination.
1.13 WARRANTY
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B. Furnish one-year manufacturer's warranty for valves excluding packing.
1.14 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M forged steel welding
type.
2. Joints: Threaded for pipe 2 inch and smaller; welded for pipe 2-1/2 inches and larger.
2.2 UNIONS AND FLANGES
A. Unions for Pipe 2 inches and Smaller:
1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150, malleable iron, threaded.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 5
2. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder
end, water impervious isolation barrier.
2.3 BALL VALVES
A. 1/4 inch to 1 inch: MSS SP 110, Class 125, two piece, threaded ends, bronze body, chrome
plated bronze ball, reinforced teflon seats, blow-out proof stem, lever handle, UL 842 listed for
flammable liquids and LPG, full port.
B. 1-1/4 inch to 3 inch: MSS SP 110, Class 125, two piece, threaded ends, bronze body, chrome
plated bronze ball, reinforced teflon seats, blow-out proof stem, lever handle, UL 842 listed for
flammable liquids and LPG, conventional port.
2.4 SOLENOID VALVES
A. UL 429, direct acting 2-way normally closed, aluminum body, stainless steel and non-metallic
internal components, plugged upstream and downstream 1/8” NPT taps, standard 24VAC coil
with conduit hub, ASCO 8040 series or equivalent.
2.5 NATURAL GAS PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. Product Description: Spring loaded, general purpose, self-operating service regulator including
internal relief type diaphragm assembly and vent valve. Diaphragm case can be rotated 360
degrees in relation to body.
1. Comply with ANSI Z21.80.
2. Temperatures: minus 20 degrees F to 150 degrees F.
3. Body: Aluminum.
4. Disk, diaphragm, and O-ring: Nitrile or equivalent.
5. Maximum inlet pressure: 2 psig.
6. Minimum inlet pressure: 1 psig
7. Regulated pressure: 7 to 11 inches w.c.
8. Furnish sizes 2 inches and smaller with threaded ends.
9. Furnish vent limiters if acceptable to valve manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 6
B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.3 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Install natural gas piping in accordance with NFPA 54.
B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient.
D. Where required, bend pipe with pipe bending tools in accordance with procedures intended for
that purpose.
E. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space.
F. Size and install gas piping to provide sufficient gas to supply maximum appliance demand at
pressure higher than appliance minimum inlet pressure.
G. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
H. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected
equipment.
I. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. Refer to Section 230529.
J. Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating
sleeves and piping. Refer to Section 230529.
K. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access
doors with Section 083113.
L. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility company.
M. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not pre-finished, ready for finish painting. Refer
to Section 099000.
N. Install identification on piping systems. Refer to Section 230553.
O. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
P. Install medium pressure gas pressure regulator with tee fitting and sediment trap between
regulator and upstream shutoff valve. Cap or plug one opening of tee fitting.
Q. Install medium pressure gas pressure regulator with tee fitting not less than 10 pipe diameters
down stream of regulator. Cap or plug nipple on one opening of tee fitting pointing down to
serve as sediment trap.
R. Install vent piping from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in weatherproof
hood. Protect vent against entry of insects and foreign material.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 7
1. Minimum Vent Size: Connection size at regulator vent connection.
2. Run individual vent line from each relief device, independent of breather vents.
3. If, per valve manufacturer, gas pressure reducing valves may be fitted with vent limiter in
lieu of piping vent to outdoors, provide and install limiters.
S. Breather vents may be manifolded together with piping sized for combined appliance vent
requirements.
T. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing
sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system.
U. Provide new gas service. Gas service distribution piping to have pressure of 2 inch wg upstream
of gas pressure regulators and 7” w.c. to gas-fired appliance.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements and 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements:
Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Where gas appliance will be damaged by test pressure, disconnect appliance and cap piping
during pressure test. Reconnect appliance after pressure test and leak test connection.
C. Where gas appliance is designed for operating pressures equal to or greater than piping test
pressure, provide gas valve to isolate appliance or equipment from gas test pressure.
D. Pressure test natural gas piping in accordance with NFPA 54.
E. When pressure tests do not meet specified requirements, remove defective work, replace and
retest.
F. Immediately after gas is applied to a new system, or a system has been restored after gas service
interruption, check pipe for leakage.
1. Where leakage is detected, shut off gas supply until necessary repairs are complete.
G. Do not place appliances in service until leak testing and repairs are complete.
END OF SECTION 231123
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - 1
SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Heating water and glycol piping, buried
2. Heating water and glycol piping, above ground
3. Snow melt glycol tubing, embedded in slab
4. Snow melt glycol piping, above ground
5. Equipment drains and over flows
6. Flue and combustion air piping
7. Unions and flanges
8. Valves.
9. Bedding and cover materials
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 083113 - Access Doors and Frames: Product requirements for access doors for
placement by this section.
2. Section 099000 - Painting and Coating: Product requirements Painting for placement by
this section.
3. Section 230529 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product
requirements for pipe hangers and supports, sleeves, and firestopping for placement by
this section.
4. Section 230553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product requirements
for pipe identification for placement by this section.
5. Section 230700 - HVAC Insulation: Product requirements for Piping Insulation for
placement by this section.
6. Section 232116 - Hydronic Piping Specialties: Product and execution requirements for
piping specialties used in heating and cooling piping systems.
7. Section 232123 - Hydronic Pumps: Product and execution requirements for pumps used
in heating and cooling piping systems.
8. Section 232500 - HVAC Water Treatment: Product and execution requirements for
cleaning and chemical treatment of heating and cooling piping systems.
9. Section 310513 - Soils for Earthwork: Soils for backfill in trenches.
10. Section 310516 - Aggregates for Earthwork: Aggregate for backfill in trenches.
11. Section 312316 - Excavation: Product and execution requirements for excavation and
backfill required by this section.
12. Section 312317 - Trenching: Execution requirements for trenching required by this
section.
13. Section 312323 - Fill: Execution requirements for backfilling required by this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
1. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - 2
2. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping.
3. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.
4. ASME Section IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Welding and Brazing
Qualifications.
B. ASTM International:
1. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon
Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service.
2. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal.
3. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.
4. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe,
Schedules 40, 80, and 120.
5. ASTM D2241 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR)
Based on Controlled Inside Diameter.
6. ASTM D2464 - Standard Specification for Threaded Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
7. ASTM D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Schedule 40.
8. ASTM D2467 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Schedule 80.
9. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC) Plastic Piping Systems.
10. ASTM D2846/D2846M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems.
11. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings.
12. ASTM F437 - Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
13. ASTM F438 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.
14. ASTM F439 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
15. ASTM F441/F441M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80.
16. ASTM F493 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
17. ASTM F876 - Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing.
18. ASTM F877 - Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot-
and Cold-Water Distribution Systems.
C. American Welding Society:
1. AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding.
2. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
D. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry:
1. MSS SP 71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.
2. MSS SP 80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.
3. MSS SP 110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared
Ends.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - 3
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide compatible system
components and joints. Use non-conducting dielectric connections whenever jointing dissimilar
metals in open systems.
B. Provide flanges, union, and couplings at locations requiring servicing. Use unions, flanges, and
couplings downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. Do not use direct
welded or threaded connections to valves, equipment or other apparatus.
C. Use ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.
D. Use spring loaded check valves on discharge of hot water pumps.
E. Use 3/4 inch ball valves with cap for drains at main shut-off valves, low points of piping, bases
of vertical risers, and at equipment.
F. Flexible Connectors: Use at or near pumps where piping configuration does not absorb
vibration.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data:
1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. Submit manufacturers
catalog information.
2. Valves: Submit manufacturer's catalog information with valve data and ratings for each
service.
C. Test Reports: Indicate results of hydronic piping system pressure test.
D. Welders' Certificate: Include welder’s certification of compliance with ASME Section IX or
AWS D1.1.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves, equipment and accessories.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for installation and changing
components, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.1 and ASME B31.9 code for installation of
piping systems and ASME Section IX for welding materials and procedures.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - 4
B. Perform Work in accordance with codes adopted by authority having jurisdiction.
C. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years' documented experience.
B. Fabricator or Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum
three years' documented experience.
1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until
installation.
D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing
sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system.
1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
B. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.
1.11 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.12 COORDINATION
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination.
B. Coordinate trenching, excavating, bedding, and backfilling of buried piping systems with
requirements of Civil Specifications
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - 5
1.13 WARRANTY
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B. Furnish one-year manufacturer's warranty for valves excluding packing.
1.14 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HEATING WATER AND GLYCOL PIPING, ABOVE GROUND
A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, drawn.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.22 solder wrought copper.
2. Tee Connections: Mechanically extracted collars with notched and dimpled branch tube.
3. Joints: Solder, lead free, ASTM B32, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver, with melting
range 430 to 535 degrees F.
2.2 SNOW MELT GLYCOL TUBING, EMBEDDED IN SLAB
A. Tubing: ASTM F876 and ASTM F877 PEX crosslinked polyethylene tubing with polymer
oxygen diffusion barrier and polyethylene layer over oxygen diffusion barrier for protection,
rated for 180°F at 100 psi; Wirsbo hePEX or equivalent.
2.3 SNOW MELT GLYCOL TUBING, BURIED
A. ASTM F876, F877, and F1960; hePEX tube with oxygen diffuser barrier, pre-insulated with 2
inch thick foam insulation, covered by corrugated, watertight, HDPE jacket designed for direct
burial, with EPDM rubber end caps; Wirsbo Ecoflex Thermal Single or equivalent.
2.4 SNOW MELT GLYCOL PIPING, ABOVE GROUND
A. Polyethylene: ASTM F876, ASTM E84, and ASTM E119 straight lengths of crosslinked
polyethylene PEX-a with oxygen diffusion barrier and polyethylene layer over oxygen diffusion
barrier for protection, 100 psig operating pressure at 180 degrees, and F25 FS and 50SD plenum
listing; Wirsbo hePEX or equivalent.
1. Fittings: Engineered polymer or brass with reinforcing rings; Wirsbo ProPEX or
equivalent.
B. Polypropylene Pipe: ASTM F2389, SDR-11, Aquatherm Blue MF Pipe.
1. Fittings: Aquatherm polypropylene.
2. Joints: Heat fused per manufacturer’s instructions.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - 6
C. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, drawn.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.22 solder wrought copper.
2. Joints: Solder, lead free, ASTM B32, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver, with melting
range 430 to 535 degrees F.
2.5 EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS
A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40, or ASTM D2241, SDR 21 or 26, polyvinyl chloride
(PVC) material.
1. Fittings: ASTM D2466, Schedule 40, PVC and ASTM D2464 PVC, threaded.
2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.
2.6 FLUE AND COMBUSTION AIR PIPING
A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material.
1. Fittings: ASTM D2466, Schedule 40, PVC.
2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement. Prime joints with
a contrasting color.
B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785, Schedule 80, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material.
1. Fittings: ASTM D2467, Schedule 80, PVC and ASTM D2464 PVC, threaded.
2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement. Prime joints with
a contrasting color.
C. CPVC Pipe: ASTM F441/F441M, Schedule 40, chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC)
material.
1. Fittings: ASTM F438, CPVC, Schedule 40, socket type.
2. Joints: ASTM D2846/D2846M, solvent weld with ASTM F493 solvent cement. Prime
joints with a contrasting color.
D. CPVC Pipe: ASTM F441/F441M, Schedule 80, chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC)
material.
1. Fittings: ASTM F439, CPVC, Schedule 80, socket type. And ASTM F437, CPVC,
Schedule 80, threaded.
2. Joints: ASTM D2846/D2846M, solvent weld with ASTM F493 solvent cement. Prime
joints with a contrasting color.
2.7 UNIONS AND FLANGES
A. Unions for Pipe 2 inches and Smaller:
1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150, malleable iron, threaded.
2. Copper Piping: Class 150, bronze unions with soldered or brazed joints.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - 7
3. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder
end, water impervious isolation barrier.
4. PVC Piping: PVC.
5. CPVC Piping: CPVC.
B. PVC Pipe Materials: For connections to equipment and valves with threaded connections,
furnish solvent-weld socket to screwed joint adapters and unions, or ASTM D2464, Schedule
80, threaded, PVC pipe.
2.8 BALL VALVES
A. 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 110, 400 psi WOG, two piece bronze body, chrome plated brass
ball, full port, teflon seats, blow-out proof stem, solder or threaded ends, lever handle.
B. 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 110, Class 150, bronze, two piece body, chrome plated bronze or
type 316 stainless steel ball, full port, teflon seats, blow-out proof stem, solder or threaded ends,
lever handle.
2.9 CHECK VALVES
A. Spring Loaded Check Valves:
1. 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 80, Class 250, bronze body, in-line spring lift check, silent
closing, teflon disc, integral seat, solder or threaded ends.
2. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 71, Class 125, wafer style, cast iron body, bronze seat,
center guided bronze disc, stainless steel spring and screws, flanged ends.
2.10 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS
A. Bedding: Sand or pea gravel.
B. Cover: Sand or pea gravel.
C. Soil Backfill from Above Pipe to Finish Grade: Subsoil with no rocks over 6 inches in
diameter, frozen earth or foreign matter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - 8
B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or
caps.
E. After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems. Refer to Section 232500.
3.3 INSTALLATION - BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Verify connection size, location, and invert are as indicated on Drawings.
B. Establish elevations of buried piping with not less than 2 ft of cover.
C. Remove scale and dirt on inside of piping before assembly.
D. Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Civil Specifications.
E. Install heating water piping in accordance with ASME B31.1 and ASME B31.9.
F. Install pipe to elevation.
G. Place bedding material at trench bottom to provide uniform bedding for piping, level bedding
materials in one continuous layer not exceeding 4 inches compacted depth; compact to 95
percent maximum density.
H. Install pipe on prepared bedding.
I. Route pipe in straight line.
J. Install piping specialties in accordance with Section 232116.
K. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints.
L. Install shutoff and drain valves at locations indicated on Drawings in accordance with this
Section.
M. Install trace wire continuous buried 6 inches below finish grade, above pipe line. Refer to
Section 230553.
N. Pipe Cover and Backfilling:
1. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill material to attain required compaction density.
2. After hydrostatic test, evenly backfill entire trench width by hand placing backfill
material and hand tamping in 6 inches compacted layers to 6 inches minimum cover over
top of jacket. Compact to 95 percent maximum density.
3. Evenly and continuously backfill remaining trench depth in uniform layers with backfill
material.
4. Do not use wheeled or tracked vehicles for tamping.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - 9
3.4 INSTALLATION – SNOW MELT TUBING EMBEDDED IN SLAB
A. Install tubing per Wirsbo instructions and per Drawings.
B. Do not embed tubing joints in concrete slab. Purchase tubing in lengths that allow use of
continuous loops without joints other than at manifolds in valve boxes beside slab.
3.5 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Install heating water piping in accordance with ASME B31.1 and ASME B31.9.
B. Route piping parallel to building structure and maintain gradient.
C. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space.
D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
E. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. Refer to Section 230529.
F. Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating
sleeves and piping. Refer to Section 230529.
G. Install pipe identification in accordance with Section 230553.
H. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected
equipment.
I. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access
doors with Section 083113.
J. Slope hydronic piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to
maintain top of pipe aligned.
K. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and
apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welds.
L. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories, ready for finish painting. Refer to
Section 099000.
M. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
N. Insulate piping and equipment; refer to Section 230700.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements and 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements:
Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Test heating water piping system in accordance with ASME B31.9 and ASME B31.1.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - 10
END OF SECTION 232113
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 232116 - 1
SECTION 232116 - HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pressure gages.
2. Pressure gage taps.
3. Thermometers.
4. Thermometer supports.
5. Test plugs.
6. Flexible connectors.
7. Diaphragm-type expansion tanks.
8. Air vents.
9. Air separators.
10. Strainers.
11. Combination pump discharge valves.
12. Relief valves.
13. Snow melt manifolds and accessories
14. Snow melt manifold box
15. Glycol solution
16. Solution feeders
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 232113 - Hydronic Piping: Execution requirements for piping connections to
products specified by this section.
2. Section 232123 - Hydronic Pumps: Execution requirements for piping connections to
products specified by this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
1. ASME B40.1 - Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element.
2. ASME Section VIII - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Pressure Vessels.
B. ASTM International:
1. ASTM E1 - Standard Specification for ASTM Thermometers.
2. ASTM E77 - Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers.
C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1. UL 393 - Indicating Pressure Gauges for Fire-Protection Service.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 232116 - 2
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Flexible Connectors: Provide at or near pumps where piping configuration does not absorb
vibration.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit for manufactured products and assemblies used in this Project.
1. Manufacturer’s data indicating use, operating range, total range, accuracy, and location
for manufactured components.
2. Submit product description, model, dimensions, component sizes, rough-in requirements,
service sizes, and finishes.
3. Submit schedule indicating manufacturer, model number, size, location, rated capacity,
load served, and features for each piping specialty.
4. Submit electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of actual locations of components and
instrumentation,.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for calibrating instruments, installation
instructions, assembly views, servicing requirements, lubrication instruction, and replacement
parts list.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years' documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years'
documented experience approved by manufacturer.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 232116 - 3
B. Accept piping specialties on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for
damage.
C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
D. Protect systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, caps and closures,
completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system until installation.
1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
B. Do not install instruments when areas are under construction, except rough in, taps, supports
and test plugs.
1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements before fabrication.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B. Furnish one-year manufacturer's warranty for piping specialties.
1.12 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Maintenance service.
B. Furnish service and maintenance of glycol fluid and glycol charging components for one years
from Date of Substantial Completion.
1.13 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance materials.
1.14 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
B. Furnish two extra 5 gallon container of inhibited propylene glycol.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 232116 - 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Gage: ASME B40.1, UL 393 with bourdon tube, rotary brass movement, brass socket, front
calibration adjustment, black scale on white background.
1. Case: Steel, Cast aluminum, Fiberglass reinforced polypropylene, Stainless steel or ABS.
2. Bourdon Tube: Phosphor bronze.
3. Dial Size: 3-1/2 inch or 4-1/2 inch diameter.
4. Mid-Scale Accuracy: One percent.
5. Scale: Psi.
2.2 PRESSURE GAGE TAPS
A. Ball Valve: Brass, 1/4 inch NPT for 250 psi.
B. Pulsation Damper: Pressure snubber, brass with 1/4 inch NPT connections.
2.3 STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS
A. Thermometer: ASTM E1, adjustable angle, red appearing mercury, lens front tube, cast
aluminum case with enamel finish, cast aluminum adjustable joint with positive locking device.
1. Size: 9 inch scale.
2. Window: Clear glass or Lexan.
3. Stem: Brass, 3/4 inch NPT, 3-1/2 inch long.
4. Accuracy: ASTM E77 2 percent.
5. Calibration: Degrees F.
2.4 THERMOMETER SUPPORTS
A. Socket: Brass separable sockets for thermometer stems with or without extensions.
2.5 TEST PLUGS
A. 1/4 inch NPT or 1/2 inch NPT brass fitting and cap for receiving 1/8 inch outside diameter
pressure or temperature probe with:
1. Neoprene core for temperatures up to 200 degrees F.
2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Corrugated stainless steel or bronze hose with single layer of stainless steel exterior braiding,
minimum 9 inches long with copper tube ends; for maximum working pressure 300 psig.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 232116 - 5
2.7 DIAPHRAGM-TYPE EXPANSION TANKS
A. Construction: Welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME Section VIII;
supplied with National Board Form U-1, rated for working pressure of 125 psig, with flexible
EPDM diaphragm sealed into tank and welded floor stand.
B. Accessories: Air-charging fitting, tank drain; pre-charge to 10 psig.
A. Size:
1. ET-1 for snow melt system: 5 gallons acceptance volume with initial pressure 10 psig and
maximum pressure 75 psig over temperature range of 0 to 140°F; Taco model CX84-125
or equivalent.
2. ET-2 for building heating system: 4 gallons acceptance volume with initial pressure of 10
psig and maximum pressure of 30 psig over temperature range of 40 to 180°F; Taco
model CX30-125 or equivalent.
2.8 AIR VENTS
A. Manual Type: Short vertical sections of 2 inch diameter pipe to form air chamber, with 1/8 inch
brass needle valve at top of chamber.
B. Float Type:
1. Brass or semi-steel body, copper, polypropylene, or solid non-metallic float, stainless
steel valve and valve seat; suitable for system operating temperature and pressure; with
isolating valve.
C. Washer Type:
1. Brass with hydroscopic fiber discs, vent ports, adjustable cap for manual shut-off, and
integral spring loaded ball check valve.
2.9 AIR SEPARATORS
A. AS-1 In-line Air Separators, 2 inch and larger:
1. Steel vessel for sizes 2 inch and larger, tangential or straight with offset flanged
connections; tested and stamped in accordance with ASME Section VIII; for 125 psig
operating pressure.
2. Manufacturer and model: Taco AC series or ACT series or equivalent, size based on pipe
connection size to match adjacent piping and with pressure drop less than 2 ft. of head.
B. AS-2 In-line Air Separators, 1-1/2 inch and smaller:
1. Tangential flow, automatic air vent, brass housing, 150 psi maximum pressure, 240°F
maximum temperature, with 1/2 inch expansion tank connection.
2. Manufacturer and model: Taco 4900 series or equivalent.
2.10 STRAINERS
A. Size 2 inch and Smaller:
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 232116 - 6
1. Screwed brass or iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with 1/32 inch
stainless steel perforated screen.
2.11 RELIEF VALVES
A. Bronze body, Teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated
capacities ASME certified and labeled.
2.12 SNOW MELT MANIFOLDS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Supply Manifold: Copper, 2 inch with factory installed outlets spaced 4 inches apart and ball
valve and PEX fitting on each outlet, 2 inch copper end cap with drain and vent fitting, 2 inch
ball valve to isolate manifold, and 2 inch adapter for supply main tubing connection; Wirsbo or
equivalent.
B. Return Manifold: Copper, 2 inch with factory installed inlets spaced 4 inches apart and ball
valve, balancing valve, and PEX fitting on each inlet, 2 inch copper end cap with drain and vent
fitting, 2 inch ball valve to isolate manifold, and 2 inch adapter for return main tubing
connection; Wirsbo or equivalent.
2.13 SNOW MELT MANIFOLD BOX
A. Manifold Box: In-ground box with open bottom, reinforced HDPE sidewalls, HDPE removable
cover rated for 300 lb/ft2 load, penta head fasteners for cover; Oldcastle Carson series or
equivalent.
2.14 GLYCOL SOLUTION
A. Building Heating System: Inhibited propylene glycol and water solution, Dowfrost or
equivalent, mixed by volume 40 percent glycol - 60 percent water, suitable for operating
temperatures from -8 degrees F to 219 degrees F.
B. Snow Melt System: Inhibited propylene glycol and water solution, Dowfrost or equivalent,
mixed by volume 40 percent glycol - 60 percent water, suitable for operating temperatures from
-8 degrees F to 219 degrees F.
2.15 SF-1 AND SF-2 SOLUTION FEEDERS
A. Storage/Mixing Tank: UL Listed, plastic semi-transparent tank with volume markings, 17
gallon capacity, 115V fuse-protected 0.7 gpm diaphragm pump, suction hose with inlet strainer
and check valve, diverter valve for air purge and agitation, fluid low level pump switch,
discharge pressure adjustable between 10 and 25 psig, pressure gauge; Axiom Industries
Limited model MF300 or equivalent.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 232116 - 7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - THERMOMETERS AND GAGES
A. Install one pressure gage for each pump, locate taps before strainers and on suction and
discharge of pump; pipe to gage.
B. Install gage taps in piping
C. Install pressure gages with pulsation dampers. Provide ball valve to isolate each gage. Extend
nipples to allow clearance from insulation.
D. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes smaller than
2-1/2 inches for installation of thermometer sockets. Allow clearance from insulation.
E. Install thermometer sockets adjacent to controls systems thermostat, transmitter, or sensor
sockets.
F. Coil and conceal excess capillary on remote element instruments.
G. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest appropriate
scale.
H. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal operating
level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical.
I. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate to zero.
3.2 INSTALLATION - HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Locate test plugs adjacent to thermometers and thermometer sockets adjacent to pressure gages
and pressure gage taps adjacent to pressure gages and pressure gage taps adjacent to control
device sockets and as indicated on Drawings.
B. Where large air quantities accumulate, provide enlarged air collection standpipes.
C. Install manual air vents at system high points.
D. For automatic air vents in ceiling spaces or other concealed locations, install vent tubing to
nearest drain.
E. Provide air separator on suction side of system circulation pump and connect to expansion tank.
F. Provide drain and hose connection with valve on strainer blow down connection.
G. Provide balancing valves on water outlet for the following terminal heating unit types: radiation,
unit heaters, and fan coil units.
H. Feed glycol solution to system through make-up line with pressure regulator, venting system
high points. Set to fill at 12 psig.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 232116 - 8
I. Provide solution feeder system to feed snow melt system. Install isolating and drain valves and
interconnecting piping. Fill with antifreeze and water solution of concentration indicated on
Drawings.
J. Provide solution feeder system to feed building hydronic heating system. Install isolating and
drain valves and interconnecting piping. Fill with antifreeze and water solution of concentration
indicated on Drawings.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements and 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements:
Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Test for strength of glycol and water solution and submit written test results.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.
B. Clean and flush glycol system before adding glycol solution.
3.5 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting installed
construction.
B. Do not install hydronic pressure gauges until after systems are pressure tested.
END OF SECTION 232116
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123 - 1
SECTION 232123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. System lubricated circulators.
2. In-line circulators.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 232113 - Hydronic Piping: Execution requirements for connection to pumps
specified by this section.
2. Section 232116 - Hydronic Piping Specialties: Product and execution requirements for
piping specialties installed in hydronic systems adjacent to pumps.
3. Section 260503 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for electrical
connections to pumps specified by this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1. UL 778 - Motor Operated Water Pumps.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide pumps to operate at system fluid temperatures indicated on Drawings without vapor
binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate
within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit certified pump curves showing performance characteristics with pump
and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. Include electrical
characteristics and connection requirements. Submit also, manufacturer model number,
dimensions, service sizes, and finishes.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123 - 2
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit installation instructions, servicing requirements,
assembly views, lubrication instructions, and replacement parts list.
C. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years' documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years'
documented experience approved by manufacturer.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Protect systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the
work, and isolating parts of completed system.
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B. Furnish two-year manufacturer's warranty for pumps.
1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PC-1 AND PC-2 IN-LINE CIRCULATORS
A. Type: Single stage, close coupled, for 125 psig maximum working pressure.
B. Casing: Cast iron, with flanged pump connections.
C. Impeller: Stainless steel, keyed to shaft.
D. Shaft: Stainless steel.
E. Seal: Tungsten carbide/carbon or tungsten carbide with EPDM rubber bellows or as appropriate
for pumped fluid and temperature range.
F. Performance:
1. Refer to Pump Schedule on Drawings.
G. Electrical Characteristics and Components:
1. Refer to Pump Schedule on Drawings.
2. Wiring Terminations: Furnish terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities,
sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70.
2.2 PC-3 AND PC-4 SYSTEM LUBRICATED CIRCULATORS
A. Type: Horizontal shaft, single stage, direct connected with single speed wet rotor motor for in-
line mounting, for 140 psig maximum working pressure, 230 degrees F maximum water
temperature.
B. Casing: Cast iron or bronze with flanged pump connections.
C. Impeller, Shaft, Rotor: Stainless Steel.
D. Bearings: Metal Impregnated carbon (graphite) and ceramic.
E. Motor: Impedance protected, single speed.
F. Performance:
1. Refer to Pump Schedule on Drawings.
G. Electrical Characteristics and Components:
1. Refer to Pump Schedule on Drawings.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide pumps to operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and
cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent
of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.
B. Install pumps on vibration isolators.
C. Install flexible connectors at or near pumps. Refer to Section 232116.
D. Provide line sized shut-off valve and strainer on pump suction, and line sized soft seat check
valve, balancing valve, and shut-off valve or combination pump discharge valve on pump
discharge. Refer to Section Section 232116.
E. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping adjacent
to pump so no weight is carried on pump casings.
F. Lubricate pumps before start-up.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements and 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements:
Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
END OF SECTION 232123
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 1
SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Refrigerant piping.
2. Unions, flanges, and couplings.
3. Pipe hangers and supports.
4. Refrigerant moisture and liquid indicators.
5. Valves.
6. Refrigerant filter-driers.
7. Refrigerant expansion valves.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 099000 - Painting and Coating: Product requirements for painting for placement
by this section.
2. Section 230529 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product
requirements for pipe hangers and supports, sleeves, [and firestopping] for placement by
this section.
3. Section 230553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product requirements
for pipe identification for placement by this section.
4. Section 230700 - HVAC Insulation: Product requirements for Piping Insulation for
placement by this section.
5. Section 260503 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for electric
connections specified by this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute:
1. ARI 710 - Liquid-Line Driers.
2. ARI 750 - Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion Valves.
B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers:
1. ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
1. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
2. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes.
3. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping.
D. ASTM International:
1. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 2
2. ASTM B280 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning
and Refrigeration Field Service.
E. American Welding Society:
1. AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding.
2. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide compatible system
components and joints. Use non-conducting dielectric connections when joining dissimilar
metals in systems.
B. Provide flanges, unions, or couplings at locations requiring servicing. Use unions, flanges, or
couplings downstream of valves and at equipment connections. Do not use direct welded or
threaded connections to valves or equipment.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of refrigeration piping system, including equipment, critical
dimensions, and sizes.
C. Product Data:
1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories.
2. Refrigerant Specialties: Submit manufacturer's catalog information including capacity,
component sizes, rough-in requirements, and service sizes for the following:
a. Refrigerant moisture and liquid indicators.
b. Refrigerant filter-driers.
c. Refrigerant expansion valves.
D. Test Reports: Indicate results of refrigeration piping system pressure test.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of piping, equipment and refrigerant
accessories.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for installation and changing
components, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 3
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.5 code for installation of refrigerant piping
systems.
B. Perform Work in accordance with codes adopted by authority having jurisdiction.
C. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years' documented experience.
B. Fabricator or Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum
three years' documented experience approved by manufacturer.
1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Dehydrate and charge refrigeration components including piping and receivers, seal prior to
shipment. Maintain seal until connected into system.
C. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until
installation.
E. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing
sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system.
1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
1.11 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 4
1.12 COORDINATION
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination.
1.13 WARRANTY
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
1.14 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REFRIGERANT PIPING
A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B280, drawn.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper.
2. Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy with melting range 1190
to 1480 degrees F.
2.2 COUPLINGS
A. 2 inches and Smaller:
1. Copper Pipe: Bronze, soldered joints.
2.3 REFRIGERANT MOISTURE AND LIQUID INDICATORS
A. Indicators:
1. Port: Single, UL listed.
2. Body: Copper or brass, flared or solder ends.
3. Sight glass: Color-coded paper moisture indicator with removable element cartridge and
plastic cap.
4. Maximum working pressure: 500 psig
5. Maximum working temperature: 200 degrees F.
2.4 REFRIGERANT FILTER-DRIERS
A. Permanent Straight Through Type:
1. ARI 710, UL listed, steel shell with molded desiccant filter core, for maximum working
pressure of 500 psig.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 5
2.5 REFRIGERANT EXPANSION VALVES
A. Provided with direct expansion cooling coils.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.
B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or
caps.
3.3 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Route piping parallel to building structure and maintain gradient.
B. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space.
C. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
D. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. Refer to Section 230529.
E. Install pipe identification in accordance with Section 230553.
F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected
equipment.
G. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.
H. Arrange refrigerant piping to return oil to compressor. Provide traps and loops in piping, and
provide double risers as required. Slope horizontal piping 0.40 percent in direction of flow.
I. Flood refrigerant piping system with nitrogen when brazing.
J. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories, ready for finish painting. Refer to
Section 099000.
K. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 6
L. Insulate piping; refer to Section 230700.
M. Install thermal expansion valve per cooling coil manufacturer’s instructions.
N. Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing.
O. Follow ASHRAE 15 procedures for charging and purging of systems and for disposal of
refrigerant.
P. Install refrigerant piping in accordance with ASME B31.5.
3.4 INSTALLATION - REFRIGERANT SPECIALTIES
A. Refrigerant Liquid Indicators:
1. Install line size liquid indicators in main liquid line downstream of condenser.
B. Filter-Dryers:
1. Install permanent filter-dryer in systems containing hermetic compressors.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements and 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements:
Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5.
C. Pressure test refrigeration system with dry nitrogen to 200 psig. Perform final tests at 27 inches
vacuum and 200 psig using electronic leak detector.
D. Repair leaks.
E. Retest until no leaks are detected.
3.6 SCHEDULES
A. Copper Tube Hanger Spacing:
1. Pipe Size 1/2 Inch:
a. Maximum Hanger Spacing: 5 feet.
b. Hanger Rod Diameter: 3/8 inch.
2. Pipe Size 3/4 Inch:
a. Maximum Hanger Spacing: 5 feet.
b. Hanger Rod Diameter: 3/8 inch.
3. Pipe Size 1 Inch:
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 7
a. Maximum Hanger Spacing: 6 feet.
b. Hanger Rod Diameter: 3/8 inch.
END OF SECTION 232300
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC WATER TREATMENT 232500 - 1
SECTION 232500 - HVAC WATER TREATMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. System cleaner.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 260503 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for electrical
connections specified by this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system schematic, equipment locations, and controls schematics,
electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
C. Product Data: Submit chemical treatment materials, chemicals, and equipment including
electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
D. Manufacturers Field Reports: Indicate start-up of treatment systems when completed and
operating properly. Indicate analysis of system water after cleaning and after treatment.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout products.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment and piping, including
sampling points and location of chemical injectors.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit data on chemical feed pumps including spare parts
lists, procedures, and treatment programs. Include step by step instructions on test procedures
including target concentrations.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC WATER TREATMENT 232500 - 2
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with codes adopted by authority having jurisdiction.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years documented experience with water analysis laboratories and full time
service personnel.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years
documented experience approved by manufacturer.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Maintenance service.
1.11 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM CLEANER
A. Product Description: Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to
remove grease and petroleum products.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC WATER TREATMENT 232500 - 3
B. Biocide ; chlorine release agents including sodium hypochlorite or calcium hypochlorite, or
microbiocides including quaternary ammonia compounds, tributyl tin oxide, methylene bis
(thiocyanate), or isothiazolones.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Operate, fill, start and vent systems prior to cleaning. Use water meter to record capacity in each
system. Place terminal control valves in open position during cleaning.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Concentration:
1. As recommended by manufacturer.
B. Hydronic Systems (snow melt and building heating):
1. Apply heat while circulating, slowly raising temperature to 160 degrees F and maintain
for 12 hours minimum.
2. Remove heat and circulate to 100 degrees F or less; drain systems as quickly as possible
and refill with clean water.
3. Circulate for 6 hours at design temperatures, then drain.
4. Refill with clean water and repeat until system cleaner is removed.
C. Use neutralizer agents on recommendation of system cleaner supplier and acceptance of
Architect/Engineer.
D. Flush glycol filled closed systems with clean water for one hour minimum. Drain completely
and refill.
E. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens.
F. Inspect, remove sludge, and flush low points with clean water after cleaning process is
completed. Include disassembly of components as required.
3.3 CLOSED SYSTEM TREATMENT
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for demonstration and
training.
B. Furnish one hour training course for operating personnel, instruction to include installation,
care, maintenance, testing, and operation of water treatment systems. Arrange course at start up
of systems.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC WATER TREATMENT 232500 - 4
END OF SECTION 232500
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 233100 - 1
SECTION 233100 - HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Duct materials.
2. Glass-fiber ducts.
3. Flexible ducts.
4. Insulated flexible ducts.
5. Single-wall, spiral round ducts.
6. Transverse duct connection system.
7. Ductwork fabrication.
8. Glass-fiber ductwork fabrication.
9. Duct cleaning.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Requirements for concrete curbs as specified in
this Section.
2. Section 099000 - Painting and Coating: Requirements for painting or coating as specified
in this Section.
3. Section 233300 - Air Duct Accessories: Requirements for duct accessories as specified in
this Section.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers:
1. ASHRAE Handbook - Fundamentals.
B. American Welding Society:
1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
2. AWS D1.2 - Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.
3. AWS D9.1 - Sheet Metal Welding Code.
C. ASTM International:
1. ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
2. ASTM A90 - Standard Test Method for Weight [Mass] of Coating on Iron and Steel
Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings.
3. ASTM A240 - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications.
4. ASTM A568 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Structural, and High-
Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 233100 - 2
5. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-
Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
6. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless
Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.
7. ASTM A1008 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,
Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable.
8. ASTM A1011 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
Formability, and Ultra-High Strength.
9. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and
Plate.
10. ASTM C14 - Standard Specification for Nonreinforced Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain,
and Culvert Pipe.
11. ASTM C443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using
Rubber Gaskets.
12. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
D. International Code Council:
1. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC).
2. International Mechanical Code (IMC).
E. NFPA:
1. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
2. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning
Systems.
3. NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
Operations.
F. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association:
1. SMACNA 016 - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
2. SMACNA 1767 - Kitchen Ventilation Systems and Food Service Equipment Guidelines.
3. SMACNA 1884 - Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards.
4. SMACNA 1966 - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
G. UL:
1. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors.
2. UL 181A - Closure Systems for Use With Rigid Air Ducts.
3. UL 1978 - Grease Ducts.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for preinstallation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this Section.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 233100 - 3
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer information for duct connectors.
C. Test and Evaluation Reports: Indicate pressure tests performed, including date, section tested,
test pressure, and leakage rate according to SMACNA 016.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.
B. Project Record Documents:
1. Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings.
2. Record changes in fitting location and type.
3. Show additional fittings used.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work according to SMACNA 1884 and 1966.
B. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B standards.
C. Perform Work according to codes adopted by authority having jurisdiction.
D. Maintain one copy of each standard affecting Work of this Section on Site.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with
minimum three years' documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum three years'
documented experience.
C. Welders: AWS qualified within previous 12 months for employed weld types.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and
protecting products.
B. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for
damage.
C. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 233100 - 4
D. Protection:
1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from
construction operations areas.
2. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions.
1.9 AMBIENT CONDITIONS
A. Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Requirements for ambient condition
control facilities for product storage and installation.
B. Minimum Conditions: Do not install duct sealant when temperatures are less than those
recommended by sealant manufacturer.
C. Subsequent Conditions: Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealant.
1.10 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements:
1. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for warranties.
B. Furnish one-year manufacturer's warranty for ducts.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCTS
A. Performance and Design Criteria:
1. Variation of duct configuration or sizes other than those of equivalent or lower loss
coefficient is not permitted except by written permission of Architect/Engineer.
2. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts according to ASHRAE Handbook
- Fundamentals.
B. Materials:
C. Galvanized-Steel Ducts:
1. Material: ASTM A653 galvanized-steel sheet.
2. Quality: Lock forming.
3. Finish: G60 or G90 zinc coating according to ASTM A90.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 233100 - 5
D. Aluminum Ducts:
1. Material: ASTM B209 aluminum sheet Alloy 3003-H14.
2. Connectors and Bar Stock: Aluminum Alloy 6061-T6 or equivalent strength.
E. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.
F. Hanger Rod:
1. Material: Galvanized steel.
2. Comply with ASTM A36.
3. Type: Threaded both ends, one end or continuously.
2.2 GLASS-FIBER DUCTS
A. Description:
1. Rigid glass fiber with aluminum foil, glass scrim, and kraft or plastic jacket vapor barrier.
2. Comply with UL 181.
3. Thickness: 1 inch.
4. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.23 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg. F at 75 degrees F.
2.3 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Description:
B. Description:
1. UL-labeled black polymer film supported by helical-wound spring steel wire.
2. Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg positive and 0.5-inch wg negative.
3. Maximum Velocity: 4,000 fpm.
4. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 degrees F.
C. Description:
1. UL-labeled multiple layers of aluminum laminate supported by helical-wound spring
steel wire.
2. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch negative.
3. Maximum Velocity: 4,000 fpm.
4. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 degrees F.
D. Description:
1. UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex adhesive supported by
helical-wound spring steel wire.
2. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative.
3. Maximum Velocity: 4,000 fpm.
4. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 degrees F.
E. Description:
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 233100 - 6
1. UL 181, Class 0, interlocking spiral of aluminum foil.
2. Pressure Rating: 8-inch wg positive or negative.
3. Maximum Velocity: 5,000 fpm.
4. Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 432 degrees F.
2.4 INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Description:
1. UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex adhesive supported by
helical-wound spring steel wire.
2. Insulation: Fiberglass.
3. Vapor Barrier Film: PE Aluminized.
4. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative.
5. Maximum Velocity: 4,000 fpm.
6. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 degrees F.
7. Thermal Resistance: 3.0 sq. ft. x h x deg. F/Btu.
****** [OR] ******
B. Description:
1. UL 181, Class 0, interlocking spiral of aluminum foil.
2. Insulation: Fiberglass.
3. Vapor Barrier Film: PE Aluminized.
4. Pressure Rating: 8-inch wg positive or negative.
5. Maximum Velocity: 5,000 fpm.
6. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 250 degrees F.
7. Thermal Resistance: 3.0 sq. ft. x h x deg. F/Btu.
****** [OR] ******
C. Description:
1. UL 181, Class 1, constructed with interior liner of round corrugated steel or aluminum
duct.
2. Insulation: Exterior fiberglass.
3. Vapor Barrier Film: Vinyl.
4. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive or negative.
5. Maximum Velocity: 4,000 fpm.
6. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 degrees F.
7. Thermal Resistance: 3.0 sq. ft. x h x deg. F/Btu.
8. Furnish each flexible duct section with integral clamping devices for connection to round
or oval fittings.
2.5 SINGLE-WALL, SPIRAL ROUND DUCTS
A. Description:
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 233100 - 7
1. UL 181, Class 1, round spiral lockseam duct.
2. Material: Galvanized steel.
B. Minimum Duct Wall Thicknesses:
1. Diameter 2 to 14 Inches 26 gage; 16 to 26 Inches 24 gage; 28 to 36 Inches 22 gage.
C. Minimum Fittings Wall Thicknesses:
1. Diameter 2 to 14 Inches24 gage.16 to 26 Inches 22 gage; 28 to 36 Inches 20 gage.
2.6 TRANSVERSE DUCT CONNECTION SYSTEM
A. Description:
1. Interlocking angle and duct edge connection system with sealant, gasket, cleats, and
corner clips.
2. Rigidity Class Connection: SMACNA "E."
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Rectangular Ducts:
1. According to SMACNA 1966.
2. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for indicated operating pressures.
B. Round Ducts:
1. According to SMACNA 1966.
2. Seams: Longitudinal.
3. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for indicated operating pressures.
C. Tees, Bends, and Elbows:
1. Minimum Radius:
a. 1-1/2 times centerline duct width.
b. If not possible or if rectangular elbows are used, provide airfoil turning vanes.
2. If acoustical lining is indicated, furnish turning vanes of perforated metal with glass-fiber
insulation.
D. Divergence:
1. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees of divergence wherever possible.
2. Upstream of Equipment: Maximum 30 degrees.
3. Downstream of Equipment: Maximum 45 degrees.
E. Welding:
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 233100 - 8
1. Continuously Welded Round and Oval Duct Fittings: Two gages heavier than duct gages
according to SMACNA 1966.
2. Cemented Slip Joints:
a. Minimum 4 inches.
b. Brazed or electric welded.
3. Prime coat welded joints.
F. Takeoffs:
1. Provide standard 45-degree lateral wye takeoffs.
2. If not possible due to space limitations, provide 90-degree conical tee connections.
G. Sealing:
1. Seal joints between duct sections and duct seams with welds, gaskets, mastic adhesives,
mastic plus embedded fabric systems, or tape.
2. Sealants, Mastics, and Tapes: Comply with UL 181A and provide products bearing
appropriate UL 181A markings.
H. Glass-Fiber Ducts:
1. Fabricate according to SMACNA 1884.
2. Tape: 3-inch-wide heat-activated chemical bonding tape.
3. Machine-fabricate glass-fiber ducts and fittings; only minor on-Site adjustments are
permitted.
4. Staples for Duct Joints and Tape:
a. Material: Aluminum.
b. Size: 3 inches wide by 2 mils thick.
5. Glass-fiber ducts shall only be used for boots at ceiling mounted return and exhaust
grilles.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Hangers and Supports:
1. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.
2. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or
galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
3. Strap and Rod Sizes:
a. Comply with SMACNA 1966.
b. Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Ducts: Comply with SMACNA 1884.
4. Trapeze and Riser Supports:
a. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 233100 - 9
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation
examination.
B. Verify sizes of equipment connections before fabricating transitions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation
preparation.
B. Install temporary closures of metal or taped PE on open ductwork to prevent construction dust
from entering ductwork system.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install and seal ducts according to SMACNA 1966.
B. Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Ducts: Comply with SMACNA 1884.
C. Insulated Flexible Duct Fittings:
1. Join each flexible duct section to main trunk duct through sheet metal fittings.
2. Material: Galvanized steel.
3. Equip fittings with factory-installed volume damper having positive locking regulator.
4. Provide insulation guard with fittings installed in lined ductwork.
D. Use crimp joints with or without bead or beaded sleeve couplings for joining round duct sizes 8
inches and smaller.
E. Hanger and Supports:
1. Fabricate and support ducts according to SMACNA 1884 and 1966.
2. Threaded Rods: Provide double nuts and lock washers.
3. Building Attachments:
a. Provide concrete inserts or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction
materials to which hangers are being attached.
b. If possible, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
c. Powder-Actuated Concrete Fasteners:
1) Use only for slabs more than 4 inches thick.
2) Install after concrete is placed and completely cured.
3) Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.
4. Hanger Spacing:
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 233100 - 10
a. Comply with SMACNA 1884 and 1966.
b. Install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches
of each branch intersection.
c. Extend strap supports down both sides of ducts and turn under bottom at least 1
inch.
d. Secure hanger to sides and bottom of ducts with sheet metal screws.
5. Hangers Exposed to View: Provide threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
6. Vertical Ducts:
a. Support with steel angles or channel secured to sides of duct with welds, bolts,
sheet metal screws, or blind rivets.
b. Support at each floor and at maximum intervals of 16 feet.
7. Upper Attachments:
a. Attach to structures.
b. Selection and Sizing: Provide pull-out, tension, and shear capacities as required for
supported loads and building materials.
8. Penetrations:
a. Avoid penetrations of ducts with hanger rods.
b. If unavoidable, provide airtight rubber grommets at penetrations.
F. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.
G. Exhaust Outlet Locations:
1. Minimum Distance from Property Lines: 3 feet.
2. Minimum Distance from Building Openings: 3 feet.
3. Minimum Distance from Outside Air Intakes: 10 feet.
H. Interface with Other Work:
1. Install openings in ductwork as required to accommodate thermometers and controllers.
2. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low-pressure ducts with 5-foot maximum
length of flexible duct held in place with strap or clamp.
3. Connect air outlets and inlets to supply ducts with 5-foot maximum length of flexible
duct; do not use flexible duct to change direction.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for inspecting and testing.
B. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for testing, adjusting,
and balancing.
C. Testing:
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 233100 - 11
3.5 CLEANING
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.
B. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust.
C. To obtain sufficient airflow, clean one half of system completely before proceeding to other
half.
****** [OR] ******
D. Vacuuming:
1. Clean duct systems with high-power vacuum machines.
2. Install access openings into ductwork for cleaning purposes.
E. Protect sensitive equipment with temporary filters or bypass during cleaning.
3.6 ATTACHMENTS
A. Ductwork Material Schedule:
1. Supply - Heating Systems: Steel.
2. Supply - Systems with Cooling Coils: Steel.
3. Return and Relief : Steel.
4. General Exhaust: Steel.
5. Kitchen Hood Exhaust: Steel or stainless steel.
6. Outside Air Intake: Steel.
7. Intake and Exhaust: Steel.
B. Ductwork Pressure Class Schedule:
1. Constant Volume Supply: 1-inch wg, regardless of velocity.
2. Return and Relief: 1/2-inch wg.
3. General Exhaust: 1/2-inch wg.
END OF SECTION 233100
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1
SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Back-draft dampers.
2. Duct access doors.
3. Volume control dampers.
4. Flexible duct connections.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 230900 - Instrumentation and Control for HVAC: Execution and Product
requirements for connection and control of Combination Smoke and Fire Dampers for
placement by this section.
2. Section 233100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings: Requirements for duct construction and
pressure classifications.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.:
1. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters.
B. ASTM International:
1. ASTM E1 - Standard Specification for ASTM Thermometers.
C. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
D. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors:
1. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers and
duct access doors.
C. Product Data: Submit data for shop fabricated assemblies and hardware used.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 2
D. Product Data: Submit for the following. Include where applicable electrical characteristics and
connection requirements.
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Flexible duct connections.
3. Volume control dampers.
4. Duct access doors.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of access doors and dampers.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Dampers tested, rated and labeled in accordance with the latest UL requirements.
B. Damper pressure drop ratings based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with
AMCA 500.
C. Perform Work in accordance with codes adopted by authority having jurisdiction.
D. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years documented experience.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.
C. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and
packaging, with labels clearly indicating manufacturer and material.
D. Storage: Store materials in a dry area indoor, protected from damage.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 3
E. Handling: Handle and lift dampers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Protect
materials and finishes during handling and installation to prevent damage.
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Coordinate Work where appropriate with building control Work.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B. Furnish one year manufacturer warranty for duct accessories.
1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BACK-DRAFT DAMPERS
A. Product Description: Low leakage multi-Blade, back-draft dampers: Parallel-action, gravity-
balanced, Galvanized 16 gage thick steel, or extruded aluminum. Blades, maximum 6 inch
width,, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges. Blades linked together in rattle-free manner with
90-degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin. Furnish dampers with
counterweight adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.
Leakage rating shall comply with 2015 IECC (not greater than 20 cfm/ft2 where not less than 24
inches in either dimension and not greater than 40 cfm/ft2 where less than 24 inches in either
dimension, at 1.0 inch water gauge differential pressure)
2.2 DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible.
B. Fabrication: Rigid and close fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening
locking devices. For insulated ductwork, furnish minimum 1 inch thick insulation with sheet
metal cover.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 4
1. Less than 12 inches square, secure with sash locks.
2. Up to 18 inches Square: Furnish two hinges and two sash locks.
3. Up to 24 x 48 inches: Three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside
handles.
4. Access panels with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.
2.3 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible.
B. Multi-Blade Damper: Low leakage, fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade
sizes 8 x 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized
frame channel with suitable hardware, with leakage rating complying with 2015 IECC (< 4 cfm
/ft2 at 1.0 inch w.c. differential); Model CD51 Manufactured by Ruskin or equivalent.
C. End Bearings: Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, furnish end bearings. On
multiple blade dampers, furnish oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings.
D. Quadrants:
1. Furnish locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers.
2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on standoff mounting brackets, bases, or
adapters.
3. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches furnish regulator at both ends.
2.4 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible.
B. Connector: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip.
1. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric conforming to
NFPA 90A, minimum density 30 oz per sq yd.
2. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 3 inches wide.
3. Metal: 3 inch wide, 24 gauge galvanized steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify rated walls are ready for fire damper installation.
C. Verify ducts and equipment installation are ready for accessories.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 5
D. Check location of air outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform
to architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
3.2 INSTALLATION.
A. Install in accordance with NFPA 90A and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 233100 for duct construction and pressure
class.
B. Install back-draft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where
indicated on Drawings.
C. Access Doors: Install access doors at the following locations and as indicated on Drawings:
1. Upstream of each reheat coil.
2. Before or after each rectangular automatic control damper.
D. Access Door Sizes: Install minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for
shoulder access, and as indicated on Drawings. Review locations prior to fabrication.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for demonstration and
training.
END OF SECTION 233300
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC FANS 233400 - 1
SECTION 233400 - HVAC FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Centrifugal fans.
2. Ceiling fans.
3. Duct blowers or cabinet fans.
4. Centrifugal square inline fans.
5. Energy recovery ventilator.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 230700 - HVAC Insulation: Product requirements for power ventilators for
placement by this section.
2. Section 230900 - Instrumentation and Control for HVAC: Product requirements for
control components to interface with fans.
3. Section 233100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings: Product requirements for hangers for
placement by this section.
4. Section 233300 - Air Duct Accessories: Product requirements for duct accessories for
placement by this section.
5. Section 260503 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Execution and product requirements
for connecting equipment specified by this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Bearing Manufacturers Association:
1. ABMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
2. ABMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
B. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.:
1. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.
2. AMCA 204 - Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans.
3. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating.
4. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans.
5. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data.
C. American Refrigeration Institute:
1. ARI 1060 - Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment Certification Equipment
Program.
D. ASTM International:
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC FANS 233400 - 2
1. ASTM E1996 - Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls, Doors and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in
Hurricanes.
E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.
2. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1. UL 705 - Power Ventilators.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit data on each type of fan and include accessories, fan curves with
specified operating point plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet
at rated capacity, electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for lubrication, motor and drive
replacement, spare parts list, and wiring diagrams.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear AMCA Certified Rating Seal.
B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300 and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating
Seal.
C. UL Compliance: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with
UL 705.
D. Balance Quality: Conform to AMCA 204.
E. Energy Recovery Unit Wheel Energy Transfer Rating: Meet ARI 1060.
F. Perform Work in accordance with codes adopted by authority having jurisdiction.
G. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC FANS 233400 - 3
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years' documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years'
documented experience approved by manufacturer.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Protect motors, shafts, and bearings from weather and construction dust.
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B. Furnish five-year manufacturer's warranty for fans.
1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenance service.
B. Furnish service and maintenance of fans for one years from Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Examine each fan components bi-monthly. Clean, adjust, and lubricate equipment.
D. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of fans, and controls checkout and
adjustments. Repair or replace parts in accordance with manufacturer's operating and
maintenance data. Use parts produced by manufacturer of original equipment.
E. Perform work without removing fans from service during building normal occupied hours.
F. Provide emergency call back service during working hours for this maintenance period.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC FANS 233400 - 4
G. Maintain locally, near Place of the Work, adequate stock of parts for replacement or emergency
purposes. Have personnel available to ensure fulfillment of this maintenance service, without
unreasonable loss of time.
H. Perform maintenance work using competent and qualified personnel under supervision and in
direct employ of manufacturer or original installer.
I. Do not assign or transfer maintenance service to agent or subcontractor without prior written
consent of Owner.
1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CEILING FANS
A. Centrifugal Fan Unit: Direct driven with galvanized steel housing lined with 1/2 inch acoustic
insulation, resilient mounted motor, gravity backdraft damper in discharge opening, integral
outlet duct collar. Discharge position convertible by moving interchangeable panels.
B. Disconnect Switch: Cord and plug in housing for thermal overload protected motor.
C. Grille: Aluminum with baked white enamel finish or painted steel.
D. Wheel: Centrifugal forward curved type constructed of injection molded or polypropylene
resin.
E. Motor: Open drip proof type with permanently lubricated sealed bearings and thermal overload
protection.
F. Accessories:
1. Rubber-in-shear vibration isolator.
2. Fan speed controller.
G. Performance:
1. Refer to Exhaust Fan Schedule on Drawings.
H. Electrical Characteristics and Components:
1. Refer to Exhaust Fan Schedule on Drawings.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC FANS 233400 - 5
2.2 CENTRIFUGAL SQUARE INLINE FANS
A. Product Description: Direct drive with galvanized steel housing lined with 1/2 or 1 inch
acoustic glass fiber insulation, integral inlet cone, removable access doors on 3 sides, inlet and
outlet duct collar, gravity backdraft damper in discharge, horizontal hanging brackets.
B. Fan Wheel: Backward inclined centrifugal type, aluminum construction.
C. Motor and Drive Mounting: Out of air stream, direct drive, ECM with potentiometer for speed
setting.
D. Bearings: ABMA 9 life at 200,000 hours.
E. Accessories:
1. Inlet safety screen.
2. Flexible duct connector.
3. Outlet ductwork companion flange.
4. Disconnect Switch: NEMA 250 Type 1 enclosure.
F. Performance:
1. Refer to Exhaust Fan Schedule on Drawing.
G. Electrical Characteristics and Components:
1. Refer to Exhaust Fan Schedule on Drawing.
2.3 ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATOR
A. Unit Casing: Constructed of galvanized steel with bolted construction using corrosion resistant
fasteners. Furnish with inlet and outlet duct collars. Top side and interior panels insulated with
1-1/2 inch, 3 pound per cubic foot density glass fiber insulation. Side panels hinged and
removable for access to internal components. Energy exchange core removable for access and
cleaning.
B. Energy Exchange Core: Static plate type heat exchanger constructed of hydroscopic resin plates
for sensible and latent heat transfer.
C. Fans: Supply and exhaust fans. Direct drive, forward curved, centrifugal blower with resilient
mounted motor.
D. Motors: Electrically commutated open drip proof with permanently lubricated sealed type
bearings with ABMA 9 life at 200,000 hours.
E. Filter: 2 inch thick MERV8 pleated type located in both supply and exhaust air streams.
F. Electrical: Components factory wired for single point power connection. Control panel UL
listed with access door, control power transformer, motor contactors, factory wired to terminal
blocks for connection of field wiring.
G. Accessories:
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC FANS 233400 - 6
1. Motorized dampers factory installed and wired in supply and exhaust air streams.
2. Disconnect Switch: NEMA 250 Type 1 enclosure.
3. Rubber-in-shear or spring type vibration isolators, seismically rated.
H. Controls: Furnish unit with the following:
1. Motor contactor with 24VAC coil.
2. Control power transformer.
3. ECM speed control.
I. Performance:
1. Refer to Energy Recovery Ventilator Schedule on Drawings.
J. Electrical Characteristics and Components:
1. Refer to Energy Recovery Ventilator Schedule on Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install supports in compliance with ASCE 7-10 for seismic.
B. Suspended Fans: Install flexible connections specified in Section 233300 between fan and
ductwork. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between
ductwork and fan while running.
C. Provide backdraft dampers on outlet from cabinet and ceiling fans and as indicated on
Drawings.
D. Install safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed.
E. Install backdraft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans and as indicated on Drawings. Refer to
Section 233300.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.
B. Vacuum inside of fan cabinet.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HVAC FANS 233400 - 7
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for demonstration and
training.
B. Demonstrate fan operation and maintenance procedures.
3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished
Work.
B. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has
been test run under observation.
END OF SECTION 233400
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 233700 - 1
SECTION 233700 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Diffusers.
2. Registers
3. Grilles.
4. Louvers.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 099000 - Painting and Coating: Execution and product requirements for Painting
of ductwork visible behind outlets and inlets specified by this section.
2. Section 233300 - Air Duct Accessories: Volume dampers for inlets and outlets.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.:
1. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters.
B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers:
1. ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets.
C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors:
1. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Test and rate diffuser, register, and grille performance in accordance with ASHRAE 70.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 233700 - 2
B. Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500.
C. Perform Work in accordance codes adopted by authority having jurisdiction.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years' documented experience.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B. Furnish one-year manufacturer's warranty for air outlets and inlets.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS
A. Refer to Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers Schedule on Drawings. Provide scheduled items or
equivalent from other manufacturer.
2.2 LR-1 LOUVERS
A. Product Description: Stationary drainable.
B. Type: 6 inch deep with blades on 35 degree slope, heavy channel frame.
C. Fabrication: 0.094 inch thick extruded aluminum blades, 0.125 inch thick extruded aluminum
frame, welded assembly, with factory fluoropolymer spray finish color to be selected.
D. Mounting: Furnish with standard frame and screw holes in jambs for installation.
E. Bird Screen: Bird screen with 1/2 inch square mesh for exhaust and 3/4 inch for intake.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 233700 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify inlet and outlet locations.
C. Verify ceiling and wall systems are ready for installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers to ductwork with airtight connection.
B. Install balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, except when
dampers are scheduled to be part of diffuser, grille, and register assembly. Refer to Section
233300.
C. Paint visible portion of ductwork behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Section
099000.
3.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to
architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
B. Refer to Architectural Drawings for louver installation details.
END OF SECTION 233700
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 235100 - 1
SECTION 235100 - BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Type B double wall gas vents.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 230529 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product
requirements for hangers and supports for placement by this section.
2. Section 235500 - Fuel-Fired Heaters: Fuel fired heaters using breeching, chimneys, and
stacks.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International:
1. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
2. A1011/A1011M-07 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled,
Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
Formability, and Ultra-High Strength
B. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code.
C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1. UL 441 - Gas Vents.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Vent: Portion of a venting system designed to convey flue gases directly outdoors from a vent
connector or from an appliance when a vent connector is not used.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittals procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit data indicating factory built chimneys, including dimensional details of
components and flue caps, dimensions and weights, electrical characteristics and connection
requirements.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 235100 - 2
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with codes adopted by authority having jurisdiction.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years
documented experience.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for manufactured units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TYPE B DOUBLE WALL GAS VENTS
A. Furnish materials in accordance with codes adopted by authority having jurisdiction.
1. Fabrication: Inner pipe of sheet aluminum, and outer pipe of galvanized sheet steel, tested
in compliance with UL 441.
2. Provide combustion vent (exhaust) hood, Tjernlund model VH1-4” or equivalent
approved by manufacturer of equipment requiring vent.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 235100 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with NFPA 54.
B. For Type B double wall gas vents, maintain UL listed minimum clearances from combustibles.
Assemble pipe and accessories for complete installation.
C. Clean combustion vents during installation, removing dust and debris.
D. Install slip joints allowing removal of appliances without removal or dismantling of combustion
vent.
END OF SECTION 235100
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FINNED WATER-TUBE BOILERS 235233.13 - 1
SECTION 235233.13 - WATER-TUBE BOILERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Water-tube boilers.
2. Boiler controls.
3. Boiler trim.
4. Natural gas-fired burners.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete housekeeping pads.
2. Section 221100 - Facility Water Distribution: Cold water piping connections to boilers.
3. Section 230593 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC: Adjusting and balancing
hot water boiler flow rates.
4. Section 231123 - Facility Natural-Gas Piping: Natural gas piping connections to boilers.
5. Section 232113 - Hydronic Piping: Hot water piping for connections to boilers.
6. Section 260583 - Wiring Connections: Electric connections to boilers.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute - Hydronics Institute Section:
1. AHRI 1500 - Performance Rating of Commercial Space Heating Boilers.
B. American National Standards Institute:
1. ANSI Z21.13 - Gas-Fired Low Pressure Steam and Hot Water Boilers.
C. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers:
1. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential
Buildings.
D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
1. ASME BPVC Section IV - Heating Boilers.
2. ASME CSD-1 - Controls and Safety Devices for Automatically Fired Boilers.
E. Department of Energy:
1. 10 CFR 430, Subpart B, Appendix N - Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy
Consumption of Furnaces and Boilers.
F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FINNED WATER-TUBE BOILERS 235233.13 - 2
1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
G. NFPA:
1. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code.
H. UL:
1. UL 795 - Commercial-Industrial Gas Heating Equipment.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for preinstallation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this Section.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Product Data:
1. Submit capacities and accessories included with boiler.
2. Submit general layout, dimensions, electrical characteristics, weight and mounting loads,
and size and location of water, fuel, electric, and vent connections.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
D. Test and Evaluation Reports:
1. Indicate that boilers meet or exceed specified performance and efficiency.
2. Submit results of testing.
E. Manufacturer Instructions:
1. Submit assembly, support details, connection requirements, and startup instructions.
2. Submit detailed instructions on installation requirements, including storage and handling
procedures.
F. Field Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor-furnished tests and inspections.
G. Manufacturer Reports:
1. Certify that equipment has been installed according to manufacturer instructions.
2. Certify control settings after startup.
3. Furnish performance chart of control system.
H. Qualifications Statements:
1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer and installer.
2. Submit manufacturer's approval of installer.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FINNED WATER-TUBE BOILERS 235233.13 - 3
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenance
materials.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Boiler Construction:
1. Comply with ASME BPVC IV and ANSI Z21.13.
2. Furnish boilers registered with National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors.
B. Boiler Performance Requirements:
1. Minimum Efficiency: 95% thermal efficiency.
2. Testing: Comply with AHRI 1500 and certify to AHRI Commercial Boilers Certification
Program.
C. Gas Train and Safety Controls: Comply with requirements of ASME CSD-1.
D. Unit Certification: AHRI.
E. Internal Wiring of Factory-Wired Equipment: Comply with applicable code.
F. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL or testing firm
acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and as indicated.
G. Perform Work according to codes adopted by authority having jurisdiction.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with
minimum three years' documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum three years'
documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and
protecting products.
B. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for
damage.
C. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions.
D. Protection:
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FINNED WATER-TUBE BOILERS 235233.13 - 4
1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from
construction operations areas.
2. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for warranties.
B. Furnish 10-year limited manufacturer's warranty for boilers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BL-1 WATER-TUBE BOILERS
A. Description:
1. Hot water, induced draft boiler with stainless steel water tube heat exchanger, welded
construction, with no gaskets, gas burning system, controls, and boiler trim.
B. Performance and Design Criteria:
1. Refer to Boiler Schedule on Drawings for performance, manufacturer and model.
C. Hot Water Boiler Trim:
1. Pressure Relief Valve.
a. ASME rated.
b. Set Point: 75 psig.
2. Gage:
a. Description: Combination water pressure and temperature.
b. Furnish graduated pressure scale from 1-1/2 to 3 times pressure relief valve setting.
3. Low-Water Cutoff:
a. Furnish manual reset to automatically prevent operation when water falls below
safe level.
b. Furnish auxiliary low-water cutoff.
4. Inlet Flow Switch: Automatically prevent burner operation when there is low flow
through boiler.
5. Control transformer.
6. ON-OFF switch with indicator lights.
7. Alarm bell.
8. High-Limit Temperature Controller:
a. Description: To prevent boiler water temperature from exceeding safe system
temperature.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FINNED WATER-TUBE BOILERS 235233.13 - 5
b. Furnish manual reset.
9. Boiler air vent.
10. Drain valve.
11. Circulator relay.
D. Burning System:
1. Gas Burner:
a. Description: Modulating 20 to 100% firing of natural gas, with adjustable
combustion air supply, gas pressure regulator, diaphragm gas valves, manual
shutoff, intermittent spark or glow coil ignition, thermistor flame sensing device,
and automatic 100 percent safety gas shutoff.
b. Type: Induced draft, premix burner with negative pressure gas valve.
c. Material: Stainless steel.
d. NOx Emissions: Not exceeding 10ppm.
2. Safety Controls:
a. After ignition energized, limit time for establishment of flame.
b. Prevent opening of gas valve until pilot flame is proven.
c. Stop gas flow on ignition failure.
3. Flue Gas Collector and Draft Hood:
a. Integral with boiler casing.
b. Furnish built-in induced draft fan, with draft gage and draft-providing switches.
E. Fabrication:
1. Heat Exchanger:
a. Description: Stainless steel water tube heat exchanger.
b. Comply with ASME BPVC IV.
c. Maximum Working Pressure: 160 psig.
2. Combustion Chamber:
a. Sealed combustion system independent of jacket.
b. Category IV venting with PVC, CPVC or stainless steel material.
3. Jacket:
a. Material: Galvanized steel with factory-applied baked-enamel or acrylic coating.
b. Removable without disconnecting piping.
F. Controls:
1. Power: 120V/1PH/60HZ, 6 amps, with control circuit voltage of 24VAC.
2. Electronic PID temperature and ignition control.
3. Color touchscreen display.
4. Monitor for flue gas temperature and shut down boiler if high.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FINNED WATER-TUBE BOILERS 235233.13 - 6
5. Controller shall be capable of control of boiler pump and system pump and provide
outdoor temperature reset utilizing outdoor sensor provided with boiler.
6. Modulation control signal: 4-20mA or 0-10VDC.
G. Manufacturer and model: Refer to Boiler Schedule on Drawings.
2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for testing, inspection, and analysis.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. According to manufacturer instructions.
B. Install boilers plumb and level, to plus or minus 1/16 inch over boiler base.
C. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances around and over boilers.
D. Concrete Housekeeping Pad.
1. As specified in Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
2. Minimum Size: 3-1/2 inches high and 6 inches larger than boiler base on each side.
E. Connect hot water piping to supply and return boiler connections.
F. Fuel Piping Connections:
1. Connect to boiler, full size of boiler gas train inlet.
2. Arrange piping with clearances for burner removal and service.
3. Natural Gas Piping:
a. As specified in Section 231123 - Facility Natural-Gas Piping.
b. Comply with NFPA 54.
c. Accessories:
1) Shutoff valve.
2) Sediment trap.
3) Union.
G. Piping Accessories:
1. Refer to piping details on Drawings.
H. Install discharge piping from relief valves and drain valves to nearest floor drain.
I. Circulator and Expansion Tank:
1. Install on boiler.
2. Pre-charge to 12 psig.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FINNED WATER-TUBE BOILERS 235233.13 - 7
J. Install boiler trim, electrical devices, and accessories furnished loose for field mounting.
K. Install control wiring between boiler control panel and field-mounted control devices.
L. Install combustion air piping and combustion vent piping.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for inspecting and testing.
B. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for testing, adjusting,
and balancing.
C. Inspection:
1. Arrange with local authorities having jurisdiction for inspection of boilers and piping.
2. Obtain certificate of operation.
D. Testing:
1. Perform tests at minimum, midrange-, and high-fire rates.
2. Tests:
a. Boiler firing rate.
b. Gas flow rate.
c. Heat input.
d. Burner manifold gas pressure.
e. Percent carbon monoxide.
f. Percent oxygen.
g. Percent excess air.
h. Flue-gas temperature at outlet.
i. Ambient temperature.
j. Percent efficiency.
k. Heat output.
E. Manufacturer Services: Furnish services of manufacturer's representative experienced in
installation of products furnished under this Section for not less than four hours on Site for
installation, inspection, startup, field testing, and instructing Owner's personnel in operation and
maintenance of equipment.
F. Equipment Acceptance:
1. Adjust, repair, modify, or replace components failing to perform as specified and rerun
tests.
2. Make final adjustments to equipment under direction of manufacturer's representative.
G. Furnish installation certificate from equipment manufacturer's representative attesting that
equipment has been properly installed and is ready for startup and testing.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FINNED WATER-TUBE BOILERS 235233.13 - 8
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for starting and
adjusting.
B. Section 230593 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC: Adjust and balance hot water
boiler flow rates.
C. Start up boilers according to manufacturer instructions and in presence of boiler manufacturer's
representative.
D. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements.
E. Adjust burner for maximum efficiency.
F. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.
B. Section 232500 - HVAC Water Treatment: Requirements for system cleaner and closed loop
treatment.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for demonstration and
training.
B. Demonstrate equipment startup, shutdown, routine maintenance, and emergency repair
procedures to Owner's personnel.
3.6 MAINTENANCE
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenance service.
B. Provide service and maintenance of boilers for one year from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Provide emergency callback service during working hours for specified maintenance period.
D. Perform maintenance Work using qualified personnel under supervision and in direct employ of
boiler manufacturer, boiler manufacturer's representative, or original installer.
END OF SECTION 235233.13
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FIRE-TUBE BOILERS 235239 - 1
SECTION 235239 – FIRE-TUBE BOILERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Boilers.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete housekeeping pads.
2. Section 221100 - Facility Water Distribution: Cold water piping connections to boilers.
3. Section 230593 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC: Adjusting and balancing
hot water boiler flow rates.
4. Section 231123 - Facility Natural-Gas Piping: Natural gas piping connections to boilers.
5. Section 232113 - Hydronic Piping: Hot water piping for connections to boilers.
6. Section 260583 - Wiring Connections: Electrical connections to boilers.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute - Hydronics Institute Section:
1. AHRI 1500 - Performance Rating of Commercial Space Heating Boilers.
B. American National Standards Institute:
1. ANSI Z21.13 - Gas-Fired Low Pressure Steam and Hot Water Boilers.
C. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers:
1. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential
Buildings.
D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
1. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC) Section I - Rules for Construction of
Power Boilers.
2. ASME BPVC Section IV - Heating Boilers.
3. ASME CSD-1 - Controls and Safety Devices for Automatically Fired Boilers.
E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
F. NFPA:
1. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FIRE-TUBE BOILERS 235239 - 2
G. UL:
1. UL 795 - Commercial-Industrial Gas Heating Equipment.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for preinstallation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this Section.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Product Data:
1. Submit manufacturer information for capacities, accessories, general layout, dimensions,
electrical characteristics, weight, and mounting loads.
2. Submit sizes and location of water, fuel, electrical, and vent connections.
C. Source Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of factory tests and inspections.
D. Field Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor-furnished tests and inspections.
E. Manufacturer Reports:
1. Certify that equipment has been installed according to manufacturer instructions.
2. After startup, indicate equipment control settings and performance chart of control
system.
F. Qualifications Statements:
1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer and installer.
2. Submit manufacturer's approval of installer.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenance
materials.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Boiler Construction:
1. Comply with ASME ANSI Z21.13.
2. Furnish boilers registered with National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors.
B. Boiler Performance Requirements:
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FIRE-TUBE BOILERS 235239 - 3
1. Minimum Efficiency: 95% thermal efficiency.
2. Testing: Comply with AHRI 1500.
C. Gas Train and Safety Controls: Comply with requirements of ASME CSD-1.
D. Unit Certification: American Gas Association.
E. Internal Wiring of Factory-Wired Equipment: Comply with applicable code.
F. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL or testing firm
acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.
G. Perform Work according codes adopted by authority having jurisdiction.
H. Maintain one copy of each standard affecting Work of this Section on Site.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with
minimum three years' documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum three years'
documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and
protecting products.
B. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for
damage.
C. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions.
D. Protection:
1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from
construction operations areas.
2. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions.
1.9 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements:
1. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
2. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FIRE-TUBE BOILERS 235239 - 4
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for warranties.
B. Furnish five-year manufacturer's warranty for parts and ten-year manufacturer's warranty for
heat exchanger.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BL-2 FIRE-TUBE BOILERS
A. Description:
1. Factory-assembled, factory-fire tested, self-contained unit ready for automatic operation
except for connection of water, fuel, electrical, and vent connections.
2. Furnish integral forced-draft burner, burner controls, boiler trim, refractory, insulation,
and jacket.
B. Performance and Design Criteria:
1. Minimum Efficiency:
a. 95 percent from 30 to 100 percent of full-load firing rate.
2. Operating Fluid: Hot water.
3. Capacity:
a. Refer to Boiler Schedule on Drawing.
C. Shell:
1. Maximum Working Pressure:
a. Water: 30 psig.
D. Hot Water Boiler Trim:
1. Pressure Relief Valve:
a. ASME rated.
b. Set Point: 30 psig.
2. Water temperature gage.
3. Water pressure gage.
4. Low-Water Cutoff: Automatically prevent burner operation if boiler water falls below
safe level.
5. Operating Temperature Controller:
a. Description: Maintain water temperature set point. Provide outdoor temperature
reset of water temperature set point.
b. High-Limit Controller:
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FIRE-TUBE BOILERS 235239 - 5
1) Description: Prevent boiler water temperature from exceeding safe system
temperature.
2) Furnish manual reset.
c. Graphical display and navigation buttons.
d. Circulator control.
e. Outdoor temperature reset.
f. 0-10VDC modulation input.
g. Adjustable warm weather shutdown.
h. Logging of sensor readings.
i. Alarm contacts.
E. Fuel Burning System:
1. Description:
a. Forced-draft, automatic burner integral with front head of boiler.
b. Designed to burn natural gas and to maintain fuel-air ratios automatically.
2. Gas Burner:
a. Forced-draft, variable speed blower, with electric ignition.
b. Modulating with at least 5:1 turndown.
c. Natural-Gas Burner Piping: Furnish complete gas train including HIGH and LOW
gas-pressure switches and gas-pressure regulator.
F. Manufacturer and Model: Refer to Boiler Schedule on Drawings.
2.2 OPERATION
A. Electrical Characteristics:
1. Power: 120V/1PH/60HZ 10 FLA
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for testing, inspection, and analysis.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. According to manufacturer instructions.
B. Install boilers plumb and level, to plus or minus 1/16 inch over boiler base.
C. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances around and over boilers.
D. Hot Water Piping Connections: Connect to supply and return boiler connections.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FIRE-TUBE BOILERS 235239 - 6
E. Fuel Piping Connections:
1. Connect to boiler, full size of boiler gas train inlet.
2. Arrange piping with clearances for burner removal and service.
3. Natural Gas Piping:
a. As specified in Section 231123 - Facility Natural-Gas Piping.
b. Comply with NFPA 54.
c. Accessories:
1) Ball valve.
2) Sediment trap.
3) Union.
F. Piping Accessories:
a. Refer to piping details on Drawings.
G. Install boiler trim, electrical devices, and accessories furnished loose for field mounting.
H. Install control wiring between boiler control panel and field-mounted control devices.
I. Connect combustion air piping and combustion vent piping.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for inspecting and testing.
B. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for testing, adjusting,
and balancing.
C. Inspection:
1. Arrange with local authorities having jurisdiction for inspection of boilers and piping.
2. Obtain certificate of operation.
D. Manufacturer Services: Furnish services of manufacturer's representative experienced in
installation of products furnished under this Section for not less than 4 hours on Site for
installation, inspection, startup, field testing, and instructing Owner's personnel in operation and
maintenance of equipment.
E. Equipment Acceptance:
1. Adjust, repair, modify, or replace components failing to perform as specified and rerun
tests.
2. Make final adjustments to equipment under direction of manufacturer's representative.
F. Furnish installation certificate from equipment manufacturer's representative attesting that
equipment has been properly installed and is ready for startup and testing.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FIRE-TUBE BOILERS 235239 - 7
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for starting and
adjusting.
B. Section 230593 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC: Adjust and balance hot water
boiler flow rates.
C. Start up boilers according to manufacturer instructions and in presence of boiler manufacturer's
representative.
D. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements.
E. Adjust burner for maximum burning efficiency.
F. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for demonstration and
training.
B. Demonstrate equipment startup, shutdown, routine maintenance, and emergency repair
procedures to Owner's personnel.
3.6 MAINTENANCE
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenance service.
B. Provide service and maintenance of boilers for one year from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Provide emergency callback service during working hours for specified maintenance period.
D. Perform maintenance Work using qualified personnel under supervision and in direct employ of
boiler manufacturer, boiler manufacturer's representative, or original installer.
END OF SECTION 235239
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FURNACES 235400 - 1
SECTION 235400 - FURNACES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Gas-fired furnaces.
2. Thermostats.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 221100 - Facility Water Distribution: Requirements for humidifier supply and
condensate drains.
2. Section 231123 - Facility Natural-Gas Piping: Requirements for natural-gas piping.
3. Section 233100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings: Requirements for ductwork and duct liners.
4. Section 233300 - Air Duct Accessories: Requirements for flexible duct connections.
5. Section 234000 - HVAC Air Cleaning Devices: Product requirements for air filters and
electronic air cleaners.
6. Section 238126 - Split-System Air-Conditioners: Requirements for condensing units and
indoor air handling units with evaporator coils.
7. Section 260583 - Wiring Connections: Requirements for electrical connections.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American National Standards Institute:
1. ANSI Z21.47 - Gas-Fired Central Furnaces.
B. Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute:
1. AHRI 210/240 - Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat
Pump Equipment.
C. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers:
1. ASHRAE 62.1 - Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality.
2. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential
Buildings.
D. Department of Energy:
1. 10 CFR, Appendix N to Subpart B of Part 430 - Uniform Test Method for Measuring the
Energy Consumption of Furnaces and Boilers.
E. International Code Council:
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FURNACES 235400 - 2
1. ICC IECC - International Energy Conservation Code.
2. ICC IFGC - International Fuel and Gas Code.
F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.
G. NFPA:
1. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code.
2. NFPA 211 - Standard for Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents, and Solid Fuel-Burning
Appliances.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for preinstallation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this Section.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Product Data: Submit rated capacities, efficiencies, weights, required clearances, locations and
sizes of field connections, accessories, electrical nameplate data, and wiring diagrams.
C. Manufacturer Instructions: Submit detailed instructions on installation requirements, including
storage and handling procedures.
D. Manufacturer Reports: Certify that equipment has been installed according to manufacturer
instructions.
E. Qualifications Statements:
1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer and installer.
2. Submit manufacturer's approval of installer.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of furnaces, components, and connections.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenance
materials.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FURNACES 235400 - 3
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ICC IFGC.
B. Minimum Furnace Efficiency:
1. Comply with ASHRAE/IES 90.1.
2. Testing: Comply with ICC IECC and ANSI Z21.47.
3. Certification: Certify to AHRI Residential Furnaces Certification Program.
C. Furnish equipment that is UL listed as suitable for clearance space available in installed
location.
D. Perform Work according to codes adopted by authority having jurisdiction.
E. Maintain one copy of each standard affecting Work of this Section on Site.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with
minimum three years' documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum three years'
documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and
protecting products.
B. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for
damage.
C. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions.
D. Protection:
1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from
construction operations areas.
2. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions.
1.10 AMBIENT CONDITIONS
A. Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Requirements for ambient condition
control facilities for product storage and installation.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FURNACES 235400 - 4
1.11 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements:
1. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for warranties.
B. Furnish five-year manufacturer's warranty for heat exchangers.
C. Furnish five-year manufacturer's warranty for solid-state ignition modules.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GAS-FIRED FURNACES
A. Description: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled, pre-wired unit, consisting of cabinet,
supply fan, gas-fired heat, controls, air filter, and accessories.
B. Performance and Design Criteria:
1. Wiring: Single power connection with control transformer.
2. Airflow Configuration: As indicated on Drawings
3. Fuel: Natural gas.
4. Minimum Efficiency, Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency (AFUE): 95 percent.
5. Air Flow and Heating Capacity: Refer to Furnace Schedule on Drawing.
C. Cabinet:
1. Material: Steel with baked enamel finish.
2. Access Panels:
a. Removable.
b. Furnish safety interlock switches and insulation.
D. Supply Fan:
1. Type: Centrifugal.
2. Mounting: Rubberized.
3. Drive: Direct.
E. Motors:
1. Drive: Direct.
2. Speed: Electrically commutated motor.
3. Permanently lubricated.
****** [OR] ******
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FURNACES 235400 - 5
F. Condensing Heat Exchanger:
1. Primary: Stainless steel.
2. Secondary: Stainless steel.
G. Gas Burner:
1. Gas Valve: 100 percent safety two-stage main gas valve, main shutoff valve, pressure
regulator, safety pilot with electronic flame sensor, limit control, transformer, and
combination ignition/fan timer control board.
2. Ignition: Electric pilot ignition, with hot-surface igniter or electric spark ignition.
H. Gas Burner Safety Controls:
1. Electronic Flame Sensor: Prevents gas valve from opening until pilot flame is proven;
stops gas flow on ignition failure.
2. Flame Rollout Switch: Installed on burner box; prevents burner operation.
3. Limit Control: Fixed stop at maximum permissible setting; de-energizes burner on
excessive bonnet temperature; automatic reset.
I. Combustion-Air Inducer: Centrifugal fan with thermally protected motor and sleeve bearings
prepurges heat exchanger and vents combustion products; pressure switch prevents furnace
operation if combustion-air inlet or flue outlet is blocked.
J. Furnace Controls: Solid-state board integrates ignition, heat, cooling, and fan speeds; adjustable
fan-on and fan-off timing; terminals for connection to accessories.
K. Condensing Vent Materials: PVC plastic fitting to combine combustion-air inlet and vent
through outside wall.
L. Operating Controls:
1. Digital Zone Control System.
2. Supply Fan Control:
a. Energization: From outlet air temperature or timer device, independent of burner
controls.
b. Delays: Adjustable timed-off and fixed timed-on.
M. Air Filters:
1. Type: Disposable, extended area panel filters.
2. Thickness: 2 inch.
3. Rating: MERV 8.
4. Size: As indicated on Drawings.
N. Accessories:
1. Heat exchanger condensate drain.
2. Condensate acid neutralizer.
O. Manufacturer and model: Refer to Furnace Schedule on Drawing.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FURNACES 235400 - 6
2.2 THERMOSTATS AND CONTROLS
A. Refer to section 230900.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for testing, inspection, and analysis.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation
examination.
B. Verify that building is ready for installation of units.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. According to manufacturer instructions.
B. Gas-Fired Furnaces: Comply with NFPA 54.
C. Vent Connections: Comply with NFPA 211 and NFPA 54.
D. Natural-Gas Piping:
1. Connections:
a. Comply with NFPA 54.
b. Arrange piping with clearances for burner maintenance.
2. Accessories:
a. Shutoff valve.
b. Sediment trap.
c. Union.
d. Pipe reducer.
E. Drain: Pipe drain from gas-fired furnaces heat exchangers through acid neutralizer to nearest
floor drain.
F. Power and Controls:
1. Connect units to electric supply.
2. Connect controls remote from units.
3. Install control components supplied with equipment and provide control wiring.
4. Install control wiring between thermostat, indoor unit, and outdoor unit.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FURNACES 235400 - 7
G. Connect supply air duct and return air duct to system ductwork with flexible duct connection as
specified in Section 233300 - Air Duct Accessories.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for inspecting and testing.
B. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for testing, adjusting,
and balancing.
C. Equipment Acceptance:
1. Adjust, repair, modify, or replace components failing to perform as specified and rerun
tests.
2. Make final adjustments to equipment in accordance with Manufacturer’s Installation
Instructions.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for starting and
adjusting.
B. Check control functions and adjust as required.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for demonstration and
training.
B. Demonstrate equipment startup, shutdown, routine maintenance, and emergency repair
procedures to Owner's personnel.
3.6 MAINTENANCE
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenance service.
B. Provide service and maintenance of furnace and accessories for one year from date of
Substantial Completion.
C. Services:
1. Provide systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication.
2. Repair or replace parts as required.
3. Use parts produced by manufacturer of original equipment.
END OF SECTION 235400
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FUEL-FIRED HEATERS 235500 - 1
SECTION 235500 - FUEL-FIRED HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Tubular infrared heaters.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 230529 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product
requirements for hangers for placement by this section.
2. Section 230900 - Instrumentation and Control for HVAC: Product requirements for
thermostats and time clocks for placement by this section.
3. Section 231123 - Facility Natural-Gas Piping: Product requirements for natural gas
piping connected to gas-fired heaters.
4. Section 233300 - Air Duct Accessories: Product requirements for flexible duct
connections.
5. Section 235100 - Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks: Product requirements for vents for
placement by this section.
6. Section 260503 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for electrical
connections specified by this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers:
1. ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.
B. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code.
2. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
3. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning
Systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittals procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature and data indicating rated capacities, weights,
accessories, electrical nameplate data, and wiring diagrams.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FUEL-FIRED HEATERS 235500 - 2
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of thermostats or other products not
mounted on unit.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating
instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with codes adopted by authority having jurisdiction.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years' documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years'
documented experience approved by manufacturer.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Accept heaters and controls on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B. Furnish five-year manufacturer's warranty for heat exchanger and 3-year warranty on all other
components.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FUEL-FIRED HEATERS 235500 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TUBULAR INFRARED HEATERS
A. Packaged, partially factory assembled, pre-wired unit consisting of cabinet, burner, heat
exchanger, radiant tube, reflector and controls for natural gas.
B. Heat Exchanger: U-configuration with aluminized tubular 16 gage steel combustion chamber,
16 gage steel emitter, aluminized steel couplings, and aluminum reflectors.
C. Reflectors: Reflectors shall reflect 100% of infrared energy. Emitter tubes shall be fully
recessed within reflector and shall include end caps to reduce convective heat loss. Provide side
shields for hottest two sections of heat exchanger to reduce spread of infrared energy below
heater.
D. Gas Burner:
1. Gas Burner: Forced draft type with adjustable combustion air supply.
2. Gas valve provides 100 percent safety gas shut-off.
3. Direct spark ignition with gas ignition and flame proving within the main burner cup.
4. Non-corrosive burner air blower with permanently lubricated motor.
E. Gas Burner Safety Controls:
1. Gas Control Valve shall be a proportional, regulated, redundant 24VAC electric gas
valve, incorporating a pressure regulator and manual shutoff all in one body.
2. Control Panel Interlock: Burner shall be serviceable while system is running with no
requirements for safety interlock.
3. Integral air pressure switches shall provide for air proving and shall monitor adequate
inlet air and vent flow.
4. Indicator Lights: Burner on and run indicator lights shall be standard equipment.
F. Controls: Low voltage room thermostat cycles burner to maintain room temperature setting.
G. Combustion Air duct:
1. Single wall galvanized steel duct.
2. Duct insulation with vapor barrier to prevent condensation.
3. Intake hood, galvanized sheet metal painted brown with screen, FAMCO model SWV4P
or equivalent.
H. Performance:
1. Refer to Infrared Heater Schedule on Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify space is ready for installation of units and openings are as indicated on shop drawings.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FUEL-FIRED HEATERS 235500 - 4
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install units in accordance with NFPA 90A, NFPA 90B, and NFPA 54.
B. Installation - Natural Gas Piping:
1. Connect natural gas piping in accordance with NFPA 54.
2. Connect natural gas piping to unit, full size of unit gas train inlet. Arrange piping with
clearances for burner service.
3. Install the following piping accessories on natural gas piping connections. Refer to
Section 231123.
a. Shutoff valve.
b. Sediment trap.
c. Pressure reducing valve.
d. Test tee.
e. Union connection.
f. Flexible pipe connector installed in accordance with heater manufacturer’s
instructions.
C. Install vent connections in accordance with appliance manufacturer’s instructions. Install vents
and stacks. Refer to Section 235100.
D. Provide hangers and supports for suspended units. Support infrared radiant heaters in fixed
position, braced to prevent swaying.
E. Provide hangers and supports for suspended units. Refer to Section 230529.
F. Provide galvanized steel combustion air duct per heater manufacturer’s instructions. Include
flexible duct section and duct insulation.
G. Provide operating controls. Refer to Section 230900.
H. Provide connection to electrical power systems. Refer to Section 260503.
END OF SECTION 235500
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126 - 1
SECTION 238126 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Condensing unit.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 230993 - Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls: Sequences of operation
applying to units in this section.
2. Section 232300 - Refrigerant Piping: Execution requirements for connection to
refrigerant piping specified by this section.
3. Section 260503 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Electrical connection to units.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute:
1. ARI 210/240 - Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment.
2. ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment.
3. ARI 340/360 - Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump
Equipment.
4. ARI 365 - Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning Condensing Units.
B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers:
1. ASHRAE 52.1 - Gravimetric and Dust-Spot Procedures for Testing Air-Cleaning
Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter.
2. ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.
C. ASTM International:
1. ASTM B117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.
D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.
E. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126 - 2
B. Product Data: Submit data indicating:
1. Cooling and heating capacities.
2. Dimensions.
3. Weights.
4. Rough-in connections and connection requirements.
5. Electrical requirements with electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
6. Controls.
7. Accessories.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit assembly, support details, connection
requirements, and include start-up instructions.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of controls installed remotely from units.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating
instructions, installation instructions, and maintenance and repair data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Cooling Capacity: Rate in accordance with ARI 210/240.
B. Sound Rating: Measure in accordance with ARI 270.
C. Insulation and adhesives: Meet requirements of NFPA 90A.
D. Perform Work in accordance with codes adopted by authority having jurisdiction.
E. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years' documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years'
documented experience approved by manufacturer.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126 - 3
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and
protecting products.
B. Accept units and components on site in factory protective containers, with factory shipping
skids and lifting lugs. Inspect for damage.
C. Comply with manufacturer's installation instruction for rigging, unloading and transporting
units.
D. Protect units from weather and construction traffic by storing in dry, roofed location.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination.
B. Coordinate installation of condensing units with concrete pad.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for warranties.
B. Furnish five-year manufacturer's warranty for compressors and one-year manufacturer’s
warranty for all other parts.
1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenance service.
B. Furnish service and maintenance of equipment for one year from Date of Substantial
Completion. Include maintenance items as shown in manufacturer's operating and maintenance
data, including filter replacements, fan belt replacement, and controls checkout and adjustments.
1.12 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenance
materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CU-1, CU-2, CU-3 CONDENSING UNITS
A. General: Factory assembled and tested air cooled condensing units, consisting of casing,
compressor, condenser, coil, condenser fan and motor, and unit controls.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126 - 4
B. Unit Casings: Exposed casing surfaces constructed of galvanized steel with manufacturer's
standard baked enamel finish. Designed for outdoor installation and complete with weather
protection for components and controls, and complete with removable panels for required
access to compressors, controls, condenser fans, motors, and drives.
C. Compressor: Single refrigeration circuit with two-stage scroll type compressor, resiliently
mounted, with internal motor overload protection and noise enclosure.
D. Condenser Coil: Constructed of copper or aluminum tubing mechanically bonded to aluminum
or copper fins, factory leak and pressure tested.
E. Controls: Furnish operating and safety controls including high and low pressure cutouts.
Control transformer. Furnish magnetic contactors for compressor and condenser fan motors.
F. Condenser Fans and Drives: Direct drive propeller fans statically and dynamically balanced.
Permanently lubricated ball bearing type motors with built-in thermal overload protection.
Furnish high efficiency fan motors.
G. Condensing Unit Accessories: Furnish the following accessories:
1. Anti-short cycle timer.
2. Vibration isolators.
H. Refrigeration specialties: Furnish the following:
1. Charge of compressor oil.
2. Holding charge of refrigerant.
3. Filter drier.
4. Liquid line sight glass and moisture indicator.
5. Shut-off valves on suction and liquid piping.
6. Charging valve.
7. Oil level sight glass.
8. Crankcase heater.
9. Pressure relief device.
I. Refrigerant: Furnish charge of refrigerant R410-A.
J. Performance and Electrical Data: Refer to Air Cooled Condensing Units Schedule on Drawing.
K. Manufacturer and Model: Refer to Air Cooled Condensing Units Schedule on Drawing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before
starting work.
B. Verify concrete pad for condensing unit is ready for unit installation.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126 - 5
3.2 INSTALLATION - CONDENSING UNIT
A. Install condensing units on vibration isolators and anchor units to housekeeping pads.
B. Install refrigerant piping from unit to condensing unit in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions. Install refrigerant specialties furnished with unit.
C. Evacuate refrigerant piping and install initial charge of refrigerant.
D. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting.
E. Install control wiring between air handling unit, condensing unit, and field installed accessories.
F. Install connection to electrical power wiring in accordance with Section 260503.
3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for manufacturer’s field services.
B. Furnish initial start-up and shutdown during first year of operation, including routine servicing
and checkout.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.
B. Vacuum clean coils and inside of unit cabinet.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for demonstration and
training.
B. Demonstrate starting, maintenance, and operation of condensing unit.
3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished
Work.
END OF SECTION 238126
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CONVECTION HEATING AND COOLING UNITS 238200 - 1
SECTION 238200 - CONVECTION HEATING AND COOLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Air coils.
2. Cabinet unit heaters.
3. Fan coil units.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 230700 - HVAC Insulation: Execution requirements for insulation specified by
this section.
2. Section 232113 - Hydronic Piping: Execution requirements for connection of chilled
water, hot water, and drain piping to units specified by this section.
3. Section 232116 - Hydronic Piping Specialties: Product requirements for hydronic piping
specialties for placement by this section.
4. Section 233100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings: Execution requirements for ducts specified
by this section.
5. Section 260503 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for electric
connection to units specified by this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute:
1. ARI 410 - Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils.
B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors:
1. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit coil and frame configurations, dimensions, materials, rows, connections,
and rough-in dimensions. Submit mechanical and electrical service locations, capacities and
accessories or optional items.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CONVECTION HEATING AND COOLING UNITS 238200 - 2
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and locations of access
doors in radiation cabinets required for access to valves.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturers descriptive literature, operating
instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listings.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with codes adopted by authority having jurisdiction.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years' documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years'
documented experience approved by manufacturer.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Accept units on site in factory packing. Inspect for damage. Store under roof.
C. Protect coil fins from crushing and bending by leaving in shipping cases until installation, and
by storing indoors. Protect coils from entry of dirt and debris with pipe caps or plugs.
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B. Furnish one-year manufacturer's warranty for fan-coil units, cabinet heaters and duct mounted
heating coils.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CONVECTION HEATING AND COOLING UNITS 238200 - 3
1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
B. Furnish two sets of filters.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HC-1, HC-2, HC-3 AIR COILS
A. Fabrication:
1. Tubes: seamless copper tubing arranged in parallel or staggered pattern, expanded into
fins, brazed joints.
2. Fins: Aluminum continuous plate type with full fin collars or individual helical spiral
finned tube type wound under tension.
3. Casing: Die formed channel frame of 16 gage galvanized steel with mounting holes on 3
inch centers.
B. Water Heating Coils:
1. Headers: Cast iron with tubes expanded into header, seamless copper tube with silver
brazed joints, or prime coated steel pipe with brazed joints.
2. Leak Testing: Air test under water to 200 psig for working pressure of 200 psig and 200
degrees F.
3. Configuration: Self draining circuitry, with threaded plugs for drain and vent; serpentine
type with return bends on smaller sizes and return headers on larger sizes.
4. Fin Spacing: no more than 12 fins per inch.
2.2 CH-1 CABINET UNIT HEATERS
A. Coils: Evenly spaced aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes, designed for 100 psi
and 220 degrees F.
B. Cabinet: 0.0598 inch thick steel with exposed corners and edges rounded, easily removed
panels, glass fiber insulation and integral air outlet and inlet grilles.
C. Finish: Factory applied baked enamel of color as selected on visible surfaces of enclosure or
cabinet.
D. Fans: Centrifugal forward-curved double-width wheels, statically and dynamically balanced,
direct driven.
E. Motor: ECM, tap wound multiple speed permanent split capacitor, or shaded pole with sleeve
bearings, resiliently mounted.
F. Control: Multiple speed switch or potentiometer, factory wired, located in cabinet.
G. Filter: Easily removed 1 inch thick glass fiber throw-away type, located to filter air before coil.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CONVECTION HEATING AND COOLING UNITS 238200 - 4
H. Capacity: Refer to Fan Coil and Cabinet Heater Schedule on Drawing.
I. Electrical Characteristics: Refer to Fan Coil and Cabinet Heater Schedule on Drawing.
2.3 FC-1 FAN COIL UNITS
A. Coils: Evenly spaced aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes, designed for 200 psi
and 220 degrees F.
B. Cabinet: 0.0598 inch thick steel with exposed corners and edges rounded, easily removed
panels, glass fiber insulation and integral air outlet and inlet duct connections.
C. Fans: Centrifugal forward-curved double-width wheels, statically and dynamically balanced,
direct driven.
D. Motor: ECM, tap wound multiple speed permanent split capacitor or shaded pole with sleeve
bearings, resiliently mounted.
E. Control: Multiple speed switch or potentiometer, factory wired, located in cabinet.
F. Filter: Easily removed 1 inch thick glass fiber throw-away type, located to filter air before coil.
G. Capacity: Refer to Fan Coil and Cabinet Heater Schedule on Drawing.
H. Electrical Characteristics: Refer to Fan Coil and Cabinet Heater Schedule on Drawing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify wall construction is ready for installation.
C. Verify ductwork is ready for installation.
D. Verify concealed blocking and supports are in place and connections are correctly located.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install air coils in ducts and casings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards, Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 233100.
B. Support air coil sections independent of piping on steel channel or double angle frames and
secure to casings. Install with airtight seal between coil and duct or casing.
C. Protect coils to prevent damage to fins and flanges. Comb out bent fins.
06/08/2018
1740 - ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CONVECTION HEATING AND COOLING UNITS 238200 - 5
D. Install coils level.
E. Make connections to coils with unions.
F. On water coils, install pipe and accessories according to Heating Coil Mixing Valve Piping
Schematic on Drawings.
G. Insulate headers located outside airflow, insulate as specified for piping. Refer to Section
230700.
H. Install equipment exposed to finished areas after walls and ceilings are finished and painted.
Avoid damage.
I. Protection: Install finished cabinet units with protective covers during remainder of
construction.
J. Cabinet Unit Heaters: Install at locations as indicated on Drawings.
K. Fan-Coil Units: Install at locations as indicated on Drawings.
L. Hydronic Units: Install pipe and accessories according to Heating Coil Mixing Valve Piping
Schematic on Drawings.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning.
B. After construction is completed, including painting, clean exposed surfaces of units. Vacuum
clean coils and inside of cabinets.
C. Touch-up marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets, using finish materials
furnished by manufacturer.
D. Install new filters.
END OF SECTION 238200
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberiln Architects
SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS 260519 - 1
SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Copper building wire rated 600 V or less.
2. Metal-clad cable, Type MC, rated 600 V or less.
3. Armored cable, Type AC, rated 600 V or less.
4. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables" for control systems
communications cables and Classes 1, 2, and 3 control cables.
2. Section 271513 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling" for twisted pair cabling
used for data circuits.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. RoHS: Restriction of Hazardous Substances.
B. VFC: Variable-frequency controller.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.5 Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COPPER BUILDING WIRE
A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying conductor with
an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberiln Architects
SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS 260519 - 2
1. Alpha Wire Company.
2. American Bare Conductor.
3. Belden Inc.
4. Cerro Wire LLC.
5. Encore Wire Corporation.
6. General Cable Technologies Corporation.
7. Okonite Company.
8. Service Wire Co.
9. Southwire Company.
C. Standards:
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for
intended location and use.
2. RoHS compliant.
3. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's
"Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."
D. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B 8
for stranded conductors.
E. Conductor Insulation:
1. Type THHN and Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83.
2.2 METAL-CLAD CABLE, TYPE MC
A. Description: A factory assembly of one or more current-carrying insulated conductors in an
overall metallic sheath.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International.
2. Alpha Wire Company.
3. American Bare Conductor.
4. Belden Inc.
5. Encore Wire Corporation.
6. General Cable Technologies Corporation.
7. Okonite Company.
8. Service Wire Co.
9. Southwire Company.
C. Standards:
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for
intended location and use.
2. Comply with UL 1569.
3. RoHS compliant.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberiln Architects
SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS 260519 - 3
4. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's
"Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."
D. Circuits:
1. Single circuit and multi-circuit with color-coded conductors.
2. Power-Limited Fire-Alarm Circuits: Comply with UL 1424.
E. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B 8
for stranded conductors.
F. Ground Conductor: Insulated.
G. Conductor Insulation:
1. Type TFN/THHN/THWN-2: Comply with UL 83.
2. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44.
H. Armor: Steel, interlocked.
I. Jacket: PVC applied over armor.
2.3 ARMORED CABLE, TYPE AC
A. Description: A factory assembly of insulated current-carrying conductors with or without an
equipment grounding conductor in an overall metallic sheath.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International.
2. Alpha Wire Company.
3. American Bare Conductor.
4. Belden Inc.
5. Cerro Wire LLC.
6. Encore Wire Corporation.
7. General Cable Technologies Corporation.
8. Okonite Company.
9. Service Wire Co.
C. Standards:
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for
intended location and use.
2. RoHS compliant.
3. Comply with UL 4.
4. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's
"Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."
D. Circuits:
1. Single circuit and multi-circuit with color-coded conductors.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberiln Architects
SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS 260519 - 4
2. Power-Limited Fire-Alarm Circuits: Comply with UL 1424.
E. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B 8
for stranded conductors.
F. Ground Conductor: Insulated.
G. Conductor Insulation: Type THHN/THWN-2. Comply with UL 83.
H. Armor: Steel, interlocked.
2.4 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors, splices, and lugs of size, ampacity rating, material,
type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. 3M Electrical Products.
2. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International.
3. Gardner Bender.
4. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.
5. Ideal Industries, Inc.
6. ILSCO.
7. NSi Industries LLC.
8. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation.
9. Service Wire Co.
C. Jacketed Cable Connectors: For steel and aluminum jacketed cables, zinc die-cast with set
screws, designed to connect conductors specified in this Section.
D. Lugs: One piece, seamless, designed to terminate conductors specified in this Section.
1. Material: Copper.
2. Type: One hole with standard barrels.
3. Termination: Compression.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders: Copper; solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and
larger.
C. Power-Limited Fire Alarm and Control: Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberiln Architects
SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS 260519 - 5
3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND
WIRING METHODS
A. Service Entrance: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2,
single conductors in raceway.
C. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:
Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
D. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors
in raceway.
E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2, single
conductors in raceway Armored cable, Type AC Metal-clad cable, Type MC.
F. PV Circuits: Type PV for PV source circuits rated at 600 V.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to
Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and
cables.
C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will
not damage cables or raceway.
E. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
F. Do not use AC or MC for dedicated circuits. Circuits dedicated to a single piece of equipment
shall be run in EMT conduit.
G. Do not use AC or MC for home runs. There shall be no AC or MC connections to panelboards.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A-486B.
B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that
possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unsliced conductors.
C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberiln Architects
SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS 260519 - 6
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of
conductor, and identify as spare conductor.
3.6 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration
Firestopping."
END OF SECTION 260519
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1
SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Advanced Lightning Technology, Ltd.
2. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems.
3. Dossert; AFL Telecommunications LLC.
4. ERICO International Corporation.
5. Fushi Copperweld Inc.
6. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC.
7. Harger Lightning & Grounding.
8. ILSCO.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 2
9. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation.
10. Robbins Lightning, Inc.
11. Siemens Industry, Inc., Energy Management Division.
12. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.
2.3 CONDUCTORS
A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by
applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
2.4 CONNECTORS
A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in
which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items
connected.
B. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for
materials being joined and installation conditions.
C. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire
terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.
D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy, with two wire terminals.
E. Beam Clamps: Mechanical type, terminal, ground wire access from four directions, with dual,
tin-plated or silicon bronze bolts.
F. Cable-to-Cable Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy.
G. Cable Tray Ground Clamp: Mechanical type, zinc-plated malleable iron.
H. Conduit Hubs: Mechanical type, terminal with threaded hub.
I. Ground Rod Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal with hex head bolt.
J. Ground Rod Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal with hex head bolt.
K. Lay-in Lug Connector: Mechanical type, copper rated for direct burial terminal with set screw.
L. Service Post Connectors: Mechanical type, bronze alloy terminal, in short- and long-stud
lengths, capable of single and double conductor connections.
M. Signal Reference Grid Clamp: Mechanical type, stamped-steel terminal with hex head screw.
N. Straps: Solid copper,. Rated for 600 A.
O. Tower Ground Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal one-piece clamp.
P. U-Bolt Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal listed for direct burial.
Q. Water Pipe Clamps:
1. Mechanical type, two pieces with zinc-plated bolts.
a. Material: Die-cast zinc alloy.
b. Listed for direct burial.
2. U-bolt type with malleable-iron clamp and copper ground connector.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 3
2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 5/8 by 96 inches.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for
No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.
B. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise
indicated.
3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.
4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE
A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the
ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses.
3.3 GROUNDING SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMS
A. Generator: Install grounding electrode(s) at the generator location. The electrode shall be
connected to the equipment grounding conductor and to the frame of the generator.
3.4 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.
B. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted
electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers,
humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct
and connected metallic piping.
C. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated
equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond
conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.
D. Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate
insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with
branch-circuit conductors.
E. Metallic Fences: Comply with requirements of IEEE C2.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 4
1. Grounding Conductor: Bare copper, not less than No. 8 AWG.
2. Gates: Shall be bonded to the grounding conductor with a flexible bonding jumper.
3. Barbed Wire: Strands shall be bonded to the grounding conductor.
3.5 FENCE GROUNDING
A. Fence Grounding: Install at maximum intervals of 1500 feet except as follows:
1. Fences within 100 Feet of Buildings, Structures, Walkways, and Roadways: Ground at
maximum intervals of 750 feet.
a. Gates and Other Fence Openings: Ground fence on each side of opening.
1) Bond metal gates to gate posts.
2) Bond across openings, with and without gates, except at openings indicated
as intentional fence discontinuities. Use No. 2 AWG wire and bury it at
least 18 inches below finished grade.
B. Protection at Crossings of Overhead Electrical Power Lines: Ground fence at location of
crossing and at a maximum distance of 150 feet on each side of crossing.
C. Fences Enclosing Electrical Power Distribution Equipment: Ground as required by IEEE C2
unless otherwise indicated.
D. Grounding Method: At each grounding location, drive a grounding rod vertically until the top
is 6 inches below finished grade. Connect rod to fence with No. 6 AWG conductor. Connect
conductor to each fence component at grounding location.
E. Bonding Method for Gates: Connect bonding jumper between gate post and gate frame.
F. Bonding to Lightning-Protection System: If fence terminates at lightning-protected building or
structure, ground the fence and bond the fence grounding conductor to lightning-protection
down conductor or lightning-protection grounding conductor, complying with NFPA 780.
3.6 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise
indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may
be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as
otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if
any.
2. Use exothermic welds for all below-grade connections.
3. For grounding electrode system, install at least 2 rods spaced at least one-rod length from
each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and
connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 5
C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance
except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate
any adjacent parts.
2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install
bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection
is required, use a bolted clamp.
D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,
from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service
entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes;
use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of
the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect
grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or
sleeve to conductor at each end.
2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water
meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
E. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of
associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond
across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.
F. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner
column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart.
G. Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode (Ufer Ground): Fabricate according to NFPA 70; use a
minimum of 20 feet of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG.
1. If concrete foundation is less than 20 feet long, coil excess conductor within base of
foundation.
2. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor
bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building's grounding grid
or to grounding electrode external to concrete.
H. Connections: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized.
Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct
contact are galvanically compatible.
1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make
contact points closer in order of galvanic series.
2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.
3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical
clamps.
4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized-steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and
mechanical clamps.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 6
5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future
penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted,
electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance
level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal. Make tests at
ground rods before any conductors are connected.
a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of
precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural
drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of
reducing natural ground resistance.
b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.
4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each ground rod and ground-rod assembly, and
other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the
record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at
each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect
test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.
C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
E. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:
1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.
F. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect
promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
END OF SECTION 260526
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 1
SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel slotted support systems.
2. Conduit and cable support devices.
3. Mounting, anchoring, and attachment components, including powder-actuated fasteners,
mechanical expansion anchors, concrete inserts, clamps, through bolts, toggle bolts, and
hanger rods.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for products and
installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for the following:
a. Slotted support systems, hardware, and accessories.
b. Clamps.
c. Hangers.
d. Sockets.
e. Eye nuts.
f. Fasteners.
g. Anchors.
h. Saddles.
i. Brackets.
2. Include rated capacities and furnished specialties and accessories.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 2
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For hangers and supports for electrical systems.
1. Include design calculations and details of hangers.
2. Include design calculations for seismic restraints.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for hangers and supports for electrical equipment and
systems, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000
"Quality Requirements," to design hanger and support system.
B. Seismic Performance: Hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the supported equipment and systems will remain in place
without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the
supported equipment and systems will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Component Importance Factor: 1.5.
2.2 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Preformed steel channels and angles with minimum 13/32-inch-
diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c. in at least one surface.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International.
b. B-line, an Eaton business.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 3
c. ERICO International Corporation.
d. Flex-Strut Inc.
e. G-Strut.
f. Gripple Inc.
g. GS Metals Corp.
h. Haydon Corporation.
i. Metal Ties Innovation.
j. MIRO Industries.
k. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.
l. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International.
m. Wesanco, Inc.
2. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
3. Material for Channel, Fittings, and Accessories: Galvanized steel.
4. Channel Width: Selected for applicable load criteria.
5. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-
4.
6. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipping.
B. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for
types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
C. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their
supports to building surfaces include the following:
1. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1) B-line, an Eaton business.
2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.
3) Hilti, Inc.
4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
5) MKT Fastening, LLC.
2. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 units are suitable for
attached structural element.
3. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
4. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
5. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with the following standards for application and installation requirements of hangers
and supports, except where requirements on Drawings or in this Section are stricter:
1. NECA 1.
2. NECA 101
B. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping
materials and installation for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.
C. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533 "Raceways and
Boxes for Electrical Systems."
D. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceways: Space supports for
EMT, IMC, and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings that
are less than those stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.
E. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slottedsupport
system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding
specified design load limits.
1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.
3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this
article.
B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT may be
supported by openings through structure members, according to NFPA 70.
C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength
will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.
Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported
components plus 200 lb.
D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten
electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods
unless otherwise indicated by code:
1. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
2. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
3. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers
and nuts.
4. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
5. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 5
transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means
that comply with seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.
E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid the need for
reinforcing bars.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for site-
fabricated metal supports.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.4 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" Section 099123
"Interior Painting" for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.
END OF SECTION 260529
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND
BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
260533 - 1
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal conduits and fittings.
2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings.
3. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping at conduit and box entrances.
2. Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for conduits, wireways,
surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, faceplate adapters, enclosures, cabinets, and
handholes serving communications systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.
B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.
C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover
enclosures, and cabinets.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
A. Metal Conduit:
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND
BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
260533 - 2
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International.
b. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International.
c. Anamet Electrical, Inc.
d. Calconduit.
e. Electri-Flex Company.
f. FSR Inc.
g. Korkap.
h. NEC, Inc.
i. Opti-Com Manufacturing Network, Inc (OMNI).
2. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing
agency, and marked for intended location and application.
3. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
4. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.
5. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated.
a. Comply with NEMA RN 1.
b. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.
6. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
7. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.
8. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.
B. Metal Fittings:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, undefined:
a. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International.
b. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International.
c. Anamet Electrical, Inc.
d. Calconduit.
e. Electri-Flex Company.
f. FSR Inc.
g. Korkap.
h. NEC, Inc.
i. NewBasis.
2. Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.
3. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing
agency, and marked for intended location and application.
4. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use.
5. Fittings for EMT:
a. Material: Steel.
b. Type: Setscrew or compression.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND
BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
260533 - 3
6. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated
for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding
jumper.
7. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with
overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.
C. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities
having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and
protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.
2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
A. Nonmetallic Conduit:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, undefined:
a. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International.
b. Anamet Electrical, Inc.
c. Arnco Corporation.
d. CANTEX INC.
e. CertainTeed Corporation.
f. Champion Fiberglass, Inc.
g. Condux International, Inc.
h. Electri-Flex Company.
i. FRE Composites.
2. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduit shall be listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
3. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653.
4. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise
indicated.
5. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660.
B. Nonmetallic Fittings:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, undefined:
a. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International.
b. Anamet Electrical, Inc.
c. Arnco Corporation.
d. CANTEX INC.
e. CertainTeed Corporation.
f. Champion Fiberglass, Inc.
g. Condux International, Inc.
h. Electri-Flex Company.
i. FRE Composites.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND
BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
260533 - 4
2. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use.
3. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type
and material.
a. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.
4. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer.
2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, undefined:
1. Adalet.
2. Crouse-Hinds, an Eaton business.
3. EGS/Appleton Electric.
4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.
5. FSR Inc.
6. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection.
7. Hubbell Incorporated.
8. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
9. Kraloy.
10. Milbank Manufacturing Co.
11. MonoSystems, Inc.
12. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation.
13. Oldcastle Enclosure Solutions.
14. Plasti-Bond.
15. RACO; Hubbell.
16. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.
17. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures.
18. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.
19. Topaz Electric; a division of Topaz Lighting Corp.
20. Wiremold / Legrand.
B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets
installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.
C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.
D. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.
E. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge
cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND
BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
260533 - 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed Conduit: IMC.
2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: EMT.
3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC.
4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.
2. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet
locations.
4. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 nonmetallic
in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size.
D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this
type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after
installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and
apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.
3. EMT: Use setscrew or compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with
NEMA FB 2.20.
E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.
F. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.
G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"
for hangers and supports.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND
BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
260533 - 6
B. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements
on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits.
Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and
number of floors.
C. Do not install raceways or electrical items on any "explosion-relief" walls or rotating
equipment.
D. Do not fasten conduits onto the bottom side of a metal deck roof.
E. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.
Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
F. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
G. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
H. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for
control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of
changes in direction.
I. Make bends in raceway using large-radius preformed ells. Field bending shall be according to
NFPA 70 minimum radii requirements. Use only equipment specifically designed for material
and size involved.
J. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install
conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
K. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.
L. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:
1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main
reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab
support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals.
2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion
fittings.
3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 1 inch of concrete cover in all directions.
4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for
each specific location.
5. Change from ENT to GRC or IMC before rising above floor.
M. Stub-Ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:
1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways.
2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or
in an enclosure.
N. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply
listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound
manufacturer's written instructions.
O. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive
compound prior to assembly.
P. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings
to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND
BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
260533 - 7
Q. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes
or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal
bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated
throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.
R. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install
locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.
S. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in
the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.
T. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter
or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.
U. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not
less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap
underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.
V. Surface Raceways:
1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points.
2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not
exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section.
Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue
are not acceptable support methods.
W. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with
listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a
blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway
sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.
X. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or
boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all
raceways at the following points:
1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated
spaces.
2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.
3. Conduit extending from interior to exterior of building.
4. Conduit extending into pressurized duct and equipment.
5. Conduit extending into pressurized zones that are automatically controlled to maintain
different pressure set points.
6. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
Y. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.
Z. Expansion-Joint Fittings:
1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature
change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install
in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND
BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
260533 - 8
temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that
exceeds 100 feet.
2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each
of the following locations:
a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change.
b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.
c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F
temperature change.
d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.
3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot
of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install
fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of
length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits.
4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure
expansion joints.
5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected
according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time
of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.
AA. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 36 inches of
flexible conduit for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for
transformers and motors.
1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.
2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
BB. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not
individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to
center of box unless otherwise indicated.
CC. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,
and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a
raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.
DD. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same
vertical channel.
EE. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.
FF. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing
members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.
GG. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by
conduits.
HH. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
II. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND
BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
260533 - 9
3.3 FIRESTOPPING
A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with
requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating
recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 260533
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260548.16 - SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548.16 - 1
SECTION 260548.16 - SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Restraint channel bracings.
2. Restraint cables.
3. Seismic-restraint accessories.
4. Mechanical anchor bolts.
5. Adhesive anchor bolts.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for commonly used
electrical supports and installation requirements.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each seismic-restraint device.
1. Include design calculations and details for selecting seismic restraints complying with
performance requirements, design criteria, and analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
2. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading caused by equipment weight,
operation, and seismic forces required to select seismic restraints and for designing
vibration isolation bases.
a. Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for equipment
mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Sections for equipment
mounted outdoors.
3. Seismic-Restraint Details:
a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints.
Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260548.16 - SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548.16 - 2
b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to
the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and
spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and
values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate
association with vibration isolation devices.
c. Coordinate seismic-restraint and vibration isolation details with wind-restraint
details required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in
other Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.
d. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an evaluation service member of
ICC-ES, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval
(tests or calculations).
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are
more stringent.
B. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis. They shall
bear anchorage preapproval from OSHPD in addition to preapproval, showing maximum
seismic-restraint ratings, by ICC-ES or another agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations.
If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred.
Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) that support seismic-restraint designs
must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic-Restraint Loading:
1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: D.
2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: III.
a. Component Importance Factor: 1.5.
b. Component Response Modification Factor: 1.5.
c. Component Amplification Factor: 1.0.
2.2 RESTRAINT CHANNEL BRACINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. B-line, an Eaton business.
2. Hilti, Inc.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260548.16 - SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548.16 - 3
3. Mason Industries, Inc.
4. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International.
A. Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel
channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building
structure at the other end, with other matching components, and with corrosion-resistant
coating; rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.
2.3 RESTRAINT CABLES
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Gripple Inc.
2. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
3. Vibration & Seismic Technologies, LLC.
4. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.
A. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized-steel cables. End connections made of steel
assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service;
with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.
2.4 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT ACCESSORIES
C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. B-line, an Eaton business.
2. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
3. Mason Industries, Inc.
4. TOLCO; a brand of NIBCO INC.
A. Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.
B. Hinged and Swivel Brace Attachments: Multifunctional steel connectors for attaching hangers
to rigid channel bracings.
C. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid
equipment mountings and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.
D. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene
elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings and matched to type and size
of attachment devices used.
E. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant
neoprene, with a flat washer face.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260548.16 - SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548.16 - 4
2.5 MECHANICAL ANCHOR BOLTS
D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. B-line, an Eaton business.
2. Hilti, Inc.
3. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
4. Mason Industries, Inc.
A. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel
for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with
strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.
2.6 ADHESIVE ANCHOR BOLTS
E. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Hilti, Inc.
2. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
3. Mason Industries, Inc.
A. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing PVC or urethane
methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive.
Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless
steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as
tested according to ASTM E 488.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations
before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps
approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260548.16 - SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548.16 - 5
B. Hanger-Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger-rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings
to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods caused by seismic forces.
C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of
components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads
within specified loading limits.
3.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment
attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and
formwork specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B. Equipment and Hanger Restraints:
1. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance
between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.
2. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.
C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
D. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide
resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.
E. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at
flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
F. Drilled-in Anchors:
1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for
anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling.
Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are
encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and
telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved
full design strength.
3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty
sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to
which anchor is to be fastened.
4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to
installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole
and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air
pockets in the adhesive.
5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque using a torque wrench.
6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior
applications.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260548.16 - SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548.16 - 6
3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION
A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways
where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different
structural elements, and where connection is terminated to equipment that is anchored to a
different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment.
END OF SECTION 260548.16
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 1
SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Color and legend requirements for raceways, conductors, and warning labels and signs.
2. Labels.
3. Tags.
4. Signs.
5. Fasteners for labels and signs.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for electrical identification products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NFPA 70.
B. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
C. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
D. Comply with NFPA 70E and Section 260573.19 "Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis" requirements for
arc-flash warning labels.
E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks
used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 2
F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.2 COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS
A. Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:
1. Black letters on an orange field.
2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.
B. Warning Label Colors:
1. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.
C. Warning labels and signs shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -
EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN
FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."
D. Equipment Identification Labels:
1. Black letters on a white field.
2.3 LABELS
A. Self-Adhesive Labels: Polyester, thermal, transfer-printed, 3-mil- thick, multicolor, weather-
and UV-resistant, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for intended use and location.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. A'n D Cable Products.
b. Brady Corporation.
c. Brother International Corporation.
d. Emedco.
e. Grafoplast Wire Markers.
f. HellermannTyton.
g. Ideal Industries, Inc.
h. LEM Products Inc.
i. Marking Services, Inc.
j. Panduit Corp.
k. Seton Identification Products.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 3
1. Minimum Nominal Size:
a. 1-1/2 by 6 inches for raceway and conductors.
b. 3-1/2 by 5 inches for equipment.
c. As required by authorities having jurisdiction.
2.4 TAGS
A. Write-on Tags:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Carlton Industries, LP.
b. LEM Products Inc.
c. Seton Identification Products.
2. Polyester Tags: 0.010 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for
attachment.
3. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker
recommended by printer manufacturer.
2.5 SIGNS
A. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Brady Corporation.
b. Carlton Industries, LP.
c. Emedco.
d. Marking Services, Inc.
1. Engraved legend.
2. Thickness:
a. For signs up to 20 sq. in., minimum 1/16 inch thick.
b. For signs larger than 20 sq. in., 1/8 inch thick.
c. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.
d. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners with 1/4-inch grommets in corners for
mounting.
e. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable
equipment.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 4
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine
screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Before applying electrical identification products, clean
substrates of substances that could impair bond, using materials and methods recommended by
manufacturer of identification product.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Verify and coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with
requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings,
manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. Use consistent
designations throughout Project.
B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
C. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
D. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation
and maintenance manual.
E. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
F. Install signs with approved legend to facilitate proper identification, operation, and maintenance
of electrical systems and connected items.
G. System Identification for Raceways and Cables under 600 V: Identification shall completely
encircle cable or conduit. Place identification of two-color markings in contact, side by side.
1. Secure tight to surface of conductor, cable, or raceway.
H. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels, signs, and letters to those appropriate for
viewing from the floor.
I. Self-Adhesive Labels:
1. On each item, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams,
schedules, and operation and maintenance manual.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-
1/2-inch- high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.
J. Underground Line Warning Tape:
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 5
1. During backfilling of trenches, install continuous underground-line warning tape directly
above cable or raceway at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where
width of multiple lines installed in a common trench exceeds 16 inches overall.
2. Install underground-line warning tape for direct-buried cables and cables in raceways.
K. Write-on Tags:
1. Place in a location with high visibility and accessibility.
2. Secure using cable ties.
L. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs:
1. Attach signs that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the
location and substrate.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-
1/2-inch- high sign; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A. Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without
interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Install access doors or panels to
provide view of identifying devices.
B. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, pull points,
and locations of high visibility. Identify by system and circuit designation.
C. Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations,
provide self-adhesive labels with the conductor designation.
D. Locations of Underground Lines: Underground-line warning tape for power, lighting,
communication, and control wiring and optical-fiber cable.
E. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-
adhesive labels.
1. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
2. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of
equipment, including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Power-transfer switches.
b. Controls with external control power connections.
F. Arc Flash Warning Labeling: Self-adhesive labels.
G. Equipment Identification Labels:
1. Indoor Equipment: Laminated acrylic or melamine plastic sign.
2. Outdoor Equipment: Laminated acrylic or melamine sign.
3. Equipment to Be Labeled:
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 6
a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by
panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be in the form of a
engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.
b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets.
c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
d. Switchgear.
e. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.
f. Enclosed switches.
g. Enclosed circuit breakers.
h. Enclosed controllers.
i. Variable-speed controllers.
j. Contactors.
k. Receptacles: Panelbaord designation and circuit number.
END OF SECTION 260553
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDIES 260573.13 - 1
SECTION 260573.13 - SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes a computer-based, fault-current study to determine the minimum interrupting
capacity of circuit protective devices.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. Existing to remain
items shall remain functional throughout the construction period.
B. Field Adjusting Agency: An independent electrical testing agency with full-time employees and
the capability to adjust devices and conduct testing indicated and that is a member company of
NETA.
C. One-Line Diagram: A diagram that shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the
course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used
therein.
D. Power System Analysis Software Developer: An entity that commercially develops, maintains,
and distributes computer software used for power system studies.
E. Power Systems Analysis Specialist: Professional engineer in charge of performing the study and
documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located.
F. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removes
the affected portion of the circuit from the system.
G. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.
H. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to
the wiring system of the premises served.
I. Single-Line Diagram: See "One-Line Diagram."
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDIES 260573.13 - 2
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. For computer software program to be used for studies.
2. Submit the following after the approval of system protective devices submittals.
Submittals shall be in digital form.
a. Short-circuit study input data, including completed computer program input data
sheets.
b. Short-circuit study and equipment evaluation report; signed, dated, and sealed by a
qualified professional engineer.
1) Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of
distribution equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause
delay in equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Architect for
preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that selection of
devices and associated characteristics is satisfactory.
2) Revised one-line diagram, reflecting field investigation results and results of
short-circuit study.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data:
1. For Power Systems Analysis Software Developer.
2. For Power System Analysis Specialist.
3. For Field Adjusting Agency.
B. Product Certificates: For short-circuit study software, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. For overcurrent protective devices to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance
manuals.
2. The following are from the Short-Circuit Study Report:
a. Final one-line diagram.
b. Final Short-Circuit Study Report.
c. Short-circuit study data files.
d. Power system data.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Study shall be performed using commercially developed and distributed software designed
specifically for power system analysis.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDIES 260573.13 - 3
B. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this
Section.
C. Manual calculations are unacceptable.
1. Power System Analysis Software Qualifications: Computer program shall be designed to
perform short-circuit studies or have a function, component, or add-on module designed
to perform short-circuit studies.
2. Computer program shall be developed under the charge of a licensed professional
engineer who holds IEEE Computer Society's Certified Software Development
Professional certification.
D. Power Systems Analysis Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer licensed in the state
where Project is located. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct
supervision and control of this professional engineer.
E. Short-Circuit Study Certification: Short-Circuit Study Report shall be signed and sealed by
Power Systems Analysis Specialist.
F. Field Adjusting Agency Qualifications:
1. Employer of a NETA ETT-Certified Technician Level III or NICET Electrical Power
Testing Level III certification responsible for all field adjusting of the Work.
2. A member company of NETA.
3. Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. CGI CYME.
2. EDSA Micro Corporation.
3. ESA Inc.
4. Power Analytics, Corporation.
5. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.
B. Comply with IEEE 399 and IEEE 551.
1. Analytical features of power systems analysis software program shall have capability to
calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.
C. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-
characteristic curves as part of its output.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDIES 260573.13 - 4
2.2 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY REPORT CONTENTS
A. Executive summary of study findings.
B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms, and
guide for interpretation of results.
C. One-line diagram of modeled power system, showing the following:
1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings.
2. Conductor types, sizes, and lengths.
3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings.
4. Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings.
5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center, and panelboard designations and ratings.
6. Derating factors and environmental conditions.
7. Any revisions to electrical equipment required by the study.
D. Comments and recommendations for system improvements or revisions in a written document,
separate from one-line diagram.
E. Protective Device Evaluation:
1. Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to available short-circuit
currents. Verify that equipment withstand ratings exceed available short-circuit current at
equipment installation locations.
2. Tabulations of circuit breaker, fuse, and other protective device ratings versus calculated
short-circuit duties.
3. For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to or
higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.
4. For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication
factors listed in standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.
5. Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents;
verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors
at maximum ground-fault currents. Ensure that short-circuit withstand ratings are equal to
or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.
F. Short-Circuit Study Input Data:
1. One-line diagram of system being studied.
2. Power sources available.
3. Manufacturer, model, and interrupting rating of protective devices.
4. Conductors.
5. Transformer data.
G. Short-Circuit Study Output Reports:
1. Low-Voltage Fault Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the
following for each overcurrent device location:
a. Voltage.
b. Calculated fault-current magnitude and angle.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDIES 260573.13 - 5
c. Fault-point X/R ratio.
d. Equivalent impedance.
2. Momentary Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the
following for each overcurrent device location:
a. Voltage.
b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle.
c. Fault-point X/R ratio.
d. Calculated asymmetrical fault currents:
1) Based on fault-point X/R ratio.
2) Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 1.6.
3) Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 2.7.
3. Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the
following for each overcurrent device location:
a. Voltage.
b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle.
c. Fault-point X/R ratio.
d. No AC Decrement (NACD) ratio.
e. Equivalent impedance.
f. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a
symmetrical basis.
g. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a total basis.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 POWER SYSTEM DATA
A. Obtain all data necessary for conduct of the study.
1. Verify completeness of data supplied on one-line diagram. Call any discrepancies to
Architect's attention.
2. For equipment included as Work of this Project, use characteristics submitted under
provisions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project.
B. Gather and tabulate the required input data to support the short-circuit study. Comply with
requirements in Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for recording circuit protective
device characteristics. Record data on a Record Document copy of one-line diagram. Comply
with recommendations in IEEE 551 as to the amount of detail that is required to be acquired in
the field. Field data gathering shall be under direct supervision and control of the engineer in
charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its representative who holds
NETA ETT-Certified Technician Level III or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III
certification. Data include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Product Data for Project's overcurrent protective devices involved in overcurrent
protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDIES 260573.13 - 6
with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals,
input and output data, and recommended device settings.
2. Obtain electrical power utility impedance at the service.
3. Power sources and ties.
4. For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,
impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in percent, and phase shift.
5. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating, and
impedance.
6. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of
breaker, type of trip, SCCR, current rating, and breaker settings.
7. Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated
kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio.
8. Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, and
conductor material.
9. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation.
10. Conductor sizes, lengths, number, conductor material and conduit material (magnetic or
nonmagnetic).
11. Derating factors.
3.2 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY
A. Perform study following the general study procedures contained in IEEE 399.
B. Calculate short-circuit currents according to IEEE 551.
C. Base study on device characteristics supplied by device manufacturer.
D. Extent of electrical power system to be studied is indicated on Drawings.
E. Begin short-circuit current analysis at the service, extending down to system overcurrent
protective devices as follows:
1. To normal system low-voltage load buses where fault current is 10 kA or less.
F. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout
electrical distribution system for Project. Study all cases of system-switching configurations and
alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.
G. Include the ac fault-current decay from induction motors, synchronous motors, and
asynchronous generators and apply to low- and medium-voltage, three-phase ac systems. Also
account for the fault-current dc decrement to address asymmetrical requirements of interrupting
equipment.
H. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault and a
single line-to-ground fault at each equipment indicated on one-line diagram.
1. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault-current study for areas as
defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study.
I. Include in the report identification of any protective device applied outside its capacity.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDIES 260573.13 - 7
END OF SECTION 260573.13
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
COORDINATION STUDIES 260573.16 - 1
SECTION 260573.16 - COORDINATION STUDIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes computer-based, overcurrent protective device coordination studies to
determine overcurrent protective devices and to determine overcurrent protective device settings
for selective tripping.
1. Study results shall be used to determine coordination of series-rated devices.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. Existing
to remain items shall remain functional throughout the construction period.
B. Field Adjusting Agency: An independent electrical testing agency with full-time employees and
the capability to adjust devices and conduct testing indicated and that is a member company of
NETA.
C. One-Line Diagram: A diagram that shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the
course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used
therein.
D. Power System Analysis Software Developer: An entity that commercially develops, maintains,
and distributes computer software used for power system studies.
E. Power System Analysis Specialist: Professional engineer in charge of performing the study and
documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located.
F. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removes
the affected portion of the circuit from the system.
G. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.
H. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to
the wiring system of the premises served.
I. Single-Line Diagram: See "One-Line Diagram."
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
COORDINATION STUDIES 260573.16 - 2
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. For computer software program to be used for studies.
2. Submit the following after the approval of system protective devices submittals.
Submittals shall be in digital form.
a. Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data
sheets.
b. Study and equipment evaluation reports.
3. Overcurrent protective device coordination study report; signed, dated, and sealed by a
qualified professional engineer.
a. Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of distribution
equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in
equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Architect for preliminary
submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that selection of devices and associated
characteristics is satisfactory.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data:
1. For Power System Analysis Software Developer.
2. For Power Systems Analysis Specialist.
3. For Field Adjusting Agency.
B. Product Certificates: For overcurrent protective device coordination study software, certifying
compliance with IEEE 399.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For overcurrent protective devices to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
1. The following are from the Coordination Study Report:
a. Final one-line diagram.
b. Final protective device coordination study.
c. Coordination study data files.
d. List of all protective device settings.
e. Time-current coordination curves.
f. Power system data.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
COORDINATION STUDIES 260573.16 - 3
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Studies shall be performed using commercially developed and distributed software designed
specifically for power system analysis.
B. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this
Section.
C. Manual calculations are unacceptable.
D. Power System Analysis Software Qualifications:
1. Computer program shall be designed to perform coordination studies or have a function,
component, or add-on module designed to perform coordination studies.
2. Computer program shall be developed under the charge of a licensed professional
engineer who holds IEEE Computer Society's Certified Software Development
Professional certification.
E. Power Systems Analysis Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer licensed in the state
where Project is located. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct
supervision and control of this professional engineer.
F. Field Adjusting Agency Qualifications:
1. Employer of a NETA ETT-Certified Technician Level III responsible for all field
adjusting of the Work.
2. A member company of NETA.
3. Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. CGI CYME.
2. EDSA Micro Corporation.
3. ESA Inc.
4. Operation Technology, Inc.
5. Power Analytics, Corporation.
6. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.
B. Comply with IEEE 242 and IEEE 399.
C. Analytical features of device coordination study computer software program shall have the
capability to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in
IEEE 399.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
COORDINATION STUDIES 260573.16 - 4
D. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-
characteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device
settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate selective
coordination by computer-generated, time-current coordination plots.
1. Optional Features:
a. Arcing faults.
b. Simultaneous faults.
c. Explicit negative sequence.
d. Mutual coupling in zero sequence.
2.2 COORDINATION STUDY REPORT CONTENTS
A. Executive summary of study findings.
B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms, and
guide for interpretation of results.
C. One-line diagram of modeled power system, showing the following:
1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings.
2. Conductor types, sizes, and lengths.
3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings.
4. Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings.
5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center, and panelboard designations.
6. Any revisions to electrical equipment required by the study.
7. Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article.
a. Short-Circuit Study Output: As specified in "Short-Circuit Study Output Reports"
Paragraph in "Short-Circuit Study Report Contents" Article in Section 260573.13
"Short-Circuit Studies."
D. Protective Device Coordination Study:
1. Report recommended settings of protective devices, ready to be applied in the field. Use
manufacturer's data sheets for recording the recommended setting of overcurrent
protective devices when available.
a. Circuit Breakers:
1) Adjustable pickups and time delays (long time, short time, and ground).
2) Adjustable time-current characteristic.
3) Adjustable instantaneous pickup.
4) Recommendations on improved trip systems, if applicable.
b. Fuses: Show current rating, voltage, and class.
E. Time-Current Coordination Curves: Determine settings of overcurrent protective devices to
achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
COORDINATION STUDIES 260573.16 - 5
between devices installed in series, including power utility company's upstream devices.
Prepare separate sets of curves for the switching schemes and for emergency periods where the
power source is local generation. Show the following information:
1. Device tag and title, one-line diagram with legend identifying the portion of the system
covered.
2. Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting maximum symmetrical or
asymmetrical fault current to which the device is exposed.
3. Identify the device associated with each curve by manufacturer type, function, and, if
applicable, tap, time delay, and instantaneous settings recommended.
4. Plot the following listed characteristic curves, as applicable:
a. Power utility's overcurrent protective device.
b. Medium-voltage equipment overcurrent relays.
c. Medium- and low-voltage fuses including manufacturer's minimum melt, total
clearing, tolerance, and damage bands.
d. Low-voltage equipment circuit-breaker trip devices, including manufacturer's
tolerance bands.
e. Transformer full-load current, magnetizing inrush current, and ANSI through-fault
protection curves.
f. Cables and conductors damage curves.
g. Ground-fault protective devices.
h. Motor-starting characteristics and motor damage points.
i. Generator short-circuit decrement curve and generator damage point.
j. The largest feeder circuit breaker in each motor-control center and panelboard.
5. Maintain selectivity for tripping currents caused by overloads.
6. Maintain maximum achievable selectivity for tripping currents caused by overloads on
series-rated devices.
7. Provide adequate time margins between device characteristics such that selective
operation is achieved.
8. Comments and recommendations for system improvements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical
distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work. Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings.
1. Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been
assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved
prior to coordination study may not be used in study.
3.2 POWER SYSTEM DATA
A. Obtain all data necessary for conduct of the overcurrent protective device study.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
COORDINATION STUDIES 260573.16 - 6
1. Verify completeness of data supplied in one-line diagram on Drawings. Call any
discrepancies to Architect's attention.
2. For equipment included as Work of this Project, use characteristics submitted under
provisions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project.
B. Gather and tabulate all required input data to support the coordination study. List below is a
guide. Comply with recommendations in IEEE 551 for the amount of detail required to be
acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under direct supervision and control of the
engineer in charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its representative
who holds NETA ETT-Certified Technician Level III or NICET Electrical Power Testing
Level III certification. Data include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Sections and involved
in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags
that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective
device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.
2. Electrical power utility impedance at the service.
3. Power sources and ties.
4. Short-circuit current at each system bus (three phase and line to ground).
5. Full-load current of all loads.
6. Voltage level at each bus.
7. For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,
impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in percent, and phase shift.
8. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating, and
impedance.
9. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of
breaker, type of trip and available range of settings, SCCR, current rating, and breaker
settings.
10. Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated
kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio.
11. For relays, provide manufacturer and model designation, current transformer ratios,
potential transformer ratios, and relay settings.
12. Maximum demands from service meters.
13. Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, size,
and conductor material.
14. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation.
15. Low-voltage cable sizes, lengths, number, conductor material, and conduit material
(magnetic or nonmagnetic).
16. Medium-voltage cable sizes, lengths, conductor material, cable construction, metallic
shield performance parameters, and conduit material (magnetic or nonmagnetic).
17. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system one-line diagram, cross-
referenced with tag numbers on diagram, showing the following:
a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting
and stopping.
b. Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic inrush
current, and overload capability.
c. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of
start, and thermal-damage curve.
d. Generator thermal-damage curve.
e. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
COORDINATION STUDIES 260573.16 - 7
f. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility
company.
g. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated.
h. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes root mean square (rms)
symmetrical, ampere or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-
time adjustment range, and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.
i. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment range,
instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio for
overcurrent relays.
j. Switchgear, switchboards, motor-control centers, and panelboards ampacity, and
SCCR in amperes rms symmetrical.
k. Identify series-rated interrupting devices for a condition where the available fault
current is greater than the interrupting rating of downstream equipment. Obtain
device data details to allow verification that series application of these devices
complies with NFPA 70 and UL 489 requirements.
3.3 COORDINATION STUDY
A. Comply with IEEE 242 for calculating short-circuit currents and determining coordination time
intervals.
B. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.
C. Base study on device characteristics supplied by device manufacturer.
D. Extent of electrical power system to be studied is indicated on Drawings.
E. Begin analysis at the service, extending down to system overcurrent protective devices as
follows:
1. To normal system low-voltage load buses where fault current is 10 kA or less.
F. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout
electrical distribution system for Project. Study all cases of system-switching configurations and
alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.
G. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:
1. Device shall not operate in response to the following:
a. Inrush current when first energized.
b. Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current, whichever is
specified for that transformer.
c. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by
unusual loading or emergency conditions.
2. Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault
currents.
H. Motor Protection:
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
COORDINATION STUDIES 260573.16 - 8
1. Select protection for low-voltage motors according to IEEE 242 and NFPA 70.
2. Select protection for motors served at voltages more than 600 V according to IEEE 620.
I. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P-
32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and protection recommendations in IEEE 242. Demonstrate that
equipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time equivalent to the tripping
time of the primary relay protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determine
temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed
standards indicating conductor size and short-circuit current.
J. Generator Protection: Select protection according to manufacturer's written instructions and to
IEEE 242.
K. Include the ac fault-current decay from induction motors, synchronous motors, and
asynchronous generators and apply to low- and medium-voltage, three-phase ac systems. Also
account for fault-current dc decrement, to address asymmetrical requirements of interrupting
equipment.
L. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault and a
single line-to-ground fault at each equipment indicated on one-line diagram.
1. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault-current study for areas as
defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study.
M. Protective Device Evaluation:
1. Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short-circuit ratings.
2. Adequacy of switchgear, motor-control centers, and panelboard bus bars to withstand
short-circuit stresses.
3. Any application of series-rated devices shall be recertified, complying with requirements
in NFPA 70.
4. Include in the report identification of any protective device applied outside its capacity.
3.4 LOAD-FLOW AND VOLTAGE-DROP STUDY
A. Perform a load-flow and voltage-drop study to determine the steady-state loading profile of the
system. Analyze power system performance two times as follows:
1. Determine load flow and voltage drop based on full-load currents obtained in "Power
System Data" Article.
2. Determine load flow and voltage drop based on 80 percent of the design capacity of load
buses.
3. Prepare load-flow and voltage-drop analysis and report to show power system
components that are overloaded, or might become overloaded; show bus voltages that are
less than as prescribed by NFPA 70.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
COORDINATION STUDIES 260573.16 - 9
3.5 MOTOR-STARTING STUDY
A. Perform a motor-starting study to analyze the transient effect of system's voltage profile during
motor starting. Calculate significant motor-starting voltage profiles and analyze the effects of
motor starting on the power system stability.
B. Prepare the motor-starting study report, noting light flicker for limits proposed by IEEE 141,
and voltage sags so as not to affect operation of other utilization equipment on system supplying
the motor.
3.6 FIELD ADJUSTING
A. Adjust relay and protective device settings according to recommended settings provided by the
coordination study. Field adjustments shall be completed by the engineering service division of
equipment manufacturer under the "Startup and Acceptance Testing" contract portion.
B. Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish compliance with short-
circuit and protective device coordination studies.
C. Testing and adjusting shall be by a full-time employee of the Field Adjusting Agency, who
holds NETA ETT-Certified Technician Level III or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III
certification.
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS.
Certify compliance with test parameters. Perform NETA tests and inspections for all
adjustable overcurrent protective devices.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage Power Systems Analysis Specialist to train Owner's maintenance personnel in the
following:
1. Acquaint personnel in fundamentals of operating the power system in normal and
emergency modes.
2. Hand-out and explain the coordination study objectives, study descriptions, purpose,
basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms, and guide for interpreting
time-current coordination curves.
3. For Owner's maintenance staff certified as NETA ETT-Certified Technicians Level III or
NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III Technicians, teach how to adjust, operate, and
maintain overcurrent protective device settings.
END OF SECTION 260573.16
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260573.19 ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 260573.19 - 1
SECTION 260573.19 - ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes a computer-based, arc-flash study to determine the arc-flash hazard distance
and the incident energy to which personnel could be exposed during work on or near electrical
equipment.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
B. Field Adjusting Agency: An independent electrical testing agency with full-time employees and
the capability to adjust devices and conduct testing indicated and that is a member company of
NETA.
C. One-Line Diagram: A diagram that shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the
course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used
therein.
D. Power System Analysis Software Developer: An entity that commercially develops, maintains,
and distributes computer software used for power system studies.
E. Power Systems Analysis Specialist: Professional engineer in charge of performing the study and
documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located.
F. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removes
the affected portion from the system.
G. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.
H. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to
the wiring system of the premises served.
I. Single-Line Diagram: See "One-Line Diagram."
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260573.19 ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 260573.19 - 2
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.
B. Study Submittals: Submit the following submittals after the approval of system protective
devices submittals. Submittals shall be in digital form:
1. Arc-flash study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.
2. Arc-flash study report; signed, dated, and sealed by Power Systems Analysis Specialist.
3. Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of distribution equipment
submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in equipment manufacturing,
obtain approval from Architect for preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to
ensure that selection of devices and associated characteristics is satisfactory.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data:
1. For Power Systems Analysis Software Developer.
2. For Power System Analysis Specialist.
3. For Field Adjusting Agency.
B. Product Certificates: For arc-flash hazard analysis software, certifying compliance with
IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Provide maintenance procedures in equipment manuals according to requirements in
NFPA 70E.
2. Operation and Maintenance Procedures: In addition to items specified in Section 017823
"Operation and Maintenance Data," provide maintenance procedures for use by Owner's
personnel that comply with requirements in NFPA 70E.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Study shall be performed using commercially developed and distributed software designed
specifically for power system analysis.
B. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this
Section.
C. Manual calculations are unacceptable.
D. Power System Analysis Software Qualifications: An entity that owns and markets computer
software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on
electrical distribution systems using similar devices.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260573.19 ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 260573.19 - 3
1. Computer program shall be designed to perform arc-flash analysis or have a function,
component, or add-on module designed to perform arc-flash analysis.
2. Computer program shall be developed under the charge of a licensed professional
engineer who holds IEEE Computer Society's Certified Software Development
Professional certification.
E. Power Systems Analysis Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer in charge of
performing the arc-flash study, analyzing the arc flash, and documenting recommendations,
licensed in the state where Project is located. All elements of the study shall be performed under
the direct supervision and control of this professional engineer.
F. Arc-Flash Study Certification: Arc-Flash Study Report shall be signed and sealed by Power
Systems Analysis Specialist.
G. Field Adjusting Agency Qualifications:
1. Employer of a NETA ETT-Certified Technician Level III or NICET Electrical Power
Testing Level III certification responsible for all field adjusting of the Work.
2. A member company of NETA.
3. Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. CGI CYME.
2. EDSA Micro Corporation.
3. ESA Inc.
4. Power Analytics, Corporation.
5. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.
B. Comply with IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E.
C. Analytical features of device coordination study computer software program shall have the
capability to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in
IEEE 399.
2.2 ARC-FLASH STUDY REPORT CONTENT
A. Executive summary of study findings.
B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms, and
guide for interpretation of results.
C. One-line diagram, showing the following:
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260573.19 ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 260573.19 - 4
1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings.
2. Conductor types, sizes, and lengths.
3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings, including derating factors and
environmental conditions.
4. Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings.
5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center, panelboard designations, and ratings.
D. Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article.
E. Short-Circuit Study Output Data: As specified in "Short-Circuit Study Output Reports"
Paragraph in "Short-Circuit Study Report Contents" Article in Section 260573.13 "Short-Circuit
Studies."
F. Protective Device Coordination Study Report Contents: As specified in "Coordination Study
Report Contents" Article in Section 260573.16 "Coordination Studies."
G. Arc-Flash Study Output Reports:
1. Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the
following for each equipment location included in the report:
a. Voltage.
b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle.
c. Fault-point X/R ratio.
d. No AC Decrement (NACD) ratio.
e. Equivalent impedance.
f. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a
symmetrical basis.
g. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a total basis.
H. Incident Energy and Flash Protection Boundary Calculations:
1. Arcing fault magnitude.
2. Protective device clearing time.
3. Duration of arc.
4. Arc-flash boundary.
5. Restricted approach boundary.
6. Limited approach boundary.
7. Working distance.
8. Incident energy.
9. Hazard risk category.
10. Recommendations for arc-flash energy reduction.
I. Fault study input data, case descriptions, and fault-current calculations including a definition of
terms and guide for interpretation of computer printout.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260573.19 ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 260573.19 - 5
2.3 ARC-FLASH WARNING LABELS
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for self-
adhesive equipment labels. Produce a 3.5-by-5-inch (76-by-127-mm) self-adhesive equipment
label for each work location included in the analysis.
B. Label shall have an orange header with the wording, "WARNING, ARC-FLASH HAZARD,"
and shall include the following information taken directly from the arc-flash hazard analysis:
1. Location designation.
2. Nominal voltage.
3. Protection boundaries.
a. Arc-flash boundary.
b. Restricted approach boundary.
c. Limited approach boundary.
4. Arc flash PPE category.
5. Required minimum arc rating of PPE in Cal/cm squared.
6. Available incident energy.
7. Working distance.
8. Engineering report number, revision number, and issue date.
C. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field-applied markings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals. Proceed with arc-flash study only
after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that
have not been submitted and approved prior to arc-flash study may not be used in study.
3.2 ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS
A. Comply with NFPA 70E and its Annex D for hazard analysis study.
B. Preparatory Studies: Perform the Short-Circuit and Protective Device Coordination studies prior
to starting the Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis.
1. Short-Circuit Study Output: As specified in "Short-Circuit Study Output Reports"
Paragraph in "Short-Circuit Study Report Contents" Article in Section 260573.13 "Short-
Circuit Studies."
2. Coordination Study Report Contents: As specified in "Coordination Study Report
Contents" Article in Section 260573.16 "Coordination Studies."
C. Calculate maximum and minimum contributions of fault-current size.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260573.19 ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 260573.19 - 6
1. Maximum calculation shall assume a maximum contribution from the utility and shall
assume motors to be operating under full-load conditions.
2. Calculate arc-flash energy at 85 percent of maximum short-circuit current according to
IEEE 1584 recommendations.
3. Calculate arc-flash energy at 38 percent of maximum short-circuit current according to
NFPA 70E recommendations.
4. Calculate arc-flash energy with the utility contribution at a minimum and assume no
motor contribution.
D. Calculate the arc-flash protection boundary and incident energy at locations in electrical
distribution system where personnel could perform work on energized parts.
E. Include medium- and low-voltage equipment locations, except equipment rated 240 V ac or less
fed from transformers less than 125 kVA.
F. Calculate the limited, restricted, and prohibited approach boundaries for each location.
G. Incident energy calculations shall consider the accumulation of energy over time when
performing arc-flash calculations on buses with multiple sources. Iterative calculations shall
take into account the changing current contributions, as the sources are interrupted or
decremented with time. Fault contribution from motors and generators shall be decremented as
follows:
1. Fault contribution from induction motors shall not be considered beyond three to five
cycles.
2. Fault contribution from synchronous motors and generators shall be decayed to match the
actual decrement of each as closely as possible (for example, contributions from
permanent magnet generators will typically decay from 10 per unit to three per unit after
10 cycles).
H. Arc-flash energy shall generally be reported for the maximum of line or load side of a circuit
breaker. However, arc-flash computation shall be performed and reported for both line and load
side of a circuit breaker as follows:
1. When the circuit breaker is in a separate enclosure.
2. When the line terminals of the circuit breaker are separate from the work location.
I. Base arc-flash calculations on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time. Cap maximum
clearing time at two seconds based on IEEE 1584, Section B.1.2.
3.3 POWER SYSTEM DATA
A. Obtain all data necessary for conduct of the arc-flash hazard analysis.
1. Verify completeness of data supplied on one-line diagram on Drawings and under
"Preparatory Studies" Paragraph in "Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis" Article. Call
discrepancies to Architect's attention.
2. For new equipment, use characteristics from approved submittals under provisions of
action submittals and information submittals for this Project.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260573.19 ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 260573.19 - 7
3. For existing equipment, whether or not relocated, obtain required electrical distribution
system data by field investigation and surveys conducted by qualified technicians and
engineers.
B. Electrical Survey Data: Gather and tabulate the following input data to support study. Comply
with recommendations in IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E as to the amount of detail that is required
to be acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control
of the engineer in charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its
representative who holds NETA ETT-Certified Technician Level III or NICET Electrical Power
Testing Level III certification. Data include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Sections and involved
in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags
that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective
device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.
2. Obtain electrical power utility impedance or available short circuit current at the service.
3. Power sources and ties.
4. Short-circuit current at each system bus (three phase and line to ground).
5. Full-load current of all loads.
6. Voltage level at each bus.
7. For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,
impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in percent, and phase shift.
8. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating and impedance.
9. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of
breaker, type of trip and available range of settings, SCCR, current rating, and breaker
settings.
10. Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated
kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio.
11. For relays, provide manufacturer and model designation, current transformer ratios,
potential transformer ratios, and relay settings.
12. Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, size,
and conductor material.
13. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation.
14. Low-voltage conductor sizes, lengths, number, conductor material and conduit material
(magnetic or nonmagnetic).
15. Medium-voltage conductor sizes, lengths, conductor material, conductor construction and
metallic shield performance parameters, and conduit material (magnetic or nonmagnetic).
3.4 LABELING
A. Apply one arc-flash label on the front cover of each section of the equipment for each
equipment included in the study. Base arc-flash label data on highest values calculated at each
location.
B. Each piece of equipment listed below shall have an arc-flash label applied to it:
1. Switchgear.
2. Panelboard and safety switch under 250 V.
C. Note on record Drawings the location of equipment where the personnel could be exposed to
arc-flash hazard during their work.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260573.19 ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 260573.19 - 8
1. Indicate arc-flash energy.
2. Indicate protection level required.
3.5 APPLICATION OF WARNING LABELS
A. Install arc-flash warning labels under the direct supervision and control of Power System
Analysis Specialist.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage Power Systems Analysis Specialist to train Owner's maintenance personnel in potential
arc-flash hazards associated with working on energized equipment and the significance of arc-
flash warning labels.
END OF SECTION 260573.19
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260943.23 - RELAY-BASED LIGHTING CONTROLS
260943.23 - 1
SECTION 260943.23 - RELAY-BASED LIGHTING CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Lighting control panels using mechanically held relays for switching.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BAS: Building automation system.
B. DDC: Direct digital control.
C. IP: Internet protocol.
D. Monitoring: Acquisition, processing, communication, and display of equipment status data,
metered electrical parameter values, power quality evaluation data, event and alarm signals,
tabulated reports, and event logs.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for control modules, power distribution components, relays,
manual switches and plates, and conductors and cables.
2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished
specialties and accessories.
3. Sound data including results of operational tests of central dimming controls.
4. Operational documentation for software and firmware.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handle and prepare panels for installation according to NECA 407.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260943.23 - RELAY-BASED LIGHTING CONTROLS
260943.23 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Sequence of Operations: Input signal from field-mounted manual switches, or digital signal
sources, shall open or close one or more lighting control relays in the lighting control panels.
Any combination of inputs shall be programmable to any number of control relays.
B. Surge Protective Device: Factory installed as an integral part of control components or field-
mounted surge suppressors complying with UL 1449, SPD Type 2.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
D. Comply with 47 CFR 15, Subparts A and B, for Class A digital devices.
E. Comply with UL 916.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.3 LIGHTING CONTROL RELAY PANELS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. General Electric Company.
2. Intermatic, Inc.
3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.
4. Lightolier; a Philips group brand.
5. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc.
6. Siemens Industry, Inc., Energy Management Division.
7. Touch-Plate Technologies.
8. WattStopper; a Legrand® Group brand.
B. Description: Standalone lighting control panel using mechanically latched relays to control
lighting and appliances.
C. Lighting Control Panel:
1. A single enclosure with incoming lighting branch circuits, control circuits, switching
relays, and on-board timing and control unit.
2. A vertical barrier separating branch circuits from control wiring.
D. Control Unit: Contain the power supply and electronic control for operating and monitoring
individual relays.
1. Timing Unit:
a. 365-day calendar, astronomical clock, and automatic adjustments for daylight
savings and leap year.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260943.23 - RELAY-BASED LIGHTING CONTROLS
260943.23 - 3
b. Clock configurable for 12-hour (A.M./P.M.) or 24-hour format.
c. Four independent schedules, each having 24 time periods.
d. Schedule periods settable to the minute.
e. Day-of-week, day-of-month, day-of-year with one-time or repeating capability.
f. 10 special date periods.
2. Sequencing Control with Override:
a. Automatic sequenced on and off switching of selected relays at times set at the
timing unit, allowing timed overrides from external switches.
b. Sequencing control shall operate relays one at a time, completing the operation of
all connected relays in not more than 10 seconds.
c. Override control shall allow any relay connected to it to be switched on or off by a
field-deployed manual switch or by an automatic switch, such as an occupancy
sensor.
d. Override control "blink warning" shall warn occupants approximately five minutes
before actuating the off sequence.
3. Nonvolatile memory shall retain all setup configurations. After a power failure, the
controller shall automatically reboot and return to normal system operation, including
accurate time of day and date.
E. Relays: Electrically operated, mechanically held single-pole switch, rated at 20 A at 277 V.
Short-circuit current rating shall be not less than 5 kA. Control shall be three-wire, 24-V ac.
F. Power Supply: NFPA 70, Class 2, sized for connected equipment, plus 20 percent spare
capacity. Powered from a dedicated branch circuit of the panelboard that supplies power to the
line side of the relays, sized to provide control power for the local panel-mounted relays, bus
system, low-voltage inputs, field-installed occupancy sensors, and photo sensors.
2.4 MANUAL SWITCHES AND PLATES
A. Push-Button Switches: Modular, momentary contact, three wire, for operating one or more
relays and to override automatic controls.
1. Match color and style specified in Section 262726 "Wiring Devices."
2. Internal white LED locator light to illuminate when circuit is off.
B. Wall Plates: Single and multigang plates as specified in Section 262726 "Wiring Devices."
C. Legend: Engraved or permanently silk-screened on wall plate where indicated. Use designations
indicated on Drawings.
2.5 FIELD-MOUNTED SIGNAL SOURCES
A. Indoor Occupancy Sensors: Comply with Section 260923 "Lighting Control Devices." Control
power may be taken from the lighting control panel, and signal shall be compatible with the
relays.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260943.23 - RELAY-BASED LIGHTING CONTROLS
260943.23 - 4
2.6 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Class 2 Power Source: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply
with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cables: Multiconductor cable with copper conductors not smaller than
No. 22 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
C. Twisted-Pair Data Cable: Comply with requirements in Section 271513 "Communications
Copper Horizontal Cabling."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panels according to NECA 407.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are damaged or rusted or have been
subjected to water saturation.
C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panels for compliance with installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where
possible.
C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess
and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and
distribution spools.
3.3 PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Install panels and accessories according to NECA 407.
C. Mount top of trim 66" above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
D. Mount panel cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box.
E. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for
identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260943.23 - RELAY-BASED LIGHTING CONTROLS
260943.23 - 5
B. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs complying with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
C. Create a directory to indicate loads served by each relay; incorporate Owner's final room
designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a PC or typewriter to create directory;
handwritten directories are unacceptable.
D. Lighting Control Panel Nameplates: Label each panel with a nameplate complying with
requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
C. Lighting control panel will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies lighting control
panels and describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action
taken, and observations made after remedial action.
3.6 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Confirm correct communications wiring, initiate communications between panels, and
program the lighting control system according to approved configuration schedules, time-
of-day schedules, and input override assignments.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial
Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions.
Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the control unit and
operator interface.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 260943.23 - RELAY-BASED LIGHTING CONTROLS
260943.23 - 6
END OF SECTION 260943.23
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS 262416 - 1
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Distribution panelboards.
2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ATS: Acceptance testing specification.
B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C. GFEP: Ground-fault equipment protection.
D. HID: High-intensity discharge.
E. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.
F. SPD: Surge protective device.
G. VPR: Voltage protection rating.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard.
1. Include materials, switching and overcurrent protective devices, SPDs, accessories, and
components indicated.
2. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical
characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details.
2. Show tabulations of installed devices with nameplates, conductor termination sizes,
equipment features, and ratings.
3. Detail enclosure types including mounting and anchorage, environmental protection,
knockouts, corner treatments, covers and doors, gaskets, hinges, and locks.
4. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS 262416 - 2
5. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
6. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.
7. Include evidence of NRTL listing for SPD as installed in panelboard.
8. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
9. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
10. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent
protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper;
include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Include an
Internet link for electronic access to downloadable PDF of the coordination curves.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001 or 9002 certified.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary
electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.
B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NECA 407.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations:
1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work
in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary
HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions
at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise
indicated:
a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F to plus 104 deg F.
b. Altitude: Not exceeding 8000 feet.
B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:
1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.
2. Altitude not exceeding 8000 feet.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS 262416 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PANELBOARDS AND LOAD CENTERS COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in
Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items.
Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
D. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
F. Enclosures: Surface-mounted, dead-front cabinets.
1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Height: 78 inches maximum.
3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within
hinged trim cover. Trims shall cover all live parts and shall have no exposed hardware.
4. Finishes:
a. Panels and Trim: Steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating
with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat
and thermosetting topcoat.
b. Back Boxes: Same finish as panels and trim.
5. .
G. Incoming Mains:
1. Location: Convertible between top and bottom.
2. Main Breaker: Main lug interiors up to 400 amperes shall be field convertible to main
breaker.
H. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:
1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
a. Plating shall run entire length of bus.
b. Bus shall be fully rated the entire length.
2. Interiors shall be factory assembled into a unit. Replacing switching and protective
devices shall not disturb adjacent units or require removing the main bus connectors.
3. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding
conductors; bonded to box.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS 262416 - 4
4. Full-Sized Neutral: Equipped with full-capacity bonding strap for service entrance
applications. Mount electrically isolated from enclosure. Do not mount neutral bus in
gutter.
I. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
2. Terminations shall allow use of 75 deg C rated conductors without derating.
3. Size: Lugs suitable for indicated conductor sizes, with additional gutter space, if required,
for larger conductors.
4. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type, with a lug on the neutral bar for each pole in
the panelboard.
5. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type, with a lug on the bar
for each pole in the panelboard.
J. NRTL Label: Panelboards or load centers shall be labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authority
having jurisdiction for use as service equipment with one or more main service disconnecting
and overcurrent protective devices. Panelboards or load centers shall have meter enclosures,
wiring, connections, and other provisions for utility metering. Coordinate with utility company
for exact requirements.
K. Future Devices: Panelboards or load centers shall have mounting brackets, bus connections,
filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.
1. Percentage of Future Space Capacity: 20 percent.
L. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or
remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include label or
manual with size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices listed and labeled by an
NRTL for series-connected short-circuit rating.
1. Panelboards rated 240 V or less shall have short-circuit ratings as shown on Drawings,
but not less than 10,000 A rms symmetrical.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
B. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of indicated panelboards, complying
with UL 1449 SPD Type 1.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS 262416 - 5
2.3 POWER PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Eaton.
2. ESL Power Systems, Inc.
3. General Electric Company; GE Energy Management - Electrical Distribution.
4. Mersen USA.
5. Siemens Industry, Inc., Energy Management Division.
6. Square D; by Schneider Electric.
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, distribution type.
C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.
2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Eaton.
2. General Electric Company; GE Energy Management - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Industry, Inc., Energy Management Division.
4. Square D; by Schneider Electric.
A. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.
B. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing
adjacent units.
C. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
D. Doors: Door-in-door construction with concealed hinges; secured with multipoint latch with
tumbler lock; keyed alike. Outer door shall permit full access to the panel interior. Inner door
shall permit access to breaker operating handles and labeling, but current carrying terminals and
bus shall remain concealed.
1. Doors: Concealed hinges secured with multipoint latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
2.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Panelboard Label: Manufacturer's name and trademark, voltage, amperage, number of phases,
and number of poles shall be located on the interior of the panelboard door.
B. Breaker Labels: Faceplate shall list current rating, UL and IEC certification standards, and AIC
rating.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS 262416 - 6
C. Circuit Directory: Computer-generated circuit directory mounted inside panelboard door with
transparent plastic protective cover.
1. Circuit directory shall identify specific purpose with detail sufficient to distinguish it
from all other circuits.
2.6 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device
test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.
B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from
panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and
switchboard class relays.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify actual conditions with field measurements prior to ordering panelboards to verify that
equipment fits in allocated space in, and comply with, minimum required clearances specified
in NFPA 70.
B. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 407.
C. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged, rusted, or have
been subjected to water saturation.
D. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors
and panels.
B. Comply with NECA 1.
C. Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407.
D. Equipment Mounting:
1. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard.
2. Comply with requirements for seismic control devices specified in Section 260548.16
"Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS 262416 - 7
E. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.
F. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic
Controls for Electrical Systems."
G. Mount top of trim 66" above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
H. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box.
I. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back
box.
J. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.
1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.
2. Tighten bolted connections and circuit breaker connections using calibrated torque
wrench or torque screwdriver per manufacturer's written instructions.
K. Make grounding connections and bond neutral for services and separately derived systems to
ground. Make connections to grounding electrodes, separate grounds for isolated ground bars,
and connections to separate ground bars.
L. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
M. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space
designated to be ceiling space in the future.
N. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; install warning
signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final room
designations. Obtain approval before installing. Handwritten directories are not acceptable.
Install directory inside panelboard door.
C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements
for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in power panelboards with a nameplate
complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
E. Install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for
Electrical Systems" identifying source of remote circuit.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS 262416 - 8
B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,
and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test for low-voltage air
circuit breakers and low-voltage surge arrestors stated in NETA ATS, Paragraph 7.6
Circuit Breakers and Paragraph 7.19.1 Surge Arrestors, Low-Voltage. Certify
compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards
included and that describes scanning results, with comparisons of the two scans. Include
notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Section 260573.16 "Coordination
Studies."
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Heating: Prior to energizing panelboards, apply temporary heat to maintain
temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 262416
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 1
SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Standard-grade receptacles, 125 V, 20 A.
2. Toggle switches, 120/277 V, 20 A.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. AFCI: Arc-fault circuit interrupter.
B. BAS: Building automation system.
C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
D. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
E. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
F. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
G. SPD: Surge protective device.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking
wall plates.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing-
label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. RoHS compliant.
D. Comply with NEMA WD 1.
E. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted
under the following conditions:
1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire.
2. Devices shall comply with requirements in this Section.
F. Devices for Owner-Furnished Equipment:
1. Receptacles: Match plug configurations.
G. Device Color:
1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: unless otherwise indicated or
required by NFPA 70 or device listing: White
2. Wiring Devices Connected to Essential Electrical System: Red.
H. Wall Plate Color: Brushed stainless steel.
I. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single
source from single manufacturer.
2.2 STANDARD-GRADE RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 20 A
A. Duplex Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A -see schedule on the drawings:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
b. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.
c. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).
2. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding.
3. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R.
4. Standards: Comply with UL 498 and FS W-C-596.
B. Weather-Resistant Duplex Receptacle, 125 V, 20 A -see schedule on the drawings:
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 3
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
b. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.
c. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).
2. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. Integral shutters that operate only
when a plug is inserted in the receptacle. Square face.
3. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R.
4. Standards: Comply with UL 498.
5. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Receptacles in Damp or Wet
Locations" Article.
2.3 TOGGLE SWITCHES, 120/277 V, 15 A
A. Single-Pole Switches, 120/277 V, 15 A -see schedule on the drawings:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
b. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.
c. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).
2. Standards: Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.
B. Two-Pole Switches, 120/277 V, 15 A -see schedule on the drawings:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
b. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.
c. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).
2. Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.
3. Description: Contact surfaces treated with a coating that kills 99.9 percent of certain
common bacteria within two hours when regularly and properly cleaned.
4. Standards: Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.
2.4 TOGGLE SWITCHES, 120/277 V, 20 A
A. Single-Pole Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A -see schedule on the drawings:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Eaton (Arrow Hart).
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 4
b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
c. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).
1. Standards: Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Coordination with Other Trades:
1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device
boxes, and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against
outside of boxes.
2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,
paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and
cables.
3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint
unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
C. Conductors:
1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated
on devices.
2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid
scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall comply with NFPA 70,
Article 300, without pigtails.
D. Device Installation:
1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were
installed before building finishing operations were complete.
2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect
conductors.
3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last
possible moment.
4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.
5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid
conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal
screw.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 5
6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.
7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice
No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold
device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
E. Receptacle Orientation:
1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted
receptacles to the right.
F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount
outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
G. Dimmers:
1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing.
2. Verify that dimmers used for fan-speed control are listed for that application.
3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to
manufacturers' device, listing conditions in the written instructions.
H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical
and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single,
multigang wall plates.
I. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and
furnishings.
3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. Install non-feed-through GFCI receptacles.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or
engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers
or tags inside outlet boxes.
C. Essential Electrical System: Mark receptacles supplied from the essential electrical system to
allow easy identification using a self-adhesive label.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 6
B. Test Instrument for Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated
digital-display indicators of measurement.
C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service
representative:
1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
2. Test Instrument for Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or
illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.
D. Tests for Receptacles:
1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.
2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable.
3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.
6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit
breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault-current path, defective devices, or similar
problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new
ones, and retest as specified above.
E. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 262726
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 263213.16 - GASEOUS EMERGENCY ENGINE GENERATORS
263213.16 - 1
SECTION 263213.16 - GASEOUS EMERGENCY ENGINE GENERATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes packaged engine generators for emergency use with the following features:
1. Natural gas engine.
2. Gaseous fuel system.
3. Control and monitoring.
4. Generator overcurrent and fault protection.
5. Generator, exciter, and voltage regulator.
6. Outdoor engine generator enclosure.
7. Vibration isolation devices.
8. Finishes.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 263600 "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensors and relays to
initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine generators.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EPS: Emergency power supply.
B. EPSS: Emergency power supply system.
C. LP: Liquid petroleum.
D. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a parameter over
the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the nominal value of the
parameter.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished
specialties and accessories.
2. Include thermal damage curve for generator.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 263213.16 - GASEOUS EMERGENCY ENGINE GENERATORS
263213.16 - 2
3. Include time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device.
4. Include fuel consumption in cubic feet per hour at 0.8 power factor at 0.5, 0.75, and 1.0
times generator capacity.
5. Include generator efficiency at 0.8 power factor at 0.5, 0.75, and 1.0 times generator
capacity.
6. Include airflow requirements for cooling and combustion air in cubic feet per minute at
0.8 power factor, with air-supply temperature of 80 deg F. Provide Drawings indicating
requirements and limitations for location of air intake and exhausts.
7. Include generator characteristics, including, but not limited to, kilowatt rating, efficiency,
reactances, and short-circuit current capability.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include plans and elevations for engine generator and other components specified.
2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
3. Identify fluid drain ports and clearance requirements for proper fluid drain.
4. Design calculations for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for
designing vibration isolation bases.
5. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and
attachments to structure and supported equipment. Include base weights.
6. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. Complete schematic, wiring, and
interconnection diagrams showing terminal markings for EPS equipment and functional
relationship between all electrical components.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For and.
B. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for engine generator, accessories, and components,
from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: With engine and generator mounted
on rails, identify center of gravity and total weight, including full fuel tank, supplied
enclosure, and each piece of equipment not integral to the engine generator, and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
C. Field quality-control reports.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 263213.16 - GASEOUS EMERGENCY ENGINE GENERATORS
263213.16 - 3
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of packaged
engine generators and associated auxiliary components that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Caterpillar, Inc.; Electric Power Division.
2. Cummins Power Generation.
3. Kohler Power Systems.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged engine generators and auxiliary components from single
source from single manufacturer.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Engine generator housing, engine generator, batteries, battery racks,
silencers, sound attenuating equipment, accessories, and components shall withstand the effects
of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after
the seismic event."
2. Shake-table testing shall comply with ICC-ES AC156. Testing shall be performed with
all fluids at worst-case normal levels.
3. Component Importance Factor: 1.5.
B. B11 Compliance: Comply with B11.19.
C. NFPA Compliance:
1. Comply with NFPA 37.
2. Comply with NFPA 70.
3. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 EPSS.
D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 2200.
E. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with EPA Tier 2 requirements and applicable state and
local government requirements.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 263213.16 - GASEOUS EMERGENCY ENGINE GENERATORS
263213.16 - 4
F. Noise Emission: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements for
maximum noise level at adjacent property boundaries due to sound emitted by engine generator,
including engine, engine exhaust, engine cooling-air intake and discharge, and other
components of installation.
G. Environmental Conditions: Engine generator system shall withstand the following
environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of
performance capability:
1. Ambient Temperature: 41 to 104 deg F.
2. Relative Humidity: Zero to 95 percent.
3. Altitude: Sea level to 8000 feet.
2.3 ENGINE GENERATOR ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION
A. Factory-assembled and -tested, water-cooled engine, with brushless generator and accessories.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.
C. EPSS Class: Engine generator shall be classified as Class 96 according to NFPA 110.
D. Service Load: 30 kVA.
E. Power Factor: 0.8, lagging.
F. Frequency: 60 Hz.
G. Voltage: 208-V ac.
H. Phase: Three-phase, four-wire wye.
I. Induction Method: Turbocharged.
J. Governor: Adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing.
K. Mounting Frame: Structural-steel framework to maintain alignment of mounted components
without depending on concrete foundation. Provide lifting attachments sized and spaced to
prevent deflection of base during lifting and moving.
1. Rigging Diagram: Inscribed on metal plate permanently attached to mounting frame to
indicate location and lifting capacity of each lifting attachment and engine generator
center of gravity.
L. Capacities and Characteristics:
1. Power Output Ratings: Nominal ratings as indicated at 0.8 power factor excluding power
required for the continued and repeated operation of the unit and auxiliaries, with
capacity as required to operate as a unit as evidenced by records of prototype testing.
2. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name and
address, and model and serial number of component.
M. Engine Generator Performance:
1. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 3 percent of rated output voltage, from no
load to full load.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 263213.16 - GASEOUS EMERGENCY ENGINE GENERATORS
263213.16 - 5
2. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20 percent variation for 50 percent step-
load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state
operating band within three seconds.
3. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated frequency, from no
load to full load.
4. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within
the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-state
operational band and no hunting or surging of speed.
5. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 5 percent variation for 50 percent step-load
increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state
operating band within five seconds.
6. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to line or line to neutral
shall not exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for single harmonics. Telephone influence
factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent.
7. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a three-phase, bolted short circuit at system output
terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 250 percent of rated full-load current for not
less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to generator
system components.
8. Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements.
2.4 ENGINE
A. Fuel: Natural gas.
B. Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm.
C. Lubrication System: Engine or skid mounted.
1. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers and smaller
while passing full flow.
2. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil
temperature. Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe.
3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable
container with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or
appliances.
D. Jacket Coolant Heater: Electric-immersion type, factory installed in coolant jacket system.
Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment for heater capacity and with
UL 499.
E. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine generator
mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant pump.
1. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water,
with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer.
2. Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant, from cold start
to 110 percent load condition.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 263213.16 - GASEOUS EMERGENCY ENGINE GENERATORS
263213.16 - 6
3. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow
automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by
engine manufacturer.
4. Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and outer
covering of aging-, UV-, and abrasion-resistant fabric.
a. Rating: 50-psig maximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F, and non-
collapsible under vacuum.
b. End Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and
equipment connections.
F. Muffler/Silencer: Critical type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected
with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure
requirements.
1. Minimum sound attenuation of 25 dB at 500 Hz.
2. Sound level measured at a distance of 25 feet from exhaust discharge after installation is
complete shall be 78 dBA or less.
G. Air-Intake Filter: Standard-duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry-filter element
and "blocked filter" indicator.
H. Starting System: 12-V electric, with negative ground.
1. Components: Sized so they are not damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle, with
ambient temperature at maximum specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
2. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from engine
flywheel without binding.
3. Cranking Cycle: 60 seconds.
4. Battery: Lead acid, with capacity within ambient temperature range specified in
"Performance Requirements" Article to provide specified cranking cycle at least three
times without recharging.
5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer for cable length indicated.
Include required interconnecting conductors and connection accessories.
6. Battery Compartment: Factory fabricated of metal with acid-resistant finish and thermal
insulation. Thermostatically controlled heater shall be arranged to maintain battery
above 50 deg F regardless of external ambient temperature within range specified in
"Performance Requirements" Article. Include accessories required to support and fasten
batteries in place. Provide ventilation to exhaust battery gases.
7. Battery Stand: Factory-fabricated, two-tier metal with acid-resistant finish designed to
hold the quantity of battery cells required and to maintain the arrangement to minimize
lengths of battery interconnections.
8. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage
regulation and 35-A minimum continuous rating.
9. Battery Charger: Current-limiting, automatic-equalizing and float-charging type designed
for lead-acid batteries. Unit shall comply with UL 1236 and include the following
features:
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 263213.16 - GASEOUS EMERGENCY ENGINE GENERATORS
263213.16 - 7
a. Operation: Equalizing-charging rate of 10 A shall be initiated automatically after
battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery
terminals. Unit shall then be automatically switched to a lower float-charging
mode and shall continue to operate in that mode until battery is discharged again.
b. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize voltages for
variations in ambient temperature from minus 40 to 140 deg F to prevent
overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures.
c. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage regardless of
input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent.
d. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters shall indicate charging
rates.
e. Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and close contacts
providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel. Sense
high battery voltage and loss of ac input or dc output of battery charger. Either
condition shall close contacts that provide a battery-charger malfunction indication
at system control and monitoring panel.
f. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 250, Type 1, wall-mounted cabinet.
2.5 GASEOUS FUEL SYSTEM
A. Natural Gas Piping: Comply with requirements in Section 231123 "Facility Natural Gas
Piping."
B. Gas Train: Comply with NFPA 37.
C. Tanks: Comply with requirements for storage containers in Section 231126 "Facility Liquefied-
Petroleum Gas Piping."
D. Engine Fuel System:
1. Manual Fuel Shutoff Valves: One for each fuel type.
2. Flexible Fuel Connectors: Minimum one for each fuel connection.
2.6 CONTROL AND MONITORING
A. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector switch on the control
and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more
separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of engine generator. When
mode-selector switch is switched to the on position, engine generator starts. The off position of
same switch initiates engine generator shutdown. When engine generator is running, specified
system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down engine generator and
initiate alarms.
B. Provide minimum run-time control set for 15 minutes, with override only by operation of a
remote emergency-stop switch.
C. Comply with UL 508A.
D. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and
engine gages shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 263213.16 - GASEOUS EMERGENCY ENGINE GENERATORS
263213.16 - 8
engine generator. Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from engine generator
vibration. Panel shall be powered from the engine generator battery.
E. Control and Monitoring Panel:
1. Digital controller with integrated LCD display, controls, and microprocessor, capable of
local and remote control, monitoring, and programming, with battery backup.
2. Instruments: Located on the control and monitoring panel and viewable during operation.
a. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage.
b. Engine-coolant temperature gage.
c. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging).
d. Running-time meter.
e. AC voltmeter, connected to a phase selector switch.
f. AC ammeter, connected to a phase selector switch.
g. AC frequency meter.
h. Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat.
3. Controls and Protective Devices: Controls, shutdown devices, and common visual alarm
indication as required by NFPA 110 for Level 1 system, including the following:
a. Cranking control equipment.
b. Run-Off-Auto switch.
c. Control switch not in automatic position alarm.
d. Overcrank alarm.
e. Overcrank shutdown device.
f. Low water temperature alarm.
g. High engine temperature pre-alarm.
h. High engine temperature.
i. High engine temperature shutdown device.
j. Overspeed alarm.
k. Overspeed shutdown device.
l. Coolant low-level alarm.
m. Coolant low-level shutdown device.
n. Coolant high-temperature pre-alarm.
o. Coolant high-temperature alarm.
p. Coolant low-temperature alarm.
q. Coolant high-temperature shutdown device.
r. EPS load indicator.
s. Battery high-voltage alarm.
t. Low-cranking voltage alarm.
u. Battery-charger malfunction alarm.
v. Battery low-voltage alarm.
w. Lamp test.
x. Contacts for local and remote common alarm.
y. Remote manual-stop shutdown device.
z. Air shutdown damper alarm when used.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 263213.16 - GASEOUS EMERGENCY ENGINE GENERATORS
263213.16 - 9
aa. Air shutdown damper shutdown device when used.
bb. Generator overcurrent-protective-device not-closed alarm.
F. Remote Alarm Annunciator: Comply with NFPA 99. An LED indicator light labeled with
proper alarm conditions shall identify each alarm event, and a common audible signal shall
sound for each alarm condition. Silencing switch in face of panel shall silence signal without
altering visual indication. Connect so that after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating
condition will reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset. Cabinet and faceplate are surface-
or flush-mounting type to suit mounting conditions indicated.
1. Overcrank alarm.
2. Coolant low-temperature alarm.
3. High engine temperature pre-alarm.
4. High engine temperature alarm.
5. Low lube oil pressure alarm.
6. Overspeed alarm.
7. Low-fuel main tank alarm.
8. Low coolant level alarm.
9. Low-cranking voltage alarm.
10. Contacts for local and remote common alarm.
11. Audible-alarm silencing switch.
12. Air shutdown damper when used.
13. Run-Off-Auto switch.
14. Control switch not in automatic position alarm.
15. Lamp test.
16. Low-cranking voltage alarm.
G. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices and include
wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine
or generator unless otherwise indicated.
H. Remote Emergency-Stop Switch: Flush; wall mounted unless otherwise indicated; and labeled.
Push button shall be protected from accidental operation.
2.7 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION
A. Overcurrent protective devices for the entire EPSS shall be coordinated to optimize selective
tripping when a short circuit occurs. Coordination of protective devices shall consider both
utility and EPSS as the voltage source.
1. Overcurrent protective devices for the EPSS shall be accessible only to authorized
personnel.
B. Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded-case, thermal-magnetic type; 100 percent rated; complying
with UL 489.
1. Tripping Characteristic: Designed specifically for generator protection.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 263213.16 - GASEOUS EMERGENCY ENGINE GENERATORS
263213.16 - 10
2. Trip Rating: Matched to generator output rating.
3. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when engine generator is shut down by other
protective devices.
4. Mounting: Adjacent to, or integrated with, control and monitoring panel.
C. Generator Protector: Microprocessor-based unit shall continuously monitor current level in each
phase of generator output, integrate generator heating effect over time, and predict when
thermal damage of alternator will occur. When signaled by generator protector or other engine
generator protective devices, a shunt-trip device in the generator disconnect switch shall open
the switch to disconnect the generator from load circuits. Protector performs the following
functions:
1. Initiates a generator overload alarm when generator has operated at an overload
equivalent to 110 percent of full-rated load for 60 seconds. Indication for this alarm is
integrated with other engine generator malfunction alarms. Contacts shall be available for
load shed functions.
2. Under single- or three-phase fault conditions, regulates generator to 300 percent of rated
full-load current for up to 10 seconds.
3. As overcurrent heating effect on the generator approaches the thermal damage point of
the unit, protector switches the excitation system off, opens the generator disconnect
device, and shuts down the engine generator.
4. Senses clearing of a fault by other overcurrent devices and controls recovery of rated
voltage to avoid overshoot.
2.8 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR
A. Comply with NEMA MG 1.
B. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall be rotated
integrally with generator rotor.
C. Electrical Insulation: Class H or Class F.
D. Stator-Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other
voltages if required. Provide six-lead alternator.
E. Range: Provide limited range of output voltage by adjusting the excitation level.
F. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration,
overspeed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated
capacity.
G. Enclosure: Drip-proof.
H. Instrument Transformers: Mounted within generator enclosure.
I. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified
and as required by NFPA 110.
1. Adjusting Rheostat on Control and Monitoring Panel: Provide plus or minus 5 percent
adjustment of output-voltage operating band.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 263213.16 - GASEOUS EMERGENCY ENGINE GENERATORS
263213.16 - 11
2. Maintain voltage within 20 percent on one step, full load.
3. Provide anti-hunt provision to stabilize voltage.
4. Maintain frequency within 10 percent and stabilize at rated frequency within two
seconds.
J. Windings: Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding.
K. Subtransient Reactance: 12 percent, maximum.
2.9 OUTDOOR ENGINE GENERATOR ENCLOSURE
A. Description: Vandal-resistant, sound-attenuating, weatherproof steel housing, wind resistant up
to 100 mph. Multiple panels shall be lockable and provide adequate access to components
requiring maintenance. Panels shall be removable by one person without tools. Instruments and
control shall be mounted within enclosure.
1. Sound Attenuation Level: Meeting hospital requirements
B. Description: Prefabricated or pre-engineered, galvanized-steel-clad, integral structural-steel-
framed, erected on concrete foundation.
C. Structural Design and Anchorage: Comply with ASCE/SEI 7 for wind loads up to 100 mph.
D. Seismic Design: Comply with seismic requirements in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for
Electrical Systems."
E. Hinged Doors: With padlocking provisions.
F. Thermal Insulation: Manufacturer's standard materials and thickness selected in coordination
with space heater to maintain winter interior temperature within operating limits required by
engine generator components.
G. Muffler Location: Within enclosure.
H. Engine-Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Maintain temperature rise of system components
within required limits when unit operates at 110 percent of rated load for two hours with
ambient temperature at top of range specified in system service conditions.
1. Louvers: Fixed-engine, cooling-air inlet and discharge. Stormproof and drainable louvers
prevent entry of rain and snow.
2.10 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES
A. Elastomeric Isolator Pads: Oil- and water-resistant elastomer or natural rubber, arranged in
single or multiple layers, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates of
sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, and factory cut to sizes that match
requirements of supported equipment.
1. Material: Standard neoprene separated by steel shims.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 263213.16 - GASEOUS EMERGENCY ENGINE GENERATORS
263213.16 - 12
2. Shore A Scale Durometer Rating: 30.
3. Number of Layers: One.
4. Minimum Deflection: 1 inch.
B. Comply with requirements in Section 232116 "Hydronic Piping Specialties" for vibration
isolation and flexible connector materials for steel piping.
C. Comply with requirements in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for vibration isolation and flexible
connector materials for exhaust shroud and ductwork.
D. Vibration isolation devices shall not be used to accommodate misalignments or to make bends.
2.11 FINISHES
A. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard finish over
corrosion-resistant pretreatment and compatible primer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine generator
performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems and electrical connections to verify actual locations of
connections before packaged engine generator installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 404.
B. Comply with packaged engine generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment
instructions and with NFPA 110.
C. Equipment Mounting:
1. Install packaged engine generators on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply
with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
2. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for packaged engine generators. Cast
anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are
specified with concrete.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 263213.16 - GASEOUS EMERGENCY ENGINE GENERATORS
263213.16 - 13
3. Install packaged engine generator with elastomeric isolator pads having a minimum
deflection of on 4-inch- high concrete base. Secure to anchor bolts installed in concrete
bases. Concrete base construction is specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for
Electrical Systems."
4. Remote Radiators:
a. Install remote radiator with elastomeric isolator pads on concrete base on grade.
D. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections or
accessories, for periodic maintenance.
E. Exhaust System: Install Schedule 40 black steel piping with welded joints and connect to engine
muffler. Install thimble at wall. Piping shall be same diameter as muffler outlet.
1. Install flexible connectors and steel piping materials according to requirements in
Section 232116 "Hydronic Piping Specialties."
2. Insulate muffler/silencer and exhaust system components according to requirements in
Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."
F. Drain Piping: Install condensate drain piping to muffler drain outlet with a shutoff valve,
stainless-steel flexible connector, and Schedule 40 black steel pipe with welded joints.
G. Gaseous Fuel Piping:
1. Natural gas piping, valves, and specialties for gas distribution are specified in
Section 231123 "Facility Natural Gas Piping."
H. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not
specified to be factory mounted.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping and specialties.
B. Connect fuel, cooling-system, and exhaust-system piping adjacent to packaged engine generator
to allow service and maintenance.
C. Gaseous Fuel Connections:
1. Connect fuel piping to engines with a gate valve and union and flexible connector.
2. Install manual shutoff valve in a remote location to isolate gaseous fuel supply to the
generator.
3. Vent gas pressure regulators outside building a minimum of 60 inches from building
openings.
D. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 263213.16 - GASEOUS EMERGENCY ENGINE GENERATORS
263213.16 - 14
E. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables." Provide a minimum of one 90-degree bend in flexible conduit routed to the engine
generator from a stationary element.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment" and Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Install a sign indicating the generator neutral is bonded to the main service neutral at the main
service location.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each visual and mechanical inspection
and electrical and mechanical test listed in first two subparagraphs below, as specified in
NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters.
a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1) Compare equipment nameplate data with Drawings and the Specifications.
2) Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
3) Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
4) Verify that the unit is clean.
b. Electrical and Mechanical Tests:
1) Perform insulation-resistance tests according to IEEE 43.
a) Machines Larger Than 200 hp Test duration shall be 10 minutes.
Calculate polarization index.
b) Machines 200 hp or Less: Test duration shall be one minute.
Calculate the dielectric-absorption ratio.
2) Test protective relay devices.
3) Verify phase rotation, phasing, and synchronized operation as required by
the application.
4) Functionally test engine shutdown for low oil pressure, overtemperature,
overspeed, and other protection features as applicable.
5) Perform vibration test for each main bearing cap.
6) Conduct performance test according to NFPA 110.
7) Verify correct functioning of the governor and regulator.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 263213.16 - GASEOUS EMERGENCY ENGINE GENERATORS
263213.16 - 15
2. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to
those specified here including, but not limited to, single-step full-load pickup test.
3. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Record individual cell voltages.
a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for
full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific
gravity under both conditions.
b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a
capacity load test for the battery.
c. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge.
d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.
4. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-
charging conditions.
5. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity
of each element of engine generator system before and during system operation. Check
for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.
6. Exhaust Emissions Test: Comply with applicable government test criteria.
7. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope to measure
voltage and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent step-load increases and
decreases, and verify that performance is as specified.
8. Harmonic-Content Tests: Measure harmonic content of output voltage at 25 and 100
percent of rated linear load. Verify that harmonic content is within specified limits.
9. Noise Level Tests: Measure A-weighted level of noise emanating from engine generator
installation, including engine exhaust and cooling-air intake and discharge, at four
locations 25 feet from edge of the generator enclosure, and compare measured levels with
required values.
C. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.
D. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the past 12 months, traceable to NIST
Calibration Services, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make
calibration records available for examination on request.
E. Leak Test: After installation, charge exhaust, coolant, and fuel systems and test for leaks. Repair
leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
F. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation for generator and associated equipment.
G. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
H. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
I. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations, and retest until specified
requirements are met.
J. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured
insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to
each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 263213.16 - GASEOUS EMERGENCY ENGINE GENERATORS
263213.16 - 16
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators.
END OF SECTION 263213.16
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 263600 - TRANSFER SWITCHES
263600 - 1
SECTION 263600 - TRANSFER SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes automatic transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:
1. Bypass/isolation switches.
2. Remote annunciator system.
3. Remote annunciator and control system.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for transfer switches.
2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and
accessories.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details showing minimum clearances, conductor entry
provisions, gutter space, and installed features and devices.
2. Include material lists for each switch specified.
3. Single-Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch, power sources, and
load; and show interlocking provisions for each combined transfer switch and
bypass/isolation switch.
4. Riser Diagram: Show interconnection wiring between transfer switches, bypass/isolation
switches, annunciators, and control panels.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 263600 - TRANSFER SWITCHES
263600 - 2
B. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for transfer switches, accessories, and components,
from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
C. Field quality-control reports.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of transfer
switch or transfer switch components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.
C. Comply with NFPA 110.
D. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.
E. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system
transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch ampere
rating, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Short-Circuit Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by
protective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated, based
on testing according to UL 1008.
1. Where transfer switch includes internal fault-current protection, rating of switch and trip
unit combination shall exceed indicated fault-current value at installation location.
2. Short-time withstand capability for three cycles.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 263600 - TRANSFER SWITCHES
263600 - 3
G. Repetitive Accuracy of Solid-State Controls: All settings shall be plus or minus 2 percent or
better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C.
H. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage-surge
withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.62. Components shall
meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.
I. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a non-fused, momentarily energized solenoid or electric-
motor-operated mechanism. Switches for emergency or standby purposes shall be mechanically
and electrically interlocked in both directions to prevent simultaneous connection to both power
sources unless closed transition.
J. Neutral Terminal: Solid and fully rated unless otherwise indicated.
K. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop Drawings, by
color-code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable with printed shrinkable sleeve markers at
terminations. Color-coding and wire and cable markers are specified in Section 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field wiring
indicated.
2. Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field-Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or bottom
entrance of feeder conductors as indicated.
3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.
4. Accessible via front access.
2.2 CONTACTOR-TYPE AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1. Caterpillar, Inc.; Electric Power Division.
2. Cummins Power Generation.
3. Kohler Power Systems.
B. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.
C. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-rated current
between active power sources.
1. Limitation: Switches using molded-case switches or circuit breakers or insulated-case
circuit-breaker components are unacceptable.
2. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions.
3. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching. Contactor-style
automatic transfer-switch units, rated 600 A and higher, shall have separate arcing
contacts.
4. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
5. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
6. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.
7. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.
8. Ground bar.
9. Connectors shall be marked for conductor size and type according to UL 1008.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 263600 - TRANSFER SWITCHES
263600 - 4
D. Automatic Open-Transition Transfer Switches: Interlocked to prevent the load from being
closed on both sources at the same time.
1. Sources shall be mechanically and electrically interlocked to prevent closing both sources
on the load at the same time.
E. Manual Switch Operation: Unloaded. Control circuit automatically disconnects from electrical
operator during manual operation.
F. Automatic Transfer-Switch Controller Features:
1. Controller operates through a period of loss of control power.
2. Under-voltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Sense low phase-to-ground
voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of
nominal, and dropout voltage shall be adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value.
Factory set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent.
3. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from zero to 30 minutes, and
factory set for 10 minutes. Override shall automatically defeat delay on loss of voltage or
sustained under-voltage of emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored.
4. Test Switch: Simulate normal-source failure.
5. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch normal- and
emergency-source sensing circuits.
a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source
Available."
b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Emergency
Source Available."
6. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from zero to five minutes, and factory
set for five minutes. Contacts shall initiate shutdown at remote engine-generator controls
after retransfer of load to normal source.
7. Engine-Generator Exerciser: Solid-state, programmable-time switch starts engine
generator and transfers load to it from normal source for a preset time, then retransfers
and shuts down engine after a preset cool-down period. Initiates exercise cycle at preset
intervals adjustable from 7 to 30 days. Running periods shall be adjustable from 10 to 30
minutes. Factory settings shall be for 7-day exercise cycle, 20-minute running period, and
5-minute cool-down period. Exerciser features include the following:
a. Exerciser Transfer Selector Switch: Permits selection of exercise with and without
load transfer.
b. Push-button programming control with digital display of settings.
c. Integral battery operation of time switch when normal control power is
unavailable.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 263600 - TRANSFER SWITCHES
263600 - 5
2.3 TRANSFER SWITCH ACESSORIES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Annunciator and Control Panel Mounting: Flush in wall unless otherwise indicated.
B. Identify components according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
C. Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock.
D. Comply with NECA 1.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and conductors to generator
sets, motor controls, control, and communication requirements of transfer switches as
recommended by manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to Owner if
necessary to accommodate required wiring.
B. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within electrical enclosures.
Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.
1. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533
"Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess
and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii.
D. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
E. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
F. Connect twisted pair cable according to Section 271513 "Communications Copper Horizontal
Cabling."
G. Route and brace conductors according to manufacturer's written instructions and Section
260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." Do not obscure manufacturer's
markings and labels.
H. Brace and support equipment according to Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical
Systems."
I. Final connections to equipment shall be made with liquid-tight, flexible metallic conduit no
more than 18 inches in length.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 263600 - TRANSFER SWITCHES
263600 - 6
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
B. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.
C. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured
insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested
component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
D. Transfer switches will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment.
B. Training shall include testing ground-fault protective devices and instructions to determine
when the ground-fault system shall be retested. Include instructions on where ground-fault
sensors are located and how to avoid negating the ground-fault protection scheme during testing
and circuit modifications.
C. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.
END OF SECTION 263600
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 265119 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING
265119 - 1
SECTION 265119 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following types of LED luminaires:
1. Cylinder.
2. Downlight.
3. Lowbay.
4. Recessed, linear.
5. Strip light.
6. Suspended, linear.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 260923 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including
time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and
contactors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.
B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.
C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."
D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.
E. LED: Light-emitting diode.
F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.
G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation.
2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 265119 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING
265119 - 2
3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires.
4. Include emergency lighting units, including batteries and chargers.
5. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data.
6. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IES
"Lighting Measurements Testing and Calculation Guides" for each luminaire type. The
adjustment factors shall be for lamps and accessories identical to those indicated for the
luminaire as applied in this Project IES LM-79 and IES LM-80.
a. Manufacturers' Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's
laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory
Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Seismic Qualification Data: For luminaires, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.
B. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure color
consistency among luminaires.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering
before shipping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Luminaires shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to ASCE/SEI 7.
B. Altitude: Sea level to 8000 feet.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 265119 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING
265119 - 3
2.2 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps. Locate labels
where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles
when lamps are in place.
1. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics:
a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.
b. Lamp diameter, shape, size, wattage, and coating.
c. CCT and CRI.
C. Recessed luminaires shall comply with NEMA LE 4.
D. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for
indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.
2.3 CYLINDER.
A. See fixture schedule on the plans.
B. Nominal Operating Voltage: 120 V ac.
C. Lamp:
1. Minimum 1000 lm.
2. Minimum allowable efficacy of 80 lm/W.
3. CRI of minimum 80. CCT of 3500 K.
4. Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours to L70.
5. Dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output.
6. Internal driver.
7. User-Replaceable Lamps:
a. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C78.79.
b. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1.
8. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
D. Housings:
1. Extruded-aluminum housing and heat sink.
2. finish.
E. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit re-lamping without use of tools. Components are
designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling
accidentally during re-lamping and when secured in operating position.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 265119 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING
265119 - 4
F. Diffusers and Globes:
1. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to
yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.
3. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
G. With integral mounting provisions.
H. Standards:
1. ENERGY STAR certified.
2. RoHS compliant.
3. UL Listing: Listed for damp location.
2.4 DOWNLIGHT.
A. See fixture schedule on the plans.
B. Nominal Operating Voltage: 120 V ac.
C. Lamp:
1. Minimum 1000 lm.
2. Minimum allowable efficacy of 80 lm/W.
3. CRI of minimum 80. CCT of.
4. Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours to L70.
5. Dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output.
6. Internal driver.
7. User-Replaceable Lamps:
a. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C78.79.
b. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1.
8. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
D. Housings:
1. housing and heat sink.
2. finish.
3. Universal mounting bracket.
4. Integral junction box with conduit fittings.
E. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to
prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during
relamping and when secured in operating position.
F. Diffusers and Globes:
1. lens.
2. light distribution.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 265119 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING
265119 - 5
3. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to
yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
4. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.
5. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
G. Standards:
1. ENERGY STAR certified.
2. RoHS compliant.
3. UL Listing: Listed for damp location.
4. Recessed luminaires shall comply with NEMA LE 4.
2.5 LOWBAY
A. See fixture schedule on the plans.
B. Nominal Operating Voltage: 120 V ac.
C. Lamp:
1. Minimum 10,000 lm.
2. Minimum allowable efficacy of 80 lm/W.
3. CRI of minimum 80. CCT of.
4. Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours to L70.
5. Dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output.
6. Internal driver.
7. User-Replaceable Lamps:
a. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C78.79.
b. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1.
8. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
D. Housings:
1. Extruded-aluminum housing and heat sink.
2. finish.
E. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit re-lamping without use of tools. Components are
designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling
accidentally during re-lamping and when secured in operating position.
F. Diffusers and Globes:
1. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to
yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.
3. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
G. Standards:
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 265119 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING
265119 - 6
1. ENERGY STAR certified.
2. RoHS compliant.
3. UL Listing: Listed for damp location.
2.6 RECESSED, LINEAR.
A. See fixture schedule on the plans.
B. Nominal Operating Voltage: 120 V ac.
C. Lamp:
1. Minimum 3,000 lm.
2. Minimum allowable efficacy of 85 lm/W.
3. CRI of minimum 80. CCT of.
4. Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours to L70.
5. Dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output.
6. Internal driver.
7. User-Replaceable Lamps:
a. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C78.79.
b. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1.
8. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
D. Housings:
1. housing and heat sink.
2. finish.
3. With integral mounting provisions.
E. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit re-lamping without use of tools. Components are
designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling
accidentally during re-lamping and when secured in operating position.
F. Diffusers and Globes:
1. Prismatic acrylic.
2. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to
yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
3. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.
4. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
G. Standards:
1. ENERGY STAR certified.
2. RoHS compliant.
3. UL Listing: Listed for damp location.
4. NEMA LE 4.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 265119 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING
265119 - 7
2.7 STRIP LIGHT.
A. See fixture schedule on the plans.
B. Nominal Operating Voltage: 120 V ac.
C. Lamp:
1. Minimum lm.
2. Minimum allowable efficacy of lm/W.
3. CRI of minimum 80. CCT of.
4. Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours to L70.
5. Dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output.
6. Internal driver.
7. User-Replaceable Lamps:
a. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C78.79.
b. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1.
8. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
D. Housings:
1. housing and heat sink.
2. finish.
3. With integral mounting provisions.
E. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit re-lamping of luminaire without use of tools.
Components are designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components
from falling accidentally during re-lamping and when secured in operating position.
F. Diffusers and Globes:
1. Prismatic acrylic.
2. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to
yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
3. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.
4. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
G. Standards:
1. ENERGY STAR certified.
2. RoHS compliant.
3. UL Listing: Listed for damp location.
2.8 SUSPENDED, LINEAR
A. See fixture schedule on the plans.
B. Nominal Operating Voltage: 120 V ac.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 265119 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING
265119 - 8
C. Lamp:
1. Minimum 3,000 lm.
2. Minimum allowable efficacy of 85 lm/W.
3. CRI of minimum 80. CCT of.
4. Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours to L70.
5. Dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output.
6. Internal driver.
7. User-Replaceable Lamps:
a. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C78.79.
b. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1.
8. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
D. Housings:
1. Extruded-aluminum housing and heat sink.
2. finish.
3. With integral mounting provisions.
E. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit re-lamping without use of tools. Components are
designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling
accidentally during re-lamping and when secured in operating position.
F. Diffusers and Globes:
1. Diffuse glass.
2. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to
yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
3. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.
4. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
G. Standards:
1. ENERGY STAR certified.
2. RoHS compliant.
3. UL Listing: Listed for damp location.
2.9 MATERIALS
A. Metal Parts:
1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated.
3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 265119 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING
265119 - 9
B. Steel:
1. ASTM A 36/A 36M for carbon structural steel.
2. ASTM A 568/A 568M for sheet steel.
C. Stainless Steel:
1. 1. Manufacturer's standard grade.
2. 2. Manufacturer's standard type, ASTM A 240/240 M.
D. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M.
E. Aluminum: ASTM B 209.
2.10 METAL FINISHES
A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining
components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be
and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.11 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"
for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish
same as luminaire.
C. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.
D. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
E. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment with
threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical
connections before luminaire installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 265119 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING
265119 - 10
3.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTING
A. If approved by the Architect, use selected permanent luminaires for temporary lighting. When
construction is sufficiently complete, clean luminaires used for temporary lighting and install
new lamps.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install lamps in each luminaire.
D. Supports:
1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight.
2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping.
3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall.
4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100
percent of luminaire weight and a vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.
E. Flush-Mounted Luminaires:
1. Secured to outlet box.
2. Attached to ceiling structural members at four points equally spaced around
circumference of luminaire.
3. Trim ring flush with finished surface.
F. Wall-Mounted Luminaires:
1. Attached to a minimum 20 gauge backing plate attached to wall structural members.
2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board.
G. Suspended Luminaires:
1. Ceiling Mount:
a. Two5/32-inch- diameter aircraft cable supports adjustable to 10 feet in length.
b. Pendant mount Four-point pendant mount with 5/32-inch- diameter aircraft cable
supports adjustable to 10 feet in length.
c. Hook mount.
2. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.
3. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with
approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire
oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices.
4. Continuous Rows of Luminaires: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or
rod for suspension for each unit length of luminaire chassis, including one at each end.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 265119 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING
265119 - 11
5. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods
to building structure.
H. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires:
1. Secure to any required outlet box.
2. Secure luminaire to the luminaire opening using approved fasteners in a minimum of four
locations, spaced near corners of luminaire.
3. Use approved devices and support components to connect luminaire to ceiling grid and
building structure in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire.
I. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables" for wiring connections.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for
identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after
electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.
2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation.
Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.
B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.6 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Comply with requirements for startup specified in Section 260943.16 "Addressable-Luminaire
Lighting Controls."
B. Comply with requirements for startup specified in Section 260943.23 "Relay-Based Lighting
Controls."
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,
provide on-site assistance in adjusting the direction of aim of luminaires to suit occupied
conditions. Make up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal hours for this purpose.
Some of this work may be required during hours of darkness.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 265119 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING
265119 - 12
1. During adjustment visits, inspect all luminaires. Replace lamps or luminaires that are
defective.
2. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.
3. Adjust the aim of luminaires in the presence of the Architect.
END OF SECTION 265119
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 265613 - LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS 265613 - 1
SECTION 265613 - LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Poles and accessories for support of luminaires.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EPA: Equivalent projected area.
B. Luminaire: Complete luminaire.
C. Pole: Luminaire-supporting structure, including tower used for large-area illumination.
D. Standard: See "Pole."
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each pole, accessory, and luminaire-supporting and -lowering device,
arranged as indicated.
1. Include data on construction details, profiles, EPA, cable entrances, materials,
dimensions, weight, rated design load, and ultimate strength of individual components.
2. Include finishes for lighting poles and luminaire-supporting devices.
3. Anchor bolts.
4. Manufactured pole foundations.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For and.
B. Source quality-control reports.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Package aluminum poles for shipping according to ASTM B 660.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 265613 - LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS 265613 - 2
B. Store poles on decay-resistant skids at least 12 inches above grade and vegetation. Support
poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.
C. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation. Handle
poles with web fabric straps.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-6-M.
B. Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports, lowering devices, and
supporting structure, applied according to AASHTO LTS-6-M.
C. Live Load: Single load of 500 lbf distributed according to AASHTO LTS-6-M.
D. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual EPA of luminaires and brackets by a factor
of 1.1 to obtain the EPA to be used in pole selection strength analysis.
E. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting
requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 STEEL POLES
A. See lighting fixture schedule on the plans for poles.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain poles from single manufacturer or producer.
C. Poles: Comply with ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B carbon steel with a minimum yield
of 46,000 psig; one-piece construction up to 40 feet in height with access handhole in pole wall.
1. Shape: Square, straight.
2. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or breakaway
support.
D. Poles: Comply with, stainless steel with a minimum yield of 55,000 psig; one-piece
construction up to 40 feet in height with access handhole in pole wall.
1. Shape: Square, straight.
2. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or breakaway
support.
E. Steel Mast Arms: type, continuously welded to pole attachment plate. Material and finish same
as plate.
F. Pole-Top Tenons: Fabricated to support luminaire or luminaires and brackets indicated, and
securely fastened to pole top.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 265613 - LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS 265613 - 3
G. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, size and type as determined by manufacturer. Corrosion-resistant
items compatible with support components.
1. Materials: Compatible with poles and standards as well as the substrates to which poles
and standards are fastened and shall not cause galvanic action at contact points.
2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication unless otherwise indicated.
H. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch threaded lug, complying with requirements in
Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems," listed for attaching grounding
and bonding conductors of type and size indicated, and accessible through handhole.
I. Cable Support Grip: Wire-mesh type with rotating attachment eye, sized for diameter of cable
and rated for a minimum load equal to weight of supported load multiplied by a 5.0 safety
factor.
J. Factory-Painted Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and
Metal Products" recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces according to SSPC-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil, grease,
and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a
smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel,
according to SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1 or SSPC-SP 8.
2. Interior Surfaces of Pole: One coat of bituminous paint, or otherwise treat for equal
corrosion protection.
3. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of
primer and two finish coats of high gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.
a. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
2.3 MOUNTING HARDWARE
A. Nuts: ASTM A 563, Grade A, Heavy-Hex
1. Galvanizing: Hot dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153, Class C.
2. Two nuts provided per anchor bolt.
B. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1.
1. Galvanizing: Hot dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153, Class C.
2. One washers provided per anchor bolt.
2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 265613 - LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS 265613 - 4
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations
in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved
Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine poles, luminaire-mounting devices, lowering devices, and pole accessories before
installation. Components that are scratched, dented, marred, wet, moisture damaged, or visibly
damaged are considered defective.
C. Examine roughing-in for foundation and conduit to verify actual locations of installation.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 POLE FOUNDATION
A. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange.
Structural steel complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and hot-dip galvanized according to
ASTM A 123/A 123 M; and with top-plate and mounting bolts to match pole-base flange and
strength required to support pole, luminaire, and accessories. Concrete, reinforcement, and
formwork are specified on the plans.
3.3 POLE INSTALLATION
A. Alignment: Align poles as indicated.
B. Clearances: Maintain the following minimum horizontal distances of poles from surface and
underground features unless otherwise indicated on drawing.
1. Fire Hydrants and Water Piping: 60 inches.
2. Water, Gas, Electric, Communications, and Sewer Lines: 10 feet.
3. Trees: 15 feet from tree trunk.
4. .
C. Foundation-Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts and tighten top nuts to torque level
according to pole manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use anchor bolts and nuts selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and
approved by manufacturer.
2. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use non-shrink or expanding concrete
grout firmly packed to fill space.
3. Install base covers unless otherwise indicated.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 265613 - LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS 265613 - 5
4. Use a short piece of 1/2 -inch diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout. Arrange
to drain condensation from interior of pole.
D. Poles and Pole Foundations Set in Concrete-Paved Areas: Install poles with a minimum 6-inch-
wide, unpaved gap between the pole or pole foundation and the edge of the adjacent concrete
slab. Fill unpaved ring with pea gravel. Insert material to a level 1 inch below top of concrete
slab.
E. Raise and set pole using web fabric slings (not chain or cable) at locations indicated by
manufacturer.
3.4 CORROSION PREVENTION
A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a
dissimilar metal, protect aluminum using insulating fittings or treatment.
B. Steel Conduits: Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for
Electrical Systems." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- thick, pipe-
wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50-percent overlap.
3.5 GROUNDING
A. Ground Metal Poles and Support Structures: Comply with requirements in Section 260526
"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
1. Install grounding electrode for each pole unless otherwise indicated.
2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding
system.
B. Ground Nonmetallic Poles and Support Structures: Comply with requirements in Section
260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
1. Install grounding electrode for each pole.
2. Install grounding conductor and conductor protector.
3. Ground metallic components of pole accessories and foundation.
3.6 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for
identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
END OF SECTION 265613
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 265619 - LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265619 - 1
SECTION 265619 - LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exterior solid-state luminaires that are designed for and exclusively use LED lamp
technology.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 265613 "Lighting Poles and Standards" for poles and standards used to support
exterior lighting equipment.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.
B. CRI: Color rendering index.
C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."
D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.
E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.
F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details.
2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 265619 - LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265619 - 2
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: For each luminaire, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by
a qualified testing agency.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturers'
laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
B. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.
C. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure color
consistency among luminaires.
D. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by
manufacturer.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering
prior to shipping.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Verify existing and proposed utility structures prior to the start of work associated with
luminaire installation.
B. Mark locations of exterior luminaires for approval by Architect prior to the start of luminaire
installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of
hazard by an NRTL.
C. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for
indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.
D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1598 and listed for wet location.
E. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1.
F. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C79.1.
G. CRI of minimum 70. CCT of 3500 K.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 265619 - LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265619 - 3
H. L70 lamp life of 50,000 hours.
I. Lamps dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output.
J. Internal driver.
K. Nominal Operating Voltage: 120 V ac.
L. Lamp Rating: Lamp marked for outdoor use and in enclosed locations.
M. Source Limitations: Obtain luminaires from single source from a single manufacturer.
N. Source Limitations: For luminaires, obtain each color, grade, finish, type, and variety of
luminaire from single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in
appearance and physical properties.
2.2 LUMINAIRE TYPES
A. Area and Site: See lighting fixture schedule on the plans.
B. Border: See lighting fixture schedule on the plans.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
B. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum. Form and support to prevent warping
and sagging.
C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit re-lamping without use of tools. Designed to
prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during
re-lamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or
replacing lenses.
D. Diffusers and Globes:
1. Acrylic Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing
and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.
3. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
E. Lens and Refractor Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion
lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.
F. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows unless otherwise indicated:
1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.
2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
G. Housings:
1. Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosure that will not warp, sag, or deform in
use.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 265619 - LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265619 - 4
2. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.
H. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps. Labels shall be
located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal
viewing angles when lamps are in place.
1. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics:
a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.
b. Lamp diameter, shape, size, wattage and coating.
c. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Variations in Finishes: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in
appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved
Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
B. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested
luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support
materials.
C. Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes
Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and
designating finishes.
1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the
Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
2. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff
complying with AA-M20 requirements; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat
wax.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire electrical conduit to verify actual locations of conduit
connections before luminaire installation.
C. Examine walls, roofs, for suitable conditions where luminaires will be installed.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 265619 - LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265619 - 5
3.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTING
A. If approved by the Architect, use selected permanent luminaires for temporary lighting. When
construction is substantially complete, clean luminaires used for temporary lighting and install
new lamps.
3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application
and approved by manufacturer.
C. Install lamps in each luminaire.
D. Fasten luminaire to structural support.
E. Supports:
1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight.
2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and re-lamping.
3. Support luminaires without causing deflection of finished surface.
4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100
percent of luminaire weight and a vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.
F. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways. Conceal raceways and cables.
G. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with finished grade unless otherwise indicated.
Install luminaires at height and aiming angle as indicated on Drawings.
H. Coordinate layout and installation of luminaires with other construction.
I. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming.
J. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables" and Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for wiring
connections and wiring methods.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF INDIVIDUAL GROUND-MOUNTED LUMINAIRES
A. Aim as indicated on Drawings.
B. Install on concrete base with top 4 inches above finished grade or surface at luminaire location.
Cast conduit into base, and finish by troweling and rubbing smooth. Concrete materials,
installation, and finishing are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.5 CORROSION PREVENTION
A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a
dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.
B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In
concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied
with a 50 percent overlap.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 265619 - LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265619 - 6
3.6 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for
identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
END OF SECTION 265619
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 270526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270526 - 1
SECTION 270526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Grounding conductors.
2. Grounding connectors.
3. Grounding busbars.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BCT: Bonding conductor for telecommunications.
B. TGB: Telecommunications grounding busbar.
C. TMGB: Telecommunications main grounding busbar.
D. Service Provider: The operator of a service that provides telecommunications transmission
delivered over access provider facilities.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.
1. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of ITS Level 2
Installer, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at
Project site.
2. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as a designer RCDD to perform the on-
site inspection.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 270526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270526 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
C. Comply with TIA-607-B.
2.2 CONDUCTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Harger Lightning & Grounding.
2. Panduit Corp.
3. TE Connectivity Ltd.
B. Comply with UL 486A-486B.
C. Insulated Conductors: Stranded copper wire, green or green with yellow stripe insulation,
insulated for 600 V, and complying with UL 83.
1. Ground wire for custom-length equipment ground jumpers shall be No. 6 AWG, 19-
strand, UL-listed, Type THHN wire.
2. Cable Tray Equipment Grounding Wire: No. 8 AWG.
2.3 CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems.
2. Chatsworth Products, Inc.
3. Harger Lightning & Grounding.
4. Panduit Corp.
5. TE Connectivity Ltd.
B. Compression Wire Connectors: Crimp-and-compress connectors that bond to the conductor
when the connector is compressed around the conductor. Comply with UL 467.
1. Electroplated tinned copper, C and H shaped.
2.4 GROUNDING BUSBARS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1. Chatsworth Products, Inc.
2. Harger Lightning & Grounding.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 270526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270526 - 3
3. Panduit Corp.
B. TGB: Predrilled rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, 1/4 by 2 inches in cross section,
length as indicated on Drawings. The busbar shall be for wall mounting, shall be NRTL listed as
complying with UL 467, and shall comply with TIA-607-B.
1. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section.
2. Mounting Hardware: Stand-off brackets that provide at least a 2-inch clearance to access
the rear of the busbar. Brackets and bolts shall be stainless steel.
3. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall be Lexan or PVC. Comply with UL 891 for use in
600-V switchboards, impulse tested at 5000 V.
C. Rack and Cabinet Grounding Busbars: Rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, accepting
conductors ranging from No. 14 to No. 2/0 AWG, NRTL listed as complying with UL 467, and
complying with TIA-607-B. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this
Section.
1. Rack-Mounted Vertical Busbar: 72 long, with stainless-steel or copper-plated hardware
for attachment to the rack.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the ac grounding electrode system and equipment grounding for compliance with
requirements for maximum ground-resistance level and other conditions affecting performance
of grounding and bonding of the electrical system.
B. Inspect the test results of the ac grounding system measured at the point of BCT connection.
C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of
the Work.
D. Proceed with connection of the BCT only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Bonding shall include the ac utility power service entrance, the communications cable entrance,
and the grounding electrode system. The bonding of these elements shall form a loop so that
each element is connected to at least two others.
B. Comply with NECA 1.
C. Comply with TIA-607-B.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller and stranded conductors for
No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 270526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270526 - 4
1. The bonding conductors between the TGB and structural steel of steel-frame buildings
shall not be smaller than No. 6 AWG.
2. The bonding conductors between the TMGB and structural steel of steel-frame buildings
shall not be smaller than No. 6 AWG.
B. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
C. Conductor Support:
1. Secure grounding and bonding conductors at intervals of not less than 36 inches.
D. Grounding and Bonding Conductors:
1. Install in the straightest and shortest route between the origination and termination point,
and no longer than required. The bend radius shall not be smaller than eight times the
diameter of the conductor. No one bend may exceed 90 degrees.
2. Install without splices.
3. Support at not more than 36-inch intervals.
4. Install grounding and bonding conductors in 3/4-inch PVC conduit until conduit enters a
telecommunications room. The grounding and bonding conductor pathway through a
plenum shall be in EMT. Conductors shall not be installed in EMT unless otherwise
indicated.
a. If a grounding and bonding conductor is installed in ferrous metallic conduit, bond
the conductor to the conduit using a grounding bushing that complies with
requirements in Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems," and
bond both ends of the conduit to a TGB.
3.4 GROUNDING BUSBARS
A. Indicate locations of grounding busbars on Drawings. Install busbars horizontally, on insulated
spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 12 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
B. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of
doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Bond metallic equipment in a telecommunications equipment room to the grounding busbar in
that room, using equipment grounding conductors not smaller than No. 6 AWG.
B. Stacking of conductors under a single bolt is not permitted when connecting to busbars.
C. Assemble the wire connector to the conductor, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions and as follows:
1. Use crimping tool and the die specific to the connector.
2. Pretwist the conductor.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 270526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270526 - 5
3. Apply an antioxidant compound to all bolted and compression connections.
D. Primary Protector: Bond to the TMGB with insulated bonding conductor.
E. Interconnections: Interconnect all TGBs with the TMGB with the telecommunications backbone
conductor. If more than one TMGB is installed, interconnect TMGBs using the grounding
equalizer conductor. The telecommunications backbone conductor and grounding equalizer
conductor size shall not be less than 2 kcmils/linear foot of conductor length, up to a maximum
size of No. 3/0 AWG unless otherwise indicated.
F. Telecommunications Enclosures and Equipment Racks: Bond metallic components of
enclosures to the telecommunications bonding and grounding system. Install vertically mounted
rack grounding busbar unless the enclosure and rack are manufactured with the busbar. Bond
the equipment grounding busbar to the TGB No. 2 AWG bonding conductors.
G. Structural Steel: Where the structural steel of a steel frame building is readily accessible within
the room or space, bond each TGB and TMGB to the vertical steel of the building frame.
H. Shielded Cable: Bond the shield of shielded cable to the TGB in communications rooms and
spaces. Comply with TIA-568-C.1 and TIA-568-C.2 when grounding shielded balanced
twisted-pair cables.
I. Rack- and Cabinet-Mounted Equipment: Bond powered equipment chassis to the cabinet or
rack grounding bar. Power connection shall comply with NFPA 70; the equipment grounding
conductor in the power cord of cord- and plug-connected equipment shall be considered as a
supplement to bonding requirements in this Section.
END OF SECTION 270526
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 270528 - PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528 - 1
SECTION 270528 - PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal conduits and fittings.
2. Hooks.
3. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.
B. GRC: Galvanized rigid conduit.
C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
D. RTRC: Reinforced thermosetting resin conduit.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for the following:
1. Surface pathways
2. Wireways and fittings.
3. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
A. Description: Metal raceway of circular cross section with manufacturer-fabricated fittings.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 270528 - PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528 - 2
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International.
2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International.
3. Alpha Wire.
4. Anamet Electrical, Inc.
5. Electri-Flex Company.
6. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation.
7. Picoma Industries, Inc.
8. Plasti-Bond.
9. Republic Conduit.
10. Southwire Company.
11. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.
12. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation.
13. Wheatland Tube Company.
C. General Requirements for Metal Conduits and Fittings:
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a nationally recognized testing laboratory,
and marked for intended location and application.
2. Comply with TIA-569-D.
D. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
E. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.
F. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
G. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.
1. Fittings for EMT:
a. Material: Steel.
b. Type: Set screw or compression.
2. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL-467, rated
for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding
jumper.
3. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with
overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.
2.2 HOOKS
A. Description: Prefabricated sheet metal cable supports for telecommunications cable.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. MonoSystems, Inc.
2. Wiremold / Legrand.
C. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and
application.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 270528 - PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528 - 3
D. Comply with TIA-569-D.
E. Galvanized steel.
F. J shape.
2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Description: Enclosures for communications.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Adalet.
2. Carlon; a brand of Thomas & Betts Corporation.
3. Crouse-Hinds, an Eaton business.
4. EGS/Appleton Electric.
5. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.
6. FSR Inc.
7. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection.
8. Milbank Manufacturing Co.
9. Molex Industrial Products Group; Woodhead Brand.
10. MonoSystems, Inc.
11. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation.
12. Oldcastle Enclosure Solutions.
13. Plasti-Bond.
14. Quazite: Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.
15. RACO; Hubbell.
16. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.
17. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures.
18. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.
19. Wiremold / Legrand.
C. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets:
1. Comply with TIA-569-D.
2. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for use in wet locations.
3. Gangable boxes are prohibited.
D. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PATHWAY APPLICATION
A. Indoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.
2. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 270528 - PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528 - 4
3. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 nonmetallic
units in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.
B. Minimum Pathway Size: 3/4-inch trade size for copper and aluminum cables.
C. Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and location.
1. EMT: Use set-screw or compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
D. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.
E. Install surface pathways only where indicated on Drawings.
F. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with the following standards for installation requirements except where requirements
on Drawings or in this Section are stricter:
1. NECA 1.
2. NECA/BICSI 568.
3. TIA-569-D.
4. NECA 101
5. NECA 102.
6. NECA 105.
7. NECA 111.
B. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of pathways allowed in specific occupancies and
number of floors.
C. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping
materials and installation for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.
D. Comply with requirements in Section 270529 "Hangers and Supports for Communications
Systems" for hangers and supports.
E. Comply with requirements in Section 270544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications
Pathways and Cabling" for sleeves and sleeve seals for communications.
F. Keep pathways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.
Install horizontal pathway runs above water and steam piping.
G. Complete pathway installation before starting conductor installation.
H. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
I. Install no more than the equivalent of two 90-degree bends in any pathway run. Support
within 12 inches of changes in direction. Utilize long radius ells for all optical-fiber cables.
J. Conceal rigid conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
K. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.
L. Pathways Embedded in Slabs:
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 270528 - PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528 - 5
1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main
reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab
support. Secure pathways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals.
2. Arrange pathways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion
fittings. Comply with requirements for expansion joints specified in this article.
3. Arrange pathways to keep a minimum of 1 inch of concrete cover in all directions.
4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for
each specific location.
5. Change from nonmetallic conduit and fittings to GRC or IMC and fittings before rising
above floor.
M. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:
1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for pathways.
2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or
in an enclosure.
N. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply
listed compound to threads of pathway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound
manufacturer's written instructions.
O. Install pathways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install
locknuts hand tight plus one additional quarter-turn.
P. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in
the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure, to assure a continuous ground path.
Q. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits of 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll
cutter or a guide to ensure cut is straight and perpendicular to the length.
R. Install pull wires in empty pathways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not
less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.
Secure pull wire, so it cannot fall into conduit. Cap pathways designated as spare alongside
pathways in use.
S. Install pathway-sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with
listed sealing compound. For concealed pathways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a
blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install pathway-
sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.
T. Install devices to seal pathway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals, so no fittings or
boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all
pathways at the following points:
1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated
spaces.
2. Where an underground service pathway enters a building or structure.
3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
U. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding PVC conduit and fittings.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 270528 - PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528 - 6
V. Hooks:
1. Size to allow a minimum of 25 percent future capacity without exceeding design capacity
limits.
2. Shall be supported by dedicated support wires. Do not use ceiling grid support wire or
support rods.
3. Hook spacing shall allow no more than 6 inches of slack. The lowest point of the cables
shall be no less than 6 inches adjacent to ceilings, mechanical ductwork and fittings,
luminaires, power conduits, power and telecommunications outlets, and other electrical
and communications equipment.
4. Space hooks no more than 5 feet o.c.
5. Provide a hook at each change in direction.
W. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not
individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to
center of box unless otherwise indicated.
X. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,
and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surface to provide a flat surface for a
raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.
Y. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls, so they are not in the same
vertical channel.
Z. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing
members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.
AA. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by
conduits.
BB. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
CC. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
3.3 FIRESTOPPING
A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with
requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage or deterioration.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating
recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 270528
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 271100 - COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 271100 - 1
SECTION 271100 - COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Backboards.
2. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
3. Power strips.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 271513 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling" for copper data cabling
associated with system panels and devices.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Access Provider: An operator that provides a circuit path or facility between the service
provider and user. An access provider can also be a service provider.
B. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.
C. RCDD: Registered communications distribution designer.
D. Service Provider: The operator of a telecommunications transmission service delivered through
access provider facilities.
E. TGB: Telecommunications grounding bus bar.
F. TMGB: Telecommunications main grounding bus bar.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for equipment racks and cabinets.
2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished
specialties and accessories.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 271100 - COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 271100 - 2
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. Base certification on the maximum
number of components capable of being mounted in each rack type. Identify components
on which certification is based.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.
1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings shall be under direct supervision of
RCDD.
2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under direct supervision of Technician, who
shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site.
3. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as RCDD to perform the on-site
inspection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Equipment shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after
the seismic event."
2.2 BACKBOARDS
A. Backboards: Plywood, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches.
B. Backboard Paint: Light-colored interior latex paint.
2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 271100 - COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 271100 - 3
1. Adalet.
2. Crouse-Hinds, an Eaton business.
3. EGS/Appleton Electric.
4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.
5. FSR Inc.
6. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection.
7. Hubbell Incorporated.
8. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
9. Kraloy.
10. Milbank Manufacturing Co.
11. MonoSystems, Inc.
12. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation.
13. Oldcastle Enclosure Solutions.
14. Plasti-Bond.
15. RACO; Hubbell.
16. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.
17. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures.
18. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.
19. Topaz Electric; a division of Topaz Lighting Corp.
20. Wiremold / Legrand.
B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets
shall be listed and labeled for intended location and use.
C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.
D. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as
recessed box.
E. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches by 2-1/8 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep.
2.4 POWER STRIPS
A. Comply with requirements in Section 271116 "Communications Racks, Frames, and
Enclosures."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ENTRANCE FACILITIES
A. Contact telecommunications service provider and arrange for installation of demarcation point,
protected entrance terminals, and a housing when so directed by service provider.
B. Comply with requirements in Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for
materials and installation requirements for underground pathways.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 271100 - COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 271100 - 4
B. Comply with BICSI's "Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual" for layout of
communications equipment spaces.
C. Comply with BICSI's "Information Technology Systems Installation Methods Manual" for
installation of equipment in communications equipment spaces.
D. Bundle, lace, and train conductors and cables to terminal points without exceeding
manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.
E. Coordinate layout and installation of communications equipment in tracks and in room.
Coordinate service entrance configuration with service provider.
1. Meet jointly with systems providers, equipment suppliers, and Owner to exchange
information and agree on details of equipment configurations and installation interfaces.
2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute them to other participants.
3. Adjust configurations and locations of distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch
panels in equipment rooms to accommodate and optimize configurations and space
requirements of communications equipment.
4. Adjust configurations and locations of equipment with distribution frames, cross-
connects, and patch panels of cabling systems of other communications, electronic safety
and security, and related systems that share space in equipment room.
F. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of communications
equipment requiring electrical power to operate.
G. Backboards:
1. Install from 6 inches to 8 feet, 6 inches above finished floor. If plywood is fire rated,
ensure that fire-rating stamp is visible after installation.
2. Paint all sides of backboard with two coats of paint.
3. Comply with requirements for backboard installation in BICSI's "Information
Technology Systems Installation Methods Manual" and TIA-569-D.
3.3 FIRESTOPPING
A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
B. Comply with TIA-569-D, Annex A, "Firestopping."
C. Comply with BICSI's "Information Technology Systems Installation Methods Manual,"
"Firestopping Practices" Ch.
END OF SECTION 271100
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 271116 - COMMUNICATIONS RACKS, FRAMES, AND ENCLOSURES 271116 - 1
SECTION 271116 - COMMUNICATIONS RACKS, FRAMES, AND ENCLOSURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. 19-inch equipment racks.
2. Power strips.
3. Grounding.
4. Labeling.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 271100 "Communications Equipment Room Fittings" for backboards and
accessories.
2. Section 270526 "Grounding and Bonding for Telecommunications Equipment" for
TMGBs and TGBs.
3. Section 271513 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling" for copper data cabling
associated with system panels and devices.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Access Provider: An operator that provides a circuit path or facility between the service
provider and user. An access provider can also be a service provider.
B. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.
C. LAN: Local area network.
D. RCDD: Registered communications distribution designer.
E. Service Provider: The operator of a telecommunications transmission service delivered through
access provider facilities.
F. TGB: Telecommunications grounding bus bar.
G. TMGB: Telecommunications main grounding bus bar.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 271116 - COMMUNICATIONS RACKS, FRAMES, AND ENCLOSURES 271116 - 2
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for equipment racks and cabinets.
2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, certifications,
standards compliance, and furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For communications racks, frames, and enclosures. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
2. Equipment Racks and Cabinets: Include workspace requirements and access for cable
connections.
3. Grounding: Indicate location of TGB and its mounting detail showing standoff insulators
and wall-mounting brackets.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. UL listed.
B. RoHS compliant.
C. Compliant with requirements of the Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard.
2.2 BACKBOARDS
A. Backboards: Plywood, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches. Comply with requirements for plywood backing
panels specified in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."
2.3 19-INCH EQUIPMENT RACKS
A. Description: four- post racks with threaded rails designed for mounting telecommunications
equipment. Width is compatible with EIA/ECIA 310-E, 19-inch equipment mounting with an
opening of 17.72-inches between rails.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. B-line, an Eaton business.
2. Belden Inc.
3. Black Box Corporation.
4. Bud Industries, Inc.
5. CommScope, Inc.
6. Dell Inc.
7. Emerson Network Power Connectivity Solutions.
8. Hammond Mfg. Co. Inc.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 271116 - COMMUNICATIONS RACKS, FRAMES, AND ENCLOSURES 271116 - 3
9. Hubbell Premise Wiring.
10. Kendall Howard.
11. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.
12. Middle Atlantic Products, Inc.
13. Ortronics, Inc.
14. Panduit Corp.
15. Siemon Co. (The).
16. Tripp-Lite.
C. General Requirements:
1. Frames: Modular units designed for telecommunications terminal support and
coordinated with dimensions of units to be supported.
2. Material: Sheet steel.
3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked-polyester powder coat.
4. Color: Black.
D. Floor-Mounted Racks:
1. Overall Height: 84 inches.
2. Overall Depth: 29 inches.
3. Upright Depth: 6 inches.
4. Two-Post Load Rating:.
5. Four-Post Load Rating: 2000 lb.
6. Number of Rack Units per Rack: 58.
a. Numbering: Every five rack units, on interior of rack.
7. Threads: 10-32.
8. Vertical and horizontal cable management channels, top and bottom cable troughs,
grounding lug, and a power strip.
9. Base shall have a minimum of four mounting holes for permanent attachment to floor.
10. Top shall have provisions for attaching to cable tray or ceiling.
11. Self-leveling.
E. Cable Management:
1. Metal, with integral wire retaining fingers.
2. Baked-polyester powder coat finish.
3. Vertical cable management panels shall have front and rear channels, with covers.
4. Provide horizontal crossover cable manager at the top of each relay rack, with a
minimum height of two rack units each.
2.4 OPEN RACK EQUIPMENT RACKS
A. Description: Four-post racks with integral bus bars, equipment support, and dimensions meeting
Open Rack Standard v1.2.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 271116 - COMMUNICATIONS RACKS, FRAMES, AND ENCLOSURES 271116 - 4
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Penguin Computing.
2. Quanta Cloud Technology.
C. General Requirements:
1. Frames: Four vertical columns, with perforated top and bottom.
2. Support Shelves: Designed to support equipment 1 OpenU (48 mm) in height.
3. Material:
a. Frames and Shelves: Sheet steel.
b. Bus Bars: Nickel plated copper, with silver over-plating.
4. Finish:
a. Frames: Manufacturer's standard, baked-polyester powder coat.
b. Shelves: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M.
5. Color: Black.
6. Height: 2100 mm.
7. Width: 600 mm.
8. Depth: 1607 mm.
9. Base shall have a minimum of four height-adjustable feet for permanent attachment to
floor, and four casters to allow easy repositioning of rack.
10. Self-leveling.
2.5 POWER STRIPS
A. Power Strips: Comply with UL 1363.
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for
intended location and application.
2. Rack mounting.
3. 20-A, 120-V ac, NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R receptacles.
4. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
5. LED indicator lights for reverse polarity and open outlet ground.
6. Close-coupled, direct plug-in line cord.
7. Rocker-type on-off switch, illuminated when in on position.
8. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 26 kA per phase.
9. Protection modes shall be line to neutral, line to ground, and neutral to ground. UL 1449
clamping voltage for all three modes shall be not more than 330 V.
2.6 GROUNDING
A. Comply with requirements in Section 270526 "Grounding and Bonding for Communications
Systems" for grounding conductors and connectors.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 271116 - COMMUNICATIONS RACKS, FRAMES, AND ENCLOSURES 271116 - 5
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1. Chatsworth Products, Inc.
2. Harger Lightning & Grounding.
3. Panduit Corp.
C. Rack and Cabinet TGBs: Rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, accepting conductors
ranging from No. 14 to No. 2/0 AWG, NRTL listed as complying with UL 467, and complying
with TIA-606-B. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section.
1. Cabinet-Mounted TGB: Terminal block, with stainless-steel or copper-plated hardware
for attachment to cabinet.
2. Rack-Mounted Horizontal TGB: Designed for mounting in 19 equipment racks. Include a
copper splice bar for transitioning to an adjoining rack, and stainless-steel or copper-
plated hardware for attachment to the rack.
3. Rack-Mounted Vertical TGB: 72 long, with stainless-steel or copper-plated hardware for
attachment to rack.
2.7 LABELING
A. Comply with TIA-606-B and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks,
laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Comply with BICSI TDMM for layout of communications equipment spaces.
C. Comply with BICSI ITSIMM for installation of communications equipment spaces.
D. Bundle, lace, and train conductors and cables to terminal points without exceeding
manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.
E. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of communications
equipment requiring electrical power to operate.
3.2 GROUNDING
A. Comply with NECA/BICSI 607.
B. Install grounding according to BICSI ITSIMM, "Bonding, Grounding (Earthing) and Electrical
Protection" Ch.
C. Locate TGB to minimize length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall, allowing at least 2
inches of clearance behind TGB. Connect TGB with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding
electrode conductor from TGB to suitable electrical building ground. Connect rack TGB to near
TGB or the TMGB.
1. Bond the shield of shielded cable to patch panel, and bond patch panel to TGB or TMGB.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 271116 - COMMUNICATIONS RACKS, FRAMES, AND ENCLOSURES 271116 - 6
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Coordinate system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA-606-B. Comply with
requirements in Section 270553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Comply with requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For
fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.
C. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA-606-B for Class 2
level of administration.
D. Labels shall be machine printed. Type shall be 1/8 inch in height.
END OF SECTION 271116
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 271513 - COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING 271513 - 1
SECTION 271513 - COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Category 6 twisted pair cable.
2. Twisted pair cable hardware, including plugs and jacks.
3. Cable management system.
4. Cabling identification products.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 270513 "Conductors and Cables for Communications Systems" for data cabling
associated with system panels and devices.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection
or cross-connection.
B. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
C. FTP: Shielded twisted pair.
D. F/FTP: Overall foil screened cable with foil screened twisted pair.
E. F/UTP: Overall foil screened cable with unscreened twisted pair.
F. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
G. LAN: Local area network.
H. Jack: Also commonly called an "outlet," it is the fixed, female connector.
I. Plug: Also commonly called a "connector," it is the removable, male telecommunications
connector.
J. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.
K. Screen: A metallic layer, either a foil or braid, placed around a pair or group of conductors.
L. Shield: A metallic layer, either a foil or braid, placed around a pair or group of conductors.
M. S/FTP: Overall braid screened cable with foil screened twisted pair.
N. S/UTP: Overall braid screened cable with unscreened twisted pairs.
O. UTP: Unscreened (unshielded) twisted pair.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 271513 - COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING 271513 - 2
1.4 COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION
A. Horizontal cable cabling system shall provide interconnections between the equipment rack, and
the equipment outlet, in the telecommunications cabling system structure. Cabling system
consists of horizontal cables, mechanical terminations, and patch cords or jumpers used for
horizontal-to-horizontal cross-connection.
1. Horizontal cabling shall contain no more than one transition point or consolidation point
between the horizontal cross-connect and the telecommunications equipment outlet.
2. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling.
B. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 295 feet. This maximum allowable length
does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet to the workstation equipment or in the
horizontal cross-connect.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For installation supervisor, and field inspector.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.
1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, cabling administration Drawings,
and field testing program development by an RCDD.
2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Level 2
Installer, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at
Project site.
3. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site
testing.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site.
1. Test each pair of twisted pair cable for open and short circuits.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet
work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 271513 - COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING 271513 - 3
ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the
construction period.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with Owner's
telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in
TIA-568-C.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard.
B. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA-569-D.
C. Grounding: Comply with TIA-607-B.
2.2 GENERAL CABLE CHARACTERISTICS
A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with
the applicable standard and NFPA 70 for the following types:
1. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP complying with UL 1685 or Type CMP in
listed plenum communications raceway.
2. Communications, Non-plenum: Type CMR complying with UL 1666 and ICEA S-103-
701.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing
agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
C. RoHS compliant.
2.3 CATEGORY 6 TWISTED PAIR CABLE
A. Description: Four-pair, balanced-twisted pair cable, certified to meet transmission
characteristics of Category 6 cable at frequencies up to 250MHz.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. 3M.
2. AMP NETCONNECT; a TE Connectivity Ltd. company.
3. Belden CDT Networking Division/NORDX.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 271513 - COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING 271513 - 4
4. Berk-Tek Leviton; a Nexans/Leviton alliance.
5. CommScope, Inc.
6. Draka USA.
7. General Cable; General Cable Corporation.
8. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc.
9. Hitachi Cable America Inc.
10. Mohawk; a division of Belden Networking, Inc.
11. Superior Essex Inc.
12. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope Inc. brand.
C. Standard: Comply with NEMA WC 66/ICEA S-116-732 and TIA-568-C.2 for Category 6
cables.
D. Conductors: 100-ohm, 23 AWG solid copper.
E. Shielding/Screening: Unshielded twisted pairs (UTP).
F. Cable Rating: Plenum.
G. Jacket: Blue thermoplastic.
2.4 TWISTED PAIR CABLE HARDWARE
A. Description: Hardware designed to connect, splice, and terminate twisted pair copper
communications cable.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. 3M.
2. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc.
3. AMP NETCONNECT; a TE Connectivity Ltd. company.
4. Belden CDT Networking Division/NORDX.
5. Berk-Tek Leviton; a Nexans/Leviton alliance.
6. CommScope, Inc.
7. Draka USA.
8. Dynacom Corporation.
9. General Cable; General Cable Corporation.
10. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc.
11. Hubbell Premise Wiring.
12. KRONE Incorporated.
13. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.
14. Mohawk; a division of Belden Networking, Inc.
15. Molex Premise Networks.
16. Panduit Corp.
17. Siemon Co. (The).
18. Superior Essex Inc.
19. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope Inc. brand.
C. General Requirements for Twisted Pair Cable Hardware:
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 271513 - COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING 271513 - 5
1. Comply with the performance requirements of Category 6.
2. Comply with TIA-568-C.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or
tools.
3. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain twisted pair cable hardware from single source from single
manufacturer.
E. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each
jack location for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.
1. Features:
a. Universal T568A and T568B wiring labels.
b. Labeling areas adjacent to conductors.
c. Replaceable connectors.
d. 24 or 48 ports.
2. Construction: 16-gauge steel and mountable on 19-inch equipment racks.
3. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair cable indicated.
F. Jacks and Jack Assemblies:
1. Female; eight position; modular; fixed telecommunications connector designed for
termination of a single four-pair, 100-ohm, unshielded or shielded twisted pair cable.
2. Designed to snap-in to a patch panel or faceplate.
3. Standard: Comply with TIA-568-C.2.
4. Marked to indicate transmission performance.
G. Faceplate:
1. Four port, vertical single gang faceplates designed to mount to single gang wall boxes.
2. Metal Faceplate: Stainless steel, complying with requirements in the wiring device
schedule on the plans.
3. For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of twisted pair, optical fiber,
and coaxial work area cords.
a. Flush mounting jacks, positioning the cord at a 45-degree angle.
H. Legend:
1. Machine printed, in the field, using adhesive-tape label.
2.5 CABLE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
A. Description: Computer-based cable management system, with integrated database capabilities.
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 271513 - COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING 271513 - 6
1. iTRACS Corporation.
2. Telsoft Solutions.
B. Document physical characteristics by recording the network, TIA details, and connections
between equipment and cable.
C. Information shall be presented in database view.
D. System shall interface with the following testing and recording devices:
1. Direct upload tests from circuit testing instrument into the personal computer.
2. Direct download circuit labeling into labeling printer.
2.6 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Comply with TIA-606-B and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks,
laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WIRING METHODS
A. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables within enclosures. Connect to terminal
points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii.
Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools. Install conductors parallel with or at right
angles to sides and back of enclosure.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS
A. Comply with requirements for demarcation point, cabinets, and racks specified in
Section 271100 "Communications Equipment Room Fittings."
B. Comply with Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems."
C. Drawings indicate general arrangement of pathways and fittings.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF TWISTED-PAIR HORIZONTAL CABLES
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA/BICSI 568.
B. General Requirements for Cabling:
1. Comply with TIA-568-C.0, TIA-568-C.1, and TIA-568-C.2.
2. Comply with BICSI's "Information Transport Systems Installation Methods Manual
(ITSIMM), Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems," "Cable Termination Practices"
Section.
3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 271513 - COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING 271513 - 7
4. Do not untwist twisted pair cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to
maintain cable geometry.
5. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make
terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.
6. MUTOA shall not be used as a cross-connect point.
7. Consolidation points may be used only for making a direct connection to equipment
outlets:
a. Do not use consolidation point as a cross-connect point, as a patch connection, or
for direct connection to workstation equipment.
8. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches
and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and
terminals.
9. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, prevent straining connections, and prevent bending
cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.
10. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's
limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI Information
Transport Systems Installation Methods Manual, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling
Systems," "Cable Termination Practices" Section. Use lacing bars and distribution spools.
11. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable
between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged
during installation and replace it with new cable.
12. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps
shall not be used for heating.
13. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot- long service loop on each end
of cable.
14. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI Information Transport Systems Installation Methods
Manual, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems," "Pulling and Installing Cable"
Section. Monitor cable pull tensions.
C. Open-Cable Installation:
1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces
with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.
2. Suspend twisted pair cabling, not in a wireway or pathway, a minimum of 8 inches above
ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart.
3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other
potentially damaging items.
D. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.
E. Separation from EMI Sources:
1. Comply with recommendations from BICSI's "Telecommunications Distribution
Methods Manual" and TIA-569-D for separating unshielded copper communication cable
from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.
2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and
unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 271513 - COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING 271513 - 8
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches.
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.
c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.
3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and
unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches.
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.
c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.
4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways, power lines,
and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as
follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches.
c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.
5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5
kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.
6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5
inches.
3.4 FIRESTOPPING
A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
B. Comply with TIA-569-D, Annex A, "Firestopping."
C. Comply with "Firestopping Systems" Article in BISCI's "Telecommunications Distribution
Methods Manual."
3.5 GROUNDING
A. Install grounding according to the "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" chapter in
BICSI's "Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual."
B. Comply with TIA-607-B and NECA/BICSI-607.
C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall,
allowing at least a 2-inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar to
suitable electrical building ground, using a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode
conductor.
D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than a No. 6 AWG
equipment grounding conductor.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 271513 - COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING 271513 - 9
3.6 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA-606-B. Comply with
requirements for identification specified in Section 270553 "Identification for Communications
Systems."
1. Administration Class: Class 1.
2. Color-code cross-connect fields and apply colors to voice and data service backboards,
connections, covers, and labels.
B. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA-606-B for Class 2
level of administration.
C. Cable Schedule: Install in a prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List
incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with
rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules
for Project.
D. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point
labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, terminal
hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions,
grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors.
E. Cable and Wire Identification:
1. Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a
cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.
2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at the
device if wire color is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within
panel or cabinet.
3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at
intervals not exceeding 15 feet.
4. Label each terminal strip, and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.
a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and identify
each cable or wiring group, extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-
mounted device, with the name and number of a particular device.
b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.
5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label
each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and -connecting hardware.
Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling,
use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service.
F. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type, with a printing area and font color that
contrast with cable jacket color but still comply with TIA-606-B requirements for the following:
1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flexes as cables are bent.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 271513 - COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING 271513 - 10
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Visually inspect jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling
terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for
pin assignments and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA-568-C.1.
2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment
and patch cords, and labeling of all components.
3. Test twisted pair cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and
polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test
cables after termination but not cross-connection.
a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA-568-C.2.
Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test
Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified
in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters
that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test
configuration.
C. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be printed in a
summary report that is formatted similarly to Table 10.1 in BICSI's "Telecommunications
Distribution Methods Manual," or shall be transferred from the instrument to the computer,
saved as text files, printed, and submitted.
D. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified
requirements.
E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 271513
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 281500 - ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 1
SECTION 281500 - ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE WIRING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. General requirements:
1. Provide and install raceways and boxes for card readers, electric strikes and other door
access and control system devices.
2. Provide and install door lock power supplies.
3. Provide and install 120 volt power to door access and control system components
4. Provide and install network and fire alarm connections to the door access and control
system
5. Assist the door access and control subcontractor during installation and commissioning of
the system.
B. Specific requirements:
1. Provide a ¾” EMT raceway from door frames to the space above the nearest accessible
ceiling for door lock power and wiring of sensors located in the door frames.
2. Provide flush single gang boxes for card readers and motion sensors with an EMT
raceway to the space above the nearest accessible ceiling.
3. Provide, install and connect generator backed 120-volt power to door lock power
supplies. Coordinate electrical characteristics with Section 087100 Door Hardware.
4. Provide generator backed 120-volt power to the door access and control server located in
the I.T. room.
5. Provide form ‘C’ dry relay contacts from the fire alarm panel and wiring to the door
access and control server in the I.T. room for release of locks in a fire condition.
6. Provide an RJ45 network outlet in the I.T. room next the door access and control server
for internet access by the system.
C. Related Requirements:
1. Section 087100 “Door Hardware” for electric strikes and other wired door hardware.
2. Section 281300 "Access Control System Software and Database Management" for
control and monitoring applications, workstations, and interfaces.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 281500 - ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Obtain door access and control submittals from the general contractor and confirm box and
raceway requirements prior to rough-in of the system.
END OF SECTION 281500
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 284621.11 - ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS
284621.11 - 1
SECTION 284621.11 - ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fire-alarm control unit.
2. Manual fire-alarm boxes.
3. System smoke detectors.
4. System combination smoke/carbon monoxide detectors.
5. Heat detectors.
6. Remote annunciator.
7. Addressable interface devices.
8. Digital alarm communicator transmitter.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 271513 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling" for cables and conductors
for fire-alarm systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing.
B. FACP: Fire Alarm Control Panel.
C. HLI: High Level Interface.
D. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.
E. PC: Personal computer.
F. VESDA: Very Early Smoke-Detection Apparatus.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and accessories.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions, profiles, and finishes.
2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and electrical characteristics.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 284621.11 - ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS
284621.11 - 2
B. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system.
1. Comply with recommendations and requirements in the "Documentation" section of the
"Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.
2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations. Indicate conductor
sizes, indicate termination locations and requirements, and distinguish between factory
and field wiring.
4. Detail assembly and support requirements.
5. Include voltage drop calculations for notification-appliance circuits.
6. Include battery-size calculations.
7. Include input/output matrix.
8. Include statement from manufacturer that all equipment and components have been tested
as a system and meet all requirements in this Specification and in NFPA 72.
9. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector.
10. Verify that each duct detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature,
and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.
11. Provide program report showing that air-sampling detector pipe layout balances
pneumatically within the airflow range of the air-sampling detector.
12. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts,
drawn to scale; coordinate location of duct smoke detectors and access to them.
a. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes,
detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators.
b. Show field wiring required for HVAC unit shutdown on alarm.
c. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
d. Show air-sampling detector pipe routing.
13. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable
device. Show size and route of cable and conduits and point-to-point wiring diagrams.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For notification appliances and smoke and heat detectors, in
addition to submittals listed above, indicate compliance with performance requirements and
design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
or NICET level 3 designer responsible for their preparation.
1. Drawings showing the location of each notification appliance and smoke and heat
detector, ratings of each, and installation details as needed to comply with listing
conditions of the device.
2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of
detection, complying with NFPA 72. Calculate spacing and intensities for strobe signals
and sound-pressure levels for audible appliances.
3. Indicate audible appliances required to produce square wave signal per NFPA 72.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 284621.11 - ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS
284621.11 - 3
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for fire-alarm control unit, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
B. Field quality-control reports.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Use of Devices during Construction: Protect devices during construction unless devices are
placed in service to protect the facility during construction.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire-alarm system equipment and
components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Extent: All equipment and components not covered in the Maintenance Service
Agreement.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY
A. The fire alarm system manufacturer’s representative shall be responsible for the system design,
and compliance with NFPA 72, local codes, and the local authority having jurisdiction.
B. The system designer shall be NICET level 3 certified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Noncoded, UL-certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission and
horn/strobe evacuation.
B. Automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors.
C. All components provided shall be listed for use with the selected system.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 284621.11 - ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS
284621.11 - 4
2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:
1. Manual stations.
2. Heat detectors.
3. Smoke detectors.
4. Duct smoke detectors.
5. Carbon monoxide detectors.
6. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.
B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:
1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances.
2. Identify alarm and specific initiating device at fire-alarm control unit and remote
annunciators.
3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.
4. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.
5. Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors.
6. Activate elevator power shunt trip.
7. Record events in the system memory.
C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:
1. Valve supervisory switch.
2. Elevator shunt-trip supervision.
D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:
1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.
2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating
devices.
3. Loss of communication with any addressable sensor, input module, relay, control
module, remote annunciator, or Ethernet module.
4. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit.
5. Ground or a single break in internal circuits of fire-alarm control unit.
6. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit.
7. Break in standby battery circuitry.
8. Failure of battery charging.
E. System Supervisory Signal Actions:
1. Identify specific device initiating the event at fire-alarm control unit and remote
annunciators.
2. After a time delay of 200 seconds, transmit a trouble or supervisory signal to the remote
alarm receiving station.
3. Display system status on annunciator.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 284621.11 - ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS
284621.11 - 5
2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Fire-alarm control unit and raceways shall withstand the effects of
earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully
operational after the seismic event."
2.4 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
2. Faraday.
3. Fike Corporation.
4. Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell International company.
5. Gamewell - FCI by Honeywell.
6. GE UTC Fire & Security; A United Technologies Company.
7. Keltron Corporation.
8. Mircom Technologies, Ltd.
9. Notifier.
10. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC.
11. Siemens Industry, Inc.; Fire Safety Division.
12. Silent Knight.
13. SimplexGrinnell LP.
B. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit:
1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with
electronic modules, complying with UL 864.
a. System software and programs shall be held in nonvolatile flash, electrically
erasable, programmable, read-only memory, retaining the information through
failure of primary and secondary power supplies.
b. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and
printer.
c. Provide communication between the FACP and remote circuit interface panels,
annunciators, and displays.
d. The FACP shall be listed for connection to a central-station signaling system
service.
e. Provide nonvolatile memory for system database, logic, and operating system and
event history. The system shall require no manual input to initialize in the event of
a complete power down condition. The FACP shall provide a minimum 500-event
history log.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 284621.11 - ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS
284621.11 - 6
2. Addressable Initiation Device Circuits: The FACP shall indicate which communication
zones have been silenced and shall provide selective silencing of alarm notification
appliance by building communication zone.
3. Addressable Control Circuits for Operation of Notification Appliances and Mechanical
Equipment: The FACP shall be listed for releasing service.
C. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at
fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and
supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming
and control menu.
1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, two line(s) of 80 characters, minimum.
2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control
commands and to indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of
smoke-detector sensitivity and other parameters.
D. Initiating-Device, Notification-Appliance, and Signaling-Line Circuits:
1. Pathway Class Designations: NFPA 72, Class B.
2. Pathway Survivability: Level 1.
3. Install no more than 100 addressable devices on each signaling-line circuit.
4. Serial Interfaces:
a. One dedicated RS 485 port for remote station operation using point ID DACT.
b. One RS 485 port for remote annunciators, Ethernet module, or multi-interface
module (printer port).
c. One USB port for PC configuration.
d. One RS 232 port for VESDA HLI connection.
E. Smoke-Alarm Verification:
1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm-verification" signal at fire-alarm
control unit.
2. Activate an approved "alarm-verification" sequence at fire-alarm control unit and
detector.
3. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified.
4. Cancel fire-alarm control unit indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.
F. Notification-Appliance Circuit:
1. Audible appliances shall sound in a three-pulse temporal pattern, as defined in NFPA 72.
2. Where notification appliances provide signals to sleeping areas, the alarm signal shall be
a 520-Hz square wave with an intensity 15 dB above the average ambient sound level or
5 dB above the maximum sound level, or at least 75 dBA, whichever is greater, measured
at the pillow.
3. Visual alarm appliances shall flash in synchronization where multiple appliances are in
the same field of view, as defined in NFPA 72.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 284621.11 - ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS
284621.11 - 7
G. Elevator Recall:
1. Elevator recall shall be initiated only by one of the following alarm-initiating devices:
a. Elevator lobby detectors except the lobby detector on the designated floor.
b. Smoke detector in elevator machine room.
c. Smoke detectors in elevator hoistway.
2. Elevator controller shall be programmed to move the cars to the alternate recall floor if
lobby detectors located on the designated recall floors are activated.
3. Water-flow alarm connected to sprinkler in an elevator shaft and elevator machine room
shall shut down elevators associated with the location without time delay.
a. Water-flow switch associated with the sprinkler in the elevator pit may have a
delay to allow elevators to move to the designated floor.
H. Door Controls: Door hold-open devices that are controlled by smoke detectors at doors in
smoke-barrier walls shall be connected to fire-alarm system.
I. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable
smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and change
those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated
changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and
sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in system memory.
J. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory,
and trouble signals to a remote alarm station.
K. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating
devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory signals supervisory
and digital alarm communicator transmitters shall be powered by 24-V dc source.
1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-
supply module rating.
L. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and
automatic transfer switch.
1. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium.
M. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or
glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe
appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the
system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 284621.11 - ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS
284621.11 - 8
2.5 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. AMSECO - A Potter Brand.
2. Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
3. Faraday.
4. Federal Signal Corporation.
5. Fike Corporation.
6. Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell International company.
7. Gamewell - FCI by Honeywell.
8. GE UTC Fire & Security; A United Technologies Company.
9. Keltron Corporation.
10. Mircom Technologies, Ltd.
11. Notifier.
12. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC.
13. Siemens Industry, Inc.; Fire Safety Division.
14. Silent Knight.
15. SimplexGrinnell LP.
16. System Sensor.
17. Wheelock; a brand of Eaton.
B. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be
finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show
visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as
surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.
1. Single-action mechanism, type; with integral addressable module arranged to
communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.
2. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type; with
integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal,
alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.
3. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.
4. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated, clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to
permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral battery-
powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm operation.
5. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated, clear plastic enclosure hinged at the
top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.
2.6 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
2. Faraday.
3. Fenwal Protection Systems; A UTC Fire & Security Company.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 284621.11 - ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS
284621.11 - 9
4. Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell International company.
5. Gamewell - FCI by Honeywell.
6. GE UTC Fire & Security; A United Technologies Company.
7. Gentex Corporation.
8. Harrington Signal, Inc.
9. Keltron Corporation.
10. Mircom Technologies, Ltd.
11. Notifier.
12. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC.
13. Siemens Industry, Inc.; Fire Safety Division.
14. Silent Knight.
15. SimplexGrinnell LP.
16. System Sensor.
B. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:
1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal.
2. Detectors shall be four-wire type.
3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,
or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.
4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a
twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for
connection to building wiring.
5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to
restore them to normal operation.
6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated and power-
on status.
7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be digital-addressable type,
individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm
condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit.
a. Multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.
b. Sensitivity levels based on time of day.
C. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to
identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.
2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to
manually access the following for each detector:
a. Primary status.
b. Device type.
c. Present average value.
d. Present sensitivity selected.
e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
D. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 284621.11 - ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS
284621.11 - 10
1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to
identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.
2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to
manually access the following for each detector:
a. Primary status.
b. Device type.
c. Present average value.
d. Present sensitivity selected.
e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with
the supplied detector for smoke detection in HVAC system ducts.
4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.
5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific
duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.
6. Relay Fan Shutdown: Fully programmable relay rated to interrupt fan motor-control
circuit.
2.7 HEAT DETECTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
2. Faraday.
3. Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell International company.
4. Gamewell - FCI by Honeywell.
5. GE UTC Fire & Security; A United Technologies Company.
6. Gentex Corporation.
7. Harrington Signal, Inc.
8. Keltron Corporation.
9. Mircom Technologies, Ltd.
10. Notifier.
11. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC.
12. Siemens Industry, Inc.; Fire Safety Division.
13. Silent Knight.
14. SimplexGrinnell LP.
15. System Sensor.
B. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.
1. Temperature sensors shall test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device.
C. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F or a rate
of rise that exceeds per minute unless otherwise indicated.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 284621.11 - ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS
284621.11 - 11
1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting Twist-lock base interchangeable with
smoke-detector bases.
2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,
or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.
2.8 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR
A. Description: Annunciator functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit for alarm,
supervisory, and trouble indications. Manual switching functions shall match those of fire-alarm
control unit, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing.
1. Mounting: Flush cabinet, NEMA 250, Type 1.
B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display and LED indicating lights
shall match those of fire-alarm control unit. Provide controls to acknowledge, silence, reset, and
test functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals.
2.9 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE
A. General:
1. Include address-setting means on the module.
2. Store an internal identifying code for control panel use to identify the module type.
3. Listed for controlling HVAC fan motor controllers.
B. Monitor Module: Microelectronic module providing a system address for alarm-initiating
devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.
C. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to elevator controller to initiate elevator
recall to circuit-breaker shunt trip for power shutdown.
1. Allow the control panel to switch the relay contacts on command.
2. Have a minimum of two normally open and two normally closed contacts available for
field wiring.
D. Control Module:
1. Operate notification devices.
2. Operate solenoids for use in sprinkler service.
2.10 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER
A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and
shall comply with UL 632.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 284621.11 - ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS
284621.11 - 12
B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire-
alarm control unit and automatically capture one telephone line(s) and dial a preset number for a
remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals shall be transmitted.
If service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local
trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm
receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone
service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter
shall initiate the local trouble signal.
C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the
following:
1. Verification that both telephone lines are available.
2. Programming device.
3. LED display.
4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication.
5. Communications failure with the central station or fire-alarm control unit.
D. Digital data transmission shall include the following:
1. Address of the alarm-initiating device.
2. Address of the supervisory signal.
3. Address of the trouble-initiating device.
4. Loss of ac supply.
5. Loss of power.
6. Low battery.
7. Abnormal test signal.
8. Communication bus failure.
E. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger.
F. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for ventilation, temperature,
humidity, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that manufacturer's written instructions for environmental conditions have been
permanently established in spaces where equipment and wiring are installed, before
installation begins.
B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations of connections before
installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 284621.11 - ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS
284621.11 - 13
3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NFPA 72, NFPA 101, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for
installation and testing of fire-alarm equipment. Install all electrical wiring to comply with
requirements in NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760, "Fire Alarm Systems."
1. Devices placed in service before all other trades have completed cleanup shall be
replaced.
2. Devices installed but not yet placed in service shall be protected from construction dust,
debris, dirt, moisture, and damage according to manufacturer's written storage
instructions.
B. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 78 inches above the
finished floor.
1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 270548.16
"Seismic Controls for Communications Systems."
C. Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes:
1. Install manual fire-alarm box in the normal path of egress within 60 inches of the exit
doorway.
2. Mount manual fire-alarm box on a background of a contrasting color.
3. The operable part of manual fire-alarm box shall be between 42 inches and 48 inches
above floor level. All devices shall be mounted at the same height unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:
1. Comply with the "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices"
chapter in NFPA 72, for smoke-detector spacing.
2. Comply with the "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices"
chapter in NFPA 72, for heat-detector spacing.
3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet.
4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high
ceiling areas shall be determined according to Annex A or Annex B in NFPA 72.
5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 36 inches from air-supply diffuser or return-air
opening.
6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a lighting
fixture and not directly above pendant mounted or indirect lighting.
E. Install a cover on each smoke detector that is not placed in service during construction. Cover
shall remain in place except during system testing. Remove cover prior to system turnover.
F. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they
extend the full width of duct. Tubes more than 36 inches long shall be supported at both ends.
1. Do not install smoke detector in duct smoke-detector housing during construction. Install
detector only during system testing and prior to system turnover.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 284621.11 - ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS
284621.11 - 14
G. Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler rating and location.
Do not install smoke detectors in sprinklered elevator shafts.
H. Single-Station Smoke Detectors: Where more than one smoke alarm is installed within a
dwelling or suite, they shall be connected so that the operation of any smoke alarm causes the
alarm in all smoke alarms to sound.
I. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install in a visible location near each smoke detector,
sprinkler water-flow switch, and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal
viewing position.
J. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.
3.3 PATHWAYS
A. Wiring above accessible ceilings may be routed exposed above the ceiling.
B. Exposed wiring shall be run in EMT.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in
smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Section 087100 "Door Hardware." Connect
hardware and devices to fire-alarm system.
1. Verify that hardware and devices are listed for use with installed fire-alarm system before
making connections.
B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and
systems. Install the interface device less than 36 inches from the device controlled. Make an
addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system
being controlled.
1. Alarm-initiating connection to smoke-control system (smoke management) at firefighters'
smoke-control system panel.
2. Alarm-initiating connection to stairwell and elevator-shaft pressurization systems.
3. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated HVAC duct systems.
4. Magnetically held-open doors.
5. Alarm-initiating connection to elevator recall system and components.
6. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.
7. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches.
8. Supervisory connections at low-air-pressure switch of each dry-pipe sprinkler system.
9. Supervisory connections at elevator shunt-trip breaker.
10. Supervisory connections at fire-extinguisher locations.
11. Supervisory connections at fire-pump engine control panel.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 284621.11 - ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS
284621.11 - 15
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for
identification specified in Section 270553 "Identification for Communications Systems."
B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.
3.6 GROUNDING
A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground
wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.
B. Ground shielded cables at the control panel location only. Insulate shield at device location.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service
representative:
1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.
a. Inspection shall be based on completed record Drawings and system
documentation that is required by the "Completion Documents, Preparation" table
in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.
b. Comply with the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Inspection" section
of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72; retain the
"Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.
2. System Testing: Comply with the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" section of the
"Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.
3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2
requirements in ANSI S1.4.
4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of
Completion" in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72
and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" section of the "Inspection,
Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.
06/08/2018
1740 ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
Chamberlin Architects
SECTION 284621.11 - ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS
284621.11 - 16
D. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or
replaced devices and appliances.
E. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
G. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly,
quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.
H. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm
system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms
developed for initial tests and inspections.
3.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall
include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service
organization. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective
components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operation. Parts and
supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.
1. Include visual inspections according to the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the
"Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.
2. Perform tests in the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection,
Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.
3. Perform tests per the "Testing Frequencies" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the
"Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.
END OF SECTION 284621.11
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility
Project Specs-1
SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walkways, pavements, lawns and grasses and
exterior plants.
2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
3. Drainage course for slabs-on-grade.
4. Subbase course for concrete walkways and pavements.
5. Subbase and base course for asphalt paving.
6. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches.
7. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches.
8. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and pits
for buried utility structures.
1.3 UNIT PRICES
A. Unit prices for earthwork are included in Division 01 Section "Unit Prices."
B. Quantity allowances for earthwork are included in Division 01 Section "Allowances."
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.
1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to
support sides of pipe.
2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.
C. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.
D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
E. Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary
flow of pore water.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility
Project Specs-2
F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and
dimensions indicated.
1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond
indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional
excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for
unit prices.
2. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet in width and more than 30 feet in length.
3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated
lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as
remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.
G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical
and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below
the ground surface.
I. Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt
pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement
concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.
J. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or
backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
K. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground
services within buildings.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Each type of plastic warning tape.
2. Geotextile.
3. Controlled low-strength material, including design mixture.
4. Geofoam.
B. Samples: 12-by-12-inch sample of subdrainage geotextile.
C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results
for compliance of the following with requirements indicated:
1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site and imported soil material
proposed for fill and backfill.
2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site and imported
soil material proposed for fill and backfill.
D. Preexcavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction
and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused
by earthwork operations. Submit before earthwork begins.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility
Project Specs-3
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified
according to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock-definition testing, as documented
according to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548.
B. Pre-excavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary
utility services according to requirements indicated.
1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.
B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be
removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not
available from excavations.
B. Satisfactory Soils: AASHTO M 145 Soil Classification Groups A-1, A-2-4, A-2-5, and A-3;
free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials,
vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5, A-6, and A-7
according to AASHTO M 145.
1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of
optimum moisture content at time of compaction.
D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility
Project Specs-4
F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch
sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
H. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed
gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.
I. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and
natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-
inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve.
J. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate, natural, or manufactured sand.
K. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.
2.2 GEOTEXTILES
A. Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for
subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater
than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test
methods referenced:
1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288.
2. Grab Tensile Strength: 157 lbf ASTM D 4632.
3. Sewn Seam Strength: 142 lbf ASTM D 4632.
4. Tear Strength: 56 lbf ASTM D 4533.
5. Puncture Strength: 56 lbf ASTM D 4833.
6. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.
7. Permittivity: 0.2 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491.
8. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.
B. Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation applications,
made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation less than 50 percent; complying with
AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced:
1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288.
2. Grab Tensile Strength: 247 lbf; ASTM D 4632.
3. Sewn Seam Strength: 222 lbf; ASTM D 4632.
4. Tear Strength: 90 lbf; ASTM D 4533.
5. Puncture Strength: 90 lbf; ASTM D 4833.
6. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.
7. Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491.
8. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility
Project Specs-5
2.3 CONTROLLED LOW-STRENGTH MATERIAL
A. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Low-density, self-compacting, flowable concrete material
as follows:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II.
2. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.
3. Foaming Agent: ASTM C 869.
4. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.
5. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
B. Produce low-density, controlled low-strength material with the following physical properties:
1. As-Cast Unit Weight: 30 to 36 lb/cu. ft. at point of placement, when tested according to
ASTM C 138/C 138M.
2. Compressive Strength: 80 psi when tested according to ASTM C 495.
C. Produce conventional-weight, controlled low-strength material with 80-psi compressive
strength when tested according to ASTM C 495.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for
marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously
inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows:
B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape
manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide
and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core
encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is
buried up to 30 inches deep; colored as follows:
1. Red: Electric.
2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.
3. Orange: Telephone and other communications.
4. Blue: Water systems.
5. Green: Sewer systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork
operations.
B. Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil,
debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 31
Section "Site Clearing."
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility
Project Specs-6
C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 31
Section "Site Clearing," during earthwork operations.
D. Provide protective insulating materials to protect subgrades and foundation soils against
freezing temperatures or frost.
3.2 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared
subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water
accumulation.
1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to
accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.
3.3 EXPLOSIVES
A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.
B. Explosives: Obtain written permission from authorities having jurisdiction before bringing
explosives to Project site or using explosives on Project site.
1. Perform blasting without damaging adjacent structures, property, or site improvements.
2. Perform blasting without weakening the bearing capacity of rock subgrade and with the
least-practicable disturbance to rock to remain.
3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface
and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil
materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be
authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.
1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials
and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
2. Remove rock to lines and grades indicated to permit installation of permanent
construction without exceeding the following dimensions:
a. 24 inches outside of concrete forms other than at footings.
b. 12 inches outside of concrete forms at footings.
c. 6 inches outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade.
d. Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without
forms or exterior waterproofing treatments.
e. 6 inches beneath bottom of concrete slabs on grade.
f. 6 inches beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches wider than pipe or
42 inches wide.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility
Project Specs-7
B. Classified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations. Material to be excavated will be
classified as earth and rock. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross
sectioned by Architect. The Contract Sum will be adjusted for rock excavation according to
unit prices included in the Contract Documents. Changes in the Contract time may be
authorized for rock excavation.
1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface;
underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; together with
soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation.
a. Intermittent drilling; blasting, if permitted; ram hammering; or ripping of material
not classified as rock excavation is earth excavation.
2. Rock excavation includes removal and disposal of rock. Remove rock to lines and
subgrade elevations indicated to permit installation of permanent construction without
exceeding the following dimensions:
a. 24 inches outside of concrete forms other than at footings.
b. 12 inches outside of concrete forms at footings.
c. 6 inches outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade.
d. Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without
forms or exterior waterproofing treatments.
e. 6 inches beneath bottom of concrete slabs on grade.
f. 6 inches beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches wider than pipe or
42 inches wide.
3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If
applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing
concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.
1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation.
Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim
bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
2. Pile Foundations: Stop excavations 6 to 12 inches above bottom of pile cap before piles
are placed. After piles have been driven, remove loose and displaced material. Excavate
to final grade, leaving solid base to receive concrete pile caps.
3. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility
Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or
minus 1 inch. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces.
3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and
subgrades.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility
Project Specs-8
3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.
1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below
frost line.
B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or
conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of
pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Clearance: As indicated.
C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of
pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of
pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp
objects along trench subgrade.
1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed, multiple-
duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an
undisturbed subgrade.
2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to
support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand
backfill.
3. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding
bearing material to allow for bedding course.
D. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to allow for
bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe.
1. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding
bearing material to allow for bedding course.
3.8 SUBGRADE INSPECTION
A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B. If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with
compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
C. Proof-roll subgrade where accessible with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft
pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.
1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction
perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph.
2. Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15
tons.
3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as
determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility
Project Specs-9
D. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to
Contract provisions for unit prices.
E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or
construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.
3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation
of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean
concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by
Architect.
1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by
Architect.
3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing.
Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
3.11 BACKFILL
A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:
1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing,
waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.
2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents.
3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities.
4. Removing concrete formwork.
5. Removing trash and debris.
6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.
B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding
course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints,
fittings, and bodies of conduits.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility
Project Specs-10
C. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings with
satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings.
D. Provide 4-inch thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches below
surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a
minimum of 4 inches of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase.
E. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch in any
dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit.
1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both
sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or
displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
F. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place initial backfill of controlled low-strength material to a
height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit.
G. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while installing and removing shoring and bracing.
H. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.
I. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place final backfill of controlled low-strength material to
final subgrade elevation.
J. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches
below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
3.13 SOIL FILL
A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill
material will bond with existing material.
B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.
2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.
3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill.
4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill.
5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.
C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
3.14 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain
frost or ice.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility
Project Specs-11
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that
exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified
dry unit weight.
3.15 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material
compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for
material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and
uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 698:
1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12
inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.
2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each
layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent.
3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and
compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent.
4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85
percent.
3.16 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply
with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface
tolerances.
B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish
subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch.
2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch.
3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a
10-foot straightedge.
3.17 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE
A. Subdrainage Pipe: Specified in Division 33 Section "Subdrainage."
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility
Project Specs-12
B. Subsurface Drain: Place subsurface drainage geotextile around perimeter of subdrainage trench.
Place a 6-inch course of filter material on subsurface drainage geotextile to support subdrainage
pipe. Encase subdrainage pipe in a minimum of 12 inches of filter material, placed in
compacted layers 6 inches thick, and wrap in subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides
and ends at least 6 inches.
1. Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry unit weight according
to ASTM D 698.
C. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in width indicated,
to within 12 inches of final subgrade, in compacted layers 6 inches thick. Overlay drainage
backfill with 1 layer of subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6
inches.
1. Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry unit weight according
to ASTM D 698.
2. Place and compact impervious fill over drainage backfill in 6-inch- thick compacted
layers to final subgrade.
3.18 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES
A. Place subbase and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase and base course under pavements and walks as follows:
1. Install separation geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written
instructions, overlapping sides and ends.
2. Place base course material over subbase course under hot-mix asphalt pavement.
3. Shape subbase course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.
4. Place subbase course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer.
5. Place subbase course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal
thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick.
6. Compact subbase and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines,
cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 698.
C. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent lateral
movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches wide, of satisfactory soil materials and
compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not less than 95 percent of
maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.
3.19 DRAINAGE COURSE
A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-
on-grade as follows:
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility
Project Specs-13
1. Install subdrainage geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written
instructions, overlapping sides and ends.
2. Place drainage course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer.
3. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal
thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick.
4. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not
less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.
3.20 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing
agency to perform field quality-control testing.
B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with
subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with
requirements.
C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed
to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing
subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when
approved by Architect.
D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556,
ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at
the following locations and frequencies:
1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill
layer, at least 1 test for every 500 or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case
fewer than 3 tests.
2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 100
feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than 2 tests.
3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least 1 test for each
50 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than 2 tests.
E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of
compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth
required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
3.21 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep
free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed
surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent
construction operations or weather conditions.
1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and
recompact.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility
Project Specs-14
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,
backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,
and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
3.22 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil,
trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.
B. Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property.
Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Architect.
1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally
dispose of it off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 312000
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility
311216-1
SECTION 321216 - ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cold milling of existing hot-mix asphalt pavement.
2. Hot-mix asphalt patching.
3. Hot-mix asphalt paving.
4. Hot-mix asphalt paving overlay.
5. Asphalt surface treatments.
6. Pavement-marking paint.
7. Traffic-calming devices.
8. Imprinted asphalt.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for aggregate subbase and base courses and for
aggregate pavement shoulders.
2. Division 32 Sections for other paving installed as part of crosswalks in asphalt pavement
areas.
1.3 UNIT PRICES
A. Work of this Section is affected by paving.
1.4 DEFINITION
A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 8 for definitions of terms.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical
and performance properties.
1. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each
job mix proposed for the Work.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility
311216-2
2. Job-Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pavement markings, lane separations, and defined parking spaces.
Indicate, with international symbol of accessibility, spaces allocated for people with disabilities.
C. Samples: For each paving fabric, 12 by 12 inches minimum.
D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Each paving fabric, 12 by 12 inches minimum.
2. Each type and color of preformed traffic-calming device.
3. Each pattern and color of imprinted asphalt and precut marking material.
E. Qualification Data: For qualified manufacturer and Installer.
F. Material Certificates: For each paving material, from manufacturer.
G. Material Test Reports: For each paving material.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by Citt
of Aspen and CDOT.
B. Installer Qualifications: Imprinted-asphalt manufacturer's authorized installer who is trained
and approved for installation of imprinted asphalt required for this Project.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM D 3666 for testing indicated.
D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable
requirements of CDOT and City of Aspen Engineering Department for asphalt paving work.
1. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard
specifications do not apply to this Section.
E. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at project site.
1. Review methods and procedures related to hot-mix asphalt paving including, but not
limited to, the following:
a. Review proposed sources of paving materials, including capabilities and location
of plant that will manufacture hot-mix asphalt.
b. Review condition of subgrade and preparatory work.
c. Review requirements for protecting paving work, including restriction of traffic
during installation period and for remainder of construction period.
d. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,
Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility
311216-3
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pavement-marking materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken
and bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand name and type of material, date of
manufacture, and directions for storage.
B. Store pavement-marking materials in a clean, dry, protected location within temperature range
required by manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively
damp, if rain is imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure, or if the following
conditions are not met:
1. Prime Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F.
2. Tack Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F.
3. Slurry Coat: Comply with weather limitations in ASTM D 3910.
4. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising at time of
placement.
5. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F at time of placement.
B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a
minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F for oil-based materials, 55 deg F for
water-based materials and not exceeding 95 deg F.
C. Imprinted Asphalt Paving: Proceed with coating imprinted pavement only when air temperature
is at least 50 deg F and rising and will not drop below 50 deg F within 8 hours of coating
application. Proceed only if no precipitation is expected within two hours after applying the
final layer of coating.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 AGGREGATES
A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous
installations.
B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM D 692, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or cured,
crushed blast-furnace slag.
C. Fine Aggregate: AASHTO M 29, sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone,
gravel, cured blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof.
1. For hot-mix asphalt, limit natural sand to a maximum of 20 percent by weight of the total
aggregate mass.
D. Mineral Filler: AASHTO M 17, rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility
311216-4
2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS
A. Asphalt Binder: AASHTO M 320 or AASHTO MP 1a, PG 58-28.
B. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381 for viscosity-graded material and ASTM D 946 for
penetration-graded material.
C. Prime Coat: ASTM D 2027, medium-curing cutback asphalt MC-30.
D. Prime Coat: Asphalt emulsion prime coat complying with CDOT.
E. Tack Coat: AASHTO M 140 emulsified asphalt, or AASHTO M 208 cationic emulsified
asphalt, slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.
F. Fog Seal: AASHTO M 140 emulsified asphalt, or ASTM D 2397 cationic emulsified asphalt,
slow setting, factory diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.
G. Water: Potable.
H. Undersealing Asphalt: ASTM D 3141, pumping consistency.
2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by the EPA. Provide in granular,
liquid, or wettable powder form.
B. Sand: AASHTO M 29, Grade Nos. 2 or 3.
C. Paving Geotextile: AASHTO M 288, nonwoven polypropylene; resistant to chemical attack,
rot, and mildew; and specifically designed for paving applications.
D. Joint Sealant: AASHTO M 324, Type II, hot-applied, single-component, polymer-modified
bituminous sealant.
E. Pavement-Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin type, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying
with AASHTO M 248.
1. Color: White or Yellow
F. Pavement-Marking Paint: MPI #32 Alkyd Traffic Marking Paint.
1. Color: White or Yellow
G. Pavement-Marking Paint: Latex, waterborne emulsion, lead and chromate free, ready mixed,
complying with FS TT-P-1952, Type II, with drying time of less than 45 minutes.
1. Color: White or Yellow
2. Pavement-Marking Paint: MPI #97 Latex Traffic Marking Paint.
3. Color: White or Yellow
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility
311216-5
H. Glass Beads: AASHTO M 247, Type 1.
I. Wheel Stops: Precast, air-entrained concrete, 2500-psi minimum compressive strength, [4-1/2
inches high by 9 inches wide by 72 inches long. Provide chamfered corners, drainage slots on
underside, and holes for anchoring to substrate.
1. Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4-inch diameter, 10-inch minimum length.
J. Wheel Stops: Solid, integrally colored, 96 percent recycled HDPE or commingled
postconsumer and postindustrial recycled plastic; UV stabilized; 4 inches high by 6 inches wide
by 72 inches long. Provide chamfered corners, drainage slots on underside, and holes for
anchoring to substrate.
1. Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4-inch diameter, 10-inch minimum length.
2. Adhesive: As recommended by wheel-stop manufacturer for application to asphalt
pavement.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to begin paving.
B. Proof-roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft
pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.
1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction
perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph .
2. Proof roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15
tons.
3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as
determined by Engineer, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.
C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
D. Verify that utilities, traffic loop detectors, and other items requiring a cut and installation
beneath the asphalt surface have been completed and that asphalt surface has been repaired
flush with adjacent asphalt prior to beginning installation of imprinted asphalt.
3.2 COLD MILLING
A. Clean existing pavement surface of loose and deleterious material immediately before cold
milling. Remove existing asphalt pavement by cold milling to grades and cross sections
indicated.
1. Mill to a depth of 2 inches.
2. Mill to a uniform finished surface free of excessive gouges, grooves, and ridges.
3. Control rate of milling to prevent tearing of existing asphalt course.
4. Repair or replace curbs, manholes, and other construction damaged during cold milling.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility
311216-6
5. Excavate and trim unbound-aggregate base course, if encountered, and keep material
separate from milled hot-mix asphalt.
6. Transport milled hot-mix asphalt to asphalt recycling facility.
7. Keep milled pavement surface free of loose material and dust.
3.3 PATCHING
A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement
section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches into
adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Remove
excavated material. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade.
B. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement: Break cracked slabs and roll as required to reseat
concrete pieces firmly.
1. Pump hot undersealing asphalt under rocking slab until slab is stabilized or, if necessary,
crack slab into pieces and roll to reseat pieces firmly.
2. Remove disintegrated or badly cracked pavement. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal
patches, extending into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut
excavation faces vertically. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form
new subgrade.
C. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix
asphalt paving at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd.
1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving.
2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.
Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.
D. Patching: Fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix for full thickness of patch
and, while still hot, compact flush with adjacent surface.
E. Patching: Partially fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot,
compact. Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot-mix surface layer finished flush with
adjacent surfaces.
3.4 REPAIRS
A. Leveling Course: Install and compact leveling course consisting of hot-mix asphalt surface
course to level sags and fill depressions deeper than 1 inch in existing pavements.
1. Install leveling wedges in compacted lifts not exceeding 3 inches thick.
B. Crack and Joint Filling: Remove existing joint filler material from cracks or joints to a depth of
1/4 inch.
1. Clean cracks and joints in existing hot-mix asphalt pavement.
2. Use emulsified-asphalt slurry to seal cracks and joints less than 1/4 inch wide. Fill flush
with surface of existing pavement and remove excess.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility
311216-7
3. Use hot-applied joint sealant to seal cracks and joints more than 1/4 inch wide. Fill flush
with surface of existing pavement and remove excess.
3.5 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material
from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.
B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and
written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of compacted-
aggregate base before applying paving materials.
1. Mix herbicide with prime coat if formulated by manufacturer for that purpose.
C. Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted unbound-aggregate base course at a
rate of 0.15 to 0.50 gal./sq. yd. Apply enough material to penetrate and seal but not flood
surface. Allow prime coat to cure.
1. If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand over
surface to blot excess asphalt. Use enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic. Remove
loose sand by sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have evaporated.
2. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving.
D. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq.
yd.
1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving.
2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.
Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.
3.6 PAVING GEOTEXTILE INSTALLATION
A. Apply tack coat uniformly to existing pavement surfaces at a rate of 0.20 to 0.30 gal./sq. yd.
B. Place paving geotextile promptly according to manufacturer's written instructions. Broom or
roll geotextile smooth and free of wrinkles and folds. Overlap longitudinal joints 4 inches and
transverse joints 6 inches.
1. Protect paving geotextile from traffic and other damage and place hot-mix asphalt paving
overlay the same day.
3.7 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING
A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place
asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of
mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted.
1. Place hot-mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated.
2. Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility
311216-8
3. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 235 deg F.
4. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of
one-way slopes unless otherwise indicated.
5. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and
tears in asphalt-paving mat.
B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser
width are required.
1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to
overlap previous strips. Complete a section of asphalt base course before placing asphalt
surface course.
C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools
to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent
segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.
3.8 JOINTS
A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct
joints free of depressions, with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix
asphalt course.
1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints.
2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches.
3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches.
4. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive
displacement.
5. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density.
3.9 COMPACTION
A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without
excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or with vibratory-
plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.
1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F.
B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and
outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade,
and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements.
C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while
hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix
asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:
1. Average Density: 96 percent of reference laboratory density according to
AASHTO T 245, but not less than 94 percent nor greater than 100 percent.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility
311216-9
2. Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to
ASTM D 2041, but not less than 90 percent nor greater than 96 percent.
D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still
warm.
E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to
proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.
F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and
replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface
smoothness.
G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled
and hardened.
H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become
marked.
3.10 ASPHALT CURBS
A. Construct hot-mix asphalt curbs over compacted pavement surfaces. Apply a light tack coat
unless pavement surface is still tacky and free from dust. Spread mix at minimum temperature
of 235 deg F.
1. Asphalt Mix: Same as pavement surface-course mix.
B. Place hot-mix asphalt to curb cross section indicated or, if not indicated, to local standard
shapes, by machine or by hand in wood or metal forms. Tamp hand-placed materials and screed
to smooth finish. Remove forms after hot-mix asphalt has cooled.
3.11 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the
following tolerances:
1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.
B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within
the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straightedge applied transversely or
longitudinally to paved areas:
1. Base Course: 1/4 inch.
2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch
3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown.
Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch.
C. Traffic-Calming Devices: Compact and form asphalt to produce the contour indicated and
within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/8 inch of height indicated above pavement surface.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility
311216-10
3.12 SURFACE TREATMENTS
A. Fog Seals: Apply fog seal at a rate of 0.10 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. to existing asphalt pavement and
allow to cure. With fine sand, lightly dust areas receiving excess fog seal.
B. Slurry Seals: Apply slurry coat in a uniform thickness according to ASTM D 3910 and allow to
cure.
1. Roll slurry seal to remove ridges and provide a uniform, smooth surface.
3.13 PAVEMENT MARKING
A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified
with Architect.
B. Allow paving to age for 30 days before starting pavement marking.
C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.
D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions
indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide
a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils.
1. Broadcast glass beads uniformly into wet pavement markings at a rate of 6 lb/gal.
3.14 WHEEL STOPS
A. Install wheel stops in bed of adhesive as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Securely attach wheel stops to pavement with not less than two galvanized-steel dowels
embedded at one-quarter to one-third points. Securely install dowels into pavement and bond to
wheel stop. Recess head of dowel beneath top of wheel stop.
3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: The City of Aspen will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
inspections.
B. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined
according to ASTM D 3549.
C. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for
compliance with smoothness tolerances.
D. In-Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and
compacted pavement according to AASHTO T 168.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility
311216-11
1. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from
four samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared
according to ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job-mix specifications.
2. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples
according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.
a. One core sample will be taken for every 500 sq. yd. or less of installed pavement,
with no fewer than 3 cores taken.
b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by nuclear
method according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with ASTM D 1188 or
ASTM D 2726.
E. Replace and compact hot-mix asphalt where core tests were taken.
F. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements
indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.
3.16 DISPOSAL
A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project site and
legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
1. Do not allow milled materials to accumulate on-site.
END OF SECTION 32121
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility 321313-1
SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following:
1. Driveways and roadways.
2. Parking lots.
3. Curbs and gutters.
4. Walkways.
5. Unit paver base.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended
hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast-furnace slag.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete pavement mixture. Include alternate mixture designs when
characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant adjustments.
C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results
for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of
current materials:
D. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials
complies with requirements:
1. Cementitious materials.
2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.
3. Fiber reinforcement.
4. Admixtures.
5. Curing compounds.
6. Applied finish materials.
7. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility 321313-2
8. Joint fillers.
E. Field quality-control test reports.
F. Minutes of preinstallation conference.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products who complies
with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.
1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities."
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1077
and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing
Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program.
C. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless
modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.
D. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material
evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.
E. Mockups: Cast mockups of full-size sections of concrete pavement to demonstrate typical
joints, surface finish, texture, color, and standard of workmanship.
1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting construction.
4. Maintain approved mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed pavement.
5. Demolish and remove approved mockups from the site when directed by Architect.
6. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete pavement mixture design and
examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials and concrete pavement
construction practices. Require representatives, including the following, of each entity
directly concerned with concrete pavement, to attend conference:
a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility 321313-3
c. Ready-mix concrete producer.
d. Concrete pavement subcontractor.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other
construction activities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 FORMS
A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type
materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces.
1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves with a radius 100 feet or less.
B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces.
2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire
into flat sheets.
B. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.
C. Epoxy-Coated Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A, plain steel.
D. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deformed.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility 321313-4
E. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class II zinc coated, hot-dip galvanized
after fabrication and bending; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed bars.
F. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M or ASTM A 934/A 934M; with
ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed bars.
G. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed bars;
assembled with clips.
H. Plain Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, galvanized.
I. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496.
J. Epoxy-Coated-Steel Wire: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A coated, deformed.
K. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length
with ends square and free of burrs.
L. Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M,
Grade 60 , plain steel bars.
M. Tie Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
N. Hook Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A, internally and externally threaded. Design hook-bolt joint
assembly to hold coupling against pavement form and in position during concreting operations,
and to permit removal without damage to concrete or hook bolt.
O. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports
according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete
of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows:
1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will
not support chair legs.
2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated
wire bar supports.
P. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid two-part epoxy repair coating, compatible with epoxy coating on
reinforcement.
Q. Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780.
2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and
source throughout the Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II, gray.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4M coarse aggregate, uniformly graded.
Provide aggregates from a single source.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility 321313-5
1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal.
2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C. Exposed Aggregate: Selected, hard, and durable; washed; free of materials with deleterious
reactivity to cement or that cause staining; from a single source, with gap-graded coarse
aggregate as follows:
1. Aggregate Sizes: 1/2 to 3/4 inch nominal.
D. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.
E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
F. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with
other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass
of cementitious material.
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,
Type G.
6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
2.5 FIBER REINFORCEMENT
A. Synthetic Fiber: Monofilament or fibrillated polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for
use in concrete pavement, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches long.
1. Products:
a. Monofilament Fibers:
1) Axim Concrete Technologies; Fibrasol IIP.
2) Euclid Chemical Company (The); Fiberstrand 100.
3) FORTA Corporation; Forta Mono.
4) Grace, W. R. & Co.--Conn.; Grace MicroFiber.
5) Metalcrete Industries; Polystrand 1000.
6) SI Concrete Systems; Fibermix Stealth.
b. Fibrillated Fibers:
1) Axim Concrete Technologies; Fibrasol F.
2) FORTA Corporation; Forta.
3) Euclid Chemical Company (The); Fiberstrand F.
4) Grace, W. R. & Co.--Conn.; Grace Fibers.
5) SI Concrete Systems; Fibermesh.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility 321313-6
2.6 CURING MATERIALS
A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. dry.
B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene
sheet.
C. Water: Potable.
D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application
to fresh concrete.
1. Products:
a. Axim Concrete Technologies; Cimfilm.
b. Burke by Edeco; BurkeFilm.
c. ChemMasters; Spray-Film.
d. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Aquafilm.
e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film.
f. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Eucobar.
g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor Aid.
h. Lambert Corporation; Lambco Skin.
i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-Con.
j. MBT Protection and Repair, ChemRex Inc.; Confilm.
k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Sealtight Evapre.
l. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold.
m. Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Monofilm.
n. Sika Corporation, Inc.; SikaFilm.
o. Symons Corporation; Finishing Aid.
p. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex EnvioAssist.
E. Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B.
1. Products:
a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB.
b. Burke by Edoko; Aqua Resin Cure.
c. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear.
d. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.; W.B. Resin Cure.
e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W).
f. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Kurez DR VOX.
g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420.
h. Lambert Corporation; Aqua Kure-Clear.
i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R.
j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100 Clear.
k. Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Resin Cure E.
l. Symons Corporation; Resi-Chem Clear.
m. Tamms Industries Inc.; Horncure WB 30.
n. Unitex; Hydro Cure 309.
o. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure 100.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility 321313-7
F. White Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 2, Class B.
1. Products:
a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 WP WB.
b. Burke by Edoco; Resin Emulsion White.
c. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure 2000.
d. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.; W.B. Resin Cure.
e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem White Pigmented Cure (J-10-W).
f. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Kurez VOX White Pigmented.
g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 450.
h. Lambert Corporation; Aqua Kure-White.
i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R-2.
j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1200-White.
k. Symons Corporation; Resi-Chem White.
l. Tamms Industries, Inc.; Horncure 200-W.
m. Unitex; Hydro White.
n. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure White 100.
2.7 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber
or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.
B. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing
admixtures; color stable, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Bayer Corporation.
b. ChemMasters.
c. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Davis Colors.
e. Elementis Pigments, Inc.
f. Hoover Color Corporation.
g. Lambert Corporation.
h. Scofield, L. M.Company.
i. Solomon Colors.
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
C. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive
aggregate of fused aluminum-oxide granules or crushed emery with emery aggregate containing
not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 20 percent ferric oxide; unaffected by
freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials.
D. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
butadiene.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility 321313-8
E. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing
and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to
requirements, and as follows:
1. Types I and II, non-load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to
hardened concrete.
F. Chemical Surface Retarder: Water-soluble, liquid-set retarder with color dye, for horizontal
concrete surface application, capable of temporarily delaying final hardening of concrete to a
depth of 1/8 to 1/4 inch.
1. Products:
a. Burke by Edeco; True Etch Surface Retarder.
b. ChemMasters; Exposee.
c. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Delay S.
d. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Surface Retarder S.
e. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Expose.
f. Metalcrete Industries; Surftard.
g. Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Crete-Nox TA.
h. Scofield, L. M. Company; Lithotex.
i. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Rugasol-S.
j. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Envioset.
G. Pigmented Mineral Dry-Shake Hardener: Factory-packaged dry combination of portland
cement, graded quartz aggregate, color pigments, and plasticizing admixture. Use color
pigments that are finely ground, nonfading mineral oxides interground with cement.
1. Products:
a. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Conshake 600 Colortone.
b. Dayton Superior Corporation; Quartz Tuff.
c. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Surflex.
d. Lambert Corporation; Colorhard.
e. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Quartz Plate FF.
f. MBT Protection and Repair, ChemRex Inc.; Mastercron.
g. Metalcrete Industries; Floor Quartz.
h. Scofield, L. M. Company; Lithochrome Color Hardener.
i. Symons Corporation; Hard Top.
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
H. Rock Salt: Sodium chloride crystals, kiln dried, coarse gradation with 100 percent passing 3/8-
inch sieve and 85 percent retained on a No. 8 sieve.
2.8 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
A. Pavement-Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin type, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying
with FS TT-P-115, Type II or AASHTO M 248, Type F.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility 321313-9
1. Color: White and yellow.
B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Latex, waterborne emulsion, lead and chromate free, ready mixed,
complying with FS TT-P-1952, with drying time of less than 45 minutes.
1. Color: White and yellow.
C. Glass Beads: AASHTO M 247, Type 1.
2.9 WHEEL STOPS
A. Wheel Stops: Precast, air-entrained concrete, 2500-psi minimum compressive strength, 4-1/2
inches high by 9 inches wide by 72 inches long. Provide chamfered corners and drainage slots
on underside and holes for anchoring to substrate.
1. Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4-inch diameter, 10-inch minimum length.
B. Wheel Stops: Solid, integrally colored, 96 percent recycled HDPE or commingled
postconsumer and postindustrial recycled plastic; UV stabilized; 4 inches high by 6 inches wide
by 72 inches long. Provide chamfered corners and drainage slots on underside and holes for
anchoring to substrate.
1. Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4-inch diameter, 10-inch minimum length.
2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of
normal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience.
1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete
mixture designs for the trial batch method.
B. Proportion mixtures to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4500 psi.
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45.
3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.
C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight
concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows:
1. Air Content: 5-1/2 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 1-1/2-inch nominal maximum
aggregate size.
2. Air Content: 6 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 1-inch nominal maximum aggregate
size.
3. Air Content: 5 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 3/4-inch nominal maximum
aggregate size
D. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of
cement.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility 321313-10
E. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate, but
not less than 1.0 lb/cu. yd.
G. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written
instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup.
2.11 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to
ASTM C 1116. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.
1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time
from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing
and delivery time to 60 minutes.
B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.
1. For concrete mixes of 1 cu. yd. or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not
more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released.
2. For concrete mixes larger than 1 cu. yd, increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each
additional 1 cu. yd.
3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project
identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixing time, quantity, and amount of
water added.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for
dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.
B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired
equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.
1. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph.
2. Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15
tons.
3. Subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch
require correction according to requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
C. Proceed with concrete pavement operations only after nonconforming conditions have been
corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility 321313-11
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.
3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to
required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and
so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete
without damage.
3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and
supporting reinforcement.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.
C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during
concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.
D. Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at
least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent
continuous laps in either direction.
E. Zinc-Coated Reinforcement: Use galvanized steel wire ties to fasten zinc-coated reinforcement.
Repair cut and damaged zinc coatings with zinc repair material.
F. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-coated
reinforcement. Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to
ASTM D 3963/D 3963M.
G. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and
free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required
before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch overlap of adjacent mats.
3.5 JOINTS
A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with
faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to
centerline, unless otherwise indicated.
1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed
joints, unless otherwise indicated.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility 321313-12
B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at
locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless pavement
terminates at isolation joints.
1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do
not continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated.
3. Butt Joints: Use [bonding agent] [epoxy bonding adhesive] at joint locations where fresh
concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
4. Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys,
unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.
5. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated.
Lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one
side of joint.
C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs,
catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated.
1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 50 feet, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint.
3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if
joint sealant is indicated.
4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not
indicated.
5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or
clip joint-filler sections together.
6. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other
temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both
sides of joint.
D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as
indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete
thickness, as follows:
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing
each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat grooving of
contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete
surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when
cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing
random contraction cracks.
3. Doweled Contraction Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where
indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding
to one side of joint.
E. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with
an edging tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes.
Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility 321313-13
3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel
reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of
their work.
B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete.
Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.
C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not
place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and
alignment.
D. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.
E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site.
F. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing.
G. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push
or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.
H. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented
by hand spading, rodding, or tamping.
1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an
internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side
forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate
with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices.
I. Place concrete in two operations; strike off initial pour for entire width of placement and to the
required depth below finish surface. Lay welded wire fabric or fabricated bar mats immediately
in final position. Place top layer of concrete, strike off, and screed.
1. Remove and replace concrete that has been placed for more than 15 minutes without
being covered by top layer, or use bonding agent if approved by Architect.
J. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off.
K. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open textured and uniform
surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further
disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.
L. Curbs and Gutters: When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter placement,
submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements.
Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as
specified for formed concrete. If results are not approved, remove and replace with formed
concrete.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility 321313-14
M. Slip-Form Pavers: When automatic machine placement is used for pavement, submit revised
mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce pavement to
required thickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as required for formed pavement.
1. Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of
paver machine during operations.
N. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on
concrete until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28-day compressive strength.
O. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures.
1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat
water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less
than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.
P. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot-weather conditions
exist:
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time
of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature,
provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using
liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed
ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3.7 FLOAT FINISHING
A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.
B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and
concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven
floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true
planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform
granular texture.
1. Burlap Finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across float-finished concrete,
perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, gritty texture.
2. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float-finished
concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.
3. Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating float-
finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular
to line of traffic.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility 321313-15
3.8 SPECIAL FINISHES
A. Monolithic Exposed-Aggregate Finish: Expose coarse aggregate in pavement surfaces as
follows:
1. Immediately after float finishing, spray-apply chemical surface retarder to pavement
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Cover pavement surface with plastic sheeting, sealing laps with tape, and remove when
ready to continue finishing operations.
3. Without dislodging aggregate, remove excess mortar by lightly brushing surface with a
stiff, nylon-bristle broom.
4. Fine-spray surface with water and brush. Repeat water flushing and brushing cycle until
cement film is removed from aggregate surfaces to depth required.
B. Seeded Exposed-Aggregate Finish: Immediately after initial floating, spread a single layer of
aggregate uniformly on pavement surface. Tamp aggregate into plastic concrete, and float
finish to entirely embed aggregate with mortar cover of 1/16 inch.
1. Spray-apply chemical surface retarder to pavement according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
2. Cover pavement surface with plastic sheeting, sealing laps with tape, and remove
sheeting when ready to continue finishing operations.
3. Without dislodging aggregate, remove excess mortar by lightly brushing surface with a
stiff, nylon-bristle broom.
4. Fine-spray surface with water and brush. Repeat water flushing and brushing cycle until
cement film is removed from aggregate surfaces to depth required.
C. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Before final floating, spread slip-resistive aggregate finish on
pavement surface according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1. Uniformly spread 40 lb/100 sq. ft. dampened slip-resistive aggregate over pavement
surface in 2 applications. Tamp aggregate flush with surface using a steel trowel, but do
not force below surface.
2. Uniformly distribute approximately two-thirds of slip-resistive aggregate over pavement
surface with mechanical spreader, allow to absorb moisture, and embed by power
floating. Follow power floating with a second slip-resistive aggregate application,
uniformly distributing remainder of material at right angles to first application to ensure
uniform coverage, and embed by power floating.
3. Cure concrete with curing compound recommended by slip-resistive aggregate
manufacturer. Apply curing compound immediately after final finishing.
4. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or abrasive stone and water to
expose nonslip aggregate.
D. Rock-Salt Finish: After initial floating, uniformly spread 5 lb/100 sq. ft. salt over pavement
surface.
1. Cover pavement surface with 1-mil- thick polyethylene sheet and remove sheet when
concrete has hardened and 7-day curing period has elapsed.
2. Embed rock salt into plastic concrete, power float concrete, and trowel finish.
3. After 7-day curing period, saturate concrete with water and broom-sweep surface to
dissolve remaining rock salt.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility 321313-16
E. Pigmented Mineral Dry-Shake Hardener Finish: After initial floating, apply dry-shake
materials to pavement surface according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1. Uniformly spread dry-shake hardener at a rate of 100 lb/100 sq. ft., unless greater amount
is recommended by manufacturer to match pavement color required.
2. Uniformly distribute approximately two-thirds of dry-shake hardener over pavement
surface with mechanical spreader, allow to absorb moisture, and embed by power
floating. Follow power floating with a second dry-shake hardener application, uniformly
distributing remainder of material at right angles to first application to ensure uniform
color, and embed by power floating.
3. After final floating, apply a hand-trowel finish followed by a broom finish to concrete.
4. Cure concrete with curing compound recommended by dry-shake hardener manufacturer.
Apply curing compound immediately after final finishing.
3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures.
B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.
C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and
bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete
surface.
E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing
compound, or a combination of these as follows:
1. Moist Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining
cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped
at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any
holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
damage during curing period.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility 321313-17
3.10 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES
A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows:
1. Elevation: 1/4 inch.
2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch.
3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch.
4. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1 inch.
5. Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1/4 inch.
6. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: 1/2 inch.
7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: Length
of dowel 1/4 inch per 12 inches.
8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches.
9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.
10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.
3.11 PAVEMENT MARKING
A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified
with Architect.
B. Allow concrete pavement to cure for 28 days and be dry before starting pavement marking.
C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.
D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings of dimensions indicated
with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a
minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils.
1. Spread glass beads uniformly into wet pavement markings at a rate of 6 lb/gal.
3.12 WHEEL STOPS
A. Securely attach wheel stops into pavement with not less than two galvanized steel dowels
embedded in holes drilled or cast into wheel stops at one-quarter to one-third points. Firmly
bond each dowel to wheel stop and to pavement. Securely install dowels into pavement and
bond to wheel stop. Recess head of dowel beneath top of wheel stop.
3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: The City of Aspen shall contact a qualified independent testing and inspecting
agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to
ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least 1 composite sample for each 50 cu. yd. or fraction
thereof of each concrete mix placed each day.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility 321313-18
a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests
for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly
selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample,
but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional
tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not
less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix.
4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F
and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.
5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of
three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.
6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test 1 specimen at 7 days and 2
specimens at 28 days.
a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from 2
specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days.
C. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if average of any 3 consecutive compressive-
strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test
value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.
D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor
within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project
identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and
inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days,
concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break
for both 7- and 28-day tests.
E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be
permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.
F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when
test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements
have not been met, as directed by Architect.
G. Remove and replace concrete pavement where test results indicate that it does not comply with
specified requirements.
H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.14 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not
comply with requirements in this Section.
06/08/2018
May 9, 2018 Aspen Ambulance District Facility 321313-19
B. Drill test cores, where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks
or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement
concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive.
C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after
placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by
removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
D. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material.
Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial
Completion inspections.
END OF SECTION 321313
06/08/2018
05-09-2018 32 8400 - 1
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot PLANTING IRRIGATION
SECTION 32 8400
PLANTING IRRIGATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED - Work of this Section generally includes provisions for the installation of an
underground landscape irrigation system including the following:
A. Static pressure verification and coordination of irrigation system installation with landscape material
installation.
B. Trenching, stockpiling excavation materials, refilling and compacting trenches.
C. Complete irrigation system including but not limited to piping, backflow preventer assemblies, valves,
fittings, heads, controllers and wiring, and final adjustments to insure complete coverage.
D. Water connections.
E. Replacement of unsatisfactory materials.
F. Clean-up, Consultant Reviews, and Project Acceptance.
G. Tests.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Perform Work in accordance with requirements of Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 - General
requirements as well as provisions of all applicable laws, codes, ordinances, rules, and regulations.
B. Conform to requirements of reference information listed below except where more stringent requirements
are shown or specified in Contract Documents.
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) - Specifications and Test Methods specifically
referenced in this Section.
2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) - UL Wires and Cables.
3. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) – Piping and Backflow prevention.
4. American Water Works Association - Piping and Backflow prevention.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications - Installer shall have had considerable experience and demonstrate ability in the
installation of irrigation system(s) of specific type(s) in a neat, orderly, and responsible manner in
accordance with recognized standards of workmanship. To demonstrate ability and experience necessary
for this Project, and financial stability, submit if requested by Consultant, prior to contract award the
following:
1. List of 3 projects completed in the last 2 years of similar complexity to this Project. Description of
projects shall include:
a. Name of project.
b. Location.
c. Owner.
d. Brief description of work and project budget.
B. Special Requirements:
1. Work involving substantial plumbing for installation of copper piping, backflow preventer(s), and
related work shall be executed by licensed and bonded plumber(s). Secure a permit at least 48 hours
prior to start of installation.
2. Tolerances - Specified depths of mains and laterals and pitch of pipes are minimums. Settlement of
trenches is cause for removal of finish grade treatment, refilling, compaction, and repair of finish
grade treatment.
3. Coordination with Other Contractors - Protect, maintain, and coordinate Work with Work under other
Section.
06/08/2018
Arch Project No. 05/09/2018 32 8400 - 2
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot PLANTING IRRIGATION
4. Damage To Other Improvements - Contractor shall replace or repair damage to grading, soil
preparation, seeding, sodding, or planting done under other Sections during Work associated with
installation of irrigation system at no additional cost to Owner.
C. Pre-Construction Conference - Contractor shall schedule and conduct a conference to review in detail
quality control and construction requirements for equipment, materials, and systems used to perform the
Work. Conference shall be scheduled not less than 10 days prior to commencement of Work. All parties
required to be in attendance shall be notified no later than 7 days prior to date of conference. Contractor
shall notify qualified representatives of each party concerned with that portion of Work to attend
conference, including but not limited to Architect, Consultant, Contractor's Superintendent, and Installer.
1. Minutes of conference shall be recorded and distributed by Contractor to all parties in attendance
within five days of conference.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Prepare and make submittals in accordance with conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Materials List - Submit five copies if submitting in hard-copy format or one full electronic set of a complete
materials list indicating manufacturer, model number, and description of all materials and equipment to be
used. Show appropriate dimensions and adequate detail to accurately portray intent of construction via
cut sheets and/or shop drawings, as appropriate based on plans, details, and specification information
contained within.
C. Record Drawings (As-Builts):
1. At onset of irrigation installation secure Autocadd files of original irrigation design from Owner. At the
end of every day, revise as-built prints for work accomplished that day in red ink. As-built field prints
shall be brought up-to-date at the close of the working day every Friday by a qualified draftsperson.
A print of record plan(s) shall be available at Project Site. Indicate zoning changes on weekly as-built
drawings. Indicate non-pressure piping changes on as-built. Upon completion of Project, but prior to
scheduling of substantial acceptance walk-through, submit for review a final set of as-built mylars and
an Autocadd disk copy. Dimensions, from two permanent points of reference (building corners,
sidewalk, road intersections or permanent structures), location of following items:
a. Connection to existing water lines.
b. Routing of sprinkler pressure lines (dimension maximum 100 feet along routing).
c. Sprinkler control valves.
d. Quick coupling valves.
e. Manual drains and stop and waste valves.
f. Drip line blow-out stubs.
g. Control wire routing if not with pressure mainline.
h. Gate valves.
i. Control wire and communication cable splices
j. Water meters
k. Locations of all sleeving including size, quantity and depth of sleeve
l. Flow sensors
m. Pressure regulating valves
2. Owner’s Representative will not certify any pay request submitted by the Contractor if the as-built
drawings are not current, and processing of pay request will not occur until as-builts are up-dated.
D. Operation Instructions - Submit 3 written operating instructions including winterization procedures and
start-up, with cut sheets of products, and coordinate controller/watering operation instruction with Owner
maintenance personnel.
1. Controller Charts:
a. Do not prepare charts until Consultant has reviewed record (as-built) drawings.
b. Provide one controller chart for each automatic controller installed.
i. Chart may be reproduction of record drawing, if scale permits fitting of controller door. If
photo reduction prints are required, keep reduction to maximum size possible to retain full
legibility.
ii. Chart shall be blueline print of actual "as-built" system, showing area covered by that
controller.
c. Identify area of coverage of each remote control valve, using a distinctly different pastel color
drawing over entire area of coverage.
06/08/2018
Arch Project No. 05/09/2018 32 8400 - 3
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot PLANTING IRRIGATION
d. Following review of charts by Consultant, they shall be hermetically sealed between two layers
of 20-mm thick plastic sheet
e. Charts shall be completed and reviewed prior to final review of irrigation system.
E. Provide documentation of construction and demolition waste debris recycling / salvage rates. See Section
01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with General Conditions and Division 1 Section “Product Requirements”.
B. Deliver, unload, store, and handle materials, packaging, bundling, products in dry, weatherproof, condition
in manner to prevent damage, breakage, deterioration, intrusion, ignition, and vandalism. Deliver in original
unopened packaging containers prominently displaying manufacturer's name, volume, quantity, contents,
instructions, and conformance to local, state, and federal law. Remove and replace cracked, broken, or
contaminated items or elements prematurely exposed to moisture, inclement weather, snow, ice,
temperature extremes, fire, or jobsite damage.
C. Handling of PVC Pipe - Exercise care in handling, loading and storing, of PVC pipe. All PVC pipe shall be
transported in a vehicle that allows length of pipe to lie flat so as not to subject it to undue bending or
concentrated external loads. All sections of pipe that have been dented or damaged shall be discarded,
and if installed, shall be replaced with new piping.
1.06 JOBSITE CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Property:
1. Preserve and protect all trees, plants, monuments, structures, and paved areas from damage due to
Work of this Section. In the event damage does occur, all damage to inanimate items shall be
completely repaired or replaced to satisfaction of Owner, and all injury to living plants shall be
repaired by Owner. All costs of such repairs shall be charged to and paid by Contractor.
2. Protect buildings, walks, walls, and other property from damage. Flare and barricade open ditches.
Damage caused to asphalt, concrete, or other building material surfaces shall be repaired or replaced
at no cost to Owner. Restore disturbed areas to original condition.
3. Irrigation piping shall maintain a minimum distance from building foundations of 5 feet or as described
in soils report, whichever is greater. No spray irrigation shall occur within 10 feet of the foundation. No
drip irrigation shall occur within 5 feet of the foundation unless soil moisture sensors are installed on
valves servicing these areas. All irrigation piping and emission devices located on top of or within
building structure shall conform to Waterproofing Consultant requirements. Pipe routing may be
shown within these distances for graphical clarity only.
B. Existing Trees:
1. All trenching or other Work under limb spread of any and all evergreens or low branching deciduous
material shall be done by hand or by other methods so as to prevent damage to limbs or branches.
2. Where it is necessary to excavate adjacent to existing trees use all possible care to avoid injury to
trees and tree roots. Excavation, in areas where 2 inch and larger roots occur, shall be done by hand.
Roots 2 inches or larger in diameter, except directly in the path of pipe of conduit, shall be tunneled
under and shall be heavily wrapped with burlap to prevent scarring or excessive drying. Where a
trenching machine is operated close to trees having roots smaller than 2 inches in diameter, wall of
trench adjacent to tree shall be hand trimmed, making clean cuts through roots. Trenches adjacent to
trees shall be closed within 24 hours, and when this is not possible, side of trench adjacent to tree
shall be kept shaded with moistened burlap or canvas.
C. Protection and Repair of Underground Lines:
1. Request proper utility company to stake exact location (including depth) of all underground electric,
gas, or telephone lines. Take whatever precautions are necessary to protect these underground lines
from damage. If damage does occur, Utility Owner shall repair all damage. Contractor shall pay all
costs of such repairs unless other arrangements have been made.
2. Request Owner, in writing, to locate all private utilities (i.e., electrical service to outside lighting) before
proceeding with excavation. If, after such request and necessary staking, private utilities that were
not staked are encountered and damaged by Installer, Owner shall repair them at no cost to Installer.
If Contractor damages staked or located utilities, they shall be repaired by Utility Owner at
Contractor's expense unless other arrangements have been made.
06/08/2018
Arch Project No. 05/09/2018 32 8400 - 4
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot PLANTING IRRIGATION
D. Replacement of Paving and Curbs - Where trenches and lines cross existing roadways, paths, curbing,
etc., damage to these shall be kept to a minimum and shall be restored to original condition.
1.07 WARRANTY/GUARANTY
A. Manufacturer shall warrant materials against defects for a period of one year from date of Substantial
Completion. Installer(s) shall guaranty workmanship for similar period.
B. Settling of backfilled trenches that may occur during guaranty period shall be repaired at no expense to
Owner, including complete restoration of damaged property.
C. Expenses due to vandalism before substantial completion shall be borne by Contractor.
D. Owner will maintain turf and planting areas during warranty period, so as not to hamper proper operation of
irrigation system.
1.08 MAINTENANCE
A. Furnish the following maintenance items to Owner prior to final Acceptance:
1. Two Sets of special tools required for removing, disassembling, and adjusting each type of sprinkler
head and valve supplied on this Project.
2. One eight foot valve key for operation of stop and waste valve.
3. Two six foot valve keys for operation of gate valves.
4. Two keys for each automatic controller.
5. Two quick coupler keys and two matching hose swivels for each type of quick coupling valve installed.
6. Two aluminum drain valve keys of sufficient length for operation of drain valves.
B. Winterization - include cost in bid for winterizing complete system at conclusion of sprinkling season (in
which system received final acceptance) within 3 days notification by the Owner. System shall be voided
of water using compressed air or similar method reviewed by Consultant. Reopen, operate, and adjust
system malfunctions accordingly during April of following season within 3 days of notification by Owner.
1.09 EXTRA STOCK - In addition to installed system furnish the following items to Owner:
A. 30 Drip emitters of each type used.
B. 100’ roll in-line emitter tubing of each type used.
C. 10 Pop-up spray heads with nozzles of each type used
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General Piping:
1. Pressure Supply Line (from tap on city mains to winterization tee or Stop and Drain valve prior to
backflow prevention unit) – Type “K” Soft Copper (3/4” – 2 1/2”), C900 PVC, Galvanized Steel (3/4” –
2 1/2”), and ductile iron (3” and larger).
2. Pressure Supply Line (from point of connection, winterization tee or Stop and Drain valve and through
backflow prevention unit, - Type "K" Hard Copper (3/4” – 2 1/2”), and ductile iron (3” and larger).
3. Pressure Supply Lines (downstream of backflow prevention units) – Type "K" Hard Copper (3/4” – 2
1/2”), Class 200 PVC BE (1" - 2 1/2") and Class 200 PVC RT (3" and larger), , as noted on plans and
schedule.
4. Non-pressure Lines - Class 200 PVC BE, 100PSI NSF polyethylene, 1” minimum size, as noted on
plans.
5. Sleeving - Class 160 PVC, as noted on plans and schedule. Drip Tubing - Toro Dura-Pol EHD 1645
3/4" with .050 inch wall thickness.
6. Emitter Tubing - As recommended by emitter manufacturer.
B. Copper Pipe and Fittings:
1. Copper Pipe - Type K, hard tempered or annealed coil.
2. Fittings - Wrought copper, solder joint type.
3. Joints - Soldered with solder, 45% silver, 15% copper, 16% zinc, and 24% cadmium and solidus at
1125~F and liquids at 1145~F.
06/08/2018
Arch Project No. 05/09/2018 32 8400 - 5
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot PLANTING IRRIGATION
C. Brass Pipe and Fittings:
1. Brass Pipe - 85% red brass, ANSI Schedule 40 screwed pipe.
2. Fittings - Medium brass, screwed 125-pound class.
D. Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings:
1. Ductile Iron Pipe – Centrifugal cast ductile iron in metal molds for water pipe in accordance with ANSI
C151 and AWWA A21.51 with asphaltic exterior coating and interior lining and coating in accordance
with ANSI C151 and AWWA A21.
2. Fittings – Mechanical joint as supplied by the pipe manufacturer and rated for working pressures of
350 psi.
3. Gaskets – Furnish in accordance with ANSI C111 and AWWA A21.11.
E. Plastic Pipe and Fittings:
1. Identification Markings:
a. Identify all pipe with following indelible markings:
i. Manufacturer's name.
ii. Nominal pipe size.
iii. Schedule of class.
iv. Pressure rating.
v. NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) seal of approval.
vi. Date of extrusion.
2. Solvent Weld Pipe - Manufactured from virgin polyvinyl chloride (PVC) compound in accordance with
ASTM D2241 and ASTM D1784; cell classification 12454-B, Type 1, Grade 1.
a. Fittings - Standard Weight, Schedule 40, injection molded PVC; complying with ASTM D1784
and D2466, cell classification 12454-B.
i. Threads - Injection molded type (where required).
ii. Tees and ells - Side gated.
b. Threaded Nipples - ASTM D2464, Schedule 80 with molded threads.
c. Teflon Tape – All PVC male threaded fittings and nipples, excluding marlex fittings, shall receive
wrapping of Teflon tape applied to threaded surfaces per pipe manufacturer’s recommendations.
d. Joint Cement and Primer - Type as recommended by manufacturer of pipe and fittings.
3. Gasketed End Pipe - Manufactured from virgin Polyvinyl Chloride compound in accordance with
ASTM D2241 and ASTM D1784; cell classification 1254-B, Type 1,Grade 1.
a. Fittings and Services Tees (3" and larger) - Ductile iron, grade 70-55-05 in accordance with
ASTM A-536. Fittings shall have deep bell push-on joints with gaskets meeting ASTM F-477.
b. Gaskets - Factory installed in pipe and fittings, having a metal or plastic support within gasket or
a plastic retainer ring for gasket.
c. Lubricant - As recommended by manufacturer of pipe fittings.
4. Flexible Plastic Pipe - Manufactured from virgin polyethylene in accordance with ASTM D2239, with a
hydrostatic design stress of 630 psi and designated as PE 2306.
a. Fittings – Insert type manufactured in accordance with ASTM D2609; PVC Type 1 cell
classification 12454-B.
b. Clamps - All stainless steel worm gear screw clamps. Use 2 clamps per joint on 1-1/2 inch and
2 inch fittings.
F. Drip, Sub-Surface Irrigation Systems and Bubblers:
1. Drip Tubing - Manufactured of flexible vinyl chloride compound conforming to ASTM D1248, Type 1,
Class C, Category 4, P14 and ASTM D3350 for PE 122111C.
2. Fittings - Type and diameter recommended by tubing manufacturer.
3. Drip Valve Assembly - Type and size shown on Drawings.
a. Wye Strainer - Plastic construction with 150 mesh nylon screen and 1/2 inch blowout assembly.
b. Control Valve - 2 way, solenoid pilot operated type made of synthetic, non-corrosive material;
diaphragm activated and slow closing. Include freely pivoted seat seal; retained (mounted)
without attachment to diaphragm.
c. Pressure Reducing Valve - Plastic construction as detailed
4. Emitters - Single port, pressure compensating, press on type.
5. Sub-Surface tubing - Size and type shown on Drawings; installed as detailed.
a. Dripperline Tubing – Nominal sized one-half inch (1/2”) low density, ultra-violet-resistant linear
polyethylene tubing with internal pressure-compensating, continuous self-cleaning, integral
drippers at specified intervals and with specified discharge rates. Emitter spacing and discharge
specified on Drawings.
06/08/2018
Arch Project No. 05/09/2018 32 8400 - 6
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot PLANTING IRRIGATION
b. Headers and footers – polyethylene or PVC pipe as shown on Drawings.
c. Fittings - Type and diameter recommended by tubing manufacturer.
d. Drip Valve Assembly - Type and size shown on Drawings.
i. Wye Strainer - Plastic construction with 150 mesh nylon screen and 1/2 inch blowout
assembly.
ii. Control Valve - 2 way, solenoid pilot operated type made of synthetic, non-corrosive
material; diaphragm activated and slow closing. Include freely pivoted seat seal; retained
(mounted) without attachment to diaphragm.
iii. Pressure Reducing Valve - Plastic construction as detailed.
e. Soil staples – install on all on-surface installations, spaced 3-5” on center.
6. Bubblers - Rainbird 1400 Series or approved equal.
G. Gate Valves:
1. Gate Valves for 3/4 inch through 2-1/2 Inch Pipe - Brass construction; solid wedge, IPS threads, and
non-rising stem with cross operating handle.
2. Gate Valves for 3 Inch and Larger Pipe - Iron body, brass or bronze mounted AWWA gate valves with
a clear waterway equal to full nominal diameter of valve; rubber gasket or mechanical joint-type only.
Valves shall be able to withstand a continuous working pressure of 200 psi and be equipped with a
square operating nut and resilient wedge. Provide pipe restraints on gate valves 3 inches or larger as
detailed.
H. Quick Coupling Valves - Brass two-piece body designed for working pressure of 125 PSI; operable with
quick coupler. Equip quick coupler with locking NP purple rubber cover.
I. Valve Boxes:
1. Gate Valves, Quick Coupling Valves, Drain Valves, Drip Line Blow-out Stubs, and Wire Splice or Stub
Box - Carson Brooks #910-10, Carson Brooks #H910-12 or approved equal (including bolt) box with
lid, in polymer concrete, box w/ Purple Bolt Down Cover as detailed.
2. 1 inch through 2 inch Control Valves, Master Valves, Pressure Regulating Valves and Communication
Cable Splice box, Sub-meters - Carson Brooks #1419-12 box, Carson Brooks #H1324-12 or
approved equal (including bolt) box with lid, in polymer concrete, w/ Purple Bolt Down Cover as
detailed.
3. Drip Valve Assemblies and Flow Sensors - Carson Brooks #1220-12 box, Carson Brooks #1730-12
box, as detailed.
J. Electrical Control Wiring:
1. Low Voltage:
a. Electrical Control Wire - AWG UFUL approved No. 14 direct burial copper wire or larger, if
required to operate system as designed.
b. Electrical Common Wire - AWG UFUL approved No. 14 direct burial copper wire or larger, if
required to operate system as designed.
c. Wire Colors:
i. Control Wires - Red.
ii. Common Wires - White.
iii. Master Valve Wires - Blue.
iv. Drawing Spare Control Wires - Black.
v. Drawing Spare Common Wires - Yellow.
vi. Maintenance Spare Control Wires - Green.
vii. Maintenance Spare Common Wires - Brown.
d. If multiple controllers are utilized, and wire paths of different controllers cross each other, both
common and control wires from each controller shall be different colors approved by Consultant.
e. Control Wire connections and splices shall be made with 3M DBY or King 600 DBY/R direct bury
splice, or as required by the controller manufacturer.
f. Communication Cable – Paige PE-89 or approved equal with 3M Gel-type connections installed
within Preformed Super Serviseal Splice Kit.
2. High Voltage - Type required by local codes and ordinances, of proper size to accommodate needs of
equipment serviced.
K. Automatic Controller - Size and type shown on Drawings; mounted as detailed.
L. Electric Control Valves - Size and type shown on Drawings having manual flow adjustment, and manual
bleed nut.
06/08/2018
Arch Project No. 05/09/2018 32 8400 - 7
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot PLANTING IRRIGATION
M. Master Valve – Size and type shown on Drawings.
N. Flow Sensor – Size and type shown on Drawings.
O. Sprinkler Heads - As indicated on Drawings. Fabricated riser units in accordance with details on Drawings
- with fittings and nipples of equal diameter as riser inlet in sprinkler body.
P. Backflow Preventer - Size and type indicated on Drawings; Brass or iron construction with 150 psi working
pressure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SITE CONDITIONS, LANDSCAPE PLAN REVIEW AND COORDINATION
A. Contractor will be held responsible for coordination between landscape and irrigation system installation.
Landscape material locations shown on the Landscape Plan shall take precedence over the irrigation
system equipment locations. If irrigation equipment is installed in conflict with the landscape material
locations shown on the Landscape Plan, the Contractor will be required to relocate the irrigation
equipment, as necessary, at Contractor’s expense.
B. Contractor is responsible to notify Consultant of any field conditions that vary from the conditions shown on
the Irrigation Construction Documents. If Contractor fails to notify Consultant of these conditions,
Contractor will be held responsible for all costs associated with system adjustments required due to the
change in field conditions.
C. Comply with the requirements of Section 31 25 00, TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION
CONTROL PLAN for preparation and protection of the site.
3.02 STATIC PRESSURE VERIFICATION
A. Contractor shall field verify the static pressure at the project site, prior to commencing work or ordering
irrigation materials, and submit findings, in writing, to Consultant. If Contractor fails to verify static water
pressure prior to commencing work or ordering irrigation materials, Contractor shall assume responsibility
for all costs required to make system operational and the costs required to replace any damaged
landscape material. Damage shall include all required material costs, design costs and plant replacement
costs.
3.03 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section is to be performed. Do not proceed with
Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Grading operations, with the exception of final grading, shall be completed and approved by Owner before
staking or installation of any irrigation system begins.
C. Underground Utilities shall be installed prior to installation of irrigation system. If irrigation installation takes
place prior to utility installation, Contractor shall notify Owner of this condition in writing prior to
commencement of irrigation installation.
3.04 PREPARATION:
A. Staking shall Occur as Follows:
1. Mark, with powdered lime, routing of pressure supply line and flag heads for first few zones. Contact
Consultant 48 hours in advance and request review of staking. Proposed locations of all trees shall be
field staked by Contractor and approved by Owner/Landscape Architect prior to Consultant review of
irrigation staking. Consultant will advise installer as to the amount of staking to be prepared.
Consultant will review staking and direct changes if required. Review does not relieve installer from
coverage problems due to improper placement of heads after staking.
2. Contractor shall contact Consultant if field spacing varies by +/- 10% of the spacing shown on the
irrigation plans. If Contractor fails to notify Consultant of variances exceeding 10%, Contractor
assumes full responsibility for the costs associated with any required system modifications deemed
necessary by the Consultant or Owner.
3. If Project has significant topography, freeform planting beds, or other amenities, which could require
alteration of irrigation equipment layout as deemed necessary by Consultant, do not install irrigation
equipment in these areas until Consultant has reviewed equipment staking.
06/08/2018
Arch Project No. 05/09/2018 32 8400 - 8
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot PLANTING IRRIGATION
B. Install sleeving under asphalt paving and concrete walks, prior to concreting and paving operations, to
accommodate piping and wiring. Compact backfill around sleeves to 95% Modified Proctor Density within
2% of optimum moisture content in accordance with STM D1557.
C. Trenching - Trench excavation shall follow, as much as possible, layout shown on Drawing. Dig trenches
straight and support pipe continuously on bottom of trench. Trench bottom shall be clean and smooth with
all rock and organic debris removed.
1. Clearances:
a. Piping 3 Inches and Larger - Make trenches of sufficient width (14 inches minimum) to properly
assemble and position pipe in trench. Minimum clearance of piping 3 inches or larger shall be 5
inches horizontally on both sides of the trench.
b. Piping Smaller than 3 Inches - Trenches shall have a minimum width of 7 inches.
c. Line Clearance - Provide not less than 6 inches of clearance between each line and not less
than 12 inches of clearance between lines of other trades.
2. Pipe and Wire Depth:
a. Pressure Supply Piping – 18-24 inches from top of pipe minimum or as noted on plans.
b. PVC Sleeving – To match depth of sleeved material.
c. Non-pressure Piping (rotor) - 18 inches from top of pipe.
d. Non-pressure Piping (pop-up) - 14 inches from top of pipe.
e. Control Wiring/Communication Cable - Side of pressure main or at 18 inch depth if installed in a
separate trench with no mainline piping.
f. Drip Tubing - 12 inches from top of pipe.
g. Emitter Tubing (Micro-tubing) - 8 inches from top of pipe.
h. Subsurface – 2 inches from top of pipe or as noted on plans.
3. Boring will be permitted only where pipe must pass under obstruction(s) which cannot be removed. In
backfilling bore, final density of backfill shall match that of surrounding soil. It is acceptable to use
sleeves of suitable diameter installed first by jacking or boring, and pipe laid through sleeves.
Observe same precautions as though pipe were installed in open trench.
4. Vibratory Plow - Non-pressure piping may be installed through use of vibratory plow method if
consultant determines soil conditions are satisfactory for this method of installation. Vibratory plowing
does not relieve installer of minimum pipe depths.
3.05 INSTALLATION - Locate other equipment as near as possible to locations designated. Consultant shall
review deviations prior to installation.
A. PVC Piping - Snake pipe in trench as much as possible to allow for expansion and contraction. Do not
install pipe when air temperature is below 40 degrees F. Place manual drain valves at low points and
dead ends of pressure supply piping to insure complete drainage of system. When pipe installation is not
in progress, or at end of each day, close pipe ends with tight plug or cap. Perform Work in accordance
with good practices prevailing in piping trades.
1. Solvent Weld PVC Pipe - Lay pipe and make all plastic to plastic joints in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Flexible Plastic (Polyethylene) Pipe - Lay pipe and assemble fittings following manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. Drip Tubing:
1. Make all fitting connections as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. Use only manufacturer provided or recommended hole punch when making penetrations in drip
tubing for insert fittings. Use of any other hole punch shall be cause for immediate removal and
replacement of all installed drip tubing.
3. Install drip line blow-out stubs at all dead ends of drip tubing.
C. Control Wiring:
1. Low Voltage Wiring:
a. Bury control wiring between controller and electric valves in pressure supply line trenches,
strung as close as possible to main pipe lines with such wires to be consistently located below
and to one side of pipe, or in separate trenches.
b. Bundle all 24 volt wires at 10 foot intervals and lay with pressure supply line pipe to one side of
the trench.
06/08/2018
Arch Project No. 05/09/2018 32 8400 - 9
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot PLANTING IRRIGATION
c. Provide an expansion loop at every pressure pipe angle fitting, every electric control valve
location (in valve box), and every 500 feet. Form expansion loop by wrapping wire at least 8
times around a 3/4 inch pipe and withdrawing pipe.
d. Make all splices and E.C.V. connections using 3M DBY, King 600 DBY/R direct bury connectors,
or similar dry splice method.
e. Install all control wire splices not occurring at control valve in a separate splice valve box.
f. Install one control wire for each control valve.
g. Maintenance spare wires - In addition to spare wires labeled on drawings, extend two spare #14
AWG UFUL control wires and one spare #14 AWG UFUL common wire from controller pedestal
to the end of each and every leg of mainline. Label maintenance spare wires at controller and
wire stub box.
2. High Voltage Wiring for Automatic Controller:
a. Provide 120 volt power connection to automatic controller.
b. All electric work shall conform to local codes, ordinances, and authorities having jurisdiction. All
high voltage electrical work shall be performed by licensed electrician.
D. Automatic Controller:
1. Install controller in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as detailed and where shown on
Drawings.
2. Connect remote control valves to controller in numerical sequence as shown on Drawings.
3. Owner shall approve final location of controller prior to installation.
4. Connect remote control valves to controller in numerical sequence as shown on Drawings.
5. All above ground conduit shall be rigid galvanized with appropriate fittings. All below ground conduit
shall be schedule 40 PVC.
E. Electric Control Valves - Install cross-handle four inches below finished grade where shown on Drawings
as detailed. When grouped together, allow minimum of 12 inches between valve box sides. Install each
remote control valve in a separate valve box. Install valve box flush with grade or when present flush with
surfacing material (rock mulch). When parallel to roadway, sidewalk or other permanent element or
structure, control valve and box to be installed perpendicular to element or structure, spaced equally.
F. Quick Coupling Valves - Install quick couplers on swing-joint assemblies as indicated on construction
details; plumb and flush to grade. Angled nipple relative to pressure supply line shall be no more than 45
degrees and no less than 10 degrees.
G. Drip and Sub-Surface Valve Assemblies - Install valve assembly as detailed.
H. Drip Emitters - Stake all surface emitters as detailed and staked with acceptable tubing stakes.
I. Drain Valves - Install one manual drain valve on pressure supply line directly downstream of backflow
preventer and at all low points in pressure supply line as detailed. Provide a three cubic foot drainage
sump for drain valve as detailed.
J. Valve Boxes:
1. Install one valve box for each type of valve installed as detailed. Valve box extensions are not
acceptable except for master valves and flow sensors. Install gravel sump after compaction of all
trenches. Place final portion of gravel inside valve box after valve box is backfilled and compacted.
2. Brand controller letter and station number on lid of each valve box. Letter and number size shall be
no smaller than 1 inch and no greater in size than 1 1/2 inches. Depth of branding shall be no more
than 1/8 inch into valve box lid.
3. Concrete polymer boxes shall be labeled with branded inserts per manufacturer’s recommendations.
K. Gate Valves - Install where shown on Drawings as detailed.
L. Sprinkler Heads - Install sprinkler heads where designated on Drawings or where staked. Set to finish as
detailed. Spacing of heads shall not exceed the maximum indicated on Drawing unless re-staked as
directed by Consultant. In no case shall the spacing exceed maximum recommended by manufacturer.
Install heads on swing joints or riser assemblies as detailed. Adjust part circle heads for proper coverage.
Adjust heads to correct height after sod is installed. Plant placement shall not interfere with intended
sprinkler head coverage, piping, or other equipment. Consultant may request nozzle changes or
adjustments without additional cost to the Owner.
M. Backflow Preventer - Install as detailed at location designated on Drawings.
06/08/2018
Arch Project No. 05/09/2018 32 8400 - 10
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot PLANTING IRRIGATION
N. Booster Pump (if required) - Size and type required for project. Installed per manufacturers
recommendations and as detailed.
O. Master Valve – Install as detailed at location designated on Drawings.
P. Flow Sensor - Install as detailed at location designated on Drawings.
Q. Backfilling - Do not begin backfilling operations until required system tests have been completed. Backfill
shall not be done in freezing weather except with review by Consultant. Leave trenches slightly mounded
to allow for settlement after backfilling is completed. Trenches shall be finish graded prior to walk-through
of system by Consultant.
1. Materials - Excavated material is generally considered satisfactory for backfill purposes. Backfill
material shall be free of rubbish, vegetable matter, frozen materials, and stones larger than 1 inch in
maximum dimension. Do not mix subsoil with topsoil. Material not suitable for backfill shall be hauled
away. Contractor shall be responsible for providing suitable backfill if excavated material is
unacceptable or not sufficient to meet backfill, compaction, and final grade requirements.
2. Do not leave trenches open for a period of more than 48 hours. Open excavations shall be protected
in accordance with OSHA regulations.
3. Compact backfill to 90% maximum density, determined in accordance with ASTM D155-7 utilizing the
following methods:
a. Mechanical tamping.
b. Puddling or ponding. Puddling or ponding and/or jetting is prohibited within 20’-0" of building or
foundation walls.
R. Piping Under Paving:
1. Provide for a minimum cover of 18 inches between the top of the pipe and the bottom of the
aggregate base for all pressure and non-pressure piping installed under asphaltic concrete or
concrete paving.
2. Piping located under areas where asphalt or concrete paving will be installed shall be bedded with
sand (a layer 6" below pipe and 6" above pipe).
3. Compact backfill material in 6" lifts at 90% maximum density determined in accordance with ASTM
D1557 using manual or mechanical tamping devices.
4. Set in place, cap, and pressure test all piping under paving, in presence of Owner prior to backfilling
and paving operations.
5. Piping under existing walks or concrete pavement shall be done by jacking, boring, or hydraulic
driving, but where cutting or breaking of walks and/or concrete is necessary, it shall be done and
replaced at not cost to Owner. Obtain permission to cut or break walks and/or concrete from Owner.
S. Water Supply and Point of Connection - Water supply shall be extended as shown from water supply lines.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Flushing - After piping, risers, and valves are in place and connected, but prior to installation of sprinkler
heads, quick coupler assemblies, and hose valves, thoroughly flush piping system under full head of water
pressure from dead end fittings. Maintain flushing for 5 minutes through furthermost valves. Cap risers
after flushing.
B. Pressure Testing - Conduct test in presence of Consultant. Arrange for presence of Consultant 48 hours in
advance of testing. Supply force pump and all other test equipment. Compressed air shall not be used for
pressure testing system.
1. After backfilling, and installation of all control valves, fill pressure supply line with water, and
pressurize to 40 PSI over the designated static pressure or 120 PSI, whichever is greater, for a period
of 2 hours.
2. Leakage, Pressure Loss - Test is acceptable if no loss of pressure is evident during the test period.
3. Leaks - Detect and repair leaks.
4. Retest system until test pressure can be maintained for duration of test.
5. Before final acceptance, pressure supply line shall remain under pressure for a period of 48 hours.
6. Pressure test shall be scheduled and passed prior to scheduling of Substantial Completion Walk-
through.
C. Walk-Through for Substantial Completion:
1. Arrange for Consultant's presence 48 hours in advance of walk-through.
06/08/2018
Arch Project No. 05/09/2018 32 8400 - 11
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot PLANTING IRRIGATION
2. Entire system shall be completely installed and operational prior to scheduling of walk-through.
3. Operate each zone in its entirety for Consultant at time of walk-through and additionally, open all
valve boxes if directed.
4. Generate a list of items to be corrected prior to Final Completion.
5. Furnish all materials and perform all work required to correct all inadequacies of coverage due to
deviations from Contract Documents.
6. During walk-through, expose all drip emitters under operations for observation by Consultant to
demonstrate that they are performing and installed as designed, prior to placing of all mulch material.
Schedule separate walk-through if necessary.
7. Supply Consultant with prints of irrigation as-builts prior to scheduling substantial completion walk-
through.
D. Walk-Through for Final Completion:
1. Arrange for Consultant’s presence 48 hours in advance of walk-through.
2. Show evidence to Consultant that Owner has received all accessories, charts, record drawings, and
equipment as required before Final Completion walk-through is scheduled.
3. Operate each zone, in its entirety for Consultant at time of walk-through to insure correction of all
incomplete items.
4. Items deemed not acceptable by Consultant shall be reworked to complete satisfaction of Consultant.
5. If after request to Consultant for walk-through for Final Completion of irrigation system, Consultant
finds items during walk-through which have not been properly adjusted, reworked, or replaced as
indicated on list of incomplete items from previous walk-through, Contractor shall be charged for all
subsequent walk-throughs. Funds will be withheld from final payment and/or retainage to Contractor,
in amount equal to additional time and expenses required by Consultant to conduct and document
further walk-throughs as deemed necessary to insure compliance with Contract Documents
3.07 ADJUSTING - Upon completion of installation, fine-tune entire system by adjusting patterns and break-up
pins, and setting pressure reducing valves at proper and similar pressure to provide optimum and efficient
coverage. Flush and adjust all sprinkler heads for optimum performance and to prevent overspray onto
walks, roadways, and buildings as much as possible. Heads of same type shall be operating at same
pressure +/- 10%.
A. If it is determined that irrigation adjustments will provide proper coverage, and improved water distribution
as determined by Consultant, contractor shall make such adjustments prior to Final Acceptance, as
directed, at no additional cost to Owner. Adjustments may also include changes in nozzle sizes, degrees
of arc, and control valve throttling.
B. All sprinkler heads shall be set perpendicular to finish grade unless otherwise noted on Construction Plans
or directed by Consultant.
C. Areas which do not conform to designated operation requirements due to unauthorized changes or poor
installation practices shall be immediately corrected at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.08 CLEANING - Maintain continuous cleaning operation throughout duration of work. Dispose of, off-site at
no additional cost to Owner, all trash or debris generated by installation of irrigation system.
A. Comply with the requirements of DIVISION 1, General Requirements, and Section 01 74 19,
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL for recycling and salvage of debris and
waste.
B. Comply with the requirements of Section 31 25 00, TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION
CONTROL PLAN for preparation and protection of the site.
END OF SECTION
06/08/2018
LIFT STUDIO LLC | LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE | PO BOX 2748 | ASPEN, CO 81612 | 970 404 5610 | WWW.LIFTSTUDIOLANDSCAPE.NET
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot Project| 100% CDs | 2018-05-09 PLANTS 329300-1
SECTION 329300—PLANTS
PART 1 —GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, Contract Documents and general provisions of the Contract as provided by
the Contractor, Landscape Architect or Owner’s Representative.
B. The Contractor shall comply with the City of Aspen’s Landscape Ordinance and Water
Efficient Landscape Standards (COA WELS) found at
https://www.cityofaspen.com/199/Landscape-Ordinance. The following specifications
reference COA WELS, but do not constitute the full list of requirements the Contractor
must comply with. Any deviations from COA WELS must be formally appealed with
the City of Aspen. This process requires submission of a soils analysis report in
accordance with the terms of Landscape Ordinance Section 5.1.1E.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.Plants Materials
2.Trees.
3.Shrubs.
4.Perennials.
5.Seed.
6.Sod.
7.Topsoil, Plant Mix and Soil Amendments.
8.Fertilizers.
9.Mulches.
10.Stone.
11.Edging.
12.Tree stabilization.
13.Miscellaneous Products and Materials.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ANSI Z60.1: American Standard for Nursery Stock.
B. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials.
C. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.
D. Balled and Burlapped Stock (B&B): Exterior plants dug with firm, intact, natural balls of
earth in which they were grown, with a ball size not less than diameter and depth
06/08/2018
LIFT STUDIO LLC | LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE | PO BOX 2748 | ASPEN, CO 81612 | 970 404 5610 | WWW.LIFTSTUDIOLANDSCAPE.NET
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot Project| 100% CDs | 2018-05-09 PLANTS 329300-2
recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of tree or shrub required; wrapped,
tied, rigidly supported, and drum-laced, with the root flare visible at the surface of the
ball as recommended by ANSI Z60.1.
E. Bare-Root Stock: Plants with a well-branched, fibrous-root system developed by
transplanting or root pruning, with soil or growing medium removed, and with not less
than the minimum root spread according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant
required.
F. Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted exterior plants grown in a
container, with a well-established root system reaching sides of container and
maintaining a firm ball when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough
to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to
ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.
G. Contract Documents: Drawing sheets and notes (Drawings), Specifications, bid forms
and other documentation furnished by the Landscape Architect and other disciplines.
Any discrepancies, questions or clarifications regarding the intent of the contract
documents shall be clarified with the Landscape Architect prior to construction or
procurement.
H. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil, mulch (in some cases, see
Drawings) or pavement.
I. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or
mitigating a pest. Pesticides include insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides,
rodenticides, and molluscicides. They also include substances or mixtures intended for
use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant. Some sources classify herbicides
separately from pesticides. All pesticides shall be organic.
J. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to
plants, animals, or people. Pests include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and
slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria,
and viruses.
K. Plant; Plants; Plant Material: These terms refer to vegetation in general, including trees,
shrubs, vines, ground covers, ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or
herbaceous vegetation.
L. Planting Soil; Plant Mix; Topsoil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured
soil that has been modified with soil amendments and possibly fertilizers to produce a
soil mixture best for plant growth of that particular species or planting area.
M. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk
where the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root
system and the stem or trunk.
N. Stem Girdling Roots: Roots that encircle the stems (trunks) of trees below the soil
surface.
O. Subgrade: The surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete,
or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETING
A. Pre-Construction Conference: The Contractor shall request and conduct conference at
the Project Site with the Landscape Architect, Owner’s Representative and other
related trades and consultants prior to beginning work.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
06/08/2018
LIFT STUDIO LLC | LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE | PO BOX 2748 | ASPEN, CO 81612 | 970 404 5610 | WWW.LIFTSTUDIOLANDSCAPE.NET
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot Project| 100% CDs | 2018-05-09 PLANTS 329300-3
A. Planting Product Data and Certification: The Contractor shall submit each item in this
Article according to the Conditions of the Contract for Landscape Architect and
Owner’s Representative approval:
1. Plant Materials Order List: Include quantities, sizes, quality, and sources for
plant materials.
2. Plant Photographs: Include color photographs of each specified species and
size of plant material as it will be furnished to Project. Take photographs from
an angle depicting true size and condition of the typical plant to be furnished.
Include a scale rod or other measuring device in each photograph. Include a
minimum of two photographs showing the best quality plant and the worst
quality plant to be furnished. Identify each photograph with the full scientific
name of the plant, plant size, and name of the growing nursery.
3. Certification of grass seed from seed vendor for each grass-seed mixture
stating the botanical and common name, percentage by weight of each
species, variety, percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the
year of production.
4. Certification of turf grass sod from the manufacturer stating the botanical and
common name and percentage of each species.
5. Fertilizers: Product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to
Project, including compliance with specified requirements.
6. Pesticides and Herbicides: Product label and manufacturer's application
instructions specific to Project, including compliance with specified
requirements.
B. Samples for Verification: The Contractor shall submit samples for each of the following
for Landscape Architect and Owner’s Representative approval:
1. Organic Compost, Soil Amendments and Mulch: 1-pint of each mulch required;
in sealed plastic bags labeled with composition of materials by percentage of
weight and source of mulch. Each Sample shall be typical of the lot of material
to be furnished and provide an accurate representation of color, texture, and
organic makeup.
2. Stone: One pint or other approved representative quantity of each stone
specified, in sealed plastic bags or boxes labeled with source, type and size.
Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be delivered and installed on-site
and provide an accurate indication of color, texture, and makeup of the
material.
3. Tree-Stabilization Materials and Accessories: One complete set for each
application.
4. Edging Materials and Accessories: Provide sample with Manufacturer’s
warranty to verify size and color selected for each type.
5. Root Barrier samples of each type.
6. Tree Trunk Tape: 24 inches.
C. Informational Submittals: The Contractor shall provide the following information for
Landscape Architect and Owner’s Representative approval:
1. Qualification Data: For Landscape Contractor. See QUALITY ASSURANCE.
2. Soils Testing and Analysis: From a qualified independent testing agency
reporting suitability of plant mix and/or soil amendments required for plant
growth of specified plants of each plant-type area. See QUALITY ASSURANCE.
06/08/2018
LIFT STUDIO LLC | LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE | PO BOX 2748 | ASPEN, CO 81612 | 970 404 5610 | WWW.LIFTSTUDIOLANDSCAPE.NET
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot Project| 100% CDs | 2018-05-09 PLANTS 329300-4
D. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, from manufacturer, and
complying with the following:
a. Manufacturer's certified analysis of standard products.
b. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to
methods established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists,
where applicable.
c. Warranty: Three (3) copies of a written warranty stating all items included
in the warranty, conditions of the warranty, and beginning and ending of
warranty period(s).
d. Delivery tickets for all bulk materials with Owner's Representative's
approval or acknowledgment that materials were received in satisfactory
condition.
E. Closeout Submittals
1. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures for maintenance of
exterior plants during a calendar year. Before expiration of required
maintenance periods, Contractor shall submit three (3) copies of written
instructions to the Landscape Architect or Owner’s Representative for
maintenance and care of landscaping to be performed by the Contractor during
the Contractor’s warranty period. Include directions for irrigation, fertilizing,
pruning and spraying as required for continued and proper maintenance
through a full growing season and dormant period. Maintenance will be the
responsibility of the Contractor until one year after the date of Final Acceptance.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor Qualifications: A qualified Landscape Contractor/Installer, whose work has
resulted in successful establishment of exterior plants. Include 2 similar projects
completed by Contractor with color photographs demonstrating Contractor's
capabilities and experience. Include project names, addresses, year completed and
names and phone numbers of references for each project.
1. Contractor’s Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-
time supervisor on project site when exterior planting is in progress.
2. Professional Membership: Contractor shall be a member in good standing of
either the National Association of Landscape Professionals or the American
Nursery and Landscape Association.
B. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent laboratory, recognized by the
Colorado State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to
conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed.
1. Soil testing shall be provided by:
a. Colorado Analytical Laboratory, 240 S. Main Street, Brighton, CO 80601,
303-659-2313;
b. CSU Soil Testing Lab, 970-491-5061;
c. Or approved equal.
2. Soil Analysis: Furnish soil analysis by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating
percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content;
conductivity; total exchange capacity; sodium absorption ratio; deleterious
material; pH; and mineral and plant-nutrient content of topsoil.
a. The Contractor shall submit soil test results a minimum 30 days prior to
mobilizing for landscape construction.
06/08/2018
LIFT STUDIO LLC | LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE | PO BOX 2748 | ASPEN, CO 81612 | 970 404 5610 | WWW.LIFTSTUDIOLANDSCAPE.NET
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot Project| 100% CDs | 2018-05-09 PLANTS 329300-5
b. Provide testing from a minimum of 4 locations or from each topsoil
stockpile or other approved representative quantity of the site, whichever
is greater. Coordinate sampling locations with Landscape Architect and
Owner’s Representative.
c. Report suitability of plant mix and/or soil amendments required for plant
growth of specified plants of each plant-type area. Describe the
recommended quantities (pounds/square feet) of soil amendments to be
added to produce satisfactory topsoil including nitrogen, phosphorus, and
potassium nutrients, sulfur, gypsum, limestone, aluminum sulfate, organic
compost or other soil amendments for specified plants of each plant-type
area.
d. Deficient nutrients shall be corrected with the addition of appropriate
fertilizer and amendment materials.
C. Plants: Provide quality, size, genus, species, cultivar and variety of exterior plants
indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1, "American Standard
for Nursery Stock."
1. Measurements: Measure all plants according to ANSI Z60.1.
2. Labeling: Label each plant of each size, genus, species, cultivar and variety
with a securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of common
name and full scientific name.
D. Observation: The Landscape Architect may visit the site at intervals appropriate to the
stage of construction or the intervals stated below to become generally familiar with
the work completed, and to determine, in general, if the work observed is being
performed in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1. Landscape Architect and Owner’s Representative may observe trees and
shrubs either at place of growth or at the Project site before planting for
compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. Landscape Architect
and Owner’s Representative retains right to observe trees and shrubs further for
size and condition of balls and root systems, pests, injuries, and latent defects
and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of
work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site.
a. Landscape Architect and Owner’s Representative reserves the right to tag
plants at their place of growth before they are prepared for transplanting.
Arrange visit with Landscape Architect and Owner’s Representative to
nursery or source of plant material to inspect plant material for approval
prior to delivery to site. Otherwise the Contractor shall provide
photographs as described in the SUBMITTALS and notify the Landscape
Architect and Owner’s Representative to observe plants upon delivery.
2. Notify Landscape Architect and Owner’s Representative a minimum five days in
advance of plant delivery to the Project site and other requested site visits.
E. Ordinances and Regulations: Local, municipal and state laws, and regulations
governing or relating to any portion of this work shall be incorporated into these
Specifications. The Contractor shall inform the Landscape Architect of any potential
conflicting information between the aforementioned laws and regulations and these
specifications in writing for resolution prior to commencing with work. When the
Specifications and Drawings describe materials, workmanship or construction of a
higher quality, higher standard or larger size than is required by but still compliant with
the aforementioned laws and regulations, the provisions of these Specifications and
Drawings shall take precedence.
06/08/2018
LIFT STUDIO LLC | LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE | PO BOX 2748 | ASPEN, CO 81612 | 970 404 5610 | WWW.LIFTSTUDIOLANDSCAPE.NET
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot Project| 100% CDs | 2018-05-09 PLANTS 329300-6
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Plant Materials
1. Deliver only plants freshly dug or dug during the current planting season.
a. Identify each plant species and size with grower's waterproof label affixed
to the plant.
b. Provide protective covering of plants during transport.
c. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery.
d. Protect bark, branches, stems, trunks and root systems from sunscald,
drying, sweating, whipping, wind burn, handling, and transport, lifting,
rubbing, tying and any other damage.
e. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to
compromise their natural shape.
f. Do not drop plants.
g. Reject balled plants if the ball is broken or the trunk is loose in the ball.
2. Handle planting stock by root ball or the container. Do not lift plants by the
trunk, stems, or foliage.
3. Deliver plants only after preparations for planting have been completed and
approved. Install plants immediately after the delivered plant material is
approved by the Landscape Architect and Owner’s Representative. If planting is
delayed more than six hours after delivery, temporarily store plants in an onsite
nursery. Store plants in areas appropriate to their preferred aspect of filtered
sun or shade and protect from weather and mechanical damage.
a. Set balled stock on the ground and protect ball with soil or mulch.
b. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of
planting.
c. Water root systems of all plants deeply and thoroughly with a fine-mist
spray as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist, but not
overly wet condition.
d. Stage plants grouped by species for verification of delivery and plant
inspection.
4. Deliver sod in time for planting as described in EXECUTION. Protect sod from
breakage and drying.
B. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers
showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication
of compliance with local, state and Federal laws if applicable.
C. Bulk Materials:
1. Accompany each delivery of bulk materials with appropriate certificates.
2. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and
pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants. Provide erosion-control
measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials; discharge of
soil-bearing water runoff; and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water
conveyance systems, or walkways.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Field Measurements: Verify and demarcate actual grade elevations, service and utility
locations, irrigation system components, locations and dimensions of plantings and
06/08/2018
LIFT STUDIO LLC | LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE | PO BOX 2748 | ASPEN, CO 81612 | 970 404 5610 | WWW.LIFTSTUDIOLANDSCAPE.NET
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot Project| 100% CDs | 2018-05-09 PLANTS 329300-7
construction contiguous with new plantings by field measurements before proceeding
with plant installation. Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect to resolve any
discrepancies.
1. Utilities:
a. Determine locations of above grade and underground utilities and perform
work in a manner which will avoid damage to the utilities. Locations of
utilities in the field may differ from the Drawings.
b. Hand excavate, as required to minimize the possibility of damage to any
underground utilities.
c. Any damage to underground piping or wiring must be corrected and
repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Owner’s
Representative.
B. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods or as recommended for
each type of plant material specified. Coordinate planting periods with maintenance
periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion. Plant
only after final grades have been accepted by the Owner's Representative and all
exterior work on the architecture has been completed.
1. The optimal time to plant trees is before bud break; however, planting can
occur successfully year-round with appropriate care. Late fall planting of un-
acclimated evergreens is discouraged.
2. Spring Planting: May 1 – June 31. Adjust for weather limitations, altitude and
freezing conditions.
3. Summer Planting: July 1 – August 31 may be allowable based on altitude.
4. Fall Planting: September 1 – October 31. Adjust for weather limitations, altitude
and freezing conditions.
5. Perennial Planting: In elevations above 7,000’, plant perennials between June
15 and September 15.
C. Seeding Restrictions: Seed in the Spring or Fall when the soil temperature is 50 to 80
degrees. If seeding during the active growing season is necessary, seed shall be
spread to achieve 4" of growth before the first frost.
D. Coordination with Lawns: Plant trees and shrubs after finish grades are established
and before planting lawns, unless otherwise approved by Landscape Architect and
Owner’s Representative. Protect existing and new lawn areas when planting trees and
shrubs and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations.
E. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit. Planting during freezing conditions or forecasted freezing
conditions is not permitted.
F. Damage to Other Improvements: All costs for repair or replacement of any damage to
other work done onsite or adjacent properties by installation of plant material shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor installing plant and other landscape material.
Existing grades, paving, vegetation and other improvements damaged during planting
shall be restored at the Contractor's expense.
G. Excavation: No planting shall occur when conditions detrimental to plant growth are
encountered, such as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, unsuitable soil or
obstructions.
1.9 WARRANTY
06/08/2018
LIFT STUDIO LLC | LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE | PO BOX 2748 | ASPEN, CO 81612 | 970 404 5610 | WWW.LIFTSTUDIOLANDSCAPE.NET
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot Project| 100% CDs | 2018-05-09 PLANTS 329300-8
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made
by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: The Landscape Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect of
any concerns they have regarding the survivability of plant material specified in the
Contract Documents and/or existing or proposed soil conditions; as the Contractor
shall warranty plants as described herein. Landscape Contractor agrees to repair or
replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within
specified warranty period. Warrant the following exterior plants, for the warranty period
indicated, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, structural failures
including plantings falling or blowing over. The warranty shall not include defects
resulting from lack of adequate maintenance, neglect, or abuse by Owner, or incidents
that are beyond Contractor's control.
1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Final Acceptance for:
a. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses.
b. Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, and Other Plants.
c. Seeded Areas.
d. Turf Grass Sod.
e. Irrigation system.
2. Include the following remedial actions as a minimum:
a. Remove and replace dead plants immediately, unless required to plant in
the succeeding planting season.
b. Replace planting materials that are excessively pruned, more than 25
percent dead, or in an unhealthy or declining condition.
c. Repair irrigation system to sustain plant material.
3. Species substitutions may be permitted only if approved prior by the
Landscape Architect. The Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect if, in
the Contractor’s local knowledge, there are any reservations concerning
survivability with any of the specified plant materials in their respective locations
as the Contractor shall warranty the plant material.
4. Provide extended warranty for period equal to original warranty period, for any
replaced plant material.
5. All plants shall be true to name and meet all conditions of these Specifications.
Any plant which is not true to name as indicated by form, leaf, flower, or fruiting
characteristics shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense.
6. Seeded areas shall be accepted on the basis of having uniform grass growth
over all the seeded areas. Acceptable uniform grass growth shall be defined as
when scattered bare spots are not greater than one square foot and or do not
exceed 5% of the seeded area.
7. Sodded areas shall be accepted on the basis of having a fully knitted mat of
turf, devoid of visible joints or gaps between each slab and devoid of bare
patches within any slab. Turf surface shall be consistent and even, without
bumps or dips except as exist in the overall contour of grade as defined by the
grading plans.
1.10 PLANT MAINTENANCE
06/08/2018
LIFT STUDIO LLC | LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE | PO BOX 2748 | ASPEN, CO 81612 | 970 404 5610 | WWW.LIFTSTUDIOLANDSCAPE.NET
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot Project| 100% CDs | 2018-05-09 PLANTS 329300-9
A. Contractor shall maintain and warranty plants for 1 year following the date of Final
Acceptance. See SUBMITTALS for Maintenance Instructions Submittal requirement.
See PART 3 EXECUTION of PLANT MAINTENANCE.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LOCAL / REGIONAL MATERIALS
A. Preference shall be given to suppliers whose facilities are within a 500-mile radius of
the project site.
B. Preference shall also be given to materials that are harvested, extracted, mined,
quarried, etc. within a 500-mile radius of the project site.
2.2 PLANT MATERIALS
A. Furnish nursery-grown plants true to quality, size, genus, species, variety, cultivar form
and other features complying with ANSI Z60.1 and as indicated in the Contract
Documents.
B. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in
leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald,
injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.
C. Plants of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Landscape Architect and Owner’s
Representative, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls per ANSI Z 60.1.
Use of such plants shall not increase the cost to the Owner, unless approved by the
Owner.
D. If formal arrangements or consecutive order of plants is indicated on Drawings, select
stock for uniform height and spread to assure symmetry in planting.
E. Substitutions: No substitutions will be accepted without the prior written approval of
the Landscape Architect. See WARRANTY.
F. If any discrepancies arise between the plant schedule and the Drawings, the Drawings
shall take precedence; however, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect
and Owner’s Representative immediately of any such discrepancies for the confirmed
quantity prior to procuring materials.
G. Trees with damaged, crooked, or multiple leaders; tight vertical branches where bark
is squeezed between two branches or between branch and trunk; crossing trunks; cut-
off limbs more than 3/4 inch in diameter; or with stem girdling roots are unacceptable.
H. Trees shall be single stem unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
I. Collected Stock: Do not use plants harvested from the wild, from native stands, from
an established landscape planting, or not grown in a nursery unless otherwise
indicated on the Drawings.
J. Balled and Burlapped (B&B) Stock Requirements: B&B plant material shall be dug with
firm natural balls or earth of sufficient diameter and depth to include most of the fibrous
roots. Tree ball shapes shall be truncated cones.
1. Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of
root ball, which begins at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be
visible before planting
2. B&B plants may be rejected for failure to meet good digging practices. No
balled plant shall be placed if the ball is cracked or broken either before or
during the planting process. Any plant that is loose in the ball shall be removed
from the site and replaced at no cost to the Owner.
06/08/2018
LIFT STUDIO LLC | LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE | PO BOX 2748 | ASPEN, CO 81612 | 970 404 5610 | WWW.LIFTSTUDIOLANDSCAPE.NET
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot Project| 100% CDs | 2018-05-09 PLANTS 329300-10
K. Container Grown Stock Requirements: Provide healthy, disease-free plants of species
and variety shown or listed, with well-established root systems reaching to sides of the
container to maintain a firm ball, but not with excessive root growth encircling the
container. Provide only plants that are acclimated to outdoor and site altitude
conditions before delivery.
L. Seed mixes shall be fresh, clean, dry, new crop seed and labeled accurately to
indicate the purity (percentage of the labeled species by weight), the percentages of
other crop, weed, inert material, dormant or hard seed, and the percentage of seed
that will germinate. Seed shall be sourced from a distributor who has certified the
seed with certified seed tags and an analysis label as tested for purity and germination,
using the procedures sanctioned by the Association of Official Seed Analysts (AOSA).
M. Sod shall be regionally sourced and of uniform density, color, and texture, strongly
rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development.
2.3 TOPSOIL AND PLANT MIX
A. General: The Landscape Contractor shall determine what additional topsoil and
amendments are necessary to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents and
shall provide a cost for the purchase and spreading of this additional topsoil for review
and approval by the Landscape Architect and Owner’s Representative. This cost shall
be included by the Landscape Contractor during the bidding process.
B. Topsoil in Turf and Seed Zones: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7.0. Topsoil shall be
friable, fertile, dark, loamy soil, free of stones 1 inch or larger in any dimension, clean
of roots, plants, sod, clay lumps, refuse and other extraneous materials harmful to
plant growth. Refer to the manufacturer’s recommendations for preferred Topsoil
properties for the specific species of turf and seed.
1. Topsoil shall have the following physical properties, unless otherwise
recommended by the manufacturer:
a. Clay: 7-27 percent.
b. Silt: 15-35 percent.
c. Sand: less than 52 percent.
d. Organic Material: 5-12%. Organic matter shall consist of either Class I or
Class II compost.
2. Topsoil Source: Verify suitability of existing surface soil or stockpiled soil to
produce topsoil that meets the requirements of the Contract Documents and
manufacturer’s recommendations, and amend when necessary. If insufficient
quantities of topsoil exists or quality is not acceptable, replace or supplement
with imported topsoil sourced within 50 mile radius of site.
C. Plant Mix in Perennial and Shrub Zones: Plant mix shall include Topsoil as specified
above, plus an amendment of organic compost and a Mycorrhizal Application.
Compost shall be weed-free and certified by the US Composting Council (USCC).
2.4 FERTILIZER
A. Adjust application rates, ratios and fertilizer products as recommended in soil reports
from a qualified soil-testing agency and per requirements for the specified plant
species and manufacturer’s recommendations. Use fertilizer only when needed. Only
organic fertilizers will be approved. Gradual, slow release fertilizers are preferred,
especially when used in conjunction with Mycorrhizal Fungi applications.
1. Review manufacturer’s recommendations for compliance.
06/08/2018
LIFT STUDIO LLC | LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE | PO BOX 2748 | ASPEN, CO 81612 | 970 404 5610 | WWW.LIFTSTUDIOLANDSCAPE.NET
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot Project| 100% CDs | 2018-05-09 PLANTS 329300-11
B. Perennial Gardens: Till in organic fertilizer at manufacturer’s recommended rate prior
to planting perennials. Top dress and till in organic fertilizer after planting, but before
mulching.
1. Rocky Mountain Bio-Products Biosol 6-1-1 Organic Fertilizer from Southwest
Soils, 970-323-6300 or http://www.rockymtnbioproducts.com.
2. El Primero Garden Organic granular fertilizer available at Rivendell Distribution
970-945-2568 or http://alphaoneinc.com.
3. Or approved equal.
C. Trees and Shrubs:
1. Rocky Mountain Bio-Products Biosol 6-1-1 Organic Fertilizer from Southwest
Soils, 970-323-6300 or http://www.rockymtnbioproducts.com.
2. Alpha One Natural Organic Lawn and Garden Fertilizer from Rivendell
Distribution and Sod Farm, 970-945-2568 or http://alphaoneinc.com.
3. Or approved equal.
D. Sod Areas:
1. Rivendell Distribution and Sod Farm, http://www.rivendellsod.com or 970-945-
2568. Recommendations may be altered if needed for site specific constraints
and/or per the Soils Analysis and Test Report.
a. Spring: Rivendell’s Own Mountain Maintenance Mix, Rivendell’s Own with
Organics and Alpha Lawn 2 Organic.
b. Summer: Rivendell’s Own with Organics, Alpha 4 Iron Organic and
AlphaOne Natural Organic.
c. Fall: Rivendell’s Own Mountain Maintenance Mix, Rivendell’s Own with
Organics and AlphaLawn Winterizer Organic
2. Or approved equal.
E. Seeded Areas:
1. Rocky Mountain Bio-Products Biosol 6-1-1 Organic Fertilizer from Southwest
Soils, 970-323-6300 or http://www.rockymtnbioproducts.com.
2. Alpha One Natural Organic Lawn and Garden Fertilizer from Rivendell
Distribution and Sod Farm, 970-945-2568 or http://alphaoneinc.com.
3. Or approved equal.
2.5 MULCH
A. Organic Mulch: Never-dyed, dry, clean and free from deleterious materials, mildew and
seed. Suitable as a top dressing for trees and shrubs, consisting of the following:
1. Mountain West Products Yardcare 3/8 Minus Composted Soil Pep/Mulch:
Rivendell Distribution and Sod, Inc at http://www.rivendellsod.com or 970-945-
2568.
2. Or approved equal.
B. Straw Mulch Top Dressing: Clean, wheat straw, certified free of noxious weeds and
seeds. Suitable as a top dressing for protecting seeded areas.
1. Hydrostraw All Purpose Straw applied by hand-spreading: Heat and
Mechanically Treated, from Rivendell Distribution and Sod, Inc at
http://www.rivendellsod.com or 970-945-2568.
2. Or approved equal.
06/08/2018
LIFT STUDIO LLC | LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE | PO BOX 2748 | ASPEN, CO 81612 | 970 404 5610 | WWW.LIFTSTUDIOLANDSCAPE.NET
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot Project| 100% CDs | 2018-05-09 PLANTS 329300-12
C. Straw Mulch applied hydraulically: Weed free and seed free for seed establishment
and erosion control.
1. Hydrostraw Original: Heat and Mechanically Treated containing no viable seed.
From Rivendell Distribution and Sod, Inc at http://www.rivendellsod.com or 970-
945-2568.
2. Or approved equal.
D. Penn Mulch applied by hand-spreading: Weed free and seed free for seed
establishment and erosion control.
E. Tackifiers (Binder applied with mulch):
1. Organic, natural, plantago based tackifier that is nontoxic and free of plant-
growth or germination inhibitors.
a. M-Binder Hi-Swell, Granite Seed Company at 801-768-4422 or
http://www.graniteseed.com.
b. Aspen Tack Mulch with Natural Guar, Western Excelsior Corporation,
http://www.westernexcelsior.com or 970-631-8366.
c. Or approved equal.
2. Guar-based tackifier may be used in severe conditions if approved by the
Landscape Architect.
a. Hydrostraw Guar Plus: Heat and Mechanically Treated containing no
viable seed. From Rivendell Distribution and Sod, Inc at
http://www.rivendellsod.com or 970-945-2568.
b. Or approved equal.
F. Compost Mulch: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free, 100% organic matter. Peat
moss is not acceptable.
1. Pitkin County Landfill.
2. EKO Compost Mulch (Made in Colorado): Rivendell Distribution and Sod, Inc at
http://www.rivendellsod.com or 970-945-2568.
3. Cotton Burr Compost Mulch: Bookcliff Gardens at www.bookcliffgardens.com
or 970-242-7766.
4. Or approved equal.
2.6 STONE
A. Hard, durable stone, erosion resistant, washed free of loam, sand, clay, and other
foreign substances, of following type, size range, and color unless otherwise indicated.
Submit samples for Landscape Architect and Owner’s Representative approval.
1. Type: 1/4” Minus Trail Mix:
a. Colorado River Rock: The Rock Shop at http://www.rockshopgj.com/ or
970-523-4216.
b. Local: Pitkin County Landfill: http://www.landfillrules.com/ or
970.429.2880.
c. Or approved equal.
2. Type: 1” to 2” Round:
a. Gray Gunnison: The Rock Shop at http://www.rockshopgj.com/ or 970-
523-4216.
b. Or approved equal.
06/08/2018
LIFT STUDIO LLC | LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE | PO BOX 2748 | ASPEN, CO 81612 | 970 404 5610 | WWW.LIFTSTUDIOLANDSCAPE.NET
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot Project| 100% CDs | 2018-05-09 PLANTS 329300-13
3. Stockpile existing boulders found on site.
2.7 HERBICIDE
A. Bradfield Horticultural Vinegar Herbicide: All disturbed areas to receive seed shall be
sprayed with Bradfield Horticultural Vinegar Herbicide to remove any invasive plants,
and then cleared of all debris prior to seeding. Avoid spraying desirable plants. Do
NOT apply during windy conditions as drift will injure or kill contacted vegetation.
Available from Rivendell Distribution and Sod, Inc at http://www.rivendellsod.com or
970-945-2568.
B. Or approved equal.
2.8 TREE-STABILIZATION
A. Trunk-Stabilization Materials:
1. Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough-sawn, sound, non-treated wood, free of
defects, 2-by-2 inch nominal by length indicated, pointed at one end or black or
silver galvanized steel t-posts.
a. Snowfencestore.com: Silver Steel T-post, HD galv., 7', 9.74#.
b. Or approved equal.
2. Fabric Ties: Fabric bands or straps in loose contact with tree tied to guy and tie
wire.
a. DeepRoot Green Infrastructure: AborTie Green or White,
www.deeproot.com or 800-458-7668 or Grand Junction Pipe and Supply
at 970-963-5700.
b. Or approved equal.
3. Guys and Tie Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1, galvanized-steel wire, two-
strand, twisted.
4. Flags: Standard surveyor's plastic flagging tape, white, 6 inches long to
demarcate wires.
5. Proprietary Staking-and-Guying Devices can be used if approved by the
Landscape Architect in writing.
a. DeepRoot Green Infrastructure: AborTie Staking and Anchoring Kits,
www.deeproot.com or 800-458-7668 or Grand Junction Pipe and Supply
at 970-963-5700.
b. Or approved equal.
2.9 LANDSCAPE EDGING
1. Curv-rite, http://www.curv-rite.com or 800-366-2878 or approved equal.
1) 4000 Series, Heavy Duty Paver Restraint.
4”x2”x8’ Mill Finish (natural aluminum) with pre-formed
corners.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS
A. Mycorrhizal Fungi (90% of plants benefit from Endo spores and 5% benefit from Ecto
spores, primarily pines, oaks, cottonwoods, aspen, birch, douglass fir, linden, spruce,
willow, fir an poplar benefit from Ecto spores); for more info see this list http://bio-
organics.com/specificplantstrees-endo-mycorrhizae-ecto-mycorrhizae/
1. Mycorrhizal Landscape Inoculant (for Ecto and Endo spore benefitting plants),
BioOrganics at www.bio-organics.com or 1-888-332-7676.
06/08/2018
LIFT STUDIO LLC | LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE | PO BOX 2748 | ASPEN, CO 81612 | 970 404 5610 | WWW.LIFTSTUDIOLANDSCAPE.NET
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot Project| 100% CDs | 2018-05-09 PLANTS 329300-14
2. MycoApply Endo (for Endo spore benefitting plants), Rocky Mountain Bio-
Products at www.rockymtnbioproducts.com or 303-696-8964.
3. Or an approved equal.
B. Root Barrier: DeepRoot Green Infrastructure: 100% reprocessed polyethylene, black,
12 or 18 or 24 or 36 or 48 inch and Geomembrane; http://www.deeproot.com/ or 800-
458-7668 or Grand Junction Pipe and Supply at 970-963-5700.
C. Crusher Fines Binder
1. Stabilizer Solutions, Inc. http://www.stabilizersolutions.com or G&S Solutions at
970-284-6030.
2. Or approved equal.
D. Antidesiccant: Water-insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming, for
trees and shrubs when needed. Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers
and mix according to manufacturer's written instructions. If recommended, request
approval from Owner’s Representative and Landscape Architect.
E. Filter Fabric:
1. Nonwoven geotextile fabric for particle restraint, erosion control, separation
fabric for drainage.
2. Woven geotextile fabric for reinforcement and higher load capacity, not as
beneficial for drainage.
F. Trunk-Wrap Tape: Two layers of overlapping crinkled tree wrap paper installed per
manufacturer’s recommendations after leaves have fallen and removed at bud-break
for first three years minimum. Re-apply trunk wrap that has loosened or removed due
to weather or other circumstances during this period.
1. Walter E. Clark Tree Wrap.
2. Or approved equal.
G. Wildlife Protection Fencing: Protect newly planted trees and shrubs with fencing.
1. Individually wrapped trees: 4-6’ tall 1x2 woven wire mesh fence offset
approximately 18 inches offset from the tree trunk or shrub foliage. Attach to
2x2 stakes or black t-posts, driven into subgrade as needed to support the
fencing.
2. Fenced areas for mass plantings of trees and shrubs: 8’ tall woven 1x2 wire
mesh offset approximately 18 inches from the tree trunk or shrub foliage. 4x4
wooden posts or black t-posts driven into subgrade as needed for support.
3. Organic repellants, vibrating devices, smaller mesh surrounds at tree and shrub
bases and other measures may be required deter to pests site specific pests.
H. Soil Erosion Control Fabric: Unless otherwise approved, fabrics must be consist of
materials that are all natural and biodegradable with 100% certified weed free straw.
Refer to Civil Specs.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive plants and landscaping with Contractor present, for
compliance with requirements and conditions affecting installation and performance of
the Work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
06/08/2018
LIFT STUDIO LLC | LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE | PO BOX 2748 | ASPEN, CO 81612 | 970 404 5610 | WWW.LIFTSTUDIOLANDSCAPE.NET
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot Project| 100% CDs | 2018-05-09 PLANTS 329300-15
B. Verify that no foreign, contaminated or deleterious material or liquid such as paint,
paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils,
gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been
deposited in soil within a planting area.
C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a
planting area, remove the soil and contamination and replace with new planting soil.
D. Suspend soil and planting operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until
the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results.
E. Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet or muddy conditions.
F. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable or dusty.
G. Coordinate with any other Contractors and trades which may be working in and
adjacent to the landscape work areas. Examine the complete set of Drawings which
show the development of the entire site and become familiar with the scope of all work
required.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and turf areas
and existing plants from damage caused by planting and landscaping operations.
B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and
walkways.
C. Lay out and or stake individual tree and shrub locations and areas for perennial
plantings. Adjust locations when requested, and obtain Landscape Architect's
acceptance of layout before excavating or planting.
D. Apply anti-desiccant to trees and shrubs using power spray to provide an adequate
film over trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during digging,
handling, and transportation.
E. If deciduous trees are moved in full leaf, spray with anti-desiccant at nursery before
moving and again two weeks after planting.
F. Hand excavate, as required to minimize the possibility of damage to any underground
utilities or existing tree and shrub roots.
3.3 WEED CONTROL PREPARATION
A. In areas that have been regraded and/or have existing weed growth, weed control
measures appropriate to the amount of growth and/or species shall be provided.
Submit weed control plan to Owner's Representative for approval before beginning
work.
B. Comply with local regulations for weed management requirements.
C. Clear and grub and spray individual weeds or if appropriate entire area of weeds with
organic herbicide. Do not proceed with work until weeds has been controlled.
Maintain weed management program throughout construction process.
3.4 SOIL PREPARATION AND FINISH GRADING
A. Scarify undisturbed subgrade in all areas to be planted to a minimum depth of 4-8
inches prior to placing top soil and soil amendments. Remove stones larger than 1
inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and
legally dispose of them off the Owner’s property
1. Loosen subgrade of perennial planting beds to a minimum depth of 16 inches.
06/08/2018
LIFT STUDIO LLC | LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE | PO BOX 2748 | ASPEN, CO 81612 | 970 404 5610 | WWW.LIFTSTUDIOLANDSCAPE.NET
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot Project| 100% CDs | 2018-05-09 PLANTS 329300-16
B. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.
C. Spread a minimum of 6 inches of topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on
surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil mix. Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil
if planting will not proceed within a few days.
1. Spread planting soil mix in perennial beds to a depth of 16 inches but not less
than required to meet finish grades after natural settlement.
D. Seeded areas: The soil shall be textured parallel to the contours to create an
adequately roughened surface to accept the seed.
E. Soil Amendments and fertilizer: Comply with Soils Analysis and Test Report and per
manufacturer’s recommendations, and if not in conflict, provide the following:
1. Seeded and Sod Areas:
a. Fertilizer per manufacturer’s recommendations; See PRODUCTS.
b. Mycorrhizal Fungi per manufacturer’s recommendations; See
PRODUCTS.
2. Shrub and Perennial Beds
a. Fertilizer per manufacturer’s recommendations; See PRODUCTS.
b. Mycorrhizal Fungi per manufacturer’s recommendations; See
PRODUCTS.
c. Compost: Blend 1 part compost with 2-3 parts topsoil to a 16 inch depth
in all planting beds and excavated pits. See PRODUCTS.
F. Provide positive surface drainage, with no depressions, settling, or irregularities in the
finished grade.
G. Finish grade all disturbed areas to a smooth, well-matched, uniform surface plane with
loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to
meet finish and existing grades.
1. At any transitional point or line where one plane intersects another, such as
from a sloping area or berm to a level area, a smooth and gentle transition shall
be made. There shall be no abrupt changes in grade unless specifically noted
otherwise. Match the grades of new work with existing grades.
H. Restore planting beds if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading and before
planting.
I. When planting in established landscapes where soil preparation has been completed,
examine excavated soil from the planting hole to assess its quality. Remove debris
from excavated soil before thoroughly incorporating any amendments. When
encountering an acceptable amount of organic material in the top layer (from
decomposed turf roots, mulch, leaves, etc.), amendments may not be necessary.
J. New landscapes and/or soils with low amounts of organic material in the top layer of
the soil may require a thoroughly mixed organic amendment, around 10% by volume
of backfill; refer to the Soils Analysis and Test Report. Create a transition zone from the
rootball of nursery soil to the unaltered native soil outside the planting hole. For sandy
soil, add 10% to 20% by volume of organic material.
K. Western native plants and other plants adapted to lower water conditions generally do
not do well in a soil that is rich in organic material due to increased water holding
capacity. Loosen compacted soil and grade for drainage away from the plant’s root
zone and void organic amendments to plants adapted to lower water conditions.
3.5 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS
06/08/2018
LIFT STUDIO LLC | LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE | PO BOX 2748 | ASPEN, CO 81612 | 970 404 5610 | WWW.LIFTSTUDIOLANDSCAPE.NET
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot Project| 100% CDs | 2018-05-09 PLANTS 329300-17
A. Planting Pits: Excavate circular planting pits approximately two to three times as wide
as ball diameter for Balled and Burlapped and Container-grown stock. Excavate with
sides sloping inward at a 45-degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are
unacceptable. Scarify sides of planting pit.
1. Stake locations of every tree and shrub for review and approval by Landscape
Architect and Owner’s Representative prior to beginning work.
2. Balled and Burlapped Trees and Shrubs: The depth of the plant pit shall be 2
inches less than the depth of the ball (to the crown of the root flare) in well
drained soils and 4 inches less than the ball depth in poorly drained soils and
flush when the tree species prefers a consistently moist soil profile.
a. In clay or clay loam soils, the root flare should be 2” to 4” above the
adjacent grade.
b. In sandy soils, the root flare should be 1” to 3” above the adjacent grade.
c. In the absence of an obvious root flare, structural roots can be found by
carefully probing the root ball with an instrument such as a surveyor pin or
screwdriver. Systematically probe the root ball 3-4” out from the trunk to
locate structural roots and determine their depth. On some species it may
be more difficult to locate the structural root(s). Careful removal of the soil
immediately surrounding the trunk of the tree at the top of the root ball is
another method that can be used to determine the location of the first
structural root(s).
d. Planting at the higher end of the suggested planting depth is
recommended if you cannot find a visible root flare then use the structural
root depth as defined above.
3. On slopes 3:1 or steeper, the planting pit may be 2 times the root ball width,
instead of 3 times the root ball width.
4. Container-Grown Stock: The depth of all plant pits shall be 1/2 to 1 inch less
than depth of ball and flush when stock prefers a consistently moist soil profile.
5. Where drain tile is shown or required under planted areas, excavate to top of
porous backfill over tile.
6. Trim perimeter of the pit bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to
support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further
disturb the subgrade. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to
prevent settling.
7. If the area under the plant was over-excavated, add soil to raise it to the correct
level and thoroughly tamp the added soil in lifts to prevent settling.
8. Maintain angles of repose of adjacent materials to ensure stability. Do not
excavate subgrades of adjacent paving, structures, hardscapes, or other new
or existing improvements.
9. Backfill Soil: Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may be used as
backfill soil if the Soils Testing and Analysis permits.
10. Maintain supervision of excavations during working hours. Keep excavations
marked, covered and protected when not working.
11. Obstructions: Notify Landscape Architect and Owner's Representative if
unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are encountered
in excavations.
06/08/2018
LIFT STUDIO LLC | LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE | PO BOX 2748 | ASPEN, CO 81612 | 970 404 5610 | WWW.LIFTSTUDIOLANDSCAPE.NET
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot Project| 100% CDs | 2018-05-09 PLANTS 329300-18
12. Drainage: Notify Landscape Architect and Owner's Representative if subsoil
conditions evidence water seepage or retention in tree or shrub pits.
a. Fill the pit with water and allow it to completely drain before planting
occurs.
b. If water does not drain out of pit within 24 hours, notify Landscape
Architect and Owner's Representative.
c. For tree installations to be completed in the spring, dig test pits prior to
receiving delivery of plant material. If perched water is encountered,
planting schedule may be modified in coordination with Owner's
Representative and Landscape Architect.
3.6 TREE, SHRUB, AND PERENNIAL PLANTING
A. Layout plants as identified in the Drawings. Stake locations of every tree, shrub and
perennial or lay out plant materials for review and approval by Landscape Architect
and Owner’s Representative prior to planting.
B. Orient the PLANTS in the same solar orientation as their origin.
C. At time of planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to
ANSI Z60.1. If root flare is not visible, remove soil in a level manner from the root ball
to where the top-most root emerges from the trunk. After soil removal to expose the
root flare, verify that root ball still meets size requirements.
D. Roots: Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Unwind all circling roots.
Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break.
E. Backfill: Use native or planting soil as recommended for each specific species and as
described in the approved Soils Test and Analysis.
F. Balled and Burlapped Stock (B&B): Set each plant plumb and in center of planting pit
or trench with root flare above adjacent finish grade as described in EXCAVATION FOR
TREES AND SHRUBS. Orient the plant in the same solar direction as its origin.
1. After placing some Backfill around root ball to stabilize plant, carefully cut and
remove burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides,
but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting.
Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during
planting operation.
2. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and
air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly
before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is
absorbed. Complete backfilling process.
3. Dish and tamp top of backfill to form a 1 to 3 inch high mound around the rim of
the planting pits. Do not cover top of root ball with backfill.
4. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.
G. Container-Grown Stock: Set each plant plumb and in center of planting pit or trench
with root flare above adjacent finish grade as described in EXCAVATION FOR TREES
AND SHRUBS.
1. Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant.
Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and
air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly
before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is
absorbed. Complete backfilling process.
06/08/2018
LIFT STUDIO LLC | LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE | PO BOX 2748 | ASPEN, CO 81612 | 970 404 5610 | WWW.LIFTSTUDIOLANDSCAPE.NET
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot Project| 100% CDs | 2018-05-09 PLANTS 329300-19
2. Work soil around the roots to eliminate air pockets and form a slight saucer
around the plants to hold water.
3. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil. Take care not to cover
the plant crowns with wet soil.
H. Slopes: When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is
flush with the surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill
side will be above the surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of
the root ball. Retain soils as needed as shown on the Drawings or contact the
Landscape Architect for additional measures.
I. Wildlife Protection: Provide protection for all trees, shrubs and perennials immediately
after planting in areas susceptible to wildlife browsing. Maintain protection from
October to April, until plants are well-established.
J. Tree Trunk Wrapping:
1. Wrap the following trees with breathable trunk-wrap tape:
a. All deciduous thin barked trees planted in full sun and on west or south
exposures. Tree wrapping may not be necessary for Aspen, Willow,
Cottonwood, and Poplars.
2. Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper pruning, and insect infestation and take
corrective measures required before wrapping. Start at base of trunk and spiral
cover trunk to height of first branches. Overlap wrap, exposing half the width,
and securely attach without causing girdling.
3. Wrapping Periods:
a. Trees shall be wrapped after leaves fall.
b. No tree shall be wrapped after bud break.
c. Contractor shall be responsible for wrapping and unwrapping trees during
the warranty period.
d. Owner shall wrap trees until rough adult bark appears; usually the first 3-7
years after planting.
3.7 TREE STABILIZATION
A. Stake trees only as required to prevent wind tip out and in sandy or wet clay
conditions. Remove after one-year.
B. Trunk Stabilization by Upright Staking and Tying shall be applied to deciduous trees 3
inch caliper or less as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Use a minimum of two stakes, placed opposite, at a length required to
penetrate at least 18 inches below bottom of backfilled excavation and to
extend to one-third of trunk height above grade. Set vertical stakes and space
to avoid penetrating root balls or root masses.
2. Support trees with bands of flexible ties at contact points with tree trunk. Allow
enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree.
3. Attach warning flags to each wire.
C. Trunk Stabilization by At-Grade Staking and Guying shall be applied to deciduous
trees greater than 3 inch caliper and all evergreen trees as follows, unless otherwise
indicated:
1. Site-Fabricated, Staking-and-Guying Method: Install three guys spaced equally
around tree.
06/08/2018
LIFT STUDIO LLC | LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE | PO BOX 2748 | ASPEN, CO 81612 | 970 404 5610 | WWW.LIFTSTUDIOLANDSCAPE.NET
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot Project| 100% CDs | 2018-05-09 PLANTS 329300-20
a. Securely attach guys to stakes 30 inches long, driven to grade. Adjust
spacing to avoid penetrating root balls or root masses. Provide a
turnbuckle or compression spring for each guy wire and tighten securely.
b. For trees more than 6 inches in caliper, anchor guys to wood deadmen
buried at least 36 inches below grade to undisturbed subgrade. Provide a
turnbuckle or compression spring for each guy wire and tighten securely.
c. Support trees with bands of flexible ties at contact points with tree trunk
and reaching to the turnbuckle or compression spring. Allow enough
slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree.
d. Attach warning flags to each guy wire, 30 inches above finish grade.
e. Paint turnbuckles or compression springs with luminescent white paint.
2. Proprietary Staking and Guying Device: Install staking and guying system sized
and positioned as recommended by manufacturer unless otherwise indicated,
and according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Root-Ball Stabilization: Install at or below-grade stabilization system to secure each
new planting by the root ball unless otherwise indicated.
1. Wood Hold-Down Method: Place vertical stakes against side of root ball and
drive them into subsoil; place horizontal wood hold-down stake across top of
root ball and screw at each end to one of the vertical stakes.
a. Install four stakes, opposite, at a length required to penetrate at least
below bottom of backfilled excavation. Saw stakes off at finish grade.
2. Proprietary Root-Ball Stabilization Device: Install root-ball stabilization system
sized and positioned as recommended by manufacturer.
3.8 TREE, SHRUB, AND PLANT PRUNING
A. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines according to standard professional
horticultural and arboricultural practices and as directed by Landscape Architect. Do
not cut tree leaders.
B. Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape.
C. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds.
3.9 ROOT-BARRIER INSTALLATION
A. Install root barrier where trees are planted within 72 inches of paving, utilities or other
hardscape elements, such as walls, curbs, and walkways; as measured from the trunk.
1. Install root barrier on center of the trunk for a minimum run or 12 linear feet per
tree. If trees are spaced closer, use a single continuous piece of root barrier.
2. Position top of root barrier below finish grade, per manufacturer’s
recommendations.
3.10 EDGING INSTALLATION
A. Aluminum Edging: Install aluminum edging where indicated according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.11 GROUND COVER PLANTING
A. Set out and space ground cover and plants as indicated on Drawings for Landscape
Architect and Owner’s Representative approval prior to planting.
B. Use planting soil per approved Soils Testing and Analysis.
C. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots.
06/08/2018
LIFT STUDIO LLC | LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE | PO BOX 2748 | ASPEN, CO 81612 | 970 404 5610 | WWW.LIFTSTUDIOLANDSCAPE.NET
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot Project| 100% CDs | 2018-05-09 PLANTS 329300-21
D. For rooted cutting plants supplied in flats, plant each in a manner that minimally
disturbs the root system but to a depth not less than two nodes.
E. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation
around plants to hold water.
F. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil.
3.12 PLANTING AREA MULCHING
A. Organic Mulch for Trees and Shrubs in Turf Areas: Apply mulch ring of 4 inch average
thickness, with 36-48 inch radius around trunks or stems. Do not place mulch within 6
inches of trunks or stems.
B. Organic Mulch in Tree and Shrub Planting Areas: Apply 4 inch average thickness of
organic mulch in all perennial beds. Do not place mulch within 6 inches of trunks and
stems.
C. Organic Compost Mulch in Perennial Planting Areas: Apply 2 inch average thickness of
organic mulch in all perennial beds. Do not place mulch within 4 inches of stems.
D. Finish mulch level with adjacent finish grades unless otherwise indicated.
E. Slopes greater than 2:1 shall receive shredded cedar mulch?
3.13 SEEDING
A. Seed the site within 24 hours of the approved finish grading and topsoil. During
periods when seeding cannot be accomplished, soils should be protected from
erosion and weeds.
B. To support germination of the species, seed cool season plants in early spring or late
fall and warm season species in late spring to early summer. Never seed when the
ground is frozen.
C. Seeding via drop-spreader or broadcast spreader shall be used in areas of one acre or
less per seed mix, unless another method is recommended by the Contractor and
approved by the Owner’s Representative and Landscape Architect.
D. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged in transit or storage.
Deliver seed to job site in the original unopened containers and submit the certified
labels to the Landscape Architect.
E. Do not seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph, when the ground is frozen or
otherwise unable to be worked. Do not seed against existing trees. Limit extent of
seed to outside edge of planting saucer.
F. Seed shall be uniformly sown by broadcasting at maximum seeding rates
recommended by the manufacturer for broadcast seeding. The seeding shall be done
in two (2) separate applications crossing the area at right angles to one another to
provide even coverage.
G. Broadcast seeding shall be immediately raked lightly into the soil to a depth of
approximately one-quarter inch (1/4") and then watered with fine spray.
H. Protect seeded areas immediately against erosion:
1. In areas of 5:1 or flatter, uniformly spread straw mulch after completion of
seeding operations at a minimum rate of 2 tons per acre to form a continuous
blanket 1-1/2 inches loose depth over seeded areas. Anchor straw mulch by
crimping into topsoil by suitable mechanical equipment, followed by application
of hydromulch tackifier.
2. Hydromulch should be applied to slopes greater than 3:1 with a tackifier,
separately following seed application and per the manufacturer’s
06/08/2018
LIFT STUDIO LLC | LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE | PO BOX 2748 | ASPEN, CO 81612 | 970 404 5610 | WWW.LIFTSTUDIOLANDSCAPE.NET
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot Project| 100% CDs | 2018-05-09 PLANTS 329300-22
recommendations. Hydraulic mulches should never be used in areas with
concentrated flows and are preferred in areas with smooth grading cannot be
achieved.
3. Protect seeded slopes of uniform grading exceeding 3:1 against erosion with
erosion-control blankets installed and secured according to manufacturer's
recommendations. Continuous contact with the soil must be attained.
I. Water newly seeded areas and maintain adequate moisture until established. Do not
soak. Gradually train seedlings to chase longer, less frequent waters to encourage
deeper roots.
J. Protection of seeded areas immediately from disturbance: Provide barriers as required
to prevent pedestrian or vehicular traffic over newly seeded areas until completion and
acceptance of the work.
K. Fertilizers should be added only to the extent necessary. Native grasses are adapted
to soils with low nutrient content and often require minimal fertilization to do well. If
sufficient topsoil is stockpiled and redistributed, it will often retain adequate amounts of
nutrients and microbes for good seed germination and establishment of native range
grasses.
L. At the end of the first growing season, all seeded areas shall maintained and reseeded
until establishment is satisfactory. Satisfactory uniform grass growth shall be defined
as when scattered bare spots are not greater than one square foot and or do not
exceed 5% of the seeded area. Adequate germination shall equate to approximately
25 seedlings per square foot.
3.14 SODDING
A. Apply pre-plant fertilizer and install per the sod manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting and immediately upon delivery. Do not lay sod if
dormant or if ground is frozen or muddy.
C. Lay sod orthogonally along the longest straight line, such as a driveway or sidewalk.
D. Form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints and butt ends and sides of sod without
stretching or overlapping. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent
courses, like a running bond paving pattern. Avoid leaving small strips at the outer
edge as they will not retain moisture well. Protect exposed edges with dirt or edging
when complete.
E. Avoid damage to subgrade or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure
contact with subgrade, eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted
soil or fine sand into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid
smothering sod and adjacent grass.
F. Lay sod across angle of slopes exceeding 4:1.
G. Saturate sod with fine water spray of at least 1 inch of water within 1/2 hour of
installation.
H. Water twice daily or more often with hot, windy conditions, keeping sod moist to a
minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches below sod, until it is firmly rooted; approximately two
weeks. Then begin less frequent and deeper watering.
3.15 PLANT MAINTENANCE
A. Begin Maintenance immediately after planting.
B. Initial Maintenance Service: Contractor shall provide full maintenance by skilled
employees of Landscape Contractor/Installer immediately after planted and continue
06/08/2018
LIFT STUDIO LLC | LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE | PO BOX 2748 | ASPEN, CO 81612 | 970 404 5610 | WWW.LIFTSTUDIOLANDSCAPE.NET
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot Project| 100% CDs | 2018-05-09 PLANTS 329300-23
until plantings are established but not for less than one growing season from the date
of Final Acceptance.
C. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching,
restoring planting saucers, adjusting and repairing tree-stabilization devices, resetting
to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to
establish healthy, viable plantings.
D. Fill in, as necessary, soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other
processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.
E. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of
pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated and humane pest management
practices when possible to minimize use of pesticides and reduce hazards.
F. Sod Watering: Once the sod is well established (approximately 2 months) allow it to
root deeper by watering it deeply, only when needed. A turquoise color will signal the
first stage of drought stress and correct timing to soak the lawn. Deeply rooted sod
will require less watering needs and provide a healthier lawn. Eventually rotate zones
on a 3-5 day cycle at approximately 1-1/2 inch of water per week, applied in the early
morning. During the hottest parts of summer, consider a brief rotation of 2-5 minutes
in the early afternoon to reduce heat stress.
G. Sod Mowing: Mow sod one week after installation. The first few mowings should be
diagonal to the way the sod was laid. Do not cut more than one-third of the plant
blade at a time ever, as the grass will go into shock. Always keep mower blades
sharp. Dull blades chew off grass, rather than slicing cleanly, and the ragged edges
will brown or yellow, making the grass vulnerable to problems. Continue to mow turf
grass as needed to ensure grass does not exceed 4 inches in height, average height
of 3 inches preferred. Do not mow when grass is wet. Do not delay mowing until grass
blades bend over and become matted. Final mowing of the season should be closer
to 2 inches.
H. Sod Fertilization: Fertilize per the manufacturer’s recommendations.
I. Sod Aeration in the Spring or Fall per the manufacturer’s recommendations.
J. Seeded Areas: Allow grass seed heads to dry before cutting down or mowing. Do not
mow to less than 6 inches in height and allow seed to disperse. Overseed bare spots
to minimize weed growth in spring or fall.
K. During prolonged dry periods in fall and winter (October-March) all species may need
watering one to two times per month. Evergreens are highly susceptible to winter
desiccation injuries. Watering should occur when temperatures are above 40 degrees
and no snow cover exists. Winter watering should ensure consistent soil moisture to a
depth of 12 inches throughout the root zone.
L. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard
2-year maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is
concluded. Describe services, obligations, conditions and terms for the agreement
period and future renewal options.
3.16 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A. Keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition.
B. During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an
orderly condition. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil
onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.
C. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil,
trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
06/08/2018
LIFT STUDIO LLC | LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE | PO BOX 2748 | ASPEN, CO 81612 | 970 404 5610 | WWW.LIFTSTUDIOLANDSCAPE.NET
Aspen Ambulance District Facility and Parking Lot Project| 100% CDs | 2018-05-09 PLANTS 329300-24
D. Protect plants, architecture and other site features from damage due to landscape
operations and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during
installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings.
E. After installation and before Substantial Completion, clean all paved areas, remove
construction equipment, nursery tags, nursery stakes, tie tape, labels, wire, burlap, and
other debris from plant material, planting areas, and Project site. Remove non-
degradable erosion-control measures after establishment period.
F. At time of Substantial Completion, verify that tree-watering devices and irrigation
systems are in good working order and leave them in place. Replace improperly
functioning devices.
3.17 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to the Owner’s Representative and
Landscape Architect to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 7 days prior
to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection.
B. Contractor's Punch List: Owner’s Representative and Landscape Architect will prepare
and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected.
C. Schedule of Maintenance Material and Warranty Items: Contractor shall prepare and
submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items and all warranty documents
in an orderly binder.
D. Final Acceptance: Once the above items are considered satisfactory by the Owner’s
Representative, the project will be deemed complete in writing indicating the date of
Final Acceptance by the Owner.
END OF SECTION 329300
06/08/2018